Tb2 SDC - vp101 00hfb M M1a Man 9033 Rev0 (Even Error Trang 200)

DOCUMENT SUBMISSION STATUS: FF
NOTE:
0 20 Mar, 2015 For Final Zheng Kewei Yu Zelong Qiao Yuanmin Qiao Yuanmin
REV. DATE DESCRIPTION DRAWN CHECKED APPRDVED APPRDVED
OWNER OWNER’S CONSULTANT
VIETNAM OIL AND GAS GROUP (PVN) FICHTNER PVPOWER PCC
EPC CONTRACTOR EPC CONSTRACTOR’S CONSULTANT
PETROVIETNAM CONSTRUCTION JOINT

STOCK CORPORATION (PVC) WORLEYPARSONS
POWERISLAND PACKAGE SUPPLIER
DAELIM INDUSTRIAL CO., LTD.

SOJITZ CORPORATION
PROJECT TITLE
THAI BINH 2 THERMAL POWER PLANT 2 x 600MW
DRAWING / DOCUMENT TITLE
Installation, Operation, Maintenance Manual For Gravimetric Feeder

BIP SUPPLIER: BIP SUB-SUPPLIER: FUNCTION NAME SIGN DATE
DRWN Zheng Kewei 20 Mar, 2015
BWB GEDI CHKD Yu Zelong 20 Mar, 2015

C
APPD Qiao Yuanmin 20 Mar, 2015
DOCUMENT No. TB2-SDC.VP101-00HFB-M-M1

No. of page: 505 Scale Rev. 0
A-MAN-9033
P.O NO. 110180-1600-101-001-A01
ITEM NO. HFB
ITEM DESCRIPTION Coal Feeder
DOCUMENT NO. TB2-SDC.VP101-00HFB-M-M1A-MAN-9033
Installation, Operation, Maintenance Manual For
DOCUMENT TITLE
Gravimetric Feeder
REV NO. 0
Daelim's Approval Status
Daelim Industrial Co., Ltd.

Job No. 110180
A - APPROVED
B - APPROVED WITH COMMENTS
C - RETURNED FOR CORRECTION
D - REJECTED
N - NOT APPLICABLE(REFERENCE ONLY)
SIGNED BY : DATE :
DIC'S PERMISSION TO PROCEED OR REVIEW TAKEN ON VENDOR

PRINTS SHALL NOT RELIEVE VENDOR FROM ITS RESPONSIBILITIES
OR LIABILITIES UNDER THE PURCHASE ORDER.
BIP SUPPLIER: BWBC BIP SUB-SUPPLIER: GEDI

Shenyang Stock Electric Power Equipment Co.,Ltd.
No. 17-2,Zhongyang Avenue,Economic&Thechnology Development,Shenyang City
(+86)-024-25823903
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
FOR THE
INSTALLATION,
OPERATION AND MAINTERNANCE
OF THE
GRAVIMETRIC FEEDER
Shenyang Stock Electric Power Equipment Co.,Ltd. No. 17-2,Zhongyang Avenue,

Economic&Thechnology Development,Shenyang City
Tel: (+86)-024-2582 3903

Fax: (+86)-024-2582 0538
MANUAL CONTENT
Section 1.0 Installation

Section 2.0 Operation
Section 3.0 Maintenance
Section 4.0 Microprocessor Controller
Instruction Manual
1.0 Installation
Section Index
Topic Page
RECEIVING INSPECTION 1–1
STORAGE PROCEDURES 1–1
STORAGE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES 1–2
EXTENDED STORAGE PROCEDURES 1–3
INSTALLATION PROCEDURES 1–3

1.0 INSTALLATION
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

1.0 INSTALLATION
RECEIVING INSPECTION
Upon delivery, inspect the equipment for shortages or evidence of physical damage and make a report to
the independent carrier. Also notify the Contracts Department of Stock Equipment Company to arrange
for the shipment of replacement parts.
STORAGE PROCEDURES
Prior to shipment from the factory, provisions have been made to protect the equipment in the event that
prolonged storage is required at the job site. These storage procedures are provided as recommendations
to aid in maintaining the equipment in a warrantable and ready condition.
Storage areas shall be periodically inspected to ensure cleanliness. Discarded packaging and trash
shall be removed. Access shall be limited to authorized personnel. Upon placing an item in storage
and prior to its removal, the packaging and protective covers should be visually inspected to ensure
that all closures are intact. Any defects in the packaging may be repaired, after insuring that the
packaged material is intact and undamaged, using the original method of packaging. Surface
preservatives may be reapplied or touched up as required.
Equipment is to be stored in such a manner as to provide ready access for inspection and
maintenance with a minimum of handling. Items should be positioned so that any markings or
labelings can be easily identified without excessive handling. Shipping documents are attached to
the outside of each crate to identify the equipment contained inside.
A file record shall be kept on the location of all items in storage. Special periodic maintenance
requirements, such as those in Storage Maintenance Procedures on page 1-2, should be kept on
record here.
Feeders are shipped with pliofilm coverings over the motors, gear reducers, feeder inlet, seal air
inlet, feeder–mounted electrical controls, and the control cabinet access door. Inspect and replace
any damaged covering when the feeders are received and while they are in storage.
All feeders with electronic enclosures mounted to them must be stored in a heated, ventilated
building where ambient temperatures may be controlled between 5°C (40°F) minimum and 50°C
(120°F) maximum. Control enclosure access doors must be tightly closed to engage the
sealing gaskets.
Store feeders without electronic enclosures in a heated warehouse or in an enclosed building. If it is

necessary to store the feeders outside or in a structure with open sides, a weatherproof,
moisture–and mildew–resistant covering should be placed over the entire feeder. This cover should
be vented, but drip–proof, and arranged to permit access to the drive motors. When stored in this
manner, condensation may form under this cover and under the pliofilm. Desiccant should be
placed under each cover, inspected monthly, and replaced when necessary. Be certain that the
feeders are stored above any conceivable high water level and placed on timbers if the floor
condition is damp.
1–1
1.0 INSTALLATION Shenyang Stock Electric Power Equipment Co.,Ltd.
Do not store other equipment on or near the feeders. Each feeder should be fully accessible for
periodic servicing and inspection while in storage.
Feeder accessories and crates containing miscellaneous hardware must be stored in a dry area until
installation takes place.
Electrical and electronics control enclosures for installation remote from the feeders are shipped
wrapped in pliofilm and crated. They must be stored in a heated, ventilated building where ambient
temperature may be controlled between 5°C (40°F) minimum and 50°C (120°F) maximum. Control
enclosure access doors must be tightly closed to engage the sealing gaskets.
Desiccants are provided to protect electrical control enclosures and all moisture–sensitive
components from humidity. Desiccant indicator labels shall be checked at monthly intervals and all
desiccants whose labels have changed color from blue to light red shall be replaced. Saturated
desiccant can be cured for 16 hours at approximately 120°C (250°F) and returned to service, or
discarded and replaced.
Inspect and service the feeders according to the following storage maintenance procedures until
equipment startup occurs.
STORAGE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
At each service interval, special care should be taken to remove only the crating and pliofilm covers
necessary to perform the maintenance and to replace them when servicing is complete.
MONTHLY, inspect feeders and control enclosures for damage to pliofilm covers, damage due to
corrosion or contamination, and for desiccant saturation.
QUARTERLY, to avoid “shaping” the belt around the drive and take–up pulleys, remove tension
from the belt by loosening the belt take–up screws and pull the belt to a different position.
QUARTERLY, lubricate all bearings according to the instructions in the Lubrication section on
page 3-1.
ANNUALLY, change the oil in the gear reducers according to the lubrication instructions in the
Lubrication section on page 3-1.
ANNUALLY, lubricate the cleanout conveyor chain pins thoroughly with a rust preventive
lubricant or gear reducer oil.
Refer to the motor manufacturer’s short– and long–term storage recommendations on motors.
1–2
1.0 INSTALLATION
EXTENDED STORAGE PROCEDURES
An alternative method to changing oil in gear reducers when storage will exceed 12 months is to fill
the reducers to the top with oil, which prevents the formation of moisture.
Note
The oil must be reduced to the normal operating level prior to operation of the feeder.
For maximum belt life when storage will exceed 36 months, remove and store the feeder belt per the
procedure list in Belt Changing – Spliced Belt section on page 3-10 and sore it. Belts should be
stored on edge, protected from sunlight, in a cool, dry, ozone–free location. Belts should be refolded
every three months so that bends are in different places. Bends should be made as large as possible.
INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
The following items of equipment are required for feeder installation: a machinist’s level, several
pieces of four inch square shim stock in various thicknesses, and the feeder mounting hardware.
Note
The weigh roller is held in place by blocking supported in the weigh compartment access door
frames. This blocking must remain in position until after the feeder is permanently installed.
Note
Before installation of the feeder, check the support steel for proper location of mounting holes.
1. To install the feeder it is necessary to remove the protective crating and some of the
pliofilm covers. Do not remove the covers from the motors and gear reducers.
2. Place the feeder in position and insert the mounting bolts into the holes provided but do
not tighten the nuts.
3. Using the level, check the lengthwise level on both sides of the feeder using the two
checking bars from the service tool kit placed across the weigh span rollers. Shim the feeder
if necessary by inserting shims adjacent to the mounting bolts.
1–3
4. Level the feeder widthwise from the bottom of the weigh span roller nearest the inlet.
5. Should the feeder side plates rest on a solid support, add equal shims at all four corners
to raise the feeder sufficiently for the side plates to clear any bearing surface.
Note
Add shims as required to solidly support the feeder at all four corners to avoid twisting the
feeder body when tightening the mounting bolts.
6. Tighten the four mounting bolts in place.
7. Erect the connecting equipment above and below the feeder. Flexible connections are
required to minimize the loading on the feeder.
8. Ensure that the valve above the feeder is closed. If the feeder is installed but the valve
or downspout above it is not, the feeder inlet must be covered. The covering should be of a
substantial material capable of excluding water, dirt, weld spatter and construction debris.
9. Install customer supplied air supply piping between the feeder seal air connection and a
5℃ (40°F) minimum and 65℃ (150°F) maximum clean air source. A butterfly valve is
required near the feeder for flow control and shutoff.
10. Drain and refill the belt drive and cleanout conveyor drive motor gear reducers with
fresh lubricant.
11. Check all mechanical components. Clean off any corrosion and tighten any loose
connections.
12. Refer to the electrical/electronic drawings and parts lists. Interconnect the feeder
microprocessor/power control cabinet with the combustion control system.
Note
Keep three phase power leads and motor supply leads at least 3” (76 mm) away from all 220/240
volt wiring and at least 6” (153 mm) away from load cell instrumentation wiring (shielded
cables).
13. Check all electrical components and contacts. Clean off any corrosion and tighten any
loose connections found.
1–4
1.0 INSTALLATION
Note
Before installing electronics cards, all field wiring for the feeder control system must be
checked and verified. Improper wiring may result in severe damage to the electronics cards
when power is applied.
14. Verify that the ground lugs provided in each control enclosure are connected to ground
potential and structure of the plant.
Important
Safety considerations require that electrical apparatus and enclosures be solidly connected to
building ground.
15. Connect three phase electrical service to the main disconnect device in the feeder
microprocessor/power control cabinet.
16. Clean out all debris from the feeder and from the equipment mounted above it. Make a
visual inspection of the feeder body and its control cabinets. Scratched or cracked glass
should be replaced to maintain explosion protection. Arrange for the replacement of any
damaged mechanical or electrical components from Stock Equipment Company prior to
startup.
Warning!
Do not energize the feeder or the power to the control cabinets until a Stock service engineer is
present. If a service engineer is not present when the feeder or the power to the control cabinets
are energized, damage to the equipment, injury or loss of life may occur.
1–5
1–6
2.0 Operation
Section Index
Topic Page
SYSTEM COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 2–1

Feeder Body 2–1
Belt and Drive System 2–1
Cleanout Conveyor 2–2
Feeder Electrical Controls 2–2
Microprocessor/Power Control Cabinet 2–2
Service Tool Kit 2–3
STARTUP 2–3
Preliminary Startup Measures 2–3

Microprocessor Controls Setup 2–4
Storage Maintenance After Startup 2–4
Extended Storage After Startup 2–5
INITIAL SYSTEM OPERATION 2–5
TYPICAL OPERATING PROCEDURES 2–6
SITE SPECIFIC DATA 2–9
Feeder Operation Specifications 2–9

2.0 OPERATION
Stock Equipment Company

2.0 OPERATION
SYSTEM COMPONENT DESCRIPTION

The Stock Equipment Company gravimetric feeder has electronic weighing and microprocessor controls.
Feeder capacity and specifications are listed on the feeder system arrangement drawing .
Feeder Body
Feeder design meets or exceeds NFPA Code 85 for CFB applications. All structural members of
the feeder in contact with active material flow are fabricated of type 304 stainless steel. Skirting is
installed across the end of the belt upstream of the inlet and along both sides of the inlet above the
belt to contain the material on the belt. The inlet end skirt is removable for debris clearing and lump
removal. A leveling bar, mounted downstream from the inlet, shears the material column to form a
profile conducive to maximum weighing accuracy.
Dust–tight doors are provided at both ends and on each side of the feeder for access to critical
components. Bull’s–eye viewing ports in the doors permit observation of the feeder interior during
operation. A work light mounted above each end door is designed to allow bulb changing from
outside the feeder.
Belt and Drive System
The feeder is equipped with a STOCKR ACCUFLEX™ spliced belt. The belt is supported by a
machined drive pulley near the outlet; a slotted, self–cleaning take–up pulley at the inlet end; and a
support pan beneath the inlet itself. A counterweighted scraper with replaceable rubber blade
continuously cleans the carrying surface of the belt after the material is delivered to the outlet.
Constant uniform belt tension is applied by two take–up screws which project through the inlet end
door of the feeder and act through a spring to draw the take–up pulley toward it. The tensioning
screws can be turned to make adjustments while the feeder is operating or at rest. Since changes in
temperature and humidity can cause belt length to vary, the belt should be checked regularly for
proper tension.
Proper belt tracking is primarily accomplished by crowning the take–up pulley. A belt turning on a
crowned pulley will tend to center itself on the highest point, the pulley center. In addition, all
pulleys and rollers are grooved to accept the molded V–guide in the belt. The belt tension
adjustment screws can be used to “steer” the belt in either direction if tracking adjustment is
necessary. All pulleys and rollers are easily removable for belt changing and bearing maintenance.
A variable frequency drive speed control provides motor speed control to an AC motor. A speed
feedback for the feeder control system is provided by a 60/20–tooth gear reluctance pickup
attached to the belt drive motor. This pickup generates 60/20 pulses per motor revolution; therefore,
at a nominal 1500 RPM, the output frequency from the pickup is 1500/500 Hertz. This frequency is
used to maintain motor speed.
2–1
2.0 OPERATION Shenyang Stock Electric Power Equipment Co.,Ltd.
A level control switch assembly is mounted above the center of the belt to detect the presence or
absence of material on the belt. The assembly consists of a stainless steel paddle mounted on one
end of a horizontal shaft and a dust-tight switch housing on the end, accessible on the outside of the
feeder. Multiple single-pole switch contacts, depending upon the number of functions requiring
control, are mounted in housing. The contacts are actuated by adjustable cams mounted on the end
of shaft inside the switch. This switch can be used to stop the belt drive motor, start a bunker
vibrator, or simply indicate an empty belt to the control room, as directed by the customer.This
contact closure prevents operation of the total material integrator when the belt is empty and
prevents calibration when there is material on the belt.
Cleanout Conveyor
A single strand of cast iron drag chain with carbon steel pins and with alternately spaced wing links
are used to automatically clean the bottom pan of the feeder. This prevents interference with the
belt and removes stagnant material which may otherwise ignite spontaneously. Material buildup in
the cleanout conveyor area may be due to the following:
1. Material falling from the belt scraper.
2. Dust settling out of the air.
3. Material falling from the self–cleaning take–up pulley.
4. Material blown off the belt by an improperly adjusted seal air flow.
The cleanout conveyor is driven by a totally enclosed, nonventilated motor through a reducer to an
operating speed of slightly greater than two feet per minute. A three–position Cleanout Conveyor
OFF/RUN selector switch (SSC) is provided on the exterior of the control cabinet for manual
control. It is recommended that the cleanout conveyor be operated continuously with feeder
operation to keep the bottom pan of the feeder clean. Continuous operation also prevents a
corrosive buildup on the links which may, after long idle periods, cause binding of the links and
subsequent drive overload.
Feeder Electrical Controls
Electrical controls for the gravimetric feeder are housed in a microprocessor/power control cabinet
mounted to the feeder adjacent to the belt drive motor. The principal components in the cabinet are
described in the following text.
Microprocessor/Power Control Cabinet
The microprocessor/power control cabinet contains the variable frequency drive motor
speed control (see VFD instruction manual) , microprocessor control electronics (see
Section 4.0), transformers, relays and additional components for the feeder control
system.
2–2
Shenyang Stock Electric Power Equipment Co.,Ltd. 2.0 OPERATION
Service Tool Kit
The special tools listed below are supplied to assist the maintenance staff during adjustment,
calibration and service of the feeder. It is recommended that the tools be stored in the container of
their original shipment when not in use.
1. Checking bars are used in the weigh roller adjustment procedure to maintain alignment
between the weigh roller and the two weigh span rollers.
2. A pulley removal tool allows the service technician to slide the drive pulley and tensioning
idler into and out of the feeder.
3. Pulley left bar allows left and support one point of drive pulley, and the pulley removal tool
could insert the space between belt and drive pulley, on purpose of drive pulley sliding out of
the feeder.
4. Right hand and left hand rail extensions provides support to the take-up pulley during
endless belt changing. (This describing isn’t applicable for LPG model.)
5. A feeder calibration kit is provided to facilitate feeder calibration at startup and at the
recommended six–month interval thereafter. The kit consists of calibration probe assemblies,
probe interconnecting cables, and retro–reflective tapes.
6. Test calibration weights are supplied for mounting beneath the load cell during feeder
calibration.
STARTUP
Preliminary Startup Measures

If the bunker is empty, open and close the valve above the feeder to deposit any foreign material in the
bunker or downspout on the feeder belt.
1. Before performing any work inside the feeder, deenergize the electrical control center by
locking the main disconnect switch or circuit breaker in the OFF position.
2. Open all feeder doors and remove all debris from on the belt and inside the feeder.
3. Carefully remove the fiberglass tape and load cell shipping brackets and install the load
cells in place of the brackets to support all the weight of the weigh roller.
2–3
4. Inspect the gear reducers for proper oil level.
5. Align the weigh roller according to the procedure in Weigh Roller Adjustment Section
on page 3-8 and check the weigh span and weigh rollers for freedom of rotation.
6. Check that the cleanout conveyor chain tension is adjusted to provide two inches of sag
per the procedure in Cleanout Conveyor section on page3-9.
7. Inspect the electronics controls for proper installation and that all P.C. cards and cable
connectors are firmly in their sockets.
8. Measure the input voltage at the main feeder disconnect. If the voltage is correct, apply
power.
Microprocessor Controller Setup

Refer to section 4.0 for Microprocessor Controller Instruction Manual.
Storage Maintenance After Startup

Follow the procedures below for feeders that have been operational and must be stored in place for a period
of a year or less.
1. Remove all material from the equipment, bunker to pulverizer.
2. Clean the inside of the feeder thoroughly and, when it has dried, paint the feeder interior
with rust–preventive paint.
3. Cover the top of the bunkers to prevent any moisture or foreign objects from contaminating
the equipment.
4. Clean all dust, dirt and moisture from the control cabinet. Place desiccant bags in the
cabinet and tightly close the access door. Also place desiccant in the feeder near the limit
switches to prevent corrosion.
5. Monthly, operate the feeder in the LOCAL mode, with the calibrating weight engaged, for
at least an hour. Also operate the cleanout conveyor at this time.
6. Follow the storage maintenance procedures detailed in Storage Maintenance Procedures

on page 1-2.
2–4
Extended Storage After Startup

Follow the procedures below for feeders that have been operational and must be stored in place for a period
of more than a year.
1. Follow the storage maintenance after startup procedures detailed in steps 1 through 4 in
Storage Maintenance After Startup on page 2-4.
2. Block up the tension roller and fully loosen the belt take–up screws to remove tension from
the feeder belt.
3. For maximum belt life when storage will exceed 36 months, remove and store the feeder
belts per the maintenance procedure in Belt Changing – Spliced Belt on page 3-10. Belts
should be stored on edge, protected from sunlight, in a cool, dry, ozone–free location. Belts
should be refolded every three months so that bends are in different places. Bends should be
made as large as possible.
4. Quarterly, lubricate all bearings according to the instructions in Lubrication on page 3-1.
5. An alternative to annually changing oil in the gear reducers when storage will exceed 12
months is to fill them to the top with oil, which prevents the formation of moisture. After
filling, seal the fill port with a non–vented plug.
Note
The oil must be reduced to normal operating level prior to operation of the feeder.
INITIAL SYSTEM OPERATION

Follow these special operating instructions the first time the feeder is energized to operate according to
typical operating procedures.
1. Be sure that the calibration weight(s) is disengaged from both load cells.
2. Carefully load the feeder belt slowly opening the inlet valve to load the belt at a controlled
rate. This procedure minimizes compaction of the material and thereby reduces the force
necessary to start the belt moving which prolongs its life.
2–5
3. Clear the totalizers. When first placed on line, the feeder should be operated with full
tension on the belt for an hour to remove its initial stretch. During this time, belt operation
must be closely observed and tension corrected.
4. With the feeder in operation, and when the bunker has been filled and the pulverizer is
operating, pressurize the feeder and adjust the seal air flow.
TYPICAL OPERATING PROCEDURES
1. When filling the bunker, first close the inlet valve to minimize the filling pressure on the
feeder and to avoid compaction of the material at the feeder inlet. This precaution is
unnecessary if the bunker is refilled while at least 8 to 10 feet of material remains in it.
2. When starting the feeder, open the inlet valve slowly to load the belt at a controlled rate and
to minimize compaction at the feeder inlet.
3. Energize the feeder controls at the disconnect switch in the control cabinet.
4. Verify the microprocessor/cabinet in REMOTE mode.
5. Upon receipt of a customer–generated feeder start command and a demand signal from the
combustion control system, the feeder begins to operate and run.
6. When the microprocessor has verified the operation of the weighing system electronics, the
feed rate and the totalized weight are displayed.
7. The feeder will operate as outlined above and will respond automatically to the changing
demands of the combustion control system until it is de–energized.
8. For a brief feeder stop with a loaded belt, pressing the OFF/MAINT. Key is applicable for
the feeder furnished with DISCONT ® TERSUS DT-9 microprocessor controller, or making
the selectswitch at LOC./CAL. position is applicable for the feeder furnished with
INTECONT® TERSUS/PLUS microprocessor controller.
9. For a clean shutdown with an empty belt, close the inlet valve while the feeder is still
running. When the belt is emptied, then operate as item 8. This procedure is recommended
whenever the feeder will be inactive for a long period of time, since it eliminates the
possibility of material compaction at the feeder inlet due to consolidation caused by its own
weight.
2–6
10. To jog the feeder belt, press the OFF/MAINT. key followed by the JOG key on the
microprocessor keyboard for as long as motion is required. (This describing is applicable for
the feeder furnished with DISCONT ® TERSUS DT-9 microprocessor controller only.)
11. To operate the feeder in the LOCAL mode for inspection or servicing, press the RUN>>
key. The feeder will run at the speed programmed in P02.16. (This describing is applicable for
the feeder furnished with DISCONT ® TERSUS DT-9 microprocessor controller only.)
2–7
2–8
SITE SPECIFIC DATA
Feeder Operation Specifications

The following are for use in determining the feeder operating parameters:
1. Gear Reduction
2. Leveling Bar Height
3. Area of Cross Section under Leveling Bar
4. Specified Density of Material Handled
5. Head Pulley Diameter
6. Maximum Capacity Feed Rate
7. Minimum Capacity Feed Rate
8. Maximum Capacity Motor Speed
(Based on density)
9. Input Signal
10. Feedback Signal
11. Inlet Size
12. Centurline Distance
13. Vertical Rise
2–9
2.0 OPERATION
Shenyang Stock Electric Power Equipment Co,.Ltd.
2–10
3.0 Maintenance
Section Index
Topic Page
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT SCHEDULE 3–1
LUBRICATION 3–1
Lubrication Schedule 3–2

Grease Specifications 3–3
Worm Gear Oil Specifications 3–3
Worm Gear Oil Examples 3–4
FEEDER CALIBRATION 3–4
Performing Calibrations 3–5
FEEDER ADJUSTMENTS 3–5
Belt Tension 3–5

Belt Tracking 3–6
Belt Tracking Procedure – Feeder Not In Operation 3–6
Belt Tracking Procedure – Feeder On Line 3–8
Inlet Side and Belt Support Pan 3–8
Weigh Roller Adjustment 3–8
Cleanout Conveyor 3–9
Improper Operation 3–9
Chain Tension Adjustment 3–9
Feeder Discharge Pluggage Sensor (LSFD) and
Material On Belt Level Switch (LSFB) 3–9
Belt Changing – Spliced Belt (ACCUFLEXR) 3–10
Belt Installation Notes 3–12
Drive Pulley Centering 3–13
Seal Air 3–13
3.0 MAINTENANCE Shenyang Stock Electric Power Equipment Co.,Ltd.

2.0 OPERATION
Stock Equipment Company
Shenyang Stock Electric Power Equipment Co.,Ltd. 3.0 MAINTENANCE
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT SCHEDULE

Periodic inspection, adjustment and calibration of the feeder are essential to its safe, reliable and
efficient operation, and to ensure that it operates according to the engineering design criteria.
To maintain maximum weighing accuracy, the following factors are essential: proper belt tension,
proper belt tracking, proper alignment of the weigh and weigh span rollers, feeder recalibration after
every six months of operation, and adjustment of seal air to a minimum positive air pressure in the
feeder body.
Important
Before performing any work inside the feeder, press the OFF key and de–energize the feeder by
locking the main circuit breaker or disconnect switch in the OFF position.
Inspection Schedule
Daily Inspection: • Check belt tracking.
Weekly Inspection: • Check belt tension.
• Check belt for tears.
• Check oil level in gear reducers.
Monthly Inspection: • Perform monthly lubrication service.
Quarterly Inspection: • Change gear reducer oil.
• Check seal air adjustment.
Semiannual Inspection at • Check rotating parts for evidence of bearing failure or gear wear.
Shutdown for Servicing: • Check the feeder for excessively worn or corroded parts.
• Check for freedom of movement of the weigh system (drag links, load cells, rollers).
• Check the belt for signs of excessive wear.
• Check the belt scraper for wear and proper operation.
• Clean the load cell modules.
• Clean corroded electrical contacts and tighten loose wire terminals.
• Remove material buildup on the inside of the feeder body and clean the interior surface of all
viewing ports.
• Check the inlet skirts for positioning and wear.
• Perform semiannual lubrication service.
• Check cleanout conveyor chain tension and free any binding links.
• Calibrate the feeder.
Periodic Inspection: • Inspect newly installed belts for proper tension and tracking two to three times per shift until
the belt is stabilized and has lost its initial stretch; thereafter, inspect weekly.
• Adjust the weigh roller whenever the load cell modules, belt, or weigh span rollers are
changed or serviced.
• Anytime the feeder end doors are removed, inspect the cleanout conveyor.
Note
Feeder calibration should also be performed following a weigh roller adjustment or replacement
of the belt, the CPU board, a load cell module, or the microprocessor program chip.
LUBRICATION
The gravimetric feeder should be lubricated according to the following schedule.
3–1
Lubrication Schedule
Refer to Figure 3–1, Lubrication Diagram for point code locations.
Point Code Description Number of Points Frequency

2 Belt Drive Gear Reducer 1 Grease Fitting Monthly
3 Belt Drive Motor See Note 1
4 Head Pulley Bearing 1 Grease Fitting Monthly
5 Cleanout Conveyor Motor 1 Grease Fitting See Note 1
7 Cleanout Conveyor Gear Reducer 1 Oil Level Plug
8 Cleanout Conveyor Gear Reducer 1 Grease Fitting Monthly
9 Cleanout Conveyor Take Up Assembly 1 Per Side Monthly
10 Belt Drive Gear Reducer 1 Oil Level Plug
11 Belt Take–Up Pulley Bearing 1 Per Side Monthly
Point Code Description Quantity Frequency

1 Belt Drive Reducer As Required See Notes 2, 3,
6 Cleanout Conveyor Reducer As Required See Note 2, 3
Lubrication Notes
1. Refer to Motor Vendor Instruction Manual for the manufacturer’s lubrication requirements.
2. Drain oil from reducer and refill after the first month of operation; thereafter, at six–month intervals or every 2500
hours of operation, whichever occurs first.
3. The gear reducer is equipped with a dipstick for checking oil level and is located on the top of the reducer. Unscrew
the dipstick and pull out of the reducer. The dipstick has an oil level mark near the end of the dipstick.
The belt drive gear reducer is equipped with a plug located in the center of the gear box. This plug must be
removed to check oil level.
Figure 3–1 Lubrication Diagram
3–2
Grease Specifications
The feeder has been factory–lubricated with NLGI No. 2 lithium base grease with the
following specifications:
Dropping Point 180°C (375°F)

Penetration Unworked 275
Penetration Worked 272
Temperature Range -20°C (15°F) to120°C( 250°F)
The grease selected should be designed for long bearing life and formulated to provide
protection against rust, corrosion, oxidation and water washout.
While no bearings are loaded heavily enough to require using grease with extreme pressure
additives, most premium quality multipurpose greases contain additives and may provide extra
wear protection in cases where grease is not applied often enough or in sufficient quantity.
If changing to a new grease, consult the lubricant supplier to verify its compatibility with the
former grease. Some greases are incompatible with others, resulting in possible bearing failure.
If there is any doubt about compatibility, the former grease must first be flushed or cleaned
out completely.
The following is a partial listing of lubricant manufacturers’ recommended greases. They are
intended only as examples. Other manufacturers may be consulted for their recommendations.
Chevron Chevron SRI–2

Gulf Oil Gulfgem Grease
Mobil Oil Mobilux EP 2
Shell Oil Dolium Grease R
BP Energrease LS–EP2
Texaco Texaco RB No. 2
Worm Gear Oil Specifications
Ambient Temperature Ranges *
16°F to 60°F 50°F to125°F

AGMA Lubricant Number 7C 8C
Viscosity Range (MM/S@104_F) 414–506 612–748
ISO Grade 460 680
Lubricant Temperature Range 15°F to 175°F 50°F to 175°F
*For ambient temperatures below –9_C (16_F), consult Stock Equipment Company. The pour point of all
gear lubricants should be at least 10_C (50_F) lower than the lowest ambient temperature expected.
3–3
In all cases, the lubricant manufacturer’s storage instructions should be followed to avoid
separation of compounds. If changing to a new oil, consult the lubricant supplier to verify its
compatibility with the former oil. AGMA compounded, rust– and oxidation–resisting gear oils
are generally compatible with each other. If any doubt exists about their compatibility, the
reducer must first be drained and flushed with a commercially available flushing agent, or with
the new oil, to remove all traces of the previously used oil.
Worm Gear Oil Examples
Amoco Oil Co. Amoco Worm Gear Oil Amoco Cyl. Oil 680
Chevron Oil Co. Cylinder Oil 460X Cylinder OIl 680X
Exxon Oil Co. Cylesstic TK460 Cylesstic TK680
Fiske Brothers SPO 277 SPO 288
Gulf Oil Co. Senate 460 Senate 680
Mobil Oil Corp. 600W Cyl. Oil 600W Super Cyl. Oil
Pennzoil Cyl. Oil #8 Cyl. Oil #6
Phillips Petroleum Co. Hector 460S Hector 630S
Shell Oil Co. Valvata J460 Valvata J680
BP Energol DC–C460 Energol DC–C460
Texaco, Inc. Vanguard 460 Honor 680
Union Oil Co. (Calif.) Steaval B110 Steaval B165
FEEDER CALIBRATION
The feeder should be calibrated at start–up, after one month of initial operation and every six months
thereafter. Calibration should also be performed following a weigh roller adjustment or replacement of
the belt, the CPU board, or a load cell module. The controller should also be calibration after the
controller firmware is updated or a Load Default Values operation is performed. Calibration is
accomplished in two separates steps.
Step one of calibration consists of the elimination of system tare, which includes the weight of the
weigh roller, load cell support assembly, and the feeder belt. It also involves measuring belt speed and
its relationship to motor speed. Step two calibrates the load cell output with a known weight.
Cancellation of feeder tare is performed by measuring the average weigh system output over exactly
two belt revolutions and then subtracting this amount from the total weight measurement. When the belt
is running empty, it produces a zero average contribution to the totalized weight. In normal operation,
the average tare is automatically subtracted from the gross weight of the belt. Therefore, only the
material weight on the belt is reflected as totalized weight.
While the empty belt is being weighed, the belt speed is accurately measured. This is done by measuring
the time it takes a retro–reflective tape marker on the belt to travel between two fixed points. This
parameter is measured a number of times to determine repeatability and to compensate for variations in
belt thickness. From this data, the belt speed is calculated and the relationship between belt speed and
motor speed is established. The feeder operates with zero belt slippage. Therefore, the ratio of belt speed
to average motor speed is constant. This ratio is stored in memory and is used to determine the belt
speed for any motor speed.
3–4
The span of the weighing system is set after the tare has been measured. A known weight is applied to
the weigh roller and the average output over exactly two belt revolutions is measured. This calibrated
span factor is stored in memory and used to accurately determine the value of the weight of the material
on the belt.
NOTE: The DT-9 parameter P04.03 & the Intecont Tersus parameter P03.05 Effective Platform
Length is the distance from either weigh span roller to the central weigh span roller, which is supported
by the load cell. This is half the distance between the two weigh span rollers. For any given feeder, the
value used by the DT-9 should be one half of the value used by the 196NT.
Performing Calibrations
The calibration process consists of the following three steps.
1. Weigh Roller Adjustment
2. Basic (Cal 1) – Belt Speed and tare calibration
3. Span (Cal 2) – Belt Speed and span calibration
NOTE: At least on Basic (Cal 1) must be performed prior to performing a Span (Cal 2).
The following special calibration processes can be performed for testing or special maintenance
operations, but not normally required.
1. TC: Span calibration – chain test calibration
2. LB: Pulses/Belt – Belt speed calibration
3. TA: Tare – Tare calibration
NOTE: Calibration is considered a local operation. No totalization takes place and analog
feedback signals are set to minimum.
FEEDER ADJUSTMENTS
To maintain maximum weighing accuracy, the following factors are essential: proper belt tension,
proper belt tracking, proper alignment of the weigh and weigh span rollers, feeder recalibration after
every six months of operation, and adjustment of seal air to a minimum positive air pressure in the
feeder body.
Belt Tension
Belt tensioning is accomplished by means of compression springs in the belt take–up

assemblies. When the spring is compressed by the take–up screw to the 4.8mm(3/16 inch)
dimension, both grooves on the spring guides are inside the take–up housing. The belt is now
fully tensioned. When the red groove on the spring guide becomes fully visible, retensioning is
required. To maintain belt tracking, re–tension the belt by tightening the take–up screws a
maximum of four complete turns on one side and four complete turns on the other side until the
green groove on the spring guide is just inside the take–up housing.
3–5
Belt tension adjustments, when necessary, can be made most efficiently while the feeder
is operating.
Note
A new belt should be run under full tension for at least an hour to remove its initial stretch. If the
feeder must be returned to operation immediately, belt operation must be closely observed for
at least an hour. Belt tension should be corrected after each 15 minutes of running time.
Belt Tracking
The purpose of belt tracking is to center the belt on the drive and take–up pulleys. This prevents
possible damage from the belt running off the pulley sides. It also allows smooth, uninterrupted
movement of the belt through the weigh span area so that weighing accuracy is not
compromised.
The underside of the belt has a V–guide molded in its center which rides in grooves in the center
of each pulley and roller to aid in keeping the belt centered. If the belt is not tracked properly,
the V–guide will begin to ride on one edge of the groove, causing a hump to become evident on
the top of the belt. A properly tracked belt will have no sign of humping on the weigh roller or
weigh span rollers, and no more than a slight hump occurring intermittently at the drive or
take–up pulley. If regular humping is present at one of the pulleys, or intermittent humping at
one of the rollers, the belt requires tracking adjustment.
Belt tracking is primarily accomplished by crowning the take–up pulley. A belt turning on a
crowned pulley will seek the highest point, the pulley center, unless the belt slips sidewise.
Tightening the take–up adjustment screw on the right side will shift the centerline of the pulley
to the left, causing the belt to move to the left on the take–up pulley until it again centers on the
crown. Similarly, tightening the take–up adjustment screw on the left will cause the belt to
move to the right.
Belt Tracking Procedure – Feeder Not In Operation
It is preferable to perform tracking adjustments when the feeder is not in operation. This way,
the belt can be run empty with the doors open so that the top surface is readily visible for
evidence of humping.
1. Open the feeder end doors. Turn on the work lights.
2. If the belt has just been replaced, verify that the take–up pulley is square with the feeder
body. See Figure 3–2, Squaring the Take-Up Pulley.
3–6
Figure 3–2 Squaring the Take–Up Pulley
3. Adjust belt tension on both sides of the feeder to the nominal spring washer stackup
dimension shown on the take-up group drawing. Adjust the take-ups evenly during the
procedure to prevent the pulleys from binding. The starting point for belt tracking begins
when the spring washers are set to the nominal spring washer stackup on both sides of the
feeder.
4. Make a chalk mark across the width of the belt surface to indicate a complete
revolution of the belt. Start and operate the feeder at slow speed.
Observe the belt closely for at least five revolutions for signs of humping. Operate the
feeder at maximum speed for at least 20 belt revolutions. If no humping appears, the belt
can be considered properly tracked.
5. In the event that humping occurs at the pulleys, the belt is first tracked on the drive
pulley. Tighten the appropriate belt tensioning screw one turn to steer the belt in the desired
direction. Observe the effect of this adjustment for at least five belt revolutions at slow
speed. If no humping appears, operate the feeder at maximum speed for at least 20 belt
revolutions. Continue this procedure until the belt is properly tracked on the drive pulley.
Note
Certain belts will show a back–and–forth travel pattern on the drive pulley. Adjustments should
be made to average this movement in the center of the pulley.
6. After tracking adjustments are complete, recheck the belt tension adjustments.
3–7
Belt Tracking Procedure – Feeder On Line
Observe the belt closely for at least five revolutions. Humping of the belt is not visible through
the viewing ports when the feeder is in normal operation. Close observation of the distance
between the belt and pulley on each side must be made. The distance between these two points
must remain equal on both sides of the pulley.
If a tracking adjustment is necessary, observe the belt closely. Since the belt may be traveling at
high speed, an adjustment in the wrong direction may quickly cause the belt to run off to the
point where it can be damaged. If the wrong adjustment is made, an opposite adjustment to
compensate must be made immediately. After tracking adjustments are complete, readjust belt
tension to the midpoint of the tension indicator.
Inlet Side Skirts and Belt Support Pan
Inlet side skirts should be mounted plumb, parallel to the belt, with no interference to the belt.
Clearance between the side skirts and top of the belt must increase in the direction of material
flow to prevent material from being trapped between the skirts and the belt. Clearance at the
inlet end should be 5mm to 10mm and increase to 10mm to 15mm at the discharge end.
The belt support pan has several mounting holes in its sides to allow for adaptation to feeders
with varying dimensions. Correct pan location is necessary to ensure smooth, uninterrupted belt
travel for maximum weighing accuracy.
Weigh Roller Adjustment
The alignment between the weigh roller and the two weigh span rollers should be within ±
0.002 inches (±0.0051 cm) on each side for an accurate weight reading. Refer to Figure 3–3,
Weigh Roller Adjustment.
Figure 3–3 Weigh Roller Adjustment
3–8
1. Engage the calibration weight on both load cells.
2. Insert the checking bars through the inlet end access door of the feeder, adjacent to the
sides of the belt, and with their machined surfaces resting on the weigh span and weigh
rollers.
3. Beginning on either side, insert a .005 inch (0.013 cm) shim between each of the three
rollers and the machined surface of the checking bar (three places).
4. Loosen the jam nut, then turn the adjustment block to lower the weigh roller.
5. Slowly turn the adjustment block to raise the weigh roller until the shim is touching
both checking bar and weigh roller (slip fit). Then tighten the jam nut.
6. Similarly adjust the weigh roller on the opposite side of the feeder.
7. Remove the checking bars and disengage the calibration weight.
8. The feeder must be recalibrated after weigh roller adjustment. Refer to the procedure in
Feeder Calibration on page 3-4.
Cleanout Conveyor
Improper Operation
Under normal operating conditions, the bottom pan of the feeder should be visible with only a
small accumulation of material in front of the wing links. Improper operation occurs when an
excessive material buildup overloads the drive system. Possible causes to be checked are:
improper inlet skirt clearances, a worn or malfunctioning belt scraper, and an improperly
adjusted seal air flow.
Chain Tension Adjustment
Chain tension is adjusted by tightening the screw attached to each end of the take–up sprocket,
accessible through the feeder inlet door. Proper tension is indicated by a 52mm (2 inch) sag in
the chain from the drive sprocket to the first chain support pan. On long–centered feeders, the
52mm (2 inch) sag should be observed between each support pan. If there is more than a 52mm
(2 inch) sag, remove one drag link, check the sag, and retention the chain. If the sag still
measures more than 52mm (2 inch) after removing on drag link, remove second drag link,
check the sag, and retention the chain. Since chain stretch is very slow, retensioning is only
necessary every three to four years under normal operating conditions.
Feeder Discharge Pluggage Sensor (LSFD) and Material On Belt Level Switch (LSFB)
1. Verify that the switch paddle is hanging vertically. Secure it to maintain this position, if
necessary.
3–9
2. Loosen the cam set screw(s) and adjust the cam(s) that they are positioned horizontally
at right angles to the switch paddle.
3. Tighten the cam set screw(s) and ensure that the cam(s) remain in the horizontal
position.
4. Remove any device used to secure the switch paddle.
Belt Changing – Spliced Belt (ACCUFLEXR)
1. Close the valve above the feeder inlet and empty the belt.
2. When removing a spliced belt that is no longer usable, cut the belt and remove it
through one of the feeder end doors. When removing a spliced belt that may be used again,
operate the belt drive motor to position the splice in the belt in the middle of the side access
doors.
3. Before performing any work inside the feeder, power to the feeder must be shut off at
the main disconnect switch.
Note
Review the complete installation procedure and belt installation notes before work is started.
4. Open all feeder body access doors.
5. Loosen the take–up pulley adjusting screws to provide maximum belt slack. This is
accomplished by first turning the take–up screw on one side four turns maximum, then
turning the opposite screw eight turns. Continue alternating at eight turns per side to the
stop points. DO NOT USE AN IMPACT WRENCH.
6. Before attempting to remove the flex cable in the belt splice, spray the spliced area with
a penetrating oil to loosen the cable inside the belt. This will prevent the cable from
breaking as it is being removed.
7. Remove the flex cable from the belt. This task is made easier if a second man lifts
the belt up and down from the opposite side access door as the cable is being pulled and
rotated.
Note
3–10
Before installing the new spliced belt, make sure that the flex cable will pass through both ends
of the belt easily and that a washer is placed at the end of the flex cable opposite the lead wire.
8. Attach the new belt to the optional BELT PULL TOOL assembly by using the
supplied (0.187“) diameter rod. Refer to Figure 3–5, Accuflex Belt.
9. Feed a rope or strap through the feeder, and tie it to the BELT PULL TOOL assembly.
Refer to Figure 3–5, Accuflex Belt.
Note
Make sure that the rope or strap is installed either above the top of the span rollers, head pulley,
support pan and any support rollers, or under the take–up, head pullies.
10. Pull the belt through and then remove the solid rod and BELT PULL TOOL. The
splice portion of the belt should be located in the center of the side access doors.
Figure 3–5 Accuflex Belt
3–11
11. Align the leading edge of the splice and insert the ZIP TUBE into the splice portion of
the belt. Push the tube as far as possible and than tap on the driving plug until the ZIP
TUBE is fully inserted. Refer to Figure 3–5, Accuflex Belt. To facilitate the insertion of
the ZIP TUBE into the splice part of the belt, occasional lifting and aligning of the two
belt edges is required. Spray the spliced area with a penetrating oil to assist the insertion of
the ZIP TUBE.
12. Slide the furnished retaining washer over the free flex cable. Refer to Figure 3–6,
Installing Lead Wire. Crimp the washer tightly into place.
13. Insert the guide wire of the flex cable fully into the ZIP TUBE. Lock the guide wire in
place by tightening the screw on ZIP TUBE nut. While rotating the ZIP TUBE and lifting
the belt up and down, pull the ZIP TUBE and flex cable through the belt until the crimped
washer stops at the belt.
14. Cut off the excess flex cable, then install and crimp the second washer on the flex cable.
Refer to Figure 3–6, Installing Lead Wire.
Figure 3–6 Installing Lead Wire
15. With reference to Belt Installation Notes 1 through 3, properly adjust the belt.
16. With reference Belt Installation Note 4, properly calibrate the feeder.
Belt Installation Notes
1. Center the belt before it is tensioned so that the bottom V–guide is seated within the
groove on all pulleys and rollers.
3–12
2. Perform belt tracking adjustments per on page 3-6.
3. Perform belt tensioning adjustments per on page 3-5.
4. Calibrate the feeder per the procedure on page 3-4.
Drive Pulley Centering
When replacing the drive pulley, the centerline of pulley V–guides must be aligned to each
other within 1.6mm(1/16 inch) and to the center of machined surfaces on both sides of feeder
within 3.2mm(1/8 inch).
Seal Air (This section isn’t applicable for LPG model feeder.)
Adjust the seal air while the feeder and equipment below are in normal operation and after the
bunker has been filled. Perform the following steps to adjust the seal air:
1. Install a temporary feeder manometer at the tap indicated on drawing in System

arrangement Drawings and a manometer at the equipment below.
2. Adjust the seal air butterfly valve until a feeder pressure differential, as indicated on
the feeder manometer, is 6 mm of water above the manometer reading on the equipment
installed below.
3. Observe the feeder interior through the viewing ports in the discharge end access door.
4. If dust is :
1) moving slowly toward the outlet, the pressure differential is satisfactory.
2) stationary or is rising from the outlet, perform the follow steps:
a) open the butterfly valve further until the dust shows positive movement toward
the outlet, but do not exceed a pressure differential of 25 mm of water.
b) Remove the manometers and adjust the stop on the butterfly valve, if so
equipped, so that when the valve is closed, it can be reopened to the same position
without recalibration.
3–13
3–14
4.0 Microprocessor Controller
Instruction Manual
4.0 MICROPROCESSOR CONTROLLER
INSTRUCTION MANUAL

DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF
Instruction Manual
BV-H6411 GB
PASS - Service you can rely on
Fast, comprehensive, anywhere in the world
Quality and reliability are the cornerstones of our company’s

philosophy. That is why we consider a comprehensive service
concept simply par for the course, from strict quality control,
installation and commissioning through to seamless support
across the entire product life cycle.
With over 30 service stations and over 180 service specialists,
you can count on us to be there whenever – and wherever –
you need us.
It doesn’t matter where you are, our specialists are there to
advise and assist with the best in worldwide, personal, compre-
hensive service.
During office hours, service specialists from all divisions are on

hand to analyze problems and failures. Look at
www.schenckprocess.com for your nearest Schenck Process
Location.
Customized to meet your requirements, our comprehensive

Process Advanced Service System provides you with the best
service. Are you looking for individual, perfect-fit service solu-
tions?
Then our, the modular service system PASS is the ticket. It
covers the entire service spectrum, from simple inspections
through to full service. Interested?
Then find out more about the individual components at
www.schenckprocess.com/en/service.
Service:
Quality and reliability form the basis for our corporate philoso-
phy all over the world.In House Support (Monday through Fri-
day from at least 8 o´clock to 5 p.m. CST)
Service specialists are available for technical assistance to
answer your questions or assist you in trouble shooting.
STOCK EQUIPMENT COMPANY

16490 Chillicothe Rd. Chagrin Falls, OH 44023 , USA
Phone: +1 440-543-6000
Fax: +1 440-543-6839
e-mail address: sales@stockequipment.com
© by STOCK EQUIPMENT COMPANYA subsidiary of Schenck Process GmbH,

64293 Darmstadt, Germany (www.schenckprocess.com)
All rights reserved. Any reproduction of this documentation,

regardless of method, without prior permission by STOCK
EQUIPMENT in writing, even by excerpt, is prohibited.
Subject to change without prior notice.
Note: The Original Instruction Manual is English

Table of Contents
Table of Contents
1 About This Manual ................................................................

................................................................................................
................................................................................................
.................................................................
................................. 1
2 Safety notes................................
notes................................................................
................................................................................................
................................................................................................
...........................................................................
........................................... 3
2.1 Signal Words .......................................................................................................................................... 4
2.1.1 Signal Words for Safety Warnings ................................................................................................. 4
2.1.2 Signal Words for Application Notes ............................................................................................... 5
2.2 Five Safety Rules of Electrical Engineering ........................................................................................... 5
2.3 Damaged / Defective Electrical Components ......................................................................................... 6
3 Overview ................................................................
................................................................................................
................................................................................................
...............................................................................
............................................... 7
3.1 What is the DISOCONT Tersus/DT-9? ................................................................................................. 7
3.2 Definitions ............................................................................................................................................... 7
3.3 Measuring Principle ................................................................................................................................ 8
3.4 Operating Modes - Remote .................................................................................................................... 9
3.4.1 Gravimetric ..................................................................................................................................... 9
3.4.2 Volumetric ....................................................................................................................................10
3.4.3 Volumetric Control ........................................................................................................................10
3.5 Operating Modes – OFF/Maintenance .................................................................................................10
4 DT-DT-9 Setup ................................................................

................................................................................................
................................................................................................
..........................................................................
.......................................... 11
4.1 Setup Notes .........................................................................................................................................11
4.2 Startup and Functional Check ..............................................................................................................12
4.3 Setup Parameters ................................................................................................................................12
4.3.1 Commonly Changed Parameters .................................................................................................13
4.4 Calibration ............................................................................................................................................15
4.4.1 Performing Calibrations ................................................................................................................15
4.4.2 Weigh Roller Adjustment .............................................................................................................16
4.4.3 Basic (CAL 1) ..............................................................................................................................17
4.4.4 Span (CAL 2) ..............................................................................................................................18
4.4.5 TC: Span Calibration ...................................................................................................................19
4.4.6 LB: Pulses per Belt ......................................................................................................................20
4.4.7 TA: Tare .......................................................................................................................................20
4.5 Analog Trim Function ...........................................................................................................................21
4.6 Belt Monitoring ......................................................................................................................................22
4.6.1 Belt Drift Monitoring ......................................................................................................................22
4.6.2 Belt Influence Compensation (BIC) ..............................................................................................23
4.6.3 Belt Slippage Monitoring ..............................................................................................................24
4.6.3.1 Monitoring Standstill after Startup ................................................................................................24
4.6.3.2 Belt Slippage with Belt Marking ...................................................................................................24
4.6.3.3 Two-Sensor Belt Slippage Monitoring ..........................................................................................24
DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual BV-H6411GB, 1118

Schenck Process Group -i-
Table of Contents
5 Operating and Control

Control Access ................................................................
................................................................................................
.............................................................................
............................................. 27
5.1 Connection between a VHM Operating Panel and a Scales Controller (VCU) ....................................27
5.1.1 Connection via Ethernet Cable ....................................................................................................27
5.1.2 Connection via Bluetooth .............................................................................................................28
5.1.3 Connection via RS-485 ................................................................................................................28
5.2 Connecting a PC with EasyServe to a Scales Controller (VCU) ..........................................................29
5.2.1 Connection via Ethernet ...............................................................................................................29
5.2.2 Connection via RS-232 ................................................................................................................29
5.2.3 Connection via WLAN ..................................................................................................................29
5.2.4 Connection via Bluetooth .............................................................................................................29
5.3 Connection between a Web Browser and a VCU Scales Controller ....................................................30
5.4 Web Server in the Scales Controller VCU ............................................................................................30
6 Operation Using the Touch Touch Screen HMI ................................................................

...............................................................................................
............................................................... 33
6.1 Initial Configuration ..............................................................................................................................33
6.1.1 The 'Network' Screen ..................................................................................................................33
6.1.2 The 'Display Settings' Screen .....................................................................................................33
6.1.3 The 'Feeder' Screen ....................................................................................................................34
6.1.4 The 'Configuration' Screen ..........................................................................................................34
6.1.5 The 'Communication' Screen ......................................................................................................34
6.1.6 The 'Calibration' Screen ..............................................................................................................34
6.1.7 Exiting HMI Configuration ...........................................................................................................34
6.2 Display Functions ................................................................................................................................34
6.2.1 The 'Home' Screen ......................................................................................................................34
6.2.1.1 Operating the HMI in 'Off/Maintenance' Mode .............................................................................34
6.2.1.2 Operating the HMI in 'Remote' Mode ...........................................................................................35
6.2.2 The 'Trend' Screen ......................................................................................................................35
6.2.3 The 'Values' Screen ....................................................................................................................35
6.2.4 The 'Setup' Screen ......................................................................................................................35
6.2.4.1 Data Log Values ...........................................................................................................................36
6.2.4.2 Event Log Values ........................................................................................................................36
6.2.4.3 Parameter Log Values ................................................................................................................36
6.2.4.4 Parameter Setup .........................................................................................................................36
6.2.4.5 Trimming the Analog Inputs and Outputs ...................................................................................36
6.2.4.6 Restoring the Factory Default Settings .......................................................................................37
6.2.4.7 Simulation Mode .........................................................................................................................37
6.2.4.8 Calibrating the Feeder .................................................................................................................38
6.2.4.9 Setting the Current Time and Date .............................................................................................38
6.3 Typical Operating Procedures .............................................................................................................38
7 Operation Using the 196NT Display ................................................................

................................................................................................
.....................................................................
..................................... 39
BV-H6411GB, 1118 DISOCONT® Tersus (DT-9) Weighfeeder VCF, Instruction Manual

- ii - Schenck Process Group
Table of Contents
8 Operation Using EasyServe ................................................................

................................................................................................
.................................................................................
................................................. 41
8.1 Program EasyServe VPC 20150 ..........................................................................................................41
8.2 Minimum System Requirements ..........................................................................................................41
8.3 Installation.............................................................................................................................................41
8.4 Start Program and Connect to Feeder .................................................................................................41
8.4.1 Connecting to Feeder...................................................................................................................42
8.4.2 Access to Feeder Commands and Parameters ...........................................................................42
8.5 Parameter Set.......................................................................................................................................43
8.5.1 .PAR Files ....................................................................................................................................43
8.5.2 Read/change Parameters ............................................................................................................43
8.5.3 Loading Custom Default Parameters ...........................................................................................44
8.5.4 Loading Factory Default Parameters ...........................................................................................44
8.5.5 Expert Mode .................................................................................................................................44
8.5.6 Print Parameters ..........................................................................................................................44
8.6 Operating the Feeder ...........................................................................................................................45
8.6.1 Scale Operation Screens .............................................................................................................45
8.6.2 Events ..........................................................................................................................................45
8.6.3 Calibration ....................................................................................................................................45
8.6.4 Service Values .............................................................................................................................45
8.6.5 Trends ..........................................................................................................................................46
8.6.6 Setting Time .................................................................................................................................47
8.6.7 Options .........................................................................................................................................47
9 Testing ................................................................
................................................................................................
................................................................................................
...............................................................................
............................................... 49
9.1 Calibration Weight Test ........................................................................................................................49
9.2 Chain Test ............................................................................................................................................49
9.3 Material Test .........................................................................................................................................49
10 Parameters ................................................................
................................................................................................
................................................................................................
..........................................................................
.......................................... 51
10.1 General Information ..............................................................................................................................51
10.2 DT-9 Parameter List .............................................................................................................................55
10.2.1 Parameter Overview ....................................................................................................................56
10.2.2 Parameter Details ........................................................................................................................70
10.2.2.1 Parameter Block 01 - Hardware Modules ....................................................................................70
10.2.2.2 Parameter Block 02 - Feeder Definition .......................................................................................72
10.2.2.3 Parameter Block 03 - Control Sources ........................................................................................77
10.2.2.4 Parameter Block 04 - Rated Data ................................................................................................82
10.2.2.5 Parameter Block 05 - Feeder control ...........................................................................................84
10.2.2.6 Parameter Block 06 - Feeder Monitoring .....................................................................................86
10.2.2.7 Parameter Block 07 - Belt Monitoring ..........................................................................................91
10.2.2.8 Parameter Block 08 - Display Filters ............................................................................................95
10.2.2.9 Parameter Block 09 - Limit Values ...............................................................................................96
10.2.2.1 Parameter Block 10 - Calibration Data ........................................................................................99
0
10.2.2.1 Parameter Block 11 - Rate controller .........................................................................................101
1
10.2.2.1 Parameter Block 12 - Moisture...................................................................................................103
2
10.2.2.1 Parameter Block 13 - Cleanout control ......................................................................................106
3
10.2.2.1 Parameter Block 14 - Analog Outputs .......................................................................................107
4
10.2.2.1 Parameter Block 15 - Digital Inputs ...........................................................................................109
5
10.2.2.1 Parameter Block 16 - Digital Outputs .........................................................................................118
6
10.2.2.1 Parameter Block 17 - Analog calibration ....................................................................................123
7

Schenck Process Group - iii -
Table of Contents
10.2.2.1 Parameter Block 18 - 2-Sensor Slip ...........................................................................................126

8
10.2.2.1 Parameter Block 19 - Maintenance interval ...............................................................................127
9
10.2.2.2 Parameter Block 20 - Data Logging ...........................................................................................128
0
10.2.2.2 Parameter Block 21 - Communication EasyServe .....................................................................129
1
10.2.2.2 Parameter Block 22 - Communication Fieldbus.........................................................................129
2
10.2.2.2 Parameter Block 23 - Ethernet ...................................................................................................134
3
10.2.2.2 Parameter Block 24 - PLC Outputs ............................................................................................134
4
10.2.2.2 Parameter Block 25 - Fixed mode configuration ........................................................................136
5
10.2.2.2 Parameter Block 26 - FCB analog outputs ................................................................................139
6
10.2.2.2 Parameter Block 27 - FCB digital outputs ..................................................................................142
7
10.2.2.2 Parameter Block 28 - Configuration HMI Values .......................................................................145
8
11 Event (Error) Messages ................................................................
................................................................................................
.....................................................................................
..................................................... 149
11.1 Events Details .....................................................................................................................................150
11.1.1 Event Group: Calibration ............................................................................................................150
11.1.2 Event Group: Controller .............................................................................................................151
11.1.3 Event Group: Electrical System .................................................................................................151
11.1.4 Event Group: Interlock ...............................................................................................................153
11.1.5 Event Group: Material Flow........................................................................................................153
11.1.6 Event Group: MAX .....................................................................................................................154
11.1.7 Event Group: Mechanic ..............................................................................................................155
11.1.8 Event Group: MIN ......................................................................................................................158
11.1.9 Event Group: Sequence Monitoring ...........................................................................................159
11.1.10 Event Group: System Message .................................................................................................161
12 Default I/O Points ................................................................

................................................................................................
...............................................................................................
............................................................... 163
12.1 Default Digital Inputs ..........................................................................................................................163
12.2 Default Digital Outputs ........................................................................................................................163
12.3 Default Analog I/O ..............................................................................................................................164
13 Trending Data ................................................................

................................................................................................
................................................................................................
...................................................................
................................... 167
14 Appendix ................................................................
................................................................................................
................................................................................................
...........................................................................
........................................... 171
14.1 PLC Functionality (Optional)...............................................................................................................171
14.1.1 Handling the Function Blocks.....................................................................................................171
14.1.2 Function Blocks for Binary Signals ............................................................................................172
14.1.3 Function Blocks for Analog Signals ...........................................................................................173
14.2 Checking the Weight Measurement Instrumentation .........................................................................175
14.3 ............................................................................................................................................................176
14.3.1 Dimensions and Position of the Plugs .......................................................................................176
14.3.2 General Technical Data .............................................................................................................177
14.4 Basics of EMC-Compliant Cabling .....................................................................................................178
14.4.1 Thoughts on the Cable Connections ..........................................................................................178
14.4.2 Screened Cables ........................................................................................................................179
14.4.3 Unscreened Cables ....................................................................................................................179
14.5 EC Declaration of Conformity .............................................................................................................179
Index ................................................................
................................................................................................
................................................................................................
.................................................................................
................................................. 181

- iv - Schenck Process Group
About This Manual
1 About This Manual

This instruction manual describes the controller VCU 20103 loaded with software VCF 20170. This type of
controller is designed for controlling a weighbelt feeder, especially for feeding coal into a pulverizer. It is
usually used together with an operator panel type VHM.
For easy retrofits in existing installations with STOCK Equipment controller type 196NT a different type of
®
DISOCONT Tersus is provided. Please contact STOCK for details on that variant, if needed.
®
Additional details on the hardware components and the interfaces of the DISOCONT Tersus system are
found in the system manual BV-H2406 and the electrical schematics provided with the equipment.
For service purposes a PC or notebook with software EasyServe (type VPC 20150) can be connected. For
details on EasyServe besides the information in this manual see instruction manual BV-H2185.
The controller provides optional means for communication via serial fieldbus of various types to the host
plant control. Details on this communication are found in the separate fieldbus interface manual BV-H2418.
Additional copies of these instructions may be ordered from the Parts Department at Stock Equipment
Company, Chagrin Falls, Ohio. Refer to Part No. ATPDT9VCU20103.
Proprietary Note
The information in this manual, including technical data and copies of drawings, contains information that is
proprietary to Stock Equipment Company. This manual is provided to the user of equipment purchased from
Stock Equipment Company for use only in operation or maintenance of such equipment. Information in this
manual is not to be used, disclosed, copied, reproduced in whole or part for any use other than that indicated
above, or for any other purpose detrimental to the interests of Stock Equipment Company. Patents owned by
Stock Equipment Company have been issued or are pending on some of the information in this manual. Any
unauthorized use of this subject matter of such patents is a violation of such patents and is prohibited by law.
Electrostatic Sensitive Decices

Caution: The electronic controls contain ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) sensitive parts and assemblies that
can be damaged by static electricity. The following static control precautions are required when testing, ser-
vicing, or repairing the electronic assemblies.
1. Disconnect power at the main disconnect switch or circuit breaker.
2. Only qualified personnel are permitted to perform and install the electronic controls.
3. Wear a wrist type grounding strap that is grounded to the control cabinet chassis.
4. When replacing the electronic circuit board. Do not remove the board from the static shielding bag it
came in until you are ready to install the board.
5. When removing any electronic circuit board, immediately place it in static shielding bag.
6. Stock Equipment Company advises that all printed circuit boards should be returned to the factory for
repair since our technicians are trained to work with electrostatic sensitive components.
7. Contact the Stock Equipment Company Parts Department for a returns good authorization number to
facilitate the return of an electronic circuit board. Returned components should be shipped in static shiel-
ding type bags. If packing materials are used, they should be made of a static dissipative material.
Note: If you are not familiar with static control procedures, before replacing electronic components, refer to
US Department of Defense DOD - HDBK-263, Electrostatic Discharge Control Handbook for protection of
electronic parts, assemblies, and equipment.

Schenck Process Group -1-
Safety notes
2 Safety notes
To avoid personal injury and material damage, follow the safety regulations stated below.
Also pay attention to:
▪ Safety instructions given in order-specific documentation.
▪ Safety instructions relating to mechanical components.
▪ Instructions and safety tips for parts manufactured by sub-suppliers or that are not part of Schenck's
scope of delivery.
When performing installation, commissioning and service work, observe all applicable codes of practice.
Use for the purpose intended

The measuring system with the mechanical components connected to it is only intended for weighing and
control applications directly associated with that. Any use beyond that is considered not intended.
Sources of danger
The measuring system does not generate any hazards during weighing operation if the system is properly
installed and put into service.
Using the measuring system might be dangerous if the system takes on contral applications or when the
material weighed is transported. Potential sources of danger would then be add-on equipment that the ma-
terial weighed is transported or metered in. In these cases, the measuring system may cause residual ha-
zards if untrained staff uses or operates it incorrectly..
This measuring system may be a component of a more complex system. The user is fully responsible for
overall plant safety.
Personnel
Only skilled persons may prepare, install, start-up, operate, maintain and service these systems.
Everyone doing work on the measuring system should read the safety instructions and be aware of and fol-
low the parts of the service manual applicable to them.
The operating company is responsible for instructing his operators to observe all regulations and instructions
given.
Changing parameters
The parameters dictate how the measuring system functions. Only personnel familiar with the device's mode
of operation may alter these parameters (e.g. after training by Schenck Process). Incorrectly set parameters
may cause injuries to persons or damage to the machine whenever user control systems are connected.
They can also adversely affect weighing operation.
Password
Parameters are protected by password from unauthorised changes. The measuring system operating com-
pany must ensure that the password is handled safely.

Safety notes
Acknowledging Event Messages

Error messages may be acknowledged only after the cause of the fault has been remedied.
Ensure that any connected peripheral devices are functioning correctly before acknowledging an event.
Check to see that any connected control systems are in safe state.
Service and maintenance

▪ Please follow all warning signs on the scale.
▪ The measuring system must be shut down before work is performed on mechanical equipment or peri-
pheral devices (control systems in particular). Take appropriate action to ensure that the measuring sys-
tem cannot be inadvertently restarted.
▪ Before performing work on the electrical equipment, disconnect the power supply (pull the plug).
▪ The devices may only be operated in the casings provided, as there would otherwise be a risk of coming
into contact with live parts.
Moisture and humidity

All of the parts of the scale (particularly electrical components) have to be protected from moisture and hu-
midity when the housing is open such as during service work. Beyond this, the protection classes of the
housing should be observed.
Design modifications
Schenck Process assumes no liability or guarantee for any design modifications made to the measuring
system or additional components fitted to it that were not supplied by Schenck Process. This particularly
applies to modifications, which have the potential to affect the operating safety of the measuring system.
Replacement of components
If parts must be replaced in the course of a repair, only original spare parts from Schenck Process may be
used. Using other spare parts renders the warranty invalid.
2.1 Signal Words
2.1.1 Signal Words for

for Safety Warnings
Potential dangers will always exist when working with technical devices. Dangers will arise if the machine
was incorrectly installed or commissioned or is operated by untrained personnel. The following signal words
indicate throughout this manual dangers that may arise when handling this machine.
DANGER
This signal word indicates a danger that can immediately cause the
most severe injuries up to and including death.
Follow all instructions to prevent this from occurring.

-4- Schenck Process Group
Safety notes
WARNING
This signal word indicates a danger that can cause serious injuries up
to and including death.
CAUTION
This signal word indicates a danger that can cause slight or medium
injuries.
2.1.2 Signal Words for Application Notes
Signal words for information on material damages and on the optimal use of the machine
STRICTLY OBSERVE
Signal word used to identify situations in which material or environ-
mental damage could occur.
HINT
Signal word used to identify information on using the product eco-
nomically and at an optimal level of efficiency.

Safety notes
2.2 Five Safety Rules of Electrical Engineering
These fives safety rules must be followed in the order shown before commencing work on electrical systems.
Once the work is finished, they are to be applied in reverse order.
DANGER
Electric shock from live components
Danger of life from electric shocks
– Take all possible precautions to ensure safety before commencing work
on live components. Observe, among other things, the following.
1. Disconnect the components.
2. Secure them against inadvertent restart.
3. Ensure that the components have been de-energized.
4. Above 1 KV: Earth the cables and bypass them.
5. Cover or shield adjacent, live components.
2.3 Damaged / Defective Electrical Components
DANGER
Electrified damaged or defective components
There is a danger of life from an electric shock.
– Always have qualified personnel ensure that the components are neither
damaged nor defective.
1. Damaged or defective electrical components must immediately be re-
placed or, if possible, repaired by qualified personnel.

Overview
3 Overview
This chapter explains the principle functions of the DISOCONT Tersus system used in conjunction with a
Stock coal feeder.
3.1 What is the DISOCONT Tersus/DT-

Tersus/DT-9?
The DISOCONT Tersus is a versatile family of modular weighing electronics for use with weighing and feed-
ing systems.
The DISOCONT Tersus performs all weighing and processing functions required for the measuring and feed-
ing of bulk solids. It is designed for continuous measuring and control tasks as well as discontinuous batch-
ing.
Used in conjunction with the specific application software for weighing and feeding tasks, the DISOCONT
Tersus can be used in the following industries:
▪ Power
▪ Steel
▪ Basic Materials
▪ Cement
▪ Food
▪ Chemical.
In connection with the corresponding mechanical equipment, the following systems are supported:
▪ Belt Scales
▪ Weigh Feeders
▪ Solids flow meters (chutes)
▪ Solids flow feeders
▪ Loss-in-weight, gain-in-weight feeders
▪ Mass flow meters (Coriolis meters)
▪ Mass flow feeders (Coriolis feeders)
▪ Filling systems.
The Stock DT-9 configuration of the DISOCONT Tersus is a modified version, optimized for feeding coal in
power plant environment. There are two different versions of the DT-9. One is a completely redesigned and
updated version that is used in new installations. The second one uses the same components and software
but has been optimized for use as an upgrade to existing Stock 8085, 196, and 196NT installations. This
version uses the 196NT connectors and mounting footprint.
VCU 20103 – Designed for new installations where backwards compatibility is not required. This version is
identified by the steel mounting frame and screw type electrical connectors. A Touch Screen HMI is always
used when a VCU 20103 is installed.
VCU 20104– Designed as a drop in replacement for the 196NT in existing installations. This version is identi-
fied by the brown Amp style electrical connectors. The VCU 20104 can be used with either a Touch Screen
HMI or with an existing 196NT display.

Overview
3.2 Definitions
The table below explains some basic terms used in this manual.
Abbreviation Meaning Explanation Unit
I Actual feed rate The actual amount of material Lbs/hr, Lbs/min, USTons/hr, Kg/hr, Kg/min or Metric
delivered per unit time Tons/hr
P Feedrate The desired amount of ma- Lbs/hr, Lbs/min, USTons/hr, Kg/hr, Kg/min or Metric
setpoint terial delivered per unit time Tons/hr
Z Totalized Weight of material delivered Lbs, US Tons, Kg or Metric tons
amount since last counter reset
V Belt speed Feeder belt speed Inches/sec, m/sec
Q Belt load Weight of material per unit of Lbs/inch, Kg/m
belt length.
QB Platform load Lbs, Kg
Y Controller mag- Output signal magnitude mA
nitude
Xd Deviation Difference between the actual %
feedrate and the feedrate
setpoint.
3.3 Measuring Principle

The belt weighing system is designed to continuously weigh the amount of material transported on the feed-
er belt. The actual weight of material transported is calculated by multiplying the feeder belt load, in lbs/inch,
times the feeder belt speed. The systems used to measure these two values are described below.
Belt Load
The feeder weight signal is generated by two load cells that support a single weigh roller. Two weigh span
rollers are located on each side of the weigh roller to accurately define the length of belt (and amount of coal)
being supported by the weigh roller.
Since the load cells only support half of the weight on the weigh span (each load cell supports 25 percent of
the total weight) the effective platform length (Leff) is calculated as:
Leff = Lg / 2
Leff = Effective platform length

Lg = Total platform length
The microprocessor computes the feeder belt load by repeatedly reading the voltage signal from each load
cell and converting the signal into a digital value (binary number) using an analog to digital (A/D) converter.
Each value is then compared to parameters stored in permanent memory to determine if the signal is within
acceptable limits, and if it is, it is stored for use. The same operation is then performed on the other load cell,
and the signals are compared to each other to test their validity. If the signals are determined to be invalid,
the feeder is switched to volumetric operation and the controller uses a simulated belt load calculated from
an historical average stored in memory. If the signals are determined to be valid, the two load cell signals are
summed, the tare is subtracted and the result is multiplied by a scaling factor based on the load cell data
specified in P04.01 LC Characteristic Value and P04.02 LC Rated Capacity to determine the nominal weight
of material on the belt. This nominal value is then multiplied by the three range correction factors (P10.03,
P10.04 and P10.05) to determine the actual weight (QB).

Overview
The belt load (Q) is computed from the total weight (QB) as follows:
Q = QB / Leff
Q = Belt load in kg/m

QB = Weight of load on platform in kg
Note: The 196NT parameter 10 Weigh Span Length is the full distance between the two weigh span rollers.
The DT-9 parameter P04.03 Effective Platform Length is half the distance between the two weigh span roll-
ers. For any given feeder, the value used by the DT-9 should be one half of the value used by the 196NT.
Belt Speed
During normal feeder operation, the belt speed is calculated from the motor RPM rather then being meas-
ured directly. The relation ship between motor speed and belt speed is determined during calibration and is
displayed as P10.02 Pulses per length.
Feedrate Control and Totals

The weigh and speed information is used to calculate the actual feedrate as shown.
Feedrate (I) = Belt load (Q) x Belt Speed (V)
The feeder control accepts a feedrate set point from the source selected using parameter P03.02 Feedrate
Setpoint . This signal is compared with a computed feedrate derived from measured weight and speed sig-
nals to generate the system error signal which is used to adjust the speed of the motor. Compensation for
system stability is provided in the software using parameters P11.01 P-Component KP and P11.02 I-
Component TN. These calculations are repeated periodically and at each iteration, the actual feedrate is
multiplied by the time interval to calculate the totalizer increment. Separate totals are kept for gravimetric and
volumetric operation.
3.4 Operating Modes - Remote

The Remote Operating Mode is provided for normal operation, with the feeder feeding coal under control of
the plant control system. The source for the Start/Stop signal is designated by P03.01Feeder Start and the
source for the feedrate setpoint is designated by P03.02 Feedrate Setpoint. Analog feedback signals are
generated based on the entries to parameter block 14 Analog Outputs. Digital feedback signals (relay out-
puts) are generated based on the entries to parameter block 16 Digital Outputs.
While in the Remote Operating Mode, the feeder can use one of three systems to generate the required belt
speed set point.

Overview
3.4.1 Gravimetric
Gravimetric Mode is the normal mode of operation. The feed rate is calculated using the belt speed and the
actual belt load, and is controlled by the feed rate demand signal supplied by the plant control system. Pa-
rameter P03.05 Maximum Feedrate, corresponds to the maximum demand signal and the minimum feed rate
is set by parameter P03.06 Minimum Feedrate. Parameter P02.05 Nominal Flow Rate Io should always
match parameter P03.05 Maximum Feedrate. The system can be set to produce an error if the demand sig-
nal is outside to normal range.
3.4.2 Volumetric
Volumetric Mode is used when an error is detected in the weighing system. The actual feed rate is calculated
using the belt speed and an assumed belt load based on the average value over the last several hours, and
is controlled by the feed rate demand signal supplied by the plant control system. Parameter P03.05 Maxi-
mum Feedrate, corresponds to the maximum demand signal and the minimum federate is set by parameter
P03.06 Minimum Feedrate. Parameter P02.05 Nominal Flow Rate Io should always match parameter P03.05
Maximum Feedrate. The system can be set to produce an error if the demand signal is outside to normal
range.
3.4.3 Volumetric Control

Volumetric Control Mode is a variation of the gravimetric mode that is used when the feeder weigh system is
working correctly but the material on belt switch indicates that the belt is empty. The displayed feedrate and
the customer feedback signal is still based on the actual material being fed and the gravimetric total is still
being incremented but the belt speed is determined as if the feeder were in volumetric mode. This mode is
used to prevent the feeder from running to maximum belt speed when material flow is lost.
3.5 Operating Modes – OFF/Maintenance

The OFF/Maintenance mode is similar to the 196NT LOCAL mode and is provided so that the feeder can be
isolated from the plant control system during startup, calibration and other maintenance operations. In this
operating mode, the plant start/stop and demand signals are ignored and feedback signals are not generat-
ed. The feeder must be in OFF/Maint mode before a system calibration can be performed. When the feeder
is operated in the OFF/Maint mode, the belt speed is set based on the value of parameter P02.16 Mainten-
ance Speed. This is an open loop signal calculated as a percentage of the full scale signal to the motor
speed control (see parameters P11.04 Lower Limit, P11.05 Upper Limit and P01.06 Controller Magnitude
Offset).

- 10 - Schenck Process Group
DT-9 Setup
4 DT-
DT-9 Setup
This section describes the startup process when a new feeder is installed or when an existing DT-9 is re-
placed.
CAUTION
Installing the DT-9 in a feeder that uses the Stock Load Cell Amplifier
Installing the DT-9 in a feeder that uses the Stock Load Cell Amplifier will
damage the DT-9. The old style Load Cell Amplifier must be replaced with
the new version before the DT-9 can be used.
CAUTION
DO NOT connect a normal Ethernet cable to X96 (red RJ45 connector).
This connector uses normally unused wires in the CAT 5 cable to provide
power to the touch screen display. Failure to follow this warning may result
in damage to the DT-9 or to the attached network device.
HINT
The weigh span is specified using parameter P04.03 Effective Platform
Length.
This parameter is the distance between the weigh roller and either one of
the weigh span rollers. This is one-half the value used by the 196NT, which
is the distance between the weigh span rollers.
4.1 Setup Notes

▪ This section is a general description of the feeder setup process. This process can be performed using
either the touch screen HMI or a PC loaded with the EasyServe software. Section Operation Using the
Touch Screen HMI [➙ 33] describes the Touch Screen HMI and Section Operation Using EasyServe
[➙ 41] describes EasyServe.
▪ Events (Error conditions) are usually defined using three parameters. The first, which is usually hidden
by default, defines the input signal that initiates the event, the second specifies the delay between the
time when the error is detected and the time when the event is generated, and the third, specifies the
type of event that is generated (A, W1, W2 or IG). In most cases, the Event (error) can be disabled by
setting the type of event to IG.
▪ The DT-9 has 15 digital inputs (DI 1 through DI 15) and 13 digital outputs (DO 1 through DO 13). Each is
assigned to a specific function, and wired to the appropriate external device. These assignments are hid-
den and should not be changed. See chapter ‚Default I/O Points’ for a list of the default assignments.
▪ The DT-9 has one analog input (AI 1) and two analog outputs (AO 1 and AO 2). AI 1 is normally used as
the customer demand signal, AO 1 is normally used to control the motor speed control and AO 2 is nor-
mally used as the customer feedback signal. These assignments are hidden and should not be changed.
▪ The DT-9 has four slots for auxiliary analog I/O cards (channels A10-A13). These channels are not nor-
mally used. Contact Stock engineering if special analog I/O signals are required.

Schenck Process Group - 11 -
DT-9 Setup
4.2 Startup and Functional

Functional Check
This procedure verifies that the feeder and its controls are operating properly, simulates feeder trip condi-
tions, and checks the principal input/output connections.
1. Apply power to the feeder.
2. Insure that the feeder is in OFF/Maint mode and that the touch screen HMI is set to the home screen.
3. Set the feeder parameters as described in section Setup Parameters [➙ 12].
4. Interpret event messages, if any, and correct faults.
5. Unbalance the load cells by engaging the calibration weight on one side of the weigh roller. The display
should indicate volumetric mode. Unbalance each load cell in order to check both sides, then remove the
calibration weight(s).
6. Press and maintain the Jog>> button to verify that belt travel is in the in correct direction.
7. Run the feeder in LOCAL mode by pressing the Run>> button. The feeder will operate at the mainten-
ance speed programmed in P02.16 Maintenance Speed. Check the motor speed for stability.
8. Run the feeder in LOCAL by pressing the Run>> button. Set the Belt Drive Motor (Run Enable) switch to
the STOP position. The feeder should stop and the display should show a IL01 Event: Run Disabled er-
ror message. Acknowledge the event and return the Belt Drive Motor switch to its normal position.
9. Stop the feeder and deflect the material-on-belt limit switch paddle to simulate a loaded belt. Run the
feeder in the LOCAL mode to verify that the feeder trips. If it does not, check the adjustment of the pad-
dle switch cams.
10. Check the event display or the event line on EasyServe. They should both show a WM12 Event: Coal on
Belt alarm message with a time stamp. Acknowledge the event and return the coal-on-belt paddle to its
normal position
11. Calibrate the feeder as described in section Calibration [➙ 15].
12. Align the analog inputs and outputs as described in section Analog Trim Function [➙ 21].
13. Hang the calibration weights. Produce or simulate a feeder start permissive. Check feedrate and feed-
back linearity by applying demand signals of 100, 75, 50, and 25 percent. Compare each demand signal
applied to the feedback signal output. Compare the demand feedrate setpoint (service value 4) with the
measured feed rate of the feeder for each signal.
14. Energize the feeder in the REMOTE mode and deflect the discharge pluggage alarm (or touch the dis-
charge pluggage sensor with a metal rod). After the preset delay in P15.10, the feeder should be de-
energized. If the feeder does not trip, check the adjustment of the cams for the paddle switch or the sen-
sitivity setting of the sensor according to the procedure in the original equipment manual.
15. Check the event display or the event line on EasyServe. They should both show a WM07 Event: Dis-
charge Pluggage alarm with a time stamp. Acknowledge the event and return the discharge switch to its
original state.
16. Return the feeder to REMOTE operation.
4.3 Setup Parameters

The microprocessor controller is tailored to specific feeders and customers needs by the setup parameters.
Feeder-specific physical dimensions must be entered as well as user-selectable display modes and set
points. These values are stored in permanent memory and are only entered once. See section Parameters
[➙ 51] for a complete list and description of the parameters.
Note: In any given application, the majority of the DT-9 parameters are either not used, or fixed by the de-
sign of the feeder and cabinet. These parameters can be viewed using EasyServe in expert mode (default
password 7353) but should not be changed.
The controllers will come preprogrammed from Stock Equipment Company but if changes are needed, there
are two ways to do this:
▪ Using EasyServe Software (See section Parameters [➙ 51])
▪ Using the Touch Screen HMI (See Section The 'Setup' Screen [➙ 35])

DT-9 Setup
4.3.1 Commonly Changed Parameters

The following is a list of parameters that are commonly changed during startup. Their values should be rec-
orded for future reference. See section Parameters [➙ 51] for a complete list and detailed descriptions.
P-No. P-Name Actual
The following parameters set the feedrate associated with a 100 % demand signal (usually 20 mA). They must
always be set to the same value. See project specific documentation for the correct value.
P02.05 Nominal Flow Rate Io
P03.05 Maximum Feedrate
The following parameter is the belt speed associated with the nominal (maximum) feedrate and the nominal
material density. It is calculated as:
P02.05 Nominal Flow Rate Io) / (300 X Nom. Density X P04.10 Load cross section
Inputs are in lbs/hour, lbs/cubic ft and square feet. Results are in inches/sec.
P02.06 Nominal Speed
The following parameter sets the minimum feedrate clamp. See project specific documentation for the correct
value.
P03.06 Minimum Feedrate
The following parameter selects the text string displayed on the top line of the touch screen HMI.
P02.03 Scale Name
The following parameters select the units and formats that are used to display the various feeder information on
the display.
P02.01 Language
P02.02 Units
P02.07 Display Formats
P02.08 Flow Rate Units
P02.09 Counter 1 Unit
The following parameter selects the demand signal to the motor speed control when the feeder is running in
local mode. It is normally set to 50 %.
P02.16 Maintenance Speed %ﾠﾠ
The following parameter specifies the length of belt that is supported by the load cells. It must be set to the dis-
tance between the first weigh span roller and the central weigh roller (one half the distance between the weigh
span rollers). See project specific documentation for the correct value.
P04.03 Effective Platform Length

DT-9 Setup
P-No. P-Name Actual
The following parameter specifies the characteristics of the motor tachometer. See project specific
documentation for the correct value.
P04.09 Tachometer: Pulses per Rev P/revﾠﾠ
The following parameter specifies the area under the leveling bar. See project specific documentation for the
correct value.
P04.10 Load cross section
P07.02 sets the maximum time between Belt Motion Monitor (BMM) pluses and P07.03 selects the type of event
that is generated when this limit is exceeded. Set P07.03 to IG if a BMM is not installed. See project specific
documentation for the correct values.
P07.02 Belt Motion Monitor Delay sﾠﾠ
P07.03 Event: Belt Motion Monitor A / W1 / W2 / IGﾠﾠ
The following parameter specifies the distance between the calibration probe bosses. See project specific
documentation for the correct value.
P10.01 Calibration Probe Span
The following parameter specifies the actual value of the calibration weigh. This value is stamped on the weight.
P10.08 Calibration Weight
The following parameters specify the cleanout conveyor duty cycle. Set P13.02 to zero to run the cleanout con-
veyor continuously.
P13.02 CleanOut ON Time Hoursﾠﾠ
P13.03 CleanOut OFF Time Hoursﾠﾠ
The following parameters control the ‘Loss of Material on Belt’ event. Setting P05.14 to A causes the feeder trip
(stop the feeder) when the coal on belt signal is lost during normal operation. Setting P05.14 to W1 or W2 will
produce a warning. P05.13 sets the delay between the time that the signal is lost and the time that the event is
generated (This is normally set to one second). Set P05.14 to IG to disable this feature.
P15.13 Loss of Flow Trip Delay
P15.14 Event: Loss of material A / W1 / W2 / IGﾠﾠ
The following parameters are used to control the Level/Temperature Sensor event. The Level/Temperature
Sensor input is normally connected to either a flow monitor in the downspout or a temperature switch at the
feeder discharge. Setting P15.21 to A causes the feeder trip (stop the feeder) when the coal flow monitor indi-
cates a loss of flow in the downspout. Setting P15.21 to W1 or W2 will produce a warning. P15.20 sets the delay
between the time that the signal is detected and the time that the event is generated. Set P15.20 to 100 lbs for a
quick response. Set P15.21 to IG to disable this feature. See project specific documentation for the correct va-
lue.
P15.20 Level/Temperatur Sensor Delay
P15.21 Event: Coal Flow A / W1 / W2 / IGﾠﾠ

DT-9 Setup
P-No. P-Name Actual
The following parameters specify the Ethernet communications address. The default values should not be
changed unless the DT-9 is connected to a local network.
P23.01 IP Address
P23.02 Net Mask
P23.03 Gateway
4.4 Calibration
The feeder should be calibrated at startup, after one month of initial operation and every six months there
after. Calibration should also be performed following a weigh roller adjustment or replacement of the belt, the
CPU board, or a load cell module. The controller should also be calibrated after the controller firmware is
updated or a Load Default Values operation is performed. Calibration is accomplished in two separate steps.
Step one of calibration consists of the elimination of system tare, which includes the weight of the weigh
roller, load cell support assembly, and the feeder belt. It also involves measuring belt speed and its relation-
ship to motor speed. Step two calibrates the load cell output with a known weight.
Cancellation of feeder tare is performed by measuring the average weigh system output over exactly two belt
revolutions (eight tape passes) and then subtracting this amount from the total weight measurement. When
the belt is running empty, it produces a zero average contribution to the totalized weight. In normal operation,
the average tare is automatically subtracted from the gross weight of the belt. Therefore, only the material
weight on the belt is reflected as totalized weight.
While the empty belt is being weighed, the belt speed is also being accurately measured. This is done by
measuring the time it takes a retro-reflective marker, attached to the belt, to travel between two fixed points
on the feeder body. This parameter is measured eight times to determine repeatability and to compensate
for variations in belt thickness. From this data, the belt speed is calculated and the relationship between belt
speed and motor speed is established. The feeder operates with zero belt slippage. Therefore, the ratio of
belt speed to average motor speed is constant. This ratio is stored in memory and is used to determine the
belt speed for any motor speed.
The span of the weighing system is set after the tare has been measured. A known weight is applied to the
weigh roller and the average output over exactly two belt revolutions (eight tape passes) is measured. This
calibrated span factor is stored in memory and used to accurately determine the value of the weight of the
material on the belt.
Note: The DT-9 parameter P04.03 Effective Platform Length is the distance from either weigh span roller to
the central weigh roller, which is supported by the load cell. This is half the distance between the two weigh
span rollers. For any given feeder, the value used by the DT-9 should be one half of the value used by the
196NT.

DT-9 Setup
4.4.1 Performing Calibrations

The calibration process consists of the following three steps.
1. Weigh Roller Adjustment.
2. Basic (Cal 1) – Belt speed and tare calibration.
3. Span (Cal 2) – Belt Speed and span calibration.
Note: At least one Basic (Cal 1) must be performed prior to performing a Span (Cal 2).
The following special calibration processes can be preformed for testing or special maintenance operations,
but are not normally required.
1. TC: Span calibration - Chain test calibration.
2. LB: Pulses / Belt - Belt speed calibration.
3. TA: Tare - Tare calibration.
Note: Calibration is considered a local operation. No totalization takes place and analog feedback signals
are set to minimum.
4.4.2 Weigh Roller Adjustment

For the feeder to weigh accurately, the central weigh roller must be aligned with the weigh span rollers within
0.002 inch (0.05 mm). Refer to Fig.
Note: The parts shown may differ from those that actually shipped. This figure is to be used as a
general guideline.
Weigh Roller Adjustment Procedure
1. Mount the calibration weight on both load cells.
2. Insert the checking bars (A2451-1) through the discharge end access door of the feeder, adjacent to the
sides of the belt, and with their machined surfaces resting on the weigh span and weigh rollers.
3. Beginning on either side, insert a 0.005 in. shim between each of the three rollers and the machined
surface of the checking bar (three places).
Fig. 1: Weigh Roller Adjustment

DT-9 Setup
1 Weigh Roller 6 Adjustment Block
2 .005 SHIM 7 Plug
3 Checking Bar 8 Jam Nut
4 Belt 9 Drag Link
5 Load Cell
1. Loosen the jam nut, and then turn the adjustment block to lower the weigh roller.
2. Slowly turn the adjustment block to raise the weigh roller until the shim is touching both checking bar and
weigh roller (slip fit). Tighten the jam nut.
3. Similarly, adjust the weigh roller on the opposite side of the feeder.
4. Remove the checking bars.
5. Remove the calibration weights.
6. The feeder must be recalibrated after weigh roller adjustment. (See procedure on next page.)
4.4.3 Basic (CAL 1)

This operation measures the tare factor and the belt speed factor and updates the following parameters.
▪ P10.02 Pulses per length
▪ P10.10 Basic Tare
▪ P10.11 Belt Circuit No.
Note: The calibration results are not saved to the parameter table until the operator accepts them buy press-
ing <Apply> in EasyServe, <SAVE> on the (optional) Touch Screen HMI or <ENTER> on the 196NT display.
Requirements:
▪ The weigh span must be level prior calibration. If the weigh roller height has been adjusted, a complete
calibration (Basic (Cal 1) and Span (Cal 2)) must be performed.
▪ The calibration probes must be installed and in the correct location.
– Cal probe A is located closer to the feeder inlet.
– De-energize the DT-9 before installing the probes.
▪ Four retro-reflective tape clips must be installed on the belt.
– The tape clips must be farther apart than the distance between the cal probes or a Probe Error will
be generated and the calibration will not complete.
– Four tape clips are normally used but two can be used if the feeder is very shot or eight can be used
if the feeder is very long or slow. If two tape clips are used, the feeder will be calibrated over four belt
revolutions, instead of two, and P10.11 Belt Circuit No. will be twice the correct value. If eight tape
clips are used, the feeder will be calibrated over one belt revolution and P10.11 Belt Circuit No. will
be half the correct value.
▪ The feeder must NOT be in volumetric mode.
▪ The feeder must be in OFF/Maint mode.
▪ The feeder belt must be empty.
▪ The calibration weights must NOT be installed.
Calibration Procedure:
Before starting the calibration, record the values of parameters P10.02 Pulses per length and P10.10 Basic
Tare
1. These will be used later to verify that the calibration results are consistent.
2. If the calibration is being performed using EasyServe, navigate to the calibration window using the Tools
| Calibration Programs menu items. If the (optional) touch screen HMI is being used, first log in, then go
to the calibration display by pressing the <Setup> and <Calibration> buttons.
3. Select Basic (Cal 1)

DT-9 Setup
4. Initiate the Basic (Cal 1) calibration process by pressing the <Start> button in EasyServe or the (optional)
Touch Screen HMI, or the <CAL 1> button on the 196NT display.
5. The feeder will begin to run and go through a stabilization process.
– The motor will first run at a one-half the value specified in P02.16 Maintenance Speed, then at the full
value of P02.16.
6. After Stabilizing, the feeder will go through eight tape passes. The DT-9 will display the pass number and
tachometer pulses on the screen.
7. Upon completion of the calibration four values will be displayed on the screen:
– Deviation (Variation between belt speed measurements)
– Belt Circuit No (P10.11)
– Basic Tare (P10.10)
– Pulses per Length Value (P10.02).
8. After successful completion, the screen will prompt you to either save or cancel the calibration values.
Note: If the calibration results in bad values, correct any mechanical issues and run the calibration pro-
gram again.
9. Press the <SAVE>, < ENTER> or <Apply> button to store the new calibration values, or the <EXIT> or
<Cancel> button to abort the calibration leaving the parameters unchanged.
10. After the calibration has been performed, verify that the results are consistent by comparing the latest
values of P10.02 and P10.10 to the previous values (Recorded in step 1). Calculate the percent change
using the formula [100 x (new value - old value) / (new value)]. If the result is greater then 0.25 %, check
for mechanical errors in the weigh system and repeat the calibration.
4.4.4 Span (CAL 2)

This operation measures the load cell span factor and the belt speed factor, and updates the following para-
meters.
▪ P10.03 Range Correction TW
▪ P10.11 Belt Circuit No.
Requirements:
▪ The calibration probes must be installed and in the correct location.
– Cal probe A is located closer to the feeder inlet.
– De-energize the DT-9 before installing the probes.
▪ Four retro-reflective tape clips must be installed on the belt
– The tape clips must be farther apart than the distance between the cal probes or a Probe Error will
be generated and the calibration will not complete.
– Four tape clips are normally used but two can be used if the feeder is very shot or eight can be used
if the feeder is very long or slow. If two tape clips are used, the feeder will be calibrated over four belt
revolutions, instead of two, and P10.11 Belt Circuit No. will be twice the correct value. If eight tape
clips are used, the feeder will be calibrated over one belt revolution and P10.11 Belt Circuit No. will
be half the correct value.
▪ A Basic (Cal 1) had been performed.
▪ Enter Parameter P10.08 Calibration Weight. Ensure that the value entered matches the total value
stamped on the calibration weight(s).
▪ Mount the calibration weight(s) on the load cells.

DT-9 Setup
1. Before starting the calibration, record the value of parameters P10.02 Pulses per length and P10.03
Range Correction TW. These will be used later to verify that the calibration results are consistent.
3. Select Span (Cal 2)
4. Initiate the Span (Cal 2) calibration process by pressing the <Start> button in EasyServe or the (optional)
Touch Screen HMI, or the <CAL 2> button on the 196NT display.
5. The screen will prompt to add the calibration weight. The top line of the display will show the value en-
tered in P10.08 and the bottom line show what the load cells are measuring based on the current calibra-
tion parameters. Press the <ENTER> or <Start> button to proceed with calibration.
6. The feeder will begin to run and go through a stabilization process
– The motor will run at the value specified in P02.16 Maintenance Speed.
7. After Stabilizing the feeder will go through eight tape passes
– The pass number and tachometer pulses will be displayed on the screen
8. Upon completion of the calibration, four values will be displayed on the screen.
– Deviation (Variation between belt speed measurements)
– Belt Circuit No (P10.11)
– Range Correction TW (P10.03)
– Pulses per length. Value (P10.02)
gram again.
values of P10.02 and P10.03 to the previous values (Recorded in step 1). Calculate the percent change
using the formula [100 x (new value - old value) / (new value)]. If the result is greater then 0.25 %, check
for mechanical errors in the weigh system and repeat the calibration.
4.4.5 TC:
TC: Span Calibration
This operation performs a chain calibration using the values in P10.07 Simulation Travel (Belt Rev.) and
P10.09 Test Chain Weight. The results are used to update the following parameter.
▪ P10.04 Range Correction TC.
Note: The calibration probes are not used during this operation and do not need to be installed.
Requirements:
▪ The calibrated test chains must be installed.

DT-9 Setup
1. Before starting the calibration, record the value of parameter P10.04 Range Correction TC. This will be
used later to verify that the calibration results are consistent.
3. Select TC: Span Calibration.
4. Initiate the TC: Span Calibration process by pressing the <Start> button in EasyServe or the (optional)
Touch Screen HMI. This process cannot be performed using the 196NT display.
5. The screen will prompt to add the calibration weight (test chain). The top line of the display will show the
value entered in P10.09 and the bottom line show what the load cells are measuring based on the cur-
rent calibration parameters. Press the <Start> button to proceed with calibration.
– The motor will run at the value specified in P02.16 Maintenance Speed.
7. After Stabilizing the feeder will run for the number of belt revolutions specified in P10.07.
– The percentage complete will be displayed on the screen
8. Upon completion of the calibration, four values will be displayed on the screen.
– TC: Ready (Simulated weight delivered)
– Range Correction TC (P10.04)
gram again.
value of P10.04 to the previous value (Recorded in step 1). Calculate the percent change using the for-
mula [100 x (new value - old value) / (new value)]. If the result is greater then 0.25 %, check for mechan-
ical errors in the weigh system and repeat the calibration.
4.4.6 LB: Pulses per Belt

The LB: Pulses per Belt calibration process is not intended for use in coal feeder applications and should not
normally be preformed.
4.4.7 TA: Tare

This operation measures the weight of the empty belt (tare factor) for a period of time based on the value of
P10.11 Belt Circuit No. times P10.07 Simulation Travel (Belt Rev.), and updates the following parameter.
Note: The calibration probes are not used during this operation and do not need to be installed.
Requirements:
▪ The calibration weights must NOT be installed.

DT-9 Setup
1. Before starting the calibration, record the value of parameter P10.10 Basic Tare. This will be used later to
verify that the calibration results are consistent.
3. Select TA: Tare calibration.
4. Initiate the TA: Tare calibration process by pressing the <Start> button in EasyServe or the (optional)
Touch Screen HMI. This process cannot be performed using the 196NT display.
– Run the motor at the value specified in P02.16 Maintenance Speed.
6. After Stabilizing, the feeder will run for the specified time (P10.07 times P10.11). The DT-9 will display
the percent completion and the current tare value as a percentage of the rated belt load. The nominal
belt load is defined as the nominal flow rate divided by the nominal belt speed.
7. Upon completion of the calibration two values will be displayed on the screen:
– Deviation – Percent deviation between the new tare value and the previous value.
– Tare – Tare value as a percentage of the nominal belt load.
gram again.
value of P10.10 to the previous value (Recorded in step 1). Calculate the percent change using the for-
mula [100 x (new value - old value) / (new value)]. If the result is greater then 0.25 %, check for mechan-
ical errors in the weigh system and repeat the calibration.
4.5 Analog Trim Function

The feeder controls respond to a feed rate demand signal and return isolated analog feedback signals.
When the input and output modules associated with these signals are used with the plant’s control system,
they must be adjusted prior to operating the feeder under remote control. To perform this procedure, Stock
Equipment Company recommends the Fluke Model 87 Digital Multimeter or equivalent. The DC accuracy for
milliamps should be ±0.2 % and the DC accuracy for voltage should be ±0.1 % plus 1 digit. It also must have
a 4½ digit high-resolution mode.
▪ Setting analog trim values using the touch screen HMI (See section Operation Using the Touch Screen
HMI [➙ 33])
▪ Setting analog trim values using EasyServe (See section Operation Using EasyServe [➙ 41])
Note: The plant combustion control system is the preferred source of the demand signal. This will precisely
align the feeder to the control system.
The DT-9 has one built in analog input (4 - 20 mA or 0 – 10 VDC) and two built in analog outputs (4 - 20 mA
only). These I/O channels are described below.
1. AI 1: Connected to wires SIG+ & SIG- (X6-3, X6-4 or X6-3, X6-5). This input is normally used for the
customer demand signal. The value in P03.02 Feedrate Setpoint (normally hidden) should be set to AI 1.
2. AO 1: Connected to wires 142, 143 & 144 (X6-6 and X6-7). This output is normally used for the motor
speed control (VFD). The value in P11.03 AO: Motor Speed Control should be set to AO 1.
3. AO 2: Connected to wires 139, 140 & 141 (X6-8 and X6-9). This output is normally used for the customer
feedback signal. The value in P14.04 AO: Actual Flow Rate should be set to AO 2.

DT-9 Setup
In addition to the built in analog channels, there are four slots in which analog I/O cards can be installed.
Parameter group 1 is used to assign each slot to an analog I/O channel (AI 2 through AI 5 or AO 3 through
AO 6). Slots can be either input or output, depending on the type of card installed. Each card is individually
isolated.
1. A10: Connected to terminal blocks X12-1 and X12-2. Can be assigned to AI 2 or AO 3.
4.6 Belt Monitoring

The DISOCONT Tersus has an expanded belt monitor integrated into it that monitors belt drift and slippage.
Monitoring is activated using parameter P07.05 'BIC Active'. Monitoring may only be activated if the conveyor
is equipped with a belt with integrated triangular markings and if the sensor has been installed.
Additionally, differences in weight across the belt, unavoidable despite its high quality, can be identified over
one belt circuit and be compensated for (BIC).
Belt-drift switches feed to inputs used for the identification of external events. Furthermore, belt motion can
be monitored using additional (1 or 2) sensors (parameter group '2-Sensor Slip').
4.6.1 Belt Drift Monitoring

The sensor records the position relative to the feeder frame of the triangles integrated into the belt. The
result is presented after one complete belt circuit.
Fig. 2: Principle of belt-drift monitoring
The departure of the course of the belt from the neutral position can be shown in the operating area Setup.

DT-9 Setup
Activating the monitoring

Set the relevant parameters:
Parameter Value and details
P07.04 Defines the input channel used to connect the sensor that monitors the triangle in the belt
P07.05 YES: activate belt drift monitoring, slippage monitoring and BIC via position sensors and the trian-
gles in the belt
P07.08 Defines system behavior if the sensor and the triangles identify belt slippage.
P07.09
P07.10 The length L of the triangle, measured in the direction of belt motion (value is given in the scales
data sheet), as per the diagram.
The factory defaults are suitable for most situations.
P07.11 The width W of the triangle, measured transverse to the direction of belt motion (value is given in
the scales data sheet), as per the diagram.
P07.12 Measured value for the neutral position relative to the feeder frame. Upon commissioning, the
sensor must be set such that the display for deviation from the neutral position indicates zero.
Small deviations can be adjusted later via parameters.
P07.14 - P07.18 Tolerance thresholds and reactions to events belt-drift (advance warning) and belt-drift (critical
condition).
Tab. 1 : Parameter for BIC and for belt motion monitoring

Procedure to be followed
Step Task
1 Enter the parameters as per the list given above

2 Set the scales so that the belt runs centered.
3 Execute the adjustment program 'LB: Pulses/Belt' and use the result after two complete belt circuits.
4 Set the sensor relative to the belt so that the course indicator shows zero. Small deviations can be ad-
justed via P21.01.
For example:
For P21.01 = 0, belt-drift display = 0.2
For P21.01 = -0.2, belt-drift display = 0
5 By altering the value of P21.01, belt drift can be simulated and the system's reaction to this condition can
be observed.
Set P21.01 back to its original value after the test.
Tab. 2 : Sequence for adjustment and commissioning
4.6.2 Belt Influence Compensation (BIC)

The automatic belt influence compensation (BIC = Belt Influence Ccompensation) monitors and corrects the
influence of the belt on the material weight measurement. As with belt monitoring, it requires a sensor and a
marking in the belt. BIC improves feed consistency and batch accuracy, if batch mode is preset.
For the initial commissioning, we recommend switching BIC off (P07.05 = NO). The belt-drift monitoring
[➙ 22] must be activated to enable this function.
After commissioning, BIC can be activated once normal bulk material conditions have been established on
the belt (P07.05 = YES). The parameters for the belt drift monitoring must have been set. The BIC will have
measured the belt influence after around 10 belt circuits and will be able to correct the weight value accor-
dingly. It does not require setting.

DT-9 Setup
4.6.3 Belt Slippage Monitoring

Belt slippage is defined as the difference between the speed of the belt as set by the head pulley and the
actual speed of the belt. Belt slippage can result from an excessively high removal force on the bulk material
from the hopper, from soiling of the drive roller or from excessively low belt tension. Slippage influences di-
rectly measuring and feeding accuracy, as the measured value for belt speed is calculated using the rota-
tional speed of the motor.
4.6.3.1 Monitoring Standstill after Startup

A carrying idler or the guide pulley is equipped with an impulse sensor. Standstill monitoring can only be
used if the feeder is run with a minimum feed rate setpoint. If the belt can be run with a feed rate of zero, a
different manner of belt slippage monitoring must be implemented if it is required.
After a short waiting period after the feeder is switched on, the signal sent to the input channel defined in
P16.23 is evaluated. If this signal transmits no impulse within the time defined by P07.02, it will be assumed
that the belt is not moving. In this case the corresponding event is triggered (P07.03).
Belt slippage of only a few percent cannot be detected using this method.
4.6.3.2 Belt Slippage with Belt Marking

If using a belt with a belt marking, this marking can be used to measure belt motion. The comparison be-
tween the belt motion expected as a result of the head pulley motion and the distance measured across the
duration of two belt marking measurements allows the slippage to be detected with high accuracy. This me-
thod also allows errors in the belt speed to be identified that result from soiling of the drive roller.
However, this method can only produce results after one complete belt circuit. A different method must be
used if more rapid identification is required.
In order to harness this method, the belt drift monitoring [➙ 22], the belt slippage threshold (in P07.07) and
the reaction to the event (in P07.08 and P07.09) must be set.

DT-9 Setup
4.6.3.3 Two-
Two-Sensor Belt Slippage Monitoring
Two sensors whose signals supply information on the belt speed are required for this form of belt slippage
monitoring. A comparison of both signals gives information on the reliability of each signal and the belt slip-
page between both measuring points. The information given by the impulse tachometer on the motor can be
used for one of the signals, and can also be used for the feed rate calculation. A second signal is generated
by a pulse sensor on a carrying idler or guide pulley. The ratio of the speeds measured by the two sensor
signals gives a measured value for belt slippage.
Setting the two-sensor belt slippage monitoring
Parameter Setting
P18.01 = YES activates the monitoring system

P18.02 Select the source for the first speed signal
Speed: the main tacho on the belt drive is used
DIxx: an additional sensor is used
P18.04 Characteristic value of the first sensor in impulses per section
P18.05 Signal input for the second measuring channel
P18.06 Characteristic value of the second sensor in impulses per section
P18.07 Tolerance threshold level for the difference of the speed measured across both measuring
channels in relation to the actual speed.
P18.08 Definition of behavior if slippage above the permissible threshold is identified.
P18.09
Tab. 3 : Setting and adjusting the two-sensor belt slippage monitoring

Operating and Control Access
5 Operating and Control Access

DISOCONT Tersus can be operated using the following approaches:
Operating source Operation under normal Service work Operating interface

circumstances model
VHM operating panel X X VHM touch
(fixed)
VHM operating panel X VHM touch
(mobile per cable or wireless)
Fieldbus from the control computer X (X) Control computer
Web browser via PC X VHM with PC keyboard
EasyServe PC software X EasyServe
Tab. 4 : Operating access
DANGER
Feeding can be started via the operating panel. This switches on
drives and bulk material may flow. The operator must ensure that no
damage can be caused by beginning feeding before doing so.
Dangerous situations may arise if communication is interrupted while
the device is being operated via a non-permanent line (pluggable ca-
ble, wireless). Therefore, such methods of accessing control should
be reserved for service work only.
5.1 Connection between a VHM Operating Panel and a Scales Controller

(VCU)
After a loss of power at the operating panel, the console will try automatically to reconnect to the scales with
which it was communicating before the power failure after a specific, adjustable period of time. During this
time the 'Feeder' page can again be selected to select a different scale.
If a data connection exists and communication with a different scales is to be activated, the existing connec-
tion must first be closed. This can be done after logging on as a privileged user with the key '<->Scale'.
An error message is displayed on the screen if a connection is lost. If the connection cannot be re-
established after several attempts, the operating panel will open the configuration dialog.
The selection of a scales is shown in the following chapters, depending on the medium of communication.

5.1.1 Connection via Ethernet Cable

Precondition: The VHM operating panel must be connected to the ethernet network to which the control unit
VCU is also connected. The hardware requirements are described in the system manual BV-H2406.
The channel 'Ethernet' must be selected in the operating panel configuration (Configuring the Communica-
tion Path (Com)).
Once the first connection has been made, the operating panel searches for VCU controllers in the network
and displays the outcome on the page 'Feeder'. A scales can be selected and a data connection to it estab-
lished by pressing the corresponding key.
5.1.2 Connection via Bluetooth

Preconditions: A bluetooth adapter must be connected both to the operating panel and the scales. The
scales must be within range. The hardware requirements are described in the system manual BV-H2406.
The channel 'Bluetooth' must be selected in the operating panel configuration (Configuring the Communica-
tion Path (Com)).
Once the communication path has been selected, the console will search for bluetooth adapters within
range. As well as controller VCUs, other bluetooth adapters can be located and displayed. The outcome is
shown on the page „Feeder“.
Note: A complete search for all bluetooth adapters can take several seconds. A progress indicator is dis-
played during the search. Bluetooth adapters will also be shown to which no connection can be established,
either because they are not DISOCONT Tersus controllers or because a different data connection already
exists.
Scales can be selected and a data connection to them established by pressing the corresponding key. It may
take several seconds before a connection is established. The respective status will be shown in the header
of the operating panel while a connection is being established.
Note: Connection can be established to one scales only, assuming the scales are not already connected to
another bluetooth adapter. The other connection may first need to be closed. If there is another connection,
the operating panel will try constantly to connect.
If bluetooth is used, the scales to whose bluetooth adapter a connection has been established is the only
scales with which communication can be made. The ethernet destination address may not be changed in the
VHM.
5.1.3 Connection via RS-

RS-485
Preconditions: Operating panel and controller must be part of the same RS 485 network. The hardware
requirements are described in the system manual BV-H2406.
The channel 'RS 485' must be selected in the operating panel configuration (Configuring the Communication
Path (Com)).
Once the communication path has been selected the operating panel will switch to the 'Feeder' page, on
which the VCU address can be set. The last digits of the ethernet address (P25.07) for scales control are re-
used for addressing at the RS -485 bus.
The system performs a check of the communication path once the address has been entered. If communica-
tion can be established under the address entered, this is indicated by a green marking beside the address
number. Otherwise this marking will be red.
Communication with the scales can be established with the key 'Con.Scale'.
Note: The operating panel is the master at the bus. Therefore only one operating panel can be connected to
the bus at any one time.

5.2 Connecting a PC with EasyServe to a Scales Controller (VCU)
5.2.1 Connection
Connection via Ethernet
If the connection is to be established by cable the connection should be made using ethernet.
Preconditions: The EasyServe PC is connected with an ethernet cable to the scales network.
Note: Use either an uncoded VCU socket or, if using a red-coded socket, use a special cable (yellow) for the
connection.
The EasyServe address must be in the same ethernet subnetwork as the scales' address. If necessary the
address can be changed by EasyServe in the scanner. A scales can also be addressed using a router if the
network has already been configured. The scales address would then be entered manually, not using the
scanner. The PC must then have an IP address in the directly connected subnetwork.
The EasyServe menu item 'Connection | MODBUS/TCP (Scanner)' is the easiest way to select the address.
This will display all of the scales available in the network. The scales' connection parameters can be altered
and a connection to the scales made here.
If the scales is connected to a different subnetwork, it can be selected manually using 'Connection |
MODBUS/TCP (Enter IP)' and etnering the IP address of the scales.
5.2.2 Connection via RS-

RS-232
RS-232 is used to make a connection in special cases only, e.g. when no connection can be made via
ethernet. It may be necessary to establish a connection via RS-232 if there is a power failure to a device
while a software program is being loaded into it in order to re-load the software.
Precondition: The PC serial interface (COM) is connected by cable to VCU socket X97. For details see the
system manual BV-H2406.
Use the EasyServe menu item 'Connection | Serial...' to connect.
The only permissible transfer format is 38400 baud, 8-O-1. Select the PC COM port and the address of the
scales. The is stored in scales parameter P21.01 Own Address.
Note: A software update can take up to 20 minutes using the RS-232 interface. Other functions work slower
than they would if the connection was made using Ethernet.
5.2.3 Connection via WLAN

We recommend using WLAN to make a wireless connection to a scales.
Preconditions: The scales have been connected with a WLAN modem to the Ethernet. The WLAN modem
has been configuered as an access point and its ethernet address is in the same subnetwork as the scales.
The PC also has a WLAN modem, and the IP address of the PC is in the same network as the scales' IP
address.
In general the WLAN modem is configured using a browser before use. This configuration is described in the
modem's user manual.
The WLAN in the PC is activated and the WLAN access point selected. Once the connection to the WLAN
access point has been made, all of the functions can be accessed on the PC as they would if an ethernet
connection were made by cable.

5.2.4 Connection via Bluetooth

A connection is more complicated to establish via bluetooth than via WLAN. The only scales that can be
accessed is the one to whose bluetooth adapter the connection was established.
Preconditions: Scales and PC are equipped with bluetooth adapters.
Establishing a connection:
1 Start the bluetooth adapter configuration program in the PC.

2 Select the desired scales from the list of adapters displayed.
Note: It will be necessary to restart the PC if the name of the scales was changed in order to dis-
play the changed name.
3 Begin establishing a connection with the bluetooth adapter. Password: 7353.
4 The PC user must enter a PAN once the connection to the bluetooth adapter has been established.
5 The address of the bluetooth scales is one number lower than the scales' IP-subnetwork set by
parameter. The PC address must be in the same subnetwork.
6 The scales can now be selected using the scanner or by means of a direct address input. Other
scales in the network cannot be addressed.
5.3 Connection between a Web Browser and a VCU Scales Controller

Preconditions: The PC has an ethernet connection to the VCU. Java is installed on the PC and can be
started. Temporary file storage may not be activated in Java as this can cause erroneous status messages
to occur.
Establishing the connection: The URL of the operator interface homepage must be entered into the
browser address line. This URL arises as follows:
< Adresse>/hmi/start_<Skalierung>x.html
Address: VCU IP address
Scaling: size of the display on the screen. The values 2, 3 or 4 can be entered.
Example: http://192.168.240.1/hmi/start_2x.html
The user interface in the browser corresponds largely to the display on the VHM operating panel with the
exception of the field in which a different scales can be selected, which is not available. The configuration
dialogs for the VHM operating panel itself are also not available. Keyboard and mouse are used for operation
so the entry keyboard is not shown on the screen.

5.4 Web Server in the Scales Controller VCU

The controller comes with a web server that opens a scales 'homepage'. This homepage is available in Eng-
lish only.
Preconditions: The PC has an ethernet connection to the VCU.
Establishing the connection: The IP address of the controller must be entered into the browser address
line.
Various data from the controller can be called up in the left-hand navigation bar.
Navigation entry Function
HMI_2x Open at a different scale the same controller interface as is in the operating panel. Also
refer to: Connection between a Web Browser and a VCU Scales Controller [➙ 30]
HMI_3x
HMI_4x
Events Most recent stored events (alarms, warnings, etc.)

Parameter changes Most recent parameter alterations
Command Log List of certain commands, e.g. start / stop
Totalizer hourly Table of hourly-saved totalizing integrators / counters. The values can also be viewed on
the operating panel VHM.
The minute after the full hour at which the saving occurs can be set in P20.01.
Totalizer daily Table of daily-saved totalizing integrators / counters.
The time after 00:00 at which the saving occurs can be set in P20.02.
Tab. 5 : Functions available on the controller web page

Memory depth is approx. 1,000 entries. All entries are recorded with the entry time. The table is refreshed
only when it is called up. The values can be exported into a PC file for analysis with standard programs using
select-copy-paste.

Operation Using the Touch Screen HMI
6 Operation Using the Touch Screen HMI

This chapter describes control of the DT-9 using the Touch Screen HMI (Human-Machine Interface).
Notes:
1. The following values and settings remain stored after power failure:
– Counter readings
– Parameter settings
– Setpoints
– Service values
– Counter pulses pending.
2. This manual uses the abbreviations "[Button Name...] button", e.g. [HOME] button, to describe the but-
tons displayed on the touch screen HMI.
3. Text entry fields on the HMI are indicated by a white box surrounded by a gray rectangle. To enter text,
tap the desired text entry field to select it. A keyboard will appear on the screen. When you have finished
entering text, press the [OK] button to save your changes and exit the keyboard. To exit the keyboard
without saving changes, press the [EXIT] button.
4. In the event of a power failure while the feeder was running in remote mode, the system will restart in
remote mode and, if the running contact is active, continue to feed coal.
6.1 Initial Configuration

When the DT-9 is first powered up, the HMI will automatically log in to the connected DT-9 controller. In or-
der to change the settings of the HMI itself, it is necessary to log out of the DT-9 and log into the HMI via the
following steps:
1. From the ‘Home” screen, press the [Login] button and enter the DT-9 password (the default is ”7353”).
The “Home” screen will reappear and the [Login] button will change to [Logout] to indicate that you have
successfully logged in to the DT-9.
2. Press the [Sel. Scale] button. A prompt will appear asking if you really want to exit the scale. Press
[YES].
3. The main HMI configuration screen will now appear. A list of available DT-9 controllers on the local sub-
net will be displayed on the upper left portion of the screen, and the main function buttons will be dis-
played along the right edge. The display function buttons are described in the following subsections.
Most of the function buttons will be grayed out and unavailable. To gain full access, press the [Login] but-
ton and enter the HMI password (the default is ‘”7353”). Press the [Start] button to return to the main HMI
configuration screen, or press the [Change Password] button to change the display password. All of the
function buttons will now be available, indicating that you have successfully logged in to the HMI.
6.1.1 The 'Network' Screen

Press the [VHM Addr.] button to change the network settings of the HMI. This screen allows you to set the IP
Address, Subnet, and Gateway of the HMI. These settings should be obtained from your network administra-
tor. Press the [Save] button to save any changes you have made to these settings before exiting.
6.1.2 The 'Display Settings' Screen

Press the [Display] button to adjust the HMI display settings. The “Inactivity Timeout” parameter defines the
length of time that the HMI will remain at full brightness after being touched before entering “Sleep Mode”
and dimming the display. The “Working Brightness” parameter adjusts the brightness of the display during
normal operation, and the “Sleeping Brightness” parameter adjusts the brightness of the display during
“Sleep Mode”. Press the [Save] button to save any changes you have made to these settings before exiting.

6.1.3 The 'Feeder' Screen

Press the [Feeder] button to select the DT-9 controller that the HMI will connect to. A list of all available DT-9
controllers on the local subnet will be displayed, and the selected controller will be indicated with a check
mark. To connect to a different DT-9, press the check box next to the desired controller and then press the
[Select] button. The HMI will then connect to the new DT-9 the next time it is power cycled or when the [Con.
Scale] button is pressed. To rescan the local subnet, press the [Scan] button.
6.1.4 The 'Configuration' Screen

Press the [Config] button to adjust the networking options of the HMI. The “URL of start page” parameter
defines the start page of the DT-9’s embedded web server. The “Start timeout in seconds” parameter defines
the amount of time that the HMI will attempt to connect to the attached DT-9 before defaulting to the HMI
configuration screen.
6.1.5 The 'Communication' Screen

Press the [Com] button to change the method by which the HMI will communicate with an attached DT-9
controller. The available options are “Ethernet”, “Bluetooth”, and “RS485”. The factory default is “Ethernet”,
and this should not be changed.
6.1.6 The 'Calibration' Screen

Press the [Calibration] button and follow the on-screen prompts to calibrate the touch screen.
6.1.7 Exiting HMI Configuration

Press the [Con. Scale] button to exit the HMI calibration screen and return to the DT-9 “Home” screen.
6.2 Display Functions
6.2.1 The 'Home' Screen

The Home screen is the first screen displayed after the HMI has finished booting. It displays the current sta-
tus of the feeder, and contains the main operating controls.
The Mode Select buttons are located on the bottom left of the Home screen, and are used to select the op-
erating mode of the feeder (See sections Operating Modes - Remote [➙ 9] and Operating Modes –
OFF/Maintenance [➙ 10] for more information on operating modes).
6.2.1.1 Operating the HMI in 'Off/Maintenance' Mode

Press the [Off/Maint] button to place the feeder in “Off/Maintenance” mode. The background color of the
Home screen will turn yellow to indicate that “Off/Maintenance” mode has been selected. In this mode, the
plant start/stop signals and demand signals are ignored. The feeder can be run in the forward or reverse
directions by pressing the [Run >>] or [Run <<] buttons on the Home screen, as long as there is no material
on the feeder belt. The feeder will run in the desired direction at the speed defined in P02.16 Maintenance
Speed. The [Stop] button will stop the feeder. Pressing and holding the [<< Jog] or [Jog >>] buttons will
cause the feeder to jog backwards or forwards for as long as the button is pressed. The jog speed is the
same as the Maintenance Speed defined in P02.16. The feeder can be jogged with or without material on
the belt.

6.2.1.2 Operating the HMI in 'Remote' Mode

Press the [Remote] button to place the feeder in “Remote” mode. The background color of the Home screen
will turn white to indicate that “Remote” mode has been selected. At this point, the feeder is ready to receive
commands from the plant’s control system. Upon receipt of a feeder start command and a demand signal
from the control system, the feeder will begin to operate and the feeder graphic on the Home screen will
indicate that the feeder is running in the forward direction. As material fills the belt, the Belt Load and Materi-
al Total values displayed on the Home screen will begin to update. The feeder will respond automatically to
the changing demands of the plant’s control system until it receives a feeder stop command or until the
[Off/Maint] button is pressed. If an alarm occurs, it will be displayed in a banner across the top of the Home
screen and can be cleared by pressing the [Ack Event] button. If a trip occurs, the feeder will be stopped and
the display will automatically switch to “Off/Maintenance” mode. The trip can be cleared by resolving the
problem that caused the trip and pressing the [Ack Event] button. “Remote” mode can then be resumed by
pressing the [Remote] button.
6.2.2 The 'Trend' Screen

The “Trend” screen is a customizable line graph that can be used to plot various data items that are logged
by the DT-9 over time. See Appendix C for a list of available data items.
6.2.3 The 'Values' Screen

The “Values” screen displays information about the feeder on two sub screens, which can be accessed by
pressing the [Values] or [Totals] buttons.
The [Totals] button displays the following data:
▪ Material Total is the total amount of material delivered by the feeder, and is the sum of the Gravimetric
and Volumetric Totals.
▪ Gravimetric Total is the total amount of material delivered by the feeder while operating in Gravimetric
Mode.
▪ Volumetric Total is the total amount of material delivered by the feeder while operating in Volumetric
Mode.
▪ The [Reset] button will reset all three totalizers. The total values cannot be recovered after the [Reset]
button is pressed.
The [Values] button displays the following data:
▪ Belt Speed shows the current speed of the belt in feet or meters per second.
▪ Belt Load shows the weight of the material on the belt per unit of belt length in pounds per foot or kilo-
grams per meter.
▪ Speed shows the shaft speed of the belt drive motor in revolutions per minute.
▪ Density shows the currently calculated density of the material on the belt in pounds per cubic foot or
kilograms per cubic meter.

6.2.4 The 'Setup' Screen

The “Setup” Screen is used to configure the DT-9 and to access the various log files that are stored by the
controller.
The following buttons are initially shown on the “Setup” screen: [Data Log], [Event Log], [Param Log], [Para-
meter], and [→] (Right Arrow).
Pressing the Right Arrow button causes the display to scroll to the following additional buttons: [Trim], [De-
faults], [Simulation], [Calibration], and [Set Time]. Pressing the Right Arrow button again will cause the dis-
play to scroll back to the initial list of buttons.
The [Trim], [Defaults], and [Calibration] buttons will be grayed out and unavailable unless the user is logged
in to the DT-9. The user must also log in before changing any of the parameters that are accessed via the
[Parameter] button.
To log in to the DT-9, press the [Login] button, enter the DT-9 password (the default is ‘”7353”), and press
[Login]. The previously selected screen will reappear and the [Login] button will change to [Logout] to indi-
cate that you have successfully logged in to the DT-9.
The following subsections describe the various screens that are accessed via the buttons on the “Setup”
screen.
6.2.4.1 Data Log Values

The “Data Log Values” screen displays the hourly and daily material totals in pounds or kilograms. The Up
and Down Arrow buttons can be used to scroll from hour to hour or day to day to view the previously saved
totals.
6.2.4.2 Event Log Values

The “Event Log Values” screen displays the Event Log and Command Log. The Up and Down Arrow buttons
can be used to scroll through the various events and user commands that were recorded by the DT-9.
6.2.4.3 Parameter Log Values

The “Parameter Log Values” screen displays a log of all the DT-9 parameters that have been modified by the
user. The Up and Down Arrow buttons can be used to scroll through the various parameter changes that
were recorded by the DT-9.
6.2.4.4 Parameter Setup

The “Parameter” screen is used to display and edit the various parameters available on the DT-9. Refer to
Section 9 of this manual for a detailed description of the available parameters and settings.
The top half of the “Parameter” screen displays the current Parameter Block. The bottom half of the screen
displays the various parameters that are available in the selected Parameter Block. Press the Up and Down
Arrow buttons to scroll through the various blocks and parameters.
To change the value of a parameter, press the [Edit] button (Note: the user must be logged in to change
parameter values). If the parameter contains a list of possible settings, a set of Up and Down Arrow buttons
will appear and can be used to scroll through the available options. If the parameter contains a discrete val-
ue, a text box will appear. Press the [Save] button to save any changes that were made to the parameter
value, or press the [Exit] button to exit without saving any changes.

6.2.4.5 Trimming the Analog Inputs and Outputs

The “Trim” screen is used to trim the analog inputs and outputs.
Any active analog input or feedback must be matched or adjusted to the DT-9 controls. Two signals levels
must be adjusted for each channel used. The first signal level, MIN, corresponds to the lower value being
adjusted and is transmitted when the feed rate is at 0%. The second level, MAX, corresponds to the higher
value being adjusted and is transmitted when the feed rate is at 100 %.
Note: If the feeder is not equipped with a remote analog demand input, the input alignment can be omitted. If
an analog output signal is not present, the output alignment section can be omitted.
Note: Unlike the 196NT, it is necessary to trim the analog output channel (normally AO 1) that is used to
control the motor speed control.
I/O Channel Adjustment
▪ When setting the output channels use a meter to measure the signal on:
– AO 1: Connected to wires 142, 143 & 144 (X6-6 and X6-7)
– AO 2: Connected to wires 139, 140 & 141 (X6-8 and X6-9).
▪ When setting the input channel source the signal to:
– AI 1: Connected to wires SIG+ & SIG- (X6-3, X6-4 or X6-3, X6-5).
Follow These Steps:
1. Press [Trim] to initiate the Trim function. Analog Output Channel 1 is always the first one displayed. To
access other channels use the arrow up or down buttons. Press [Exit] to get back to the main screen.
2. When aligning the output channels, the minimum and maximum analog signals are sent by the DT-9.
The user measures and enters the actual values. The AO 1 values are stored in P17.11 and P17.12, and
the AO 2 values are stored in P17.13 and P17.14.
a) Press the Down arrow button to scroll to the measure mode for output channel AO 1 Min. The DT-9
will output the minimum signal value. The display will ask for the measured value. Enter the value meas-
ured on your meter in the “Analog value measured” text box then press [Save] to store.
b) Press the Down arrow button to scroll to the measure mode for output channel AO 1 Max. The DT-9
will output the maximum signal value. The display will ask for the measured value. Enter the value
measured on your meter in the “Analog value measured” text box then press [Save] to store.
c) Repeat steps a. and b. for output channel AO 2.
d) Press the [Exit] button to exit the Trim function.
3. When aligning the input channel AI 1, the minimum and maximum analog demand signals are applied to
the input signal wires of the DT-9. The analog demand is measured then stored in P17.01 Analog Input 1
Min and P17.02 Analog Input 1 Max.
a) Press [Trim] then use the arrow keys to select Analog Input 1 Min. Press [Start] to enter the measure
mode. The first value measured is the minimum analog demand signal AI 1. Use either a precision
source or, preferably, a minimum demand signal directly from the combustion control system. The dis-
play will show the value being measured from the source. Press [Save] to store the value.
b) Press the Down arrow button to scroll to the maximum analog demand signal AI 1 and press [Start] to
enter the measure mode. Use either a precision source or, preferably, a maximum demand signal direct-
ly from the combustion control system. The display will show the value being measured from the source.
Press [Save] to store the value.
6.2.4.6 Restoring the Factory Default Settings

The “Defaults” screen allows the user to overwrite all parameter settings with the factory default values. The
[Custom] button will overwrite all parameters with the original values as set by Stock Equipment at the time
that the feeders were shipped. The [Factory] button will overwrite all parameters with the factory default val-
ues. In general, the [Custom] button should always be used when resetting the parameters.

6.2.4.7 Simulation Mode

The “Simulation” is not currently operational and should not be used.
6.2.4.8 Calibrating the Feeder

The “Calibration” screen allows the user to access the various calibration functions. Refer to Section Calibra-
tion [➙ 15] of this manual for a complete description of the available calibration functions. Press the Up and
Down Arrow buttons to select the desired calibration function, then press the [Start] button and follow the on-
screen instructions. When the calibration function has completed, press the [Save] button to save the new
calibration values or press the [Exit] button to exit without saving.
6.2.4.9 Setting the Current Time and Date

The [Set Time] button allows the user to edit the current Date and Time. The current values are displayed,
and can be edited via a text box.
6.3 Typical Operating Procedures

1. When filling the bunker, first close the inlet valve to minimize the filling pressure on the feeder and to
avoid compaction of the material at the feeder inlet. This precaution is unnecessary if the bunker is re-
filled while at least 8 to 10 feet (2.43 to 3.05 meters) of material remain in it.
2. When starting the feeder, open the inlet valve slowly to load the belt at a controlled rate and to minimize
compaction at the feeder inlet.
3. Energize the feeder controls at the disconnect switch in the control cabinet. Observe that the HMI is illu-
minated.
4. From the [HOME] screen, press the [Remote] button. Upon receipt of a customer-generated feeder start
command and a demand signal from the combustion control system, the feeder begins to operate and
the display indicates that the feeder is running forward.
5. As material fills the feeder belt, the display indicates that the feeder is feeding material.
6. The DT-9 will begin totalizing the weight and updating the current feeder information.
7. The feeder will respond automatically to the changing demands of the combustion control system until it
is de-energized.
8. For a brief stop with a loaded belt, press the [OFF/Maint.] button
9. For a clean shutdown with an empty belt, close the inlet valve while the feeder is still running. When the
belt is emptied, press the [OFF/Maint] button. This procedure is recommended whenever the feeder will
be inactive for a long period of time, since it eliminates the possibility of material compaction at the feed-
er inlet due to consolidation caused by its own weight.
10. To jog the feeder belt forward, press the [OFF/Maint] button followed by the [Jog >>] button on the mi-
croprocessor keyboard for as long as motion is required. Pressing the [<< Jog] button will jog the feeder
belt backwards.
11. To operate the feeder in the MAINTENANCE mode for inspection or servicing, press the [OFF/Maint]
button followed by the [Run >>] button. The feeder will run forward at the speed programmed in P02.16
Maintenance Speed. Pressing the [<< Run] button will cause the feeder to run backwards at the same
speed.

Operation Using the 196NT Display
7 Operation Using the 196NT Display

The VCU20103 does not support the 196NT display.

Operation Using EasyServe
8 Operation Using EasyServe

This chapter describes control of the DT-9 using EasyServe.
See “Schenck Process EasyServe Operation Manual” (BV-H2185GB)
8.1 Program EasyServe VPC 20150

Designed as PC program for DISOCONT commissioning and servicing, EasyServe lets you perform any
®
operating and calibrating operation. The program is operable under Microsoft Windows 2000/XP/Vista/7
operating systems. The control unit lets you perform all controlling and calibrating operations without restric-
tions. The menu control permits flexible and easy adjustment, lets you access service data, operate the
scale for servicing, and customize the menu texts on PC screen and all operator units.
8.2 Minimum System Requirements

▪ Pentium or CPU-compatible
▪ 900MB free hard disk space
▪ VGA display, 32768 color monitor recommended
▪ Operating systems Microsoft Windows® 2000/XP/Vista/7 with latest service packs
▪ Mouse or other type of pointer
▪ CD-ROM drive.
8.3 Installation
EasyServe
Insert CD VPC20150 into CD-ROM drive. Normally, installation starts automatically. If not, open Windows
explorer select your CD-ROM drive. To open, double click on file. The automatic installation program
prompts you through a number of dialogs, for you to confirm.
Upgrade
If an old EasyServe version is available on your PC it must be removed (using Control Panel | Add or Re-
move Programs) before the installation can be performed.
Attention
To be able to install the EasyServe program, your name must be registered as user in the group of adminis-
®
trators under Windows 2000/XP/Vista/7. To execute program, main user rights are required.
8.4 Start Program and Connect to Feeder

Before EasyServe can be used it must be installed on a laptop or PC, an Ethernet cable must be installed
between the DT-9 and the PC and the PC must be configured for direct Ethernet communications. This pro-
cess is described below.
CAUTION
DO NOT use the RJ45 connector marked X96 to connect the DT-9 to a
laptop or PC.
This connector is designed to supply power for the Touch Screen HMI
through normally unused connections. Connecting a PC to X96 could cause
damage to the DT-9, the PC or both. A red cover is normally installed over
this connector to prevent it from being used with a PC.

8.4.1 Connecting to Feeder

The EasyServe program and an Ethernet connection are used for most DT-9 Programming operations. The
DT-9 cannot generate an IP address for the computer running EasyServe so the PC must be set to a static
IP address. The DT-9 default IP address is 192.168.240.1 and the PC must be on the same subnet. Set the
PC address to 192.168.240.254 as starting point. One of several ways to do this is listed below.
®
Windows XP
1. Select Network Connections in Control Panel
2. Double click on the Local Area Connection line to bring up Local Area Connection Status dialog box. If
you have more then one Local Area Connection you probably want to select the one that is not con-
nected.
3. Click on the Properties button (under the General tab) in the Local Area Connection Status dialog box.
This will bring up the Local Area Connection Properties dialog box.
4. Under the General tab, scroll down to Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) line, select this line then press the
Properties button. This will bring up the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties dialog box.
5. In the General tab, the Obtain an IP address automatically button will normally be set, and the Alternate
Configuration tab will be visible. Select the Alternate Configuration tab.
6. If an alternate IP address has already been entered, record this value. Select the User Configured button
then enter the IP address (192.168.240.254) and the Subnet mask (255.255.255.0) to use with the DT-9.
Leave the Default gateway field blank.
Note: It is not necessary to remove the alternate IP address once the DT-9 update has been completed.
When the Ethernet port is configured as described above, the PC/Laptop can be connected to a DT-9 or
a company network without changing the settings.
7. If the Ethernet port has been set to a fixed IP address, the Obtain an IP address automatically button will
not be set and the Alternate Configuration tab will not be visible. In this case either the fixed IP address
can be changed, by changing the IP address and Subnet mask fields in the Use the following IP address:
box, or by selecting the Obtain an IP address automatically button and following steps 5 and 6. In either
case, the previous IP address and Subnet mask should be recorded prior to making any changes.
8. Select OK and back out.
9. Make the physical connection to the DT-9 by installing a CAT 5 cable (either straight through or crossov-
er) between the PC Ethernet port and any of the RJ45 connectors on the DT-9 except X96. X96 uses
normally unused connection to supply power to the Touch Screen HMI and connecting a PC to X96
could cause damage to the DT-9, the PC or both. See the warning above.
10. Start EasyServe and select the Connection | MODBUS TCP (Scanner) option. The controller if con-
nected should be displayed. Select the controller and select Connect.
11. If there are more than one Ethernet connection on the computer EasyServe may have a problem decid-
ing which one to use. Rebooting the computer (not just logging out) while the DT-9 is connected and
running will usually fix this problem. If this doesn’t work the other connection may have to be disabled.
Windows® Vista
1. Select Network Connections in Control Panel.
2. Double click on Network and Sharing Center.
3. Click on the Manage Network Connections line, on the left side of the window.
4. Double click on the network connection that will be used to communicate with the DT-9. This is normally
marked Local Area Connection.
5. In the Local Area Connection Status window, click on the Properties button. This will bring up the Local
Area Connection Properties dialog box.
6. Proceed to step 4. above.

8.4.2 Access to Feeder Commands and Parameters

Once a feeder connection has been established, you have to register to make any parameter changes or
operate the feeder. To do this click on the red lock toolbar button it will change to a yellow key (or go to Edit
– Register or press F2 on the keyboard).
HINT
Once registered any parameter changes or commands are sent to the
feeder immediately.
To unregister click the yellow key toolbar button and make it go back to red lock (or go to Edit – Unregister or
press F3 on the keyboard).
8.5 Parameter Set

Once connected to a DT-9 go to View – Parameter set: Online to access the parameter set. It’s displayed
along the left side of the screen organized by parameter block. To view the parameters click on a block and
they will be displayed on the right.
At the bottom of the parameter set the events and hardware configuration can be accessed.
▪ Events
– All the events for the DT-9 are listed here in groups similar to the parameters. Click on a group to see
the event names and numbers on the right. The parameter that corresponds to the event will be
listed after the name. If you click the event name on the right it will take you to the parameter that
controls it.
▪ Hardware configuration
– This contains a list of all the Analog inputs/outputs, digital inputs/outputs and Load Cells. Just like the
event list if you click the event name on the right it will take you to the parameter that controls it.
8.5.1 .PAR Files

Feeder files for EasyServe are saved as .PAR files. To load a .PAR go to File | Open. Once the file has been
opened, the parameters can be viewed and changed. The background color remains a bluish-gray as long
as you are just editing a .PAR file and have not loaded it to a DT-9.
To send the file, a feeder connection is required. Once the connection has been established, the background
changes to white and displays the parameter set currently on the DT-9. Open the .PAR file you wish to load
or go if it was already opened you can just go to View and select the parameter set by name. The back-
ground should go back to the bluish gray color as before. Go to File | Transmit, check the box of the parame-
ter set to be loaded and click OK. Click OK on the next pop up saying it may take a minute.
8.5.2 Read/change Parameters

1. Loaded .PAR file
– Once a file has been loaded, the parameters can be viewed and edited. The parameter set file will be
displayed on the left hand side. Click on a parameter block on the left to display the parameters on
the right. To edit the parameter click in the box and enter using the keyboard or use the pull down tab
to set the desired value.
2. Connected to feeder controller
– Once a connection has been established and you have registered the parameters can be edited as
described in item 1).

8.5.3 Loading Custom Default Parameters

A set of custom default parameters can be loaded to the DT-9 controller. Loading custom defaults will load
the parameters setup by Stock Equipment.
STRICTLY OBSERVE
Edited parameters and calibrating values are reset.
We recommend that you print parameters using the Print Parameters func-
tion before loading default values.
To load:
▪ Go to Tools | Commissioning | Load Custom Defaults. EasyServe will ask for verification that you want to
load defaults. Click Yes to load the default parameters.
8.5.4 Loading Factory Default Parameters

A set of Factory default parameters can be loaded to the DT-9 controller. These are the controller default
values, NOT the initial Stock values.
STRICTLY OBSERVE
The Load Default Parameters operation will reset all calibration values
and any parameters that have been edited, and will also reset the Cus-
tom Default Parameters.
Stock recommends that parameters be printed or saved to disk before load-
ing default values. Stock does not recommend loading factory defaults ex-
cept after a firmware update, or when a memory error is detected.
To load:
▪ Go to Tools – Commissioning – Load Custom Defaults. EasyServe will ask for verification that you want
to load defaults. Click Yes to load the default parameters.
8.5.5 Expert Mode

Parameter access permissions can be modified using expert mode. The three options available are:
▪ R: Read access only. The parameter cannot be edited.
▪ W: Writable. The parameter can be viewed and edited.
▪ H: Hide. The parameter cannot be viewed or edited unless in Expert mode.
To access Expert mode click Edit | Expert Mode (or press F6). EasyServe will prompt for a password to enter
Expert Mode. The default password is 7353. Press enter or click ok once the password is entered. Now
when viewing parameters, there will be a square to the left of the parameter value with one of the above
letters in it representing the parameter state. Click on the square to change status.

8.5.6 Print Parameters

A printout of the parameter set can be done by going to File | Print. A window will pop up giving you a few
checkbox options for what to include on the printout:
▪ Only changed Parameters – Parameters that have been changed since the last loading of a parameter
file.
▪ Only visible Parameters – Does not print any parameters that have been set to hidden in expert mode.
▪ Hardware configuration – This will add a list of the analog/digital inputs/outputs, and Load cells to the end
of the parameter set on the printout
Click print when ready to proceed with printout.
8.6 Operating the Feeder
8.6.1 Scale Operation Screens

The main screen of EasyServe can either display the parameter set (as described above) or Scale (feeder)
Operation 1 and 2. To change this go to View – then select one of the options above the line on the pull
down menu. A DT-9 connection is required to access the scale operation or online parameter set screens.
▪ Scale Operation 1:
– This is the screen to use when operating the feeder from EasyServe. The feeder can be placed in
remote, local and jog from this screen. Feeder operation is the same as it is when using the 196NT
display (See section Operation using the 196NT Display). This is also where the totalizers can be re-
set. Along with this real time feeder, information is displayed on the right side.
Note: To operate the feeder, you must have a connection and be registered.
∎ Remote - Click the remote button to put the feeder in REMOTE mode. The button will change to
OFF/Maint and Remote will be displayed to the left. Click the button again to put the feeder back in
OFF mode.
∎ Local - Click the RUN>> button to run the feeder in LOCAL mode. Click the button again to stop
the feeder and place it back in OFF mode. The RUN<< button will run the feeder in reverse.
∎ Jog - Click and hold to JOG>> the feeder. Click and hold the JOG<< to jog the feeder in reverse.
∎ Reset Totalizer - Click button to reset the totalizer.
▪ Scale Operation 2:
– This screen gives status information only. The feeder can not be controlled. Along with normal opera-
tional info, the load cells can be monitored if they are connected.
8.6.2 Events
Events will be displayed across the bottom of the EasyServe screen (The event can also be viewed by going
to View | Events, bringing up the event window). Alarms and warnings can be acknowledged, after correcting
the situation, by clicking on the red X toolbar button. The event message on the bottom will go back to “No
Events”.
8.6.3 Calibration
See section Calibration [➙ 15] for feeder calibration instructions.

8.6.4 Service Values

The service values on EasyServe are displayed in pop-up windows. Up to ten windows can be opened at
one time. To open a service value window go to View – Service Values, and select one. There is no differ-
ence in the ten windows the same information can be accessed from any of them. The values are divided up
by eight tabs across the top to access different information as listed below.
1. MV 1
– Load cell info
– Tachometer Hz
– Speed set point
– Belt load info.
2. MV 2
– Software info
– Hardware info
– Totalizer pulses
– Belt motion monitor.
3. AI
– Analog input signals.
4. AO
– Analog output signals.
5. V103-DI
– Digital input status.
6. V103-DO
– Digital output status.
7. OP1
– Feedrate info
– Totalizers
– Belt speed and load
– Density.
8. OP2
– Does not contain any values with current DT-9 version.

8.6.5 Trends
Like the service values, ten trend windows can be opened. Within each trend window the following values
can be viewed.
▪ Feeder On
▪ Flow Rate
▪ Totalizer 1
▪ Totalizer 2
▪ Belt Load
▪ Belt Speed
▪ Actual Setpoint
▪ Deviation
To open a trend window, add the desired values, and modify the trend, follow these steps.
1. Go to View – Trend – and select one of the ten trends.
2. The trend window will pop up. Whatever the last selected values were, for that trend window number, will
be displayed.
3. To change the scaling of the graph or add a name click the third button from the left on the top of the
trend window (the modify button). A window will pop up, edit the fields in the top right to the desired val-
ues.
4. While still in the modify window click on value 1 on the left side.
5. Here you can select what you want to appear on the trend. To add this value to the trend make sure the
display field is set to yes. Next, click the signal source button. A window will pop up where you can select
one of the above mentioned values. Select the one you want and click apply.
6. The name and color can be modified for each value also in the fields below the signal source button.
7. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to add as many values as you want to the trend.
8. Click save and close to apply the settings to the trend.
Note: The first two buttons at the top left are for starting record and stopping the trend. The fourth button
(red X) deletes the recorded trends.
8.6.6 Setting Time

To adjust the date/time of the DT-9, go to Tools | Commissioning | Adjust Date/Time. Select the date/time in
the window that pops up then click OK.
8.6.7 Options
The EasyServe options can be accessed by going to Tools | Options. The options window opens and has
4 tabs. This window lets you change language preferences, communication settings, display settings, print
settings and working folder for the parameter set loaded. You can also load the factory default parameters,
STOCK DOES NOT RECOMMEND LOADING FACTORY DEFAULTS.

Testing
9 Testing
9.1 Calibration Weight Test

Calibration weight testing performs the following functions:
▪ Check for mechanical or electrical errors.
▪ Can check system linearity.
Requirements
▪ Calibration weight.
Follow these steps:
▪ Enter effective check weight into Parameter P10.08 Calibration Weight.
▪ Call up the "TW: Weight Check" calibrating function (see Calibration [➙ 15] item).
Deviations of measured value from actual value may be caused by
▪ Platform distortion
▪ Improper alignment
▪ Interferential forces acting on load cell cable.
9.2 Chain Test

Chain testing performs the following functions:
▪ Check for mechanical or electrical errors.
▪ Can check system linearity.
▪ Check for weigh system alignment errors.
Requirements
▪ Calibration chain.
Follow these steps:
▪ Enter chain test weight in Parameter P10.09 Test Chain Weight.
▪ Call up the "TC: Span Calibration" calibrating function (see Calibration [➙ 15] item).
Deviations of measured value from actual value may be caused by
▪ Platform distortion
▪ Improper alignment
▪ Interferential forces acting on load cell cable.
▪ Weight roller mis-alignment.

Testing
9.3 Material Test

No check or calibration using check weights can perfectly simulate actual conditions. The actual accuracy
can only be determined with a material test. The DT-9 allows errors found during this testing to be easily
corrected using Parameter P10.05 Range Correction TM.
Requirements
▪ Handling route from weighing platform to material collecting point is totally clean.
▪ No material is diverted during the test.
▪ If feed screws or air slides are provided between platform and collecting point, run the system with ma-
terial for approx. 30m minutes before starting the material test. This will allow the normal build-ups to
form on feed units.
▪ Do not remove dust or clean the equipment during the test.
▪ Hoppers or vehicles transporting the material to a legal-for-trade commercial scale have been cleaned
and re-weighed before filling (tare weight).
Example:
The figure shows the operating principle of a material test.
Within a certain period of time, e.g. 15 min., an actual material amount MW of 4.9 t is fed. The material value
MA displayed on DISOCONT is 5.0 t. The new value of P09.01 Limit: Actual Flow Rate MIN is computed
using the following formula:
Parameter P09.01 (new) = Parameter P09.01 (old) * MW / MA
In our example, value is 0.98.
Enter new value into Parameter P10.05 Range Correction TM.

Parameters
10 Parameters
This chapter discusses the parameters available with DT-9. Some parameters are not normally used on
Stock coal feeders. These parameters are hidden by default and are marked as Normally Hidden in the pa-
rameter list below. These parameters can be viewed, modified or made visible using the Expert Mode in
EasyServe. Use the Edit | Expert Mode menu selection or the F6 key. The default password is 7353.
10.1 General Information

Parameters are variable features or data used to adapt DT-9 to the application.
There are two principal types of parameter:
▪ Selection parameters - for selection from multiple Options
– Select characteristic values (e.g., display unit, control behavior)
– Select event classes (determine reaction on events)
– Select hardware configuration (source, unit, channel, level)
▪ Numeric parameters - for direct input of numeric values
Parameters can be changed during operation. However, parameters influencing measuring result, e.g., dis-
play filters, must not be changed.
Default Values:
The DT-9 controller saves two different sets of default parameter value, referred to as Factory Defaults and
Custom Defaults. Factory Defaults are set in the controller firmware and cannot be modified. These values
provide a common starting point for new systems. Custom Defaults can be modified in the field and can
store the custom settings used for a particular installation. Custom Defaults are set during factory testing.
All parameters are preset with default values that don’t normally need to be changed. You can recall default
values using the "Load Factory Defaults" function and the “Load Custom Defaults” function.
Identification:
Parameters are organized by function group and identified as follows:
"Group number - parameter number - parameter name", e.g., P01.02 Event: Communication ARM7.
Parameters Attributes:
The DT-9 is versatile system that can be user programmed for a variety of application and many of the pa-
rameters required for one application are not required for others. To simplify operation, each parameter has
a parameter attribute that can be set to hidden (H), read only (R) or read/write (W). Special parameters that
are not normally used in Stock feeders are factory set to default values and then hidden. Their current val-
ues, default values and hidden status can be changed in EasyServe, using Expert Mode (Menu: Edit | Expert
Mode). The default password is 7353.
Dependencies:
There are parameters whose availability depends on other parameters setting values. These dependencies
are stated in the header of every parameter description.

Parameters
Abbreviations:
Hardware Devices Description
VCU Main control unit type VCU 201xx

VHM Operator Panel (control unit)
ARM7 Redundant volumetric control processor in VCU
196NT Former controller generation
DT-9 DISOCONT Tersus system for coal feeding
Signal Description
Source/Destination
FB Fieldbus (optional interface required)

OP Operator Panel (control unit type VHM)
DI Digital Input
DO Digital Output
AI Analog Input
AO Analog Output
LC Load Cell
LS Logical Signal
VCU1 Located on main VCU 20100
VCU2 Located on first extension VCU 20100
VCU3 Located on second extension VCU 20100
V103 Located on VCU20103
V104 Located on VCU20104
FRQ Frequency Output
R-L Raise and Lower Contact Input
n/a Not assigned (signal not used or generated internally
Event Classes Description
A Alarm (Stops feeder)

W1 Warning 1 (acknowledgement required)
W2 Warning 2 (no acknowledgement required)
IG Ignore – No event message but contact outputs
Signals Description
I Flow rate
Q Belt load
VB Belt speed
TCI Totalizer Counter Increments
FRI Remote frequency output

Parameters
Signals Description
VAP Delay of control command till point of discharge
PLS Host plant control
FCB Function block in mini-PLC
Procedure for Setting Inputs and Outputs

Step Description
1. Select source or destination of signal DI, DO ...,...

"n/a" means "not assigned", i.e. function is not available.
2. Select unit VCU ...
Display only shows units activated in parameter block 1.
3. Select channel number DI 1 ...
4. Select signal level LOW or HIGH
(N/C or N/O contact)
Hardware Configuration
When signal path configuration parameters are set, the source/destination determines whether unit, channel
and level must be additionally indicated or not. The following table applies:
Possible hardware configurations:

Source Unit Channel Level
FB
OP
v
n/a
AI VCU103 AI1 - AI4
VCU104 AI1 - AI3
VCU1 AI1 - AI2
VCU2 AI1 - AI2
VCU3 AI1 - AI2
AO VCU103 AO1 - AO4
VCU104 AO1 - AO4
VCU1 AO1 - AO3
VCU2 AO1 - AO3
VCU3 AO1 - AO3

Parameters
Source Unit Channel Level

LC VCU103
VCU104
VCU1 LC1 - LC2
VCU2
VCU3
DI VCU103 DI1 - DI12 HIGH, LOW
VCU104 DI1 - DI12
DI1 - DI7
VCU1
DI1 - DI7
VCU2
DI1 - DI7
VCU3
DO VCU103 DO1 - DO13 HIGH, LOW
VCU104 DO1 - DO14
DO1 - DO8
VCU1
DO1 - DO8
VCU2
DO1 - DO8
VCU3
Fieldbus (FB), control unit (OP), speed (v), not assigned (n/a) and the low-resolution analog input (DI4) does
not require additional specification for unit, channel or level.
Analog inputs (AI), outputs (AO) and load cell (LC) require the unit to be specified.
Digital inputs (DI) and outputs (DO) require unit, channel and level to be specified.
Example:
Parameter P 16.21 determines the relay output that indicates that a warning (W1 or W2) event is active.
P16.21 DO: WARNING Default: DO 13 High

Options: n/a (not used)
DO 1 thru DO 14 - High/Low
The first row shows the parameter description and default values. By default, the output relay is either DO 8
for the VCU 20103, or DO 13 for the VCU 20104. The available digital outputs for the two DT-9 versions are
shown in the next two rows.
Event Messages
Event messages report abnormal states, e.g. errors or limit value excess.
STRICTLY OBSERVE
Always correct the cause of a fault before acknowledging it.
The feeder has the potential to cause injuries or damage if this is not done.

Parameters
There are four different event classes:

Event Class Code Display / Effect
Alarm A All measuring and control operations are aborted. System goes to safe state.
This type of event is the same as a feeder trip on the 196NT.
Warning 1 W1 The event is annunciated and remains active until it has been acknowledged.
Measuring and control tasks are not affected. This type of event is similar to
some type of alarms on the 196NT.
Warning 2 W2 The event is annunciated and remains active until the cause has been cor-
rected. It is not necessary to acknowledge this type of event. Measuring and
control tasks are not affected. This type of event is similar to some type of
alarms on the 196NT.
Ignore IG Event is not annunciated. Measuring and control tasks are not affected.
Events are classified in the following groups with the priority shown:
Event Group Symbol
System message SY
Sequence monitoring SC
Electrical system WE
Mechanical system WM
Material flow MF
Interlocking IL
Controllers CO
Calibration CA
Maximum HI
Minimum LO
Example:
Some parameters specify the response to an error event.
Parameter P01.02 determines the response to event SY12, Event: Communication ARM7.
P01.02 Event: Communication ARM7 Default: A

Event Group: SY Number: 12
Options: IG
A (Stop feeder)
W1 (Warning – Manual reset)
W2 (Warning – Automatic reset)
The first row shows the parameter description and default values. By default, an alarm is generated and the
feeder is stopped. The second row shows the event group and number (SY12), and the third row shows the
available digital outputs for the two DT-9 versions. All of the normal event options are available for this event.

Parameters
10.2 DT-
DT-9 Parameter List
A complete set of DT-9 parameters is listed below with options, default values and descriptions. The factory
default values are selected based on either, the requirements of the existing wiring groups or the most com-
monly used values. Some parameters are shown as “Hidden”. These parameters are not visible from the
feeder display and it should not normally be necessary to changed them. If it is necessary to view or modify
these parameters set EasyServe to Expert mode (View | Expert Mode). The default password is 7353. This
will make the parameters visible in EasyServe and allow the parameter attributes (H-Hidden, R-Read only &
W-Read/Write) to be changed.
10.2.1 Parameter Overview

VCF20170-005 3280
01 - Hardware Modules
Number: Name Default Customer Sys ID
P01.01 [➙ 70] Event: Communication VHM W2 4218
P01.02 [➙ 70] Event: Communication ARM7 A 5752
P01.03 [➙ 70] Analog Channel A10 NO 5746
02 - Feeder Definition
P02.01 [➙ 72] Language ENGLISH 4224
P02.02 [➙ 72] Units English 4225
P02.03 [➙ 72] Scale Name DISOCONT TERSUS 6238

CF
P02.04 [➙ 72] Password 10000 4292
P02.05 [➙ 72] Nominal Flow Rate Io 50000 lb/h 4226
P02.06 [➙ 72] Nominal Speed 3 inch/s 4227
P02.07 [➙ 72] Display Formats SELECTABLE 4228
P02.08 [➙ 72] Flow Rate Units ----.- lb/h 4229
P02.09 [➙ 72] Counter 1 Unit ------- lb 4230
P02.10 [➙ 72] Counter 2 Unit ------- lb 4232
P02.11 [➙ 72] Counter 3 Unit ------- lb 4233
P02.12 [➙ 72] DO: Pulse Counter DO 4239
P02.13 [➙ 72] Totalizer Increment 100 lb 4254

Parameters
P02.14 [➙ 72] Pulse Length Total 0.1 s 4231
P02.15 [➙ 72] Event: Remote TCI too small W2 5745
P02.16 [➙ 72] Maintenance Speed 50 % 5670
P02.17 [➙ 72] DO: FRI Frequency DO 5753
P02.18 [➙ 72] Remote FRI Frequency 10 Hz/(t/h) 5708
P02.20 [➙ 72] Codepage Unicode UTF-8 6242
P02.21 [➙ 72] DC_Mode NO 6243
03 - Control Sources
P03.01 [➙ 77] Feeder Start DI 4241
P03.02 [➙ 77] Feedrate Setpoint AI 4242
P03.03 [➙ 77] Setpoint Range 20 mA 4243
P03.04 [➙ 77] Setpoint Offset 4 mA 4244
P03.05 [➙ 77] Maximum Feedrate 50000 lb/h 5686
P03.06 [➙ 77] Minimum Feedrate 5000 lb/h 5687
P03.07 [➙ 77] DI: Raise Setpoint n/a 5722
P03.08 [➙ 77] DI: Lower Setpoint n/a 5723
P03.09 [➙ 77] Raise/Lower Response Time 30 s 5709
P03.10 [➙ 77] Source Run Enable DI 4245
P03.11 [➙ 77] Event: Run Disabled W2 4246
P03.12 [➙ 77] Mode Select Enable/Disable Keyb.,Remote & Local 5707
P03.13 [➙ 77] Speed Setpoint 200 rpm 5682
P03.14 [➙ 77] Run Mode Select Frate Setpoint 5684
P03.15 [➙ 77] Density Setpoint 50.955 lb/ft3 5815
04 - Rated Data
P04.01 [➙ 82] LC Characteristic Value 3 mV/V 4257
P04.02 [➙ 82] LC Rated Capacity 100 lb 4258
P04.03 [➙ 82] Effective Platform Length 18 inch 4259
P04.04 [➙ 82] Lever Ratio 1 4260
P04.05 [➙ 82] Angle 0 degree 4261
P04.06 [➙ 82] Speed Measurement DI 4262

Parameters
P04.07 [➙ 82] Source Load Cell LC 4263
P04.08 [➙ 82] Source Load Cell 2 LC 4269
P04.09 [➙ 82] Tachometer: Pulses per Rev 60 P/rev 5690
P04.10 [➙ 82] Load cross section 157 inch2 5730
05 - Feeder control
P05.01 [➙ 84] Volum on LC failure YES 4270
P05.02 [➙ 84] Event: Volum on failure IG 4271
P05.03 [➙ 84] Afterflow Totalizer 0s 4274
P05.04 [➙ 84] Zero Drop-Out Active NO 4679
P05.05 [➙ 84] Zero Drop-Out Limit 1%Q 4680
06 - Feeder Monitoring
P06.01 [➙ 86] Event: Stand-By IG 4289
P06.02 [➙ 86] Stand-By Limit Value 0 % Io 4290
P06.03 [➙ 86] Event: Tachometer Input A 4291
P06.04 [➙ 86] Event: Error LC Input IG 4293
P06.05 [➙ 86] Event: LC Input < MIN IG 4294
P06.06 [➙ 86] Event: LC Input > MAX IG 4295
P06.07 [➙ 86] Event: Setpoint Limited IG 4296
P06.08 [➙ 86] Event: Power Failure IG 4297
P06.09 [➙ 86] Time Deviation 20 s 4298
P06.10 [➙ 86] Threshold Deviation 5% 4299
P06.11 [➙ 86] Factor Deviation 1 4320
P06.12 [➙ 86] Event: Deviation W2 4300
P06.13 [➙ 86] Event: Controller Limited IG 4301
P06.14 [➙ 86] Event: Memory W1 4302

Parameters
P06.15 [➙ 86] Event: Analog Input < Offset IG 5418
P06.16 [➙ 86] DO: Dual Tacho active n/a 4304
P06.17 [➙ 86] Event: Primary Tacho Failure IG 4305
07 - Belt Monitoring
P07.01 [➙ 91] DI: Belt Motion Monitor n/a 5724
P07.02 [➙ 91] Belt Motion Monitor Delay 10 s 5698
P07.03 [➙ 91] Event: Belt Motion Monitor IG 5725
P07.04 [➙ 91] DI: Source Belt Sensor n/a 4497
P07.05 [➙ 91] BIC Active NO 4498
P07.06 [➙ 91] DI: BIC freeze n/a 4499
P07.07 [➙ 91] Slip Value 10 % LB 4507
P07.08 [➙ 91] Event: Slip IG 4508
P07.09 [➙ 91] DO: Belt Slip n/a 4511
P07.10 [➙ 91] Sensor Length 3.23 inch 4500
P07.11 [➙ 91] Sensor Width 4.73 inch 4501
P07.12 [➙ 91] Sensor Offset 0 inch 4502
P07.13 [➙ 91] Belt Drift 1.18 inch 4503
P07.14 [➙ 91] Event: Belt Drift W1 4504
P07.15 [➙ 91] Belt Skew 1.58 inch 4505
P07.16 [➙ 91] Event: Belt Skew A 4506
P07.17 [➙ 91] DO: Belt Drift n/a 4509
P07.18 [➙ 91] DO: Belt Skew n/a 4510
08 - Display Filters
P08.01 [➙ 95] LC Filter 3s 4334
P08.02 [➙ 95] Filter: Actual Flow Rate 1s 4328
P08.03 [➙ 95] Filter: Actual Flow Rate analog 1s 4329
P08.04 [➙ 95] Feedback Filter Override 15 % 5702

Threshold

Parameters
P08.05 [➙ 95] Filter: Belt Load 1s 4331
P08.06 [➙ 95] Filter: Belt Speed 1s 4332
P08.07 [➙ 95] Filter: Deviation 1s 4333
09 - Limit Values
P09.01 [➙ 96] Limit: Actual Flow Rate MIN 5 % Io 4337
P09.02 [➙ 96] Event: Actual Flow Rate MIN IG 4338
P09.03 [➙ 96] Limit: Actual Flow Rate MAX 120 % Io 4339
P09.04 [➙ 96] Event: Actual Flow Rate MAX IG 4340
P09.05 [➙ 96] Limit: Belt Load MIN 60 % Q 4341
P09.06 [➙ 96] Event: Belt Load MIN IG 4342
P09.07 [➙ 96] Limit: Belt Load MAX 120 % Q 4343
P09.08 [➙ 96] Event: Belt Load MAX IG 4344
P09.09 [➙ 96] Limit: Speed MIN 5%V 4345
P09.10 [➙ 96] Event: Speed MIN IG 4346
P09.11 [➙ 96] Limit: Speed MAX 120 % V 4347
P09.12 [➙ 96] Event: Speed MAX IG 4348
10 - Calibration Data
P10.01 [➙ 99] Calibration Probe Span 36 inch 5693
P10.02 [➙ 99] Pulses per length 300 P/inch 4256
P10.03 [➙ 99] Range Correction TW 1 5731
P10.04 [➙ 99] Range Correction TC 1 5732
P10.05 [➙ 99] Range Correction TM 1 5733
P10.06 [➙ 99] Belt Circuit Time 60 s 4353
P10.07 [➙ 99] Simulation Travel (Belt Rev.) 2 5703
P10.08 [➙ 99] Calibration Weight 70 lb 4354

Parameters
P10.09 [➙ 99] Test Chain Weight 4.3 lb/inch 5715
P10.10 [➙ 99] Basic Tare 0 lb/inch 4355
P10.11 [➙ 99] Belt Circuit No. 1000000 P/B 4357
11 - Rate controller
P11.01 [➙ 101] P-Component KP 0.05 mA/% 4369
P11.02 [➙ 101] I-Component TN 1s 4370
P11.03 [➙ 101] AO: Motor Speed Control AO 4400
P11.04 [➙ 101] Lower Limit 4 mA 4371
P11.05 [➙ 101] Upper Limit 20 mA 4372
P11.06 [➙ 101] Controller Magnitude Offset 4 mA 4373
P11.07 [➙ 101] Position at STOP Lower Limit 4374
P11.08 [➙ 101] KP speed controller 0.07 mA/% 5734
P11.09 [➙ 101] VAP Active NO 4480
P11.10 [➙ 101] Platform Dis.Length 0 % LB 4482
12 - Moisture
P12.01 [➙ 103] Moisture Active NO 5386
P12.02 [➙ 103] Moisture Select n/a 5399
P12.03 [➙ 103] AI: Moisture Measurement n/a 5387
P12.04 [➙ 103] Nominal Moisture 10 % 5388
P12.05 [➙ 103] Moisture Offset 4 mA 5389
P12.06 [➙ 103] Moisture Range 20 mA 5390
P12.07 [➙ 103] DO: Moisture active n/a 5400
P12.08 [➙ 103] Moisture MAX 20 % 5391
P12.09 [➙ 103] DO: Moisture MAX n/a 5392
P12.10 [➙ 103] Event: Moisture MAX IG 5393
P12.11 [➙ 103] AO: Flow Rate corrected n/a 5394

Parameters
P12.12 [➙ 103] AO: Flow Rate Offset 4 mA 5395
P12.13 [➙ 103] AO: Flow Rate Range 20 mA 5396
P12.14 [➙ 103] Pulse Counter corrected NO 5397
13 - Cleanout control
P13.01 [➙ 106] DO: CleanOut Timer n/a 4277
P13.02 [➙ 106] CleanOut ON Time 1h 4278
P13.03 [➙ 106] CleanOut OFF Time 1h 4279
P13.04 [➙ 106] DI: Chain Motion Monitor n/a 4404
P13.05 [➙ 106] Chain Motion Delay 20 s 4405
P13.06 [➙ 106] Event: Chain Motion Monitor IG 4406
14 - Analog Outputs
P14.01 [➙ 107] AO: Setpoint n/a 4385
P14.02 [➙ 107] Setpoint Offset 4 mA 4386
P14.03 [➙ 107] Setpoint Range 20 mA 4387
P14.04 [➙ 107] AO: Actual Flow Rate AO 4388
P14.05 [➙ 107] Flow Rate Offset 4 mA 4389
P14.06 [➙ 107] Flow Rate Range 20 mA 4390
P14.07 [➙ 107] AO: Belt Load n/a 4391
P14.08 [➙ 107] Belt Load Offset 4 mA 4392
P14.09 [➙ 107] Belt Load Range 20 mA 4393
P14.10 [➙ 107] AO: Speed n/a 4394
P14.11 [➙ 107] Speed Offset 4 mA 4395
P14.12 [➙ 107] Speed Range 20 mA 4396
P14.13 [➙ 107] AO: Deviation n/a 4397
P14.14 [➙ 107] Deviation Offset 4 mA 4398
P14.15 [➙ 107] Deviation Range 20 mA 4399
P14.16 [➙ 107] AO: Actual Flow Rate (2nd) n/a 4306
15 - Digital Inputs
P15.01 [➙ 109] DI: Acknowledge Events n/a 4419

Parameters
P15.02 [➙ 109] DI: Local Mode n/a 4420
P15.03 [➙ 109] Event: External Event 1 IG 4417
P15.04 [➙ 109] DI: External Event 1 n/a 4418
P15.05 [➙ 109] Event: NAMUR Error V103-DI13 IG 4424
P15.06 [➙ 109] Event: NAMUR Error V103-DI14 IG 4425
P15.07 [➙ 109] DI: Reset Totalizer 1 n/a 5414
P15.08 [➙ 109] DI: Reset Totalizer 2 n/a 5415
P15.09 [➙ 109] DI: Discharge Pluggage DI 5716
P15.10 [➙ 109] Discharge Pluggage Delay 2s 5697
P15.11 [➙ 109] Event: Discharge Pluggage A 5717
P15.12 [➙ 109] DI: Coal on belt switch DI 5718
P15.13 [➙ 109] Loss of Flow Trip Delay 1s 5704
P15.14 [➙ 109] Event: Loss of material IG 5719
P15.15 [➙ 109] Event: Coal on Belt A 5754
P15.16 [➙ 109] Belt Paddle Feedback Permissive prop to Rate 5705
P15.17 [➙ 109] DI: Motor feedback DI 5720
P15.18 [➙ 109] Event: Motor Start A 5721
P15.19 [➙ 109] DI: Coal Flow Monitor DI 5726
P15.20 [➙ 109] Level/Temperatur Sensor Delay 100 lb 5699
P15.21 [➙ 109] Event: Coal Flow A 5727
P15.22 [➙ 109] DI: Configuration Lock DI 5728
P15.23 [➙ 109] DI: Remote CTRL n/a 5735
P15.24 [➙ 109] DI: OFF/Maint CTRL n/a 5736
P15.25 [➙ 109] DI: Local Start n/a 5737
P15.26 [➙ 109] DI: Jog forward n/a 5738
P15.27 [➙ 109] DI: Jog backward n/a 5739
P15.34 [➙ 109] DI: Volumetric Mode n/a 4421

Parameters
16 - Digital Outputs
P16.01 [➙ 118] DO: Scale Start DO 4433
P16.02 [➙ 118] DO: Feeder Started n/a 4434
P16.03 [➙ 118] DO: Feeder running (2nd) n/a 5671
P16.04 [➙ 118] DO: Feeder Run Forward DO 5740
P16.05 [➙ 118] DO: Feeder Run Forward (2nd) n/a 5672
P16.06 [➙ 118] DO: Feeder Run Reverse DO 5741
P16.07 [➙ 118] DO: Feeder Run Reverse (2nd) n/a 5673
P16.08 [➙ 118] DO: Start Prefeeder n/a 4435
P16.09 [➙ 118] DO: ALARM DO 4436
P16.10 [➙ 118] DO: ALARM (2nd) n/a 5674
P16.11 [➙ 118] DO: Deviation n/a 4437
P16.12 [➙ 118] DO: I-MIN n/a 4438
P16.13 [➙ 118] DO: I-MAX n/a 4439
P16.14 [➙ 118] DO: Q-MIN n/a 4440
P16.15 [➙ 118] DO: Q-MAX n/a 4441
P16.16 [➙ 118] DO: v-MIN n/a 4442
P16.17 [➙ 118] DO: v-MAX n/a 4443
P16.18 [➙ 118] DO: Volumetric Mode DO 4444
P16.19 [➙ 118] DO: Volumetric Mode (2nd) n/a 5675
P16.20 [➙ 118] DO: Local Mode n/a 4445
P16.21 [➙ 118] DO: WARNING DO 4759
P16.22 [➙ 118] DO: WARNING (2nd) n/a 5676
P16.23 [➙ 118] DO: Feeding DO 5742
P16.24 [➙ 118] DO: Feeding (2nd) n/a 5677
P16.25 [➙ 118] DO: Remote CTRL DO 5750
P16.26 [➙ 118] DO: Remote CTRL (2nd) n/a 5678
17 - Analog calibration
P17.01 [➙ 123] Analog Input 1 Min 4 mA 5755
P17.02 [➙ 123] Analog Input 1 Max 20 mA 5756

Parameters
P17.11 [➙ 123] Analog Output 1 Min 4 mA 5765
P17.12 [➙ 123] Analog Output 1 Max 20 mA 5766
18 - 2-Sensor Slip
P18.01 [➙ 126] 2-Sensor Slip active NO 5433
P18.02 [➙ 126] Source Sensor 1 Speed 5434
P18.03 [➙ 126] DI: Sensor 1 n/a 5435
P18.04 [➙ 126] Characteristic Value Sensor 1 100 P/inch 5436
P18.05 [➙ 126] DI: Sensor 2 n/a 5437
P18.06 [➙ 126] Characteristic Value Sensor 2 100 P/inch 5438

Parameters
P18.07 [➙ 126] Slip Value 2 2 % LB 5439
P18.08 [➙ 126] Event: Slip 2 IG 5440
P18.09 [➙ 126] DO: Slip 2 n/a 5443
19 - Maintenance interval
P19.01 [➙ 127] Maintenance Electric 3000 h 4465
P19.02 [➙ 127] Event: Maint. Electric IG 4466
P19.03 [➙ 127] Maintenance Feeder Run 3000 h 4467
P19.04 [➙ 127] Event: Maint.Feeder Run IG 4468
20 - Data Logging
P20.01 [➙ 128] Hourly Total Time 0 min 5743
P20.02 [➙ 128] Daily Total Time 0 min 5744
21 - Communication EasyServe
P21.01 [➙ 129] Own Address 1 4520
P21.02 [➙ 129] Baud Rate 38400 4521
P21.03 [➙ 129] Format Data 8-N-1 6189
22 - Communication Fieldbus
P22.01 [➙ 129] Protocol Type NO 4528
P22.02 [➙ 129] Timeout Host 5s 4529
P22.03 [➙ 129] Event: Cyclic Communication A 4530
P22.04 [➙ 129] Modbus-Version compatible Stock 5729
P22.05 [➙ 129] Word Sequence I:std/L:std 6246
P22.06 [➙ 129] Byte Sequence High - Low 6245
P22.07 [➙ 129] Configuration FIXED_COMP_8_16 4661
P22.08 [➙ 129] Address 1 4531
P22.09 [➙ 129] Resolution 4096 4533
P22.10 [➙ 129] Baud rate 19200 4535
P22.11 [➙ 129] Data Format 8-O-1 4656
P22.12 [➙ 129] Physics RS232 6186

Parameters
P22.13 [➙ 129] Address 16 4539
P22.14 [➙ 129] FLOAT-Format IEEE 4540
P22.15 [➙ 129] Address 63 4541
P22.16 [➙ 129] Baud rate 125K 4542
P22.17 [➙ 129] Parameter NO 4658
P22.18 [➙ 129] Preset Count 2 4734
P22.19 [➙ 129] READ_ID Count 6 4659
P22.20 [➙ 129] Access Rights Control NO 4786
P22.21 [➙ 129] Remote IP Address 192.168.240.250 4787
23 - Ethernet
P23.01 [➙ 134] IP Address 192.168.240.1 6235
P23.02 [➙ 134] Net Mask 255.255.255.0 6236
P23.03 [➙ 134] Gateway 0.0.0.0 6237
24 - PLC Outputs
P24.01 [➙ 134] DO: PLC 1 n/a 4662
P24.02 [➙ 134] DO: PLC 2 n/a 4663
P24.03 [➙ 134] DO: PLC 3 n/a 4664
P24.04 [➙ 134] DO: PLC 4 n/a 4665
P24.05 [➙ 134] DO: PLC 5 n/a 4666
P24.06 [➙ 134] DO: PLC 6 n/a 4667
P24.07 [➙ 134] DO: PLC 7 n/a 4668
P24.08 [➙ 134] DO: PLC 8 n/a 4669
P24.09 [➙ 134] AO: PLC 1 n/a 4670
P24.10 [➙ 134] AO: PLC 2 n/a 4671
25 - Fixed mode configuration

P25.01 [➙ 136] ID Preset Value 1 320 6247
P25.02 [➙ 136] ID Preset Value 2 352 6248
P25.03 [➙ 136] ID Preset Value 3 384 6249
P25.04 [➙ 136] ID Preset Value 4 592 6250

Parameters
P25.05 [➙ 136] ID Preset Value 5 0 6251
P25.06 [➙ 136] ID Preset Value 6 0 6252
P25.07 [➙ 136] ID Preset Value 7 0 6253
P25.08 [➙ 136] ID Preset Value 8 0 6254
P25.09 [➙ 136] ID Read Value 1 752 6256
P25.10 [➙ 136] ID Read Value 2 816 6257
P25.11 [➙ 136] ID Read Value 3 1552 6258
P25.12 [➙ 136] ID Read Value 4 1872 6259
P25.13 [➙ 136] ID Read Value 5 1894 6260
P25.14 [➙ 136] ID Read Value 6 2230 6261
P25.15 [➙ 136] ID Read Value 7 2232 6262
P25.16 [➙ 136] ID Read Value 8 2234 6263
P25.17 [➙ 136] ID Read Value 9 0 6264
P25.18 [➙ 136] ID Read Value 10 0 6265
P25.19 [➙ 136] ID Read Value 11 0 6266
P25.20 [➙ 136] ID Read Value 12 0 6267
P25.21 [➙ 136] ID Read Value 13 0 6268
P25.22 [➙ 136] ID Read Value 14 0 6269
P25.23 [➙ 136] ID Read Value 15 0 6270
P25.24 [➙ 136] ID Read Value 16 0 6271
26 - FCB analog outputs

P26.01 [➙ 139] FCB_AO 01 n/a 20481
P26.02 [➙ 139] Offset FCB_AO 1 4 mA 6272
P26.03 [➙ 139] Range FCB_AO 1 20 mA 6273
P26.04 [➙ 139] Reference FCB_AO 1 1000 6274
P26.05 [➙ 139] FCB_AO 02 n/a 20482
P26.06 [➙ 139] Offset FCB_AO 2 4 mA 6275
P26.07 [➙ 139] Range FCB_AO 2 20 mA 6276
P26.09 [➙ 139] FCB_AO 03 n/a 20483
P26.10 [➙ 139] Offset FCB_AO 3 4 mA 6278

Parameters
P26.11 [➙ 139] Range FCB_AO 3 20 mA 6279
P26.13 [➙ 139] FCB_AO 04 n/a 20484
P26.14 [➙ 139] Offset FCB_AO 4 4 mA 6281
P26.15 [➙ 139] Range FCB_AO 4 20 mA 6282
P26.17 [➙ 139] FCB_AO 05 n/a 20485
P26.18 [➙ 139] Offset FCB_AO 5 4 mA 6284
P26.19 [➙ 139] Range FCB_AO 5 20 mA 6285
27 - FCB digital outputs

P27.01 [➙ 142] FCB_DO 01 n/a 20529
P27.02 [➙ 142] FCB_DO 02 n/a 20530
P27.03 [➙ 142] FCB_DO 03 n/a 20531
P27.04 [➙ 142] FCB_DO 04 n/a 20532
P27.05 [➙ 142] FCB_DO 05 n/a 20533
P27.06 [➙ 142] FCB_DO 06 n/a 20534
P27.07 [➙ 142] FCB_DO 07 n/a 20535
P27.08 [➙ 142] FCB_DO 08 n/a 20536
P27.09 [➙ 142] FCB_DO 09 n/a 20537
P27.10 [➙ 142] FCB_DO 10 n/a 20538
P27.11 [➙ 142] FCB_DO 11 n/a 20539
P27.12 [➙ 142] FCB_DO 12 n/a 20540
P27.13 [➙ 142] FCB_DO 13 n/a 20541
P27.14 [➙ 142] FCB_DO 14 n/a 20542
P27.15 [➙ 142] FCB_DO 15 n/a 20543
P27.16 [➙ 142] FCB_DO 16 n/a 20544
P27.17 [➙ 142] FCB_DO 17 n/a 20545

Parameters
P27.18 [➙ 142] FCB_DO 18 n/a 20546
P27.19 [➙ 142] FCB_DO 19 n/a 20547
P27.20 [➙ 142] FCB_DO 20 n/a 20548
28 - Configuration HMI Values

P28.01 [➙ 145] HMI Value 01 1884 6299
P28.02 [➙ 145] HMI Value 02 1880 6300
P28.03 [➙ 145] HMI Value 03 2276 6301
P28.04 [➙ 145] HMI Value 04 2292 6302
P28.05 [➙ 145] HMI Value 05 2236 6303
P28.06 [➙ 145] HMI Value 06 2234 6304
P28.07 [➙ 145] HMI Value 07 2224 6305
P28.08 [➙ 145] HMI Value 08 2226 6306
P28.09 [➙ 145] HMI Value 09 1904 6307
P28.10 [➙ 145] HMI Value 10 1960 6308
10.2.2 Parameter Details
10.2.2.1 Parameter Block

Block 01 - Hardware Modules
Parameters in this group are used to select the error conditions that are generated by communication errors
and to indicate to the controller which I/O module has been installed in each of the analog I/O slots. The
analog I/O channels that are defined here are used in later parameter groups.
The VCU 20103 has three built in analog channels and four slots for analog I/O modules. On the VCU 20103
channel A10 is closest to the power supply and channel A13 is farthest from the power supply.
P01.01 Event: Communication VHM Default: W2

The parameter selects the error condition generated when communications between the
DT-9 and the touch screen HMI are lost for more then 10 seconds. The touch screen HMI
must be connected to the X96 Ethernet port. This connector is located toward the center of
the board, is marked in red and is keyed for a special cable.
The parameter should be set to W2 (Warning with automatic reset).
Actions:
- Check operation of touch screen display (see display section).
- Check cable connections.
- Is correct Ethernet connection used?

Parameters
P01.02 Event: Communication ARM7 Default: A

The parameter selects the error condition generated when communications between the
ARM9 main processor and the ARM7 auxiliary processor are lost.
The parameter must always be set to A (Stop feeder) because the controller can not oper-
ate when communications are lost.
Action:
- Check cable connections between boards.
- Replace controller.
P01.03 Analog Channel A10 Default: NO

Alternative: NO
AI2 (Analog In 2)
AO3 (Analog Out 3)
This parameter specifies the analog I/O card that is installed in position A10. It is connected
to terminal blocks X12-1 and X12-2.
This I/O port is not normally used on the VCU 20103 and this parameter is normally set to
NO.

Alternative: NO
AI3 (Analog In 3)
AO4 (Analog Out 4)
This parameter specifies the analog input card that is installed in position A11. It is con-
nected to terminal blocks X12-3 and X12-4.
NO.

Alternative: NO
AI4 (Analog In 4)
AO5 (Analog Out 5)
NO.

Parameters

Alternative: NO
AI5 (Analog In 5)
AO6 (Analog Out 6)
NO.
10.2.2.2 Parameter Block 02 - Feeder Definition

This parameter group is used to specify the rating of the components in the weighing system.
P02.01 Language Default: ENGLISH

Alternative: DEUTSCH
ENGLISH
OTHER
This parameter selects the language used in DT 9 displays. When it is set to “OTHER” the
individual display strings can be set using EasyServe.
P02.02 Units Default: English

Alternative: Metric
English
This parameter selects the units used for displays and parameter inputs. Either SI (metric)
or normal American (English) units may be selected.
P02.03 Scale Name Default: DISOCONT TERSUS

CF
This parameter specifies the text string to identify the feeder and is shown on the top line of
the touch screen HMI.
This parameter is set according to customer preference.
P02.04 Password Default: 10000

Min: 1000 Max: 9999
This parameter specifies the password used to restrict access to various controller func-
tions.
Note: This parameter can be changed using EasyServe in the event that the password is
lost.
Note: Some functions may require an alternate password. The default value is 7353.

Parameters
P02.05 Nominal Flow Rate Io Default: 50000 lb/h

Min: 0 lb/h Max: 220000000 lb/h
This parameter is used to specify the feeder design feedrate. It is similar to 196NT Setup
05 (Maximum Feedrate) and is used for limit alarms and display outputs. It should always
be set to the same value as parameter P03.05 Maximum Feedrate. It is also used to scale
the analog I/O channels and to calculate the simulated load when the controller is installed
on a volumetric feeder.
This parameter is set based on customer requirements and the mechanical design of the
feeder. Check the project manual or certified drawings to insure that the proper value is
selected.
Note: If both P04.07 Source Load Cell and P04.08 Source Load Cell 2 are set to Not Used,
the load cells will be disabled and the system will operate as a volumetric feeder. The DT-9
will calculate an assumed belt load based on P02.05 Nominal Flow Rate Io and P02.06
Nominal Speed as shown below.
Nominal Belt Load = (P02.05 Nominal Flow Rate Io) / (3600 X P02.06 Nominal Speed)
P02.06 Nominal Speed Default: 3 inch/s

Min: 0.001 inch/s Max: 500 inch/s
This parameter is used to scale the belt speed analog output (i.e., Maximum analog signal
= Nominal speed) and serves as the reference value for limit value monitoring. Nominal
speed, together with nominal feedrate, is used to calculate the nominal belt load.
Nominal speed is calculated as:
(P02.05 Nominal Flow Rate Io) / (300 X Nom. Density X P04.10 Load cross section)
Note: If both P04.07 Belt LC Left and P04.08 Belt LC Right are set to Not Used, the load
cells will be disabled and the system will operate as a volumetric feeder. The DT-9 will cal-
culate an assumed belt load based on P02.05 Nominal Flow Rate and P02.06 Nominal Belt
Speed as shown below.
Nominal Belt Load = (P02.05 Nominal Flow Rate) / (3600 X P02.06 Nominal Belt Speed)
P02.07 Display Formats Default: SELECTABLE

Alternative: STANDARD
SELECTABLE
This parameter allows the operator to either, accept the standard set of display formats
(determined by the controller based on the P02.05 Nominal Flow Rate Io) or to select the
display formats individually using parameters P02.08 through P02.11.
This parameter should be set according to customer preference. The default value is
STANDARD, which is suitable for most applications.

Parameters
P02.08 Flow Rate Units Default: ----.- lb/h

Alternative: ------ lb/h
----.- lb/h
---.-- lb/h
--.--- lb/h
------ t/h
----.- t/h
---.-- t/h
--.--- t/h
----.-- lb/min
------ lb/s
----.- lb/s
---.-- lb/s
--.--- lb/s
This parameter selects the format used to display feedrate values. It is only visible when
parameter P02.07 Display Formats is set to SELECTABLE and the available options de-
pend on the selection value of parameter P02.02 Units.
This parameter should be set according to customer preference.
P02.09 Counter 1 Unit Default: ------- lb

Alternative: ------- lb
-----.- lb
----.-- lb
---.--- lb
------- t
-----.- t
----.-- t
---.--- t
This parameter selects the format used to display the total value in Counter 1. It is only
visible when parameter P02.07 Display Formats is set to SELECTABLE and the available
options depend on the selection value of parameter P02.02 Units.

-----.- lb
----.-- lb
---.--- lb
------- t
-----.- t
----.-- t
---.--- t

Parameters

-----.- lb
----.-- lb
---.--- lb
------- t
-----.- t
----.-- t
---.--- t
P02.12 DO: Pulse Counter Default: DO V103.DO12 High

Alternative: DO V103.DO12 High
n/a
This parameter specifies the digital output used for the Total Coal Integrator (TCI).
The TCI cycles continuously while the feeder is in operation. To prevent premature failure
of the output relay this parameter should always be set to DO 12 (Reed Relays - Terminal
blocks X16-3 through X16-6).
P02.13 Totalizer Increment Default: 100 lb

Min: 0 lb Max: 100000 lb
This parameter sets the weight associated with each Total Coal Integrator (TCI) pulse. It is
the same as 196NT Setup 07 (Remote Totalizer Data Logging Increment).
The TCI output frequency is based on parameter P02.11, parameter P02.12 and the actual
feedrate. If the values selected for these parameters require an output frequency greater
then the maximum frequency of the selected device, an error (MF 14 - P02.13) will be gen-
erated. See parameter P02.12 for more information.
This parameter is normally set to either 100 Lbs or 100 Kg.

Parameters
P02.14 Pulse Length Total Default: 0.1 s

Min: 0 s Max: 10 s
This parameter sets the duration of each Total Coal Integrator (TCI) pulse. It is the same as
196NT Setup 35 (Remote Totalizer Pulse Width).
The TCI output frequency is based on this parameter, parameter P02.11 and the actual
feedrate. If this combination of values requires an output frequency greater then the maxi-
mum frequency of the selected device, an error (MF 14 - P02.13) will be generated.
The maximum pulse frequency can be calculated as:
Frequency = (P03.05 Maximum Feedrate) / ((3600) x ( P02.11))
When the TCI output is directed to an open collector or reed relay output the maximum
possible pulse frequency is 10 Hz (P02.12 set to 0.05 sec). When the TCI output is directed
to a mechanical relay output the maximum possible pulse frequency is 1.0 Hz (P02.12 set
to 0.5 sec). When the pulse length (P02.12) is increased, these values are reduced.
The maximum possible frequency (in Hz) is calculated as:
Max. possible freq. = 1 / (2 X P02.12 (in sec))
To insure that the TCI output works correctly the maximum pulse frequency must always be
less then the maximum possible frequency.
P02.15 Event: Remote TCI too small Default: W2

Event Group: MF Number: 14
The parameter selects the error condition generated when totalizer pulses for the Total
Coal Integrator (TCI) output are generated faster then the TCI output can operate. See
parameter P02.14 Pulse Length Total for more information.
This parameter should be set to W2.
Action: Set P02.13 Totalizer Increment and/or P02.14 Pulse Length Total to a smaller val-
ue.
P02.16 Maintenance Speed Default: 50 %

Min: 0 % Max: 100 %
This parameter determines the Motor Speed Control (MSC) demand signal used during
maintenance (local, calibrate, jog) operations. It is similar to 196NT Setup 01 (Speed Set-
point) except that the MSC demand signal is set rather then the actual motor speed (open
loop operation). The actual motor RPM is determined by the characteristics of the motor
and the MSC.
This parameter is normally set to 50% which will produce a motor speed of approximately
900 RPM with a 4 pole, 60 Hz motor.

Parameters
P02.17 DO: FRI Frequency Default: DO V103.DO13 High

n/a
This parameter specifies the digital output used for the Feed Rate Indicator (FRI). This
parameter output can only be set to DO 13 (terminal block X6-1 and X6-2) which is an iso-
lated, unpowered, transistor output.
P02.18 Remote FRI Frequency Default: 10 Hz/(t/h)

Min: 0 Hz/(t/h) Max: 2000000 Hz/(t/h)
The value of this parameter is used to calculate remote Feedrate Indicator (FRI) output
frequency. It must be selected so that the FRI output at the minimum feedrate (see P03.06)
is greater then 1.0 Hz and the FRI output at the maximum feedrate (see P03.06) is less
then 1000 Hz.
This parameter is normally set to 10.0 Hz / Ton/hr
P02.20 Codepage Default: Unicode UTF-8

Alternative: Standard (8859-1)
Latin-2 (8859-2)
Cyrillic (1251)
Japanese Shift-JIS
Chinese 936 (GBK)
Chinese EUC-CN
Unicode UTF-8
Unicode UTF-16
P02.21 DC_Mode Default: NO

Alternative: NO
YES
This parameter allows for changing of the type of load cell excitation voltage.
When set to NO, the load cell is supplied by a rectangular AC voltage. This mode should be
used in case the load cell is connected straight to the load cell interface of the controller.
This mode provides best suppression of thermal effects in the load cell cable and terminals.
When set to YES, the load cell is supplied by a DC voltage. This mode requires the installa-
tion of an external load cell amplifier close to the load cell with a transmission of the DC
output signal on a higher voltage and current level to suppress thermal effects in the load
cell cable and terminals.

Parameters
10.2.2.3 Parameter Block 03 - Control Sources

This parameter group is used to select the control sources for use during Remote mode operation.
P03.01 Feeder Start Default: DI V103.DI2 High

Alternative: DI V103.DI2 High
OP
FB
This parameter selects the digital input used as the feeder start command.
Caution: This is a static input! Switching to remote control mode with the start input acti-
vated will start the feeder.
This parameter is normally set to DI 2 – High (terminal block X1-4) and is connected to wire
112.
P03.02 Feedrate Setpoint Default: AI V103.AI1

Alternative: AI V103.AI1
OP
FB
This parameter selects the source for the feedrate demand signal and can be set to the
following values:
AI 3 for use with an analog (usually 4-20mA) input signal on SIG+ and SIG-
R-L for use with the Raise/Lower input signals (See P03.07 and P03.08). The demand sig-
nal is set to its lower limit in case the feeder is switched off.
OP for use with EasyServe
FB or remote control using a Field Bus
This parameter is normally set to AI 3. Check the certified drawings to insure that the prop-
er value is selected.
P03.03 Setpoint Range Default: 20 mA

Min: 0 mA Max: 1000 mA
This parameter determines the nominal 100% signal level for the analog input channel. It
should be set to 20.0 for a 0-20mA, 4-20mA or 0-10V input.
This parameter is normally set to 20.00 mA and is only active when P03.02 is set to an
analog input signal.
Note: When an analog input card is used, the input jumper must be set toward the outside
of the card for a voltage input signal and toward the middle of the card for a current input
signal.

Parameters
P03.04 Setpoint Offset Default: 4 mA

Min: -200 mA Max: 200 mA
This parameter determines the nominal 0% signal level for the analog input channel.
This parameter is normally set to 4.00 mA and is only active when P03.02 is set to an ana-
log input signal. If a zero based signal (0-20mA or 0-10V) is used it must be set to 0.00 mA.
Note: When an analog input card is used, the input jumper must be set toward the outside
of the card for a voltage input signal and toward the middle of the card for a current input
signal.
P03.05 Maximum Feedrate Default: 50000 lb/h

Min: 0 lb/h Max: 220000000 lb/h
This is the maximum feedrate clamp. The feeder will not operate above this rate regardless
of the feedrate demand signal. This is similar to the 196NT parameter 05 (Maximum Fee-
drate). It should always be set to the same values as parameter P02.05 Nominal Flow Rate
Io.
This parameter is set based on customer requirements and the mechanical design of the
feeder. Check the project specifications or certified drawings to insure that the proper value
is selected.
P03.06 Minimum Feedrate Default: 5000 lb/h

Min: 0 lb/h Max: 220000000 lb/h
This is the minimum feedrate clamp. The feeder will not operate below this rate regardless
of the feedrate demand signal. This is similar to the 196NT parameter 06 (Minimum Fee-
drate).
This parameter is set based on customer requirements and the minimum motor speed.
Check the project specifications or certified drawings to insure that the proper value is se-
lected.
P03.07 DI: Raise Setpoint Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
This parameter selects the digital input signal used as the raise feedrate setpoint com-
mand.
This parameter is only active if P03.02 is set to R-L.
This parameter is normally set to DI 3 – High (terminal block X1-2), or Not Used, and is
connected to wire 113.

Parameters
P03.08 DI: Lower Setpoint Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
This parameter selects the digital input signal used as the lower feedrate setpoint com-
mand.
This parameter is normally set to DI 11 – High (terminal block X4-5), or Not Used, and is
connected to wire 114.
P03.09 Raise/Lower Response Time Default: 30 s

Min: 5 s Max: 300 s
This parameter determines the speed at which the feedrate setpoint changes when the
raise or lower input is active. The value represents the approximate time, in seconds, for
the setpoint to go from 0% to 100%. This is similar to the 196NT parameter 28
(Raise/Lower Response Time).
P03.10 Source Run Enable Default: DI V103.DI8 High

n/a
FB
This parameter selects the digital input signal used as the belt motor start permissive.
When it is enabled, (set to a digital input) an active signal on the designated input is re-
quired to start the belt drive motor. When it is set to n/a, this feature is disabled.
This parameter is normally set to DI 8 - High (terminal block X3-4) and is connected to (wire
111).
Caution: Setting this parameter to n/a will disable the Run Enable feature and create an
unsafe operating condition. The Run Enable input must ALWAYS be enabled and con-
nected to a user accessible stop switch.

Parameters
P03.11 Event: Run Disabled Default: W2

Event Group: IL Number: 01
The parameter selects the method used to annunciate the error condition when the Run
Enable input is not active. Setting the parameter to IG does not disable the Run Enable
feature but it does prevent an error from being generated.
The parameter is normally set to W2 so that there is an indication on the display when the
feeder is disabled.
Cause of event:
- When a touch screen HMI is used, parameter P03.10 Source Run Enable must be set to
DI 8, which is connected to the stop switch mounted under the HMI. This switch is used to
stop the feeder in the event that the HMI is disabled or disconnected.
Action:
- Check the position of the Run Enable switch.
- Check the wiring to the Run Enable switch.
Note: The Run Enable switch is not normally used with the Stock 196NT display and in this
case P03.10 Source Run Enable must be set to n/a to allow motor operation.
P03.12 Mode Select Enable/Disable Default: Keyb.,Remote & Local

Alternative: Keyboard only
Keyboard & Local
Keyb.,Remote & Local
This parameter is used to enable the Remote (P15.23 DI: Remote CTRL) and Local
(P15.25 DI: Local Start) digital inputs. The Remote and Local digital inputs are edge trig-
gered, meaning that their function is initiated by the transition from OFF to ON or, ON to
OFF rather then by their state. This type of operation allows the feeder to be stopped due to
an error condition or a keyboard input, even when the digital input is active.
The operation of the Remote and Local digital inputs is described below.
Keyboard Only - Both the Remote and Local digital inputs are ignored at all times.
Keyboard & Local - The Remote input is ignored but the Local input is active. If the feeder
is in OFF/Maint mode and stopped, energizing the Local input will cause the feeder to run
in Local mode. If the feeder is in OFF/Maint mode and running, de-energizing the Local
input will cause the feeder to stop.
Keyboard, Remote & Local - Both the Remote and Local input are active. If the feeder is
in OFF/Maint mode and stopped, energizing the Local input will start the feeder in Local
mode and energizing the Remote input will force the feeder into Remote mode. If the feeder
is in OFF/Maint mode and running, the Remote input will be ignored and de-energizing the
Local input will stop the feeder. If the feeder is in Remote mode, the Local input is ignored
and de-energizing the Remote input will force the feeder into OFF/Maint mode.
The keyboard is always enabled regardless of the value selected for this parameter.
This parameter is normally set to Keyboard Only.

Parameters
P03.13 Speed Setpoint Default: 200 rpm

Min: 10 rpm Max: 30000 rpm
This parameter is used to set motor RPM when P03.14 Run Mode Select is set to Speed
Setpoint.
P03.14 Run Mode Select Default: Frate Setpoint

Alternative: Frate Setpoint
Speed Setpoint
This parameter allows the feeder to operate in remote at a fixed motor speed. It is normally
set to Frate Setpoint for normal control and when in this mode the controller responds to
the Analog input or Raise/Lower contacts. When Speed Setpoint is selected the motor
speed is fixed at the value specified in P03.13 Speed Setpoint and the controller does not
respond to either the analog input or the Raise/Lower contacts. Selecting Speed Setpoint is
similar to setting 196NT Setup 03 (Run Mode Select) to 5 (RPM Setpoint).
This parameter MUST be set to Frate Setpoint
P03.15 Density Setpoint Default: 50.955 lb/ft3

Min: 1 lb/ft3 Max: 100000 lb/ft3
This parameter specifies the bulk material density in weight per volume. The value is rele-
vant during the very first startup of the feeder and in case the feeder doesn't have load cells
to deternine the belt load.
10.2.2.4 Parameter Block 04 - Rated Data

The parameters of this group describe important characteristic values of the scales' mechanics.
P04.01 LC Characteristic Value Default: 3 mV/V

Min: 0.01 mV/V Max: 10 mV/V
This parameter specifies the Load cell rated output. Both load cells must have the same
output value. Our normally use 3.000 mV/V load cells.
P04.02 LC Rated Capacity Default: 100 lb

Min: 0.5 lb Max: 220000000 lb
This parameter specifies the rated capacity of each load cell. Both load cells must have the
same capacity. Our normally use 100.0 Lbs (50 kg) load cells but smaller load cells may be
used for low capacity feeders or feeders with a short weigh span.
This parameter is normally set to 100.0 Lbs (50 kg). Check the project manual or certified
drawings to insure that the proper value is selected.

Parameters
P04.03 Effective Platform Length Default: 18 inch

Min: 0.1 inch Max: 50 inch
This parameter specifies the length of belt that is supported by the load cells. Our use a
three roller weighing system with one weighing roller, supported by the load cells, and two
fixed weigh span rollers. In this configuration, one half of the weight between the weigh
span rollers is supported by the load cells and this parameter must be set to one half of the
distance between the weigh span rollers.
This parameter must be set to ½ the value of 196NT Setup 10 Weigh Span Length, normal-
ly 18 inches (45.7cm) on new feeder installations and 19.146 (48,6 cm) on mechanical
feeder conversions.
P04.04 Lever Ratio Default: 1

Min: 0.01 Max: 2
This parameter is used to specify the ratio of weigh on the load cell and total platform weigh
on multi weigh roller systems.
This parameter MUST be set to 1.000.
P04.05 Angle Default: 0 degree

Min: 0 degree Max: 60 degree
This parameter is used to specify the feeder inclination and is used to adjust the weight
signal when the load cell is mounted perpendicular to the belt on an inclined feeder. The
load cells in our are always mounted vertically, to eliminate weighing errors, and this ad-
justment is not necessary.
The parameter must be set to 0.00 degrees.
P04.06 Speed Measurement Default: DI V103.DI15 High

n/a
This parameter selects the digital input used for the tachometer input signal.
This parameter is normally set to DI 15 (terminal block X5-1 & X5-2) and is connected to
(wires 145 & 146).
Note: If DI 14 is selected, a NAMUR type sensor must be used, and connected to X5-3 &
X5-4.

Parameters
P04.07 Source Load Cell Default: LC V103.LC1

Alternative: LC V103.LC1
n/a
This parameter specifies the input channel connected to the load cell on the left side of the
feeder (viewed in the direction of belt travel).
This parameter should always be set to LC 1.
Note: Setting both P04.07 Source Load Cell and P04.08 Source Load Cell 2 to Not Used,
will disable the load cells and force the system to operate as a volumetric feeder. The DT-9
will calculate an assumed density and belt load based on P02.05 Nominal Flow Rate Io and
P02.06 Nominal Speed.
P04.08 Source Load Cell 2 Default: LC V103.LC2

Alternative: LC V103.LC2
n/a
This parameter specifies the input channel connected to the load cell on the right side of
the feeder (viewed in the direction of belt travel).
This parameter should always be set to LC 2.
Note: Setting both P04.07 Source Load Cell and P04.08 Source Load Cell 2 to Not Used,
will disable the load cells and force the system to operate as a volumetric feeder. The DT-9
will calculate an assumed density and belt load based on P02.05 Nominal Flow Rate Io and
P02.06 Nominal Speed.
P04.09 Tachometer: Pulses per Rev Default: 60 P/rev

Min: 1 P/rev Max: 1000 P/rev
This parameter specifies the number of pulses generated by the tachometer for each revo-
lution of the motor. It is similar to 196NT Setup 09 tachometer type.
This parameter is set based on the type or tachometer that is installed. In most (but not all)
cases, feeders that use a VFD control use a tachometer that produces 60 pulses per revo-
lution and feeders that use an Eddy Current Clutch use a tachometer that produces 12
pulses per revolution. Check the project specifications or certified drawings to insure that
the proper value is selected.
P04.10 Load cross section Default: 157 inch2

Min: 0.1 inch2 Max: 100000 inch2
This parameter specifies the area under the inlet leveling bar.
This parameter is normally set to 157.0 square inches (1013 square cm). Check the project
specifications or certified drawings to insure that the proper value is selected.

Parameters
10.2.2.5 Parameter Block 05 - Feeder control

This parameter group specifies the actions to be taken when error conditions are detected.
P05.01 Volum on LC failure Default: YES

Alternative: NO
YES
This parameter allows the DT-9 to force the feeder into volumetric mode in the event of a
weighing system failure. Volumetric mode is independent of the event generated in P05.02
Event: Volum on failure.
This parameter should always be set to YES.
P05.02 Event: Volum on failure Default: IG

Event Group: CO Number: 05
The parameter is used to specify the type of error that is generated in the event of a weigh-
ing system failure. This event is independent of volumetric mode.
The parameter should be set to IG (Ignore).
Cause of event:
- Indicates that the system is in volumetric mode due to failure in the weighing system.
Action:
- Check for load cell wiring errors or imbalanced load cell inputs.
P05.03 Afterflow Totalizer Default: 0 s

Min: 0 s Max: 2000 s
This parameter specifies the amount of time that the feeder continues to totalize after the
belt has stopped.
This parameter should always be set to 0.0 sec.
P05.04 Zero Drop-Out Active Default: NO

Alternative: NO
YES
This parameter is used to specify that the DT-9 should stop totalizing and set the weight
signal to zero when the load on the belt reaches a low limit specified by P05.05 Zero Drop-
Out Limit
This parameter must be set to NO.

Parameters
P05.05 Zero Drop-Out Limit Default: 1 % Q

Min: 0 % Q Max: 10 % Q
This parameter specifies the limit at which the weight signal will be set to zero and the DT-9
will stop totalizing if P05.04 Zero Drop-Out Active is set to YES.
This parameter should be set to 1.00%.
10.2.2.6 Parameter Block 06 - Feeder Monitoring

This parameter group can be used to cause various feeder operating conditions either to produce an alarm
(A) and trip the feeder or to produce a warning (W1 or W2).
P06.01 Event: Stand-By Default: IG

Event Group: SC Number: 02
The parameter selects the error condition generated when the belt drive motor is stopped
because the motor demand signal is less than the limit specified in P06.02 Stand-By Limit
Value.
Cause of event:
- Scale is in standby mode, i.e. setpoint is smaller than set standby limit (Parameter P06.02
Stand-By Limit Value ). Material pre-feeder cuts off.
P06.02 Stand-By Limit Value Default: 0 % Io

Min: 0 % Io Max: 100 % Io
If the motor speed control (MSC) demand signal goes below the limit specified by this pa-
rameter, the required motor speed is set to zero and the motor start contact is de-
energized. There is a 3 second delay before the motor is stopped and no delay before it is
restarted.
Setting this parameter to 0% deactivates this function.
This parameter should normally be set to 5%.

Parameters
P06.03 Event: Tachometer Input Default: A

Event Group: CA Number: 02
The parameter selects the error condition generated when the tachometer signal is lost or
is greater than 3600 Hz.
The parameter should be set to A (Stop Feeder).
Cause of event:
- Input frequency is zero or exceeds 3600 Hz.
Action:
- Insure that the motor is turning.
- Insure that parameter P04.06 Speed Measurement is set to the correct input.
- Check the tachometer wiring.
- Check the tachometer signal using a frequency counter or oscilloscope.
P06.04 Event: Error LC Input Default: IG

The parameter selects the error condition generated when the load cell signal is invalid. If
P05.01 Volum on LC failure is set to YES, this condition will force the feeder into volumetric
mode, regardless of the value selected here.
Cause of event:
- Load cell cable wrong.
- Measuring amplifier A/D converter is in saturated state.
- Supply voltage is below 19V.
- Error must be available for minimum 3s.
Action:
- Check cabling.
- If cabling is OK, load cell amplifier could be defective.
- Check for either possibility. If scale cannot be restarted after remedy of fault, turn device
off and restart.
P06.05 Event: LC Input < MIN Default: IG

Event Group: LO Number: 01
The parameter selects the error condition generated when either of the load cell signals is
less than 3% of the full scale value. If P05.01 Volum on LC failure is set to YES, this condi-
tion will force the feeder into volumetric mode regardless of the value selected here.

Parameters
P06.06 Event: LC Input > MAX Default: IG

Event Group: HI Number: 01
The parameter selects the error condition generated when either of the load cell signals is
greater than the maximum allowable value. If P05.01 Volum on LC failure is set to YES, this
condition will force the feeder into volumetric mode regardless of the value selected here.
This parameter should be set to IG (Ignore).
Cause of event:
- Load cell load is higher than 110% of load cells rated capacities.
Full scale value:
125% with 2.85mV/V load cells
175% with 2mV/V load cells
Action:
- Check material infeed.
P06.07 Event: Setpoint Limited Default: IG

The parameter selects the error condition generated when the feedrate demand signal is
greater than the feedrate limit as determined by the operating mode. In gravimetric mode,
the limit is the lesser of P02.05 Nominal Flow Rate Io or P03.05 Maximum Feedrate. In
volumetric mode, the limit is 3 times P02.05 Nominal Flow Rate Io.
Depending on selected mode:

a) In gravimetric mode, setpoint is limited to nominal feed rate.
b) In volumetric mode, limitation starts from values exceeding 3 times the nominal value.
c) Emergency setpoint is active.
P06.08 Event: Power Failure Default: IG

Event Group: WE Number: 01
The parameter selects the error condition generated when the controller restarts after a
loss of power. If it is set to A, the feeder will not restart after power is lost during normal
remote mode operation.
Cause of event:
- Power failure. Power supply failed or cut off. During power failure, no totalization takes
place. Scale does not start automatically, independent of event class.

Parameters
P06.09 Time Deviation Default: 20 s

Min: 0 s Max: 600 s
This parameter specifies the maximum time that the actual feedrate can differ from the
feedrate setpoint by an amount greater than P06.10 Threshold Deviation before an error is
generated.
This parameter is normally set to 20 sec.
P06.10 Threshold Deviation Default: 5 %

Min: 0 % Max: 100 %
This parameter specifies the minimum amount that the actual feedrate can differ from the
feedrate setpoint without generating an error. The error is generated after a delay specified
by P06.09 Time Deviation.
This parameter is normally set to 5.0 %.
P06.11 Factor Deviation Default: 1

Min: 0 Max: 1
This parameter allows P06.10 Threshold Deviation to be adjusted based on the feedrate
setpoint. This allows the effective threshold to be reduced as the feedrate setpoint is re-
duced.
When P06.11 is set to 1.0 there is no adjustment and the effective threshold is always
equal to P06.10 Threshold Deviation. When P06.11 is set to 0.0 the effective deviation is
calculated by multiplying P06.10 Threshold Deviation by a factor equal to the (feedrate
setpoint) / (P02.05 (Nominal Flow Rate Io).
This parameter should be set to 1.0.
P06.12 Event: Deviation Default: W2

The parameter specifies the event that is generated when the actual feedrate can differ
from the feedrate setpoint by an amount greater than P06.10 Threshold Deviation for a time
greater than P06.09 Time Deviation.
The parameter is similar to the 196NT Feedrate Error and should be set to W2.
Action:
- Check for loss or material on belt.

Parameters
P06.13 Event: Controller Limited Default: IG

Event Group: CO Number: 01
The parameter selects the error condition generated when the motor speed control demand
signal reaches its upper limit.
Cause of event:
- Feed rate controller control magnitude has reached upper response threshold. After some
time, message HI-5 (Deviation) is additionally output.
1. Material flow missing or irregular.

2. External feed rate controller wrongly set.
Action:
- Check material discharge and control magnitude (service value Y). At nominal feed rate, Y
should be 10 to 14mA.
P06.14 Event: Memory Default: W1

The parameter selects the error condition generated when the controller detects an error in
the internal non-volatile memory. Reload the non-volatile memory by using the "Load De-
fault Parameters" function to correct this error. If the problem persists, the controller must
be replaced.
The parameter should be set to A (Stop feeder).
Note: The Load Default Parameters function will reset all of the controller's internal para-
meters, including Calibration and Trim. After this operation is performed, all parameters
must be reset, the feeder must be recalibrated and the analog I/O channels must be re-
trimmed.

Parameters
P06.15 Event: Analog Input < Offset Default: IG

The parameter selects the error condition generated when the analog feedrate demand
signal is more then 0.4 mA below the minimum value (P03.04 Setpoint Offset).
Cause of event:
- The signal available across an analog input is smaller than the offset. A tolerance space
of 0.4 mA is built in for ensuring that events are not constantly set and deleted with noisy
input signals around the offset.
Action:
- Check analog input (Sig+ & Sig-) wiring.
P06.16 DO: Dual Tacho active Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
This parameter selects the digital output used to switch to the secondary tachometer in a
dual tachometer system. The output is reset when the feeder is switched off.
This parameter should be set to n/a in a single tachometer system and DO 3 in a dual ta-
chometer system. DO 3 is normally used by P16.07 DO: Feeder Run Reverse (2nd) which
must be set to not used.
P06.17 Event: Primary Tacho Failure Default: IG

Event is detected in case the primary tachometer doesn't deliver pulses during normal op-
eration.
10.2.2.7 Parameter Block 07 - Belt Monitoring

The parameters in this group control the Belt Motion Monitor (BMM).
P07.01 DI: Belt Motion Monitor Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
This parameter selects the digital input used for the Belt Motion Monitor (BMM).
This parameter is normally set to DI 12 - High (terminal block X4-2) and is connected to
wire 115.

Parameters
P07.02 Belt Motion Monitor Delay Default: 10 s

Min: 0 s Max: 50 s
This parameter sets the maximum delay between Belt Motion Monitor (BMM) pulses before
a BMM error (P07.03 Event: Belt Motion Monitor) is generated. It is the same as 196NT
Setup 17 (Belt Motion Monitor Delay). The interval is determined when the feeder is operat-
ing at its minimum design feed rate and is equal to the time necessary for the pulley or
roller which inputs the sensor to make one complete revolution, divided by two, plus ten
percent. Therefore, time intervals for motion monitors mounted to the tension roll or belt
take-up pulley will be considerably longer than those for sensors mounted to the weigh
span roller.
Example: If the motion monitor is mounted to the weigh span roller which make revolution
every 20 seconds at minimum feed rate, the time interval between pulses before the belt is
certain not to be moving is: 20 / 2 = 10 + 10% = 11.
Note: To disable this function if a belt motion monitor is not installed set P07.03 Event: Belt
Motion Monitor to IG.
P07.03 Event: Belt Motion Monitor Default: IG

Event Group: WM Number: 10
The parameter selects the error condition generated when the belt motion monitor (BMM)
pulse delay is exceeded.
The parameter is normally set to A (Stop Feeder) if a BMM is installed. Setting it to IG (Ig-
nore) will disable the BMM feature.
Cause of event:
- The Belt Motion Monitor (BMM) pulse delay (P07.02) has been exceeded.
P07.04 DI: Source Belt Sensor Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
This parameter is used to specify the digital input used for the belt slip sensor. The slip
sensor is connected to a driven roller and generates a frequency input proportional to the
belt speed. This value is compared to the tachometer signal from the motor to detect belt
slippage at the head pulley. See also: parameters P07.08 Event: Slip and P07.09 DO: Belt
Slip.
This parameter is normally set to n/a.

Parameters
P07.05 BIC Active Default: NO

Alternative: NO
YES
This parameter is used to activate the moisture Belt Influence Compensation (BIC) system.
The BIC system is used in batching feeders to tare individual sections of the belt separately
so that batches that are less then a full belt length are weighted accurately.
The BIC feature is not used in continuous feeding systems and this parameter should al-
ways be set to NO.
P07.06 DI: BIC freeze Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
This parameter is used to specify a digital input that is used to freeze the tare value while
the BIC feature is active.
This parameter is normally set to n/a.
P07.07 Slip Value Default: 10 % LB

Min: 0 % LB Max: 20 % LB
This parameter specifies the maximum amount that the belt speed measured by the belt
slip input can differ from belt speed measured by the tachometer input, without generating
an error.
This parameter is normally set to 10.0 % LB.
P07.08 Event: Slip Default: IG

The parameter selects the error condition generated when the belt slip exceeds the limit
specified in parameter P07.07 Slip Value.
The parameter is normally set to IG.
P07.09 DO: Belt Slip Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
This parameter selects the digital output that is energized when the Belt Slip event is active.
This parameter is normally set to IG.

Parameters
P07.10 Sensor Length Default: 3.23 inch

Lenght of the conductive mark included in the belt measured in travel direction.
P07.11 Sensor Width Default: 4.73 inch

width of the conductive mark included in the belt measured in 90 degrees to the belt travel
direction..
P07.12 Sensor Offset Default: 0 inch

Min: -400 inch Max: 400 inch
Offset can be used to correct belt run monitoring zero point. However, maximum
display range is limited. Bigger differences should be compensated by shifting of
sensor mechanically(see Commissioning chapter).
New display = old display - offset
P07.13 Belt Drift Default: 1.18 inch

Threshold of the belt drift for detection of event Event: Belt Drift.
P07.14 Event: Belt Drift Default: W1

Belt out of tolerance.

Action:
1. Clean tail and drive pulleys.
2. Align belt.
Monitoring can be faulty. Watch belt circuit sensor service value; if need be, remedy
fault.
Related threshold: Belt Drift
P07.15 Belt Skew Default: 1.58 inch

Threshold of the belt drift for detection of event Event: Belt Skew.

Parameters
P07.16 Event: Belt Skew Default: A

Belt has run off-center. Feeder is no longer operable.

Action: See Event: Belt Drift
Related threshold: Belt Skew
P07.17 DO: Belt Drift Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
Digital output reporting Belt Drift event.
See also: P07.13 Belt Drift and P07.14 Event: Belt Drift
P07.18 DO: Belt Skew Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
Digital output reporting Belt Skew event.
See also: P07.15 Belt Skew and P07.16 Event: Belt Skew
10.2.2.8 Parameter Block 08 - Display Filters

The parameters of this group define the time constants of the filters for measurement and display.
P08.01 LC Filter Default: 3 s

Min: 0.25 s Max: 300 s
This parameter sets the amount of digital filtering used on the load cell signals. It is similar
to the 196NT Setup 19 Weight Signal Filter.
P08.02 Filter: Actual Flow Rate Default: 1 s

Min: 0 s Max: 600 s
This parameter sets the amount of digital filtering used on the feedrate value displayed on
the display, EasyServe and field bus interface. It is similar to the 196NT Setup 20 Feedback
Signal Filter.
P08.03 Filter: Actual Flow Rate analog Default: 1 s

Min: 0 s Max: 600 s
This parameter sets the amount of digital filtering used on the feedrate signal sent to the
analog output channel. It is similar to the 196NT Setup 20 Feedback Signal Filter.

Parameters
P08.04 Feedback Filter Override Threshold Default: 15 %

Min: 0 % Max: 200 %
This parameter specifies point at which the point at which the feedback filter is overridden
and the actual feedrate is displayed. This is used so that large changes are displayed
quickly. This parameter is the same as 196NT Setup 21 (Feedback filter override thre-
shold).
P08.05 Filter: Belt Load Default: 1 s

Min: 0 s Max: 600 s
This parameter sets the amount of digital filtering used on the belt load signal sent to the
analog output channel.
P08.06 Filter: Belt Speed Default: 1 s

Min: 0 s Max: 600 s
This parameter sets the amount of digital filtering used on the belt speed signal sent to the
P08.07 Filter: Deviation Default: 1 s

Min: 0 s Max: 600 s
This parameter sets the amount of digital filtering used on the deviation signal sent to the
10.2.2.9 Parameter
Parameter Block 09 - Limit Values
The parameters in this group are used to set the limit points at which various events are generated as well
as selecting the type of event that are generated when the limit points are reached.
Note: Limit values are only checked after the feeder has been running for 10 seconds.
P09.01 Limit: Actual Flow Rate MIN Default: 5 % Io

Min: -10 % Io Max: 200 % Io
This parameter sets the point at which a minimum feedrate event is generated.
This parameter is normally set to 5 % of the nominal flow rate (P02.06).
P09.02 Event: Actual Flow Rate MIN Default: IG

The parameter determines the type of event that is generated when the feedrate is less
than the value specified in P09.01 Limit: Actual Flow Rate MIN.
The parameter is normally set to IG (Ignore)

Parameters
P09.03 Limit: Actual Flow Rate MAX Default: 120 % Io

Min: -10 % Io Max: 200 % Io
This parameter sets the point at which a maximum feedrate event is generated.
This parameter is normally set to 120 % of the nominal flow rate (P02.06).
P09.04 Event: Actual Flow Rate MAX Default: IG

The parameter determines the type of event that is generated when the feedrate exceeds
the value specified in P09.03 Limit: Actual Flow Rate MAX.
This parameter is normally set to IG (Ignore)
Cause of event:
- Flow rate exceeds set maximum value.
P09.05 Limit: Belt Load MIN Default: 60 % Q

Min: -10 % Q Max: 200 % Q
This parameter sets the point at which a minimum belt load event is generated.
This parameter is normally set to 60 % of the nominal belt load (calculated from the nominal
flow rate and the nominal belt speed).
P09.06 Event: Belt Load MIN Default: IG

than the value specified in P09.05 Limit: Belt Load MIN. Set this value to W2 to simulate the
196NT low density alarm.
Cause of event:
- Belt load smaller than set minimum value.
P09.07 Limit: Belt Load MAX Default: 120 % Q

Min: -10 % Q Max: 200 % Q
This parameter sets the point at which a maximum belt load event is generated.
This parameter is normally set to 120 % of the nominal belt load (calculated from the no-
minal flow rate and the nominal belt speed).

Parameters
P09.08 Event: Belt Load MAX Default: IG

the value specified in P09.07 Limit: Belt Load MAX.
Cause of event:
- Belt load exceeds set maximum value.
P09.09 Limit: Speed MIN Default: 5 % V

Min: -10 % V Max: 200 % V
This parameter sets the point at which a minimum belt speed event is generated.
This parameter is normally set to 5 % of the nominal belt speed (P02.06).
P09.10 Event: Speed MIN Default: IG

than the value specified in P09.09 Limit: Speed MIN.
Cause of event:
- Belt speed is smaller than set minimum value.
P09.11 Limit: Speed MAX Default: 120 % V

Min: -10 % V Max: 200 % V
This parameter sets the point at which a maximum belt speed event is generated.
This parameter is normally set to 120 % of the nominal belt speed (P02.06).

Parameters
P09.12 Event: Speed MAX Default: IG

the value specified in P09.01 Limit: Actual Flow Rate MIN.
Cause of event:
- Belt speed exceeds set maximum value.
10.2.2.10 Parameter Block 10 - Calibration Data

The parameters of this group contain the setpoints for setup programs and their outputs. Calibration values
that have been lost can be completely reconstructed by entering earlier values.
P10.01 Calibration Probe Span Default: 36 inch

This parameter specifies the distance between the two calibration probe bosses. It is the
same as the 196NT Setup 12 Calibration Probe Span
This parameter must match the physical characteristics of the feeder but in most cases, it is
set to 36 inches (91,5 cm) for new feeder installations or 38.7 inches (98,3 cm) on mechan-
ical weighing feeder conversions.
P10.02 Pulses per length Default: 300 P/inch

Min: 1 P/inch Max: 1000000 P/inch
This parameter indicates the number of tachometer pulses per lenght unit of belt travel. It is
calculated by the DT-9 during the calibration process based on the time it takes for a cali-
bration tape to travel between the two calibration probes.
This parameter should not normally be changed by the operator.
P10.03 Range Correction TW Default: 1

Min: 0.5 Max: 2
This parameter indicates the correction factor applied to the load cell reading based on a
dead weight calibration (TW: Span Calibration). It is calculated by the DT-9 during the cali-
bration process based on the weigh system characteristics specified in Parameter Group 4,
and on the calibration weight specified in P10.08 Calibration Weight.
Note: The gross weight on the load cells is calculated based on the load cell characteristics
specified in Parameter Group 4 and the product of the three correction factors specified in
P10.03 thru P10.05.

Parameters
P10.04 Range Correction TC Default: 1

Min: 0.5 Max: 2
This parameter indicates the correction factor applied to the load cell reading based on a
chain calibration (TC: Span Calibration). It is calculated by the DT-9 during the calibration
process based on the weigh system characteristics specified in Parameter Block 4, and on
the test chain weight specified in P10.09 Test Chain Weight.
specified in Parameter Block 4 and the product of the three correction factors specified in
P10.03 thru P10.05.
P10.05 Range Correction TM Default: 1

Min: 0.5 Max: 2
This parameter specifies the correction factor applied to the load cell reading based on a
material test. It is calculated by the operator based on the difference between the totalized
value, indicated by the DT-9, and the actual value, determined by an external static scale.
specified in Parameter Block 4 and the product of the three correction factors specified in
P10.03 thru P10.05.
P10.06 Belt Circuit Time Default: 60 s

This parameter specifies the duration of the LB: Pulse/Belt calibration process. This
process counts the number of tachometer pulses received during the specified time and
place the result in P10.11 Belt Circuit No..
P10.07 Simulation Travel (Belt Rev.) Default: 2

Min: 0.5 Max: 5000
This parameter specifies the duration, in belt revolutions, of the TC: Span Calibration
process. This process performs a span calibration using P10.09 Test Chain Weight as the
calibration weight, and places the result in P10.04 Range Correction TC.
This parameter should be set to 2.0 belt revolutions.
P10.08 Calibration Weight Default: 70 lb

Min: 0.001 lb Max: 22000 lb
This parameter specifies the value of the calibration weight used during the span portion of
a feeder calibration (TW: Span Calibration). It is the same as the 196NT Setup 13 Calibra-
tion Weight
The correct value is normally stamped on the calibration weight.

Parameters
P10.09 Test Chain Weight Default: 4.3 lb/inch

Min: 0 lb/inch Max: 22000 lb/inch
This parameter specifies the value of the calibration chain used when a chain calibration
(TC: Span Calibration) is preformed. It is similar to the 196NT Setup 36 Test Chain Weight
P10.10 Basic Tare Default: 0 lb/inch

Min: 0 lb/inch Max: 10000 lb/inch
This parameter indicates the weight of the empty belt. It is calculated by the DT-9 during
the tare portion of the calibration process (BS: Tare/Belt Speed).
P10.11 Belt Circuit No. Default: 1000000 P/B

Min: 0 P/B Max: 9000000 P/B
This parameter indicates the total number of tachometer pulses in one complete belt revo-
lution. It is calculated by the DT-9 during the tare portion of the calibration process (BS:
Tare/Belt Speed).
10.2.2.11 Parameter Block 11 - Rate controller

The parameters in this group are used to control the operation of the Motor Speed Control (MSC).
P11.01 P-Component KP Default: 0.05 mA/%

Min: 0 mA/% Max: 1000 mA/%
This parameter specifies the proportional gain of the speed control loop. Increasing this
value produces a faster response but my produce oscillation or unstable operation. Reduc-
ing this value increases stability but produces a slower response.
Note: The DT-9 uses a PI control loop (Proportional & Integral terms, no Derivative term).
The proportional term is specified by P11.01 P-Component KP and the Integral term is
specified by P11.02 I-Component TN.
P11.02 I-Component TN Default: 1 s

Min: 0 s Max: 60000 s
This parameter specifies the integral gain of the speed control loop. The value specified
here is the reciprocal of the actual gain value. Decreasing this parameter produces a faster
response but my produce oscillation or unstable operation and increasing it increases sta-
bility but produces a slower response.
Note: The DT-9 uses a PI control loop (Proportional & Integral terms, no Derivative term).
The proportional term is specified by P11.01 P-Component KP and the Integral term is
specified by P11.02 I-Component TN.

Parameters
P11.03 AO: Motor Speed Control Default: AO V103.AO1

Alternative: AO V103.AO1
n/a
This parameter specifies the analog output channel used to control the Motor Speed Con-
trol (MSC).
This parameter is normally set to AO 1 (terminal blocks X6-7 and X6-6) and is connected to
wires 142 through 144.
P11.04 Lower Limit Default: 4 mA

This parameter determines the lower limit of the Motor Speed Control (MSC) demand sig-
nal. It should always be set to the same value as P11.06 Controller Magnitude Offset.
This parameter is normally set to 4.00 mA. If a zero based signal (0-20mA or 0-10V) is
used it must be set to 0.00 mA.
P11.05 Upper Limit Default: 20 mA

should be set to 20.0 for a 0-20mA, 4-20mA and 0-10V input.
P11.06 Controller Magnitude Offset Default: 4 mA

should always be set to the same value as P11.04 Lower Limit.
This parameter is normally set to 4.00 mA. If a zero based signal (0-20mA or 0-10V) is
used it must be set to 0.00 mA.
P11.07 Position at STOP Default: Lower Limit

Alternative: 0
Lower Limit
This parameter specifies the value of the Motor Speed Control (MSC) demand signal (see
P11.03 Controller Magnitude Y) when the belt drive motor is not running.
This parameter should always be set to Lower Limit.
P11.08 KP speed controller Default: 0.07 mA/%

Min: 0 mA/% Max: 1000 mA/%
This parameter specifies the speed control gain used during the volumetric startup period.

Parameters
P11.09 VAP Active Default: NO

Alternative: NO
YES
When this parameter is set to YES the feedrate and total calculations are time shifted to
adjust for the delay between the time that the material is weighed and the time that it is
discharged.
This feature is useful when small batches are being delivered but is not used on Stock
feeders. It should always be set to NO.
P11.10 Platform Dis.Length Default: 0 % LB

This parameter specifies the distance between the center of the weigh platform and the
material discharge point in percentage of total belt length.
This parameter is only used when P11.09 VAP Active is set to YES. It should always be set
to 0.0% Lb.
10.2.2.12 Parameter Block 12 - Moisture

Parameters in this group supply the information required when material moisture compensation is used. We
do not currently supply moisture measurement equipment and these parameters should always be disabled.
P12.01 Moisture Active Default: NO

Alternative: NO
YES
This parameter is used to activate the moisture compensation system. At present Stock
does not supply moisture measurement equipment and these parameters should always be
disabled.
This parameter should always be set to NO.
P12.02 Moisture Select Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
FB
With default value "--" , moisture is activated.
P12.03 AI: Moisture Measurement Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
AI
Defines the input signal for the measuring signal of the error effects, e.g. the moisture con-
tent.
Also refer to: P12.05 Moisture Offset, P12.06 Moisture Range

Parameters
P12.04 Nominal Moisture Default: 10 %

Min: 0 % Max: 100 %
Maximum value of additives (moisture) content as a percentage of weight.
See also:
P12.03 AI: Moisture Measurement
P12.05 Moisture Offset
P12.06 Moisture Range
P12.05 Moisture Offset Default: 4 mA

Current for a correction value of 0%
Reference value: P12.05 Moisture Offset
Also refer to: P12.03 AI: Moisture Measurement, P12.06 Moisture Range
P12.06 Moisture Range Default: 20 mA

Current for a correction value of 100%
Reference value: P12.05 Moisture Offset
Also refer to: P12.03 AI: Moisture Measurement, P12.05 Moisture Offset
P12.07 DO: Moisture active Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
Definition of the output channel for signal "Correction active".
Also see: P12.02 Moisture Select
P12.08 Moisture MAX Default: 20 %

Min: 0 % Max: 100 %
Threshold for monitoring the moisture as a portion of the moisture content of the overall
weight.
Also refer to: P12.09 DO: Moisture MAX, P12.10 Event: Moisture MAX

Parameters
P12.09 DO: Moisture MAX Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
Defines the output channel for the signal that indicates that the moisture content has ex-
ceeded its threshold. The output is independent of the class of the related event.
Also refer to: P12.08 Moisture MAX, P12.10 Event: Moisture MAX
P12.10 Event: Moisture MAX Default: IG

Event Group: MF Number: 05
Cause of event:
- The value of the moisture input signal is greater than the maximum signal set by P12.08
Moisture MAX.
P12.11 AO: Flow Rate corrected Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
AO
Defines the output channel for the feed rate corrected for the disturbance value (moisture).
Also refer to: P12.12 AO: Flow Rate Offset, P12.13 AO: Flow Rate Range
P12.12 AO: Flow Rate Offset Default: 4 mA

Output current for an output of 0%.
Reference value: P02.05 Nominal Flow Rate Io
P12.13 AO: Flow Rate Range Default: 20 mA

Output current for an output of 100%.
Reference value: P02.05 Nominal Flow Rate Io
P12.14 Pulse Counter corrected Default: NO

Alternative: NO
YES
Defines the output signal for connecting an external impulse counter.
NO: The impulse output supplies the uncorrected material quantity

YES: The impulse output supplies the bulk material quantity corrected by the correction
factor, e.g. moisture.

Parameters
10.2.2.13 Parameter Block 13 - Cleanout control

The parameters in this group control the cleanout conveyor timer and Chain Motion Monitor (CMM).
P13.01 DO: CleanOut Timer Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
This parameter specifies the digital output used to energize the cleanout conveyor motor
starter when the cleanout timer feature is enabled.
Note: The cleanout timer output relay is only energized when the feeder is operating in
remote mode.
P13.02 CleanOut ON Time Default: 1 h

Min: 0.01 h Max: 1000 h
This parameter specifies the cleanout conveyor ON time when the cleanout timer feature is
enabled.
remote mode.
P13.03 CleanOut OFF Time Default: 1 h

Min: 0 h Max: 1001 h
This parameter specifies the cleanout conveyor OFF time when the cleanout timer feature
is enabled.
remote mode.
P13.04 DI: Chain Motion Monitor Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
This parameter specifies the digital input used for the Chain Motion Monitor (CMM)
P13.05 Chain Motion Delay Default: 20 s

This parameter sets the maximum delay between Chain Motion Monitor (CMM) pulses be-
fore a CMM error (P13.06 Event: Chain Motion Monitor) is generated.
This parameter is normally set to 20 sec. To disable this function if a CMM is not installed
set P13.06 Event: Chain Motion Monitor to IG.

Parameters
P13.06 Event: Chain Motion Monitor Default: IG

The parameter selects the error condition generated when the Chain Motion Monitor (CMM)
pulse delay is exceeded.
The parameter is normally set to A (Stop Feeder) if a CMM is installed and IG (Ignore) if
not.
Cause of event:
- The Chain Motion Monitor (CMM) pulse delay (P13.05) has been exceeded.
10.2.2.14 Parameter Block 14 - Analog Outputs

The parameters in this group select the control source for the analog output channels.
P14.01 AO: Setpoint Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
AO
This parameter selects the analog output channel used for the indicated signal.
Setpoint: The Setpoint value is the feedrate that the feeder is currently attempting to meet.
The source of the setpoint signal is determined by P03.02 Feedrate Setpoint. The analog
output is scaled to P02.05 Nominal Flow Rate Io.
P14.02 Setpoint Offset Default: 4 mA

This parameter selects the actual analog output when the control signal is zero.
P14.03 Setpoint Range Default: 20 mA

This parameter selects the actual analog output when the control signal is maximum.
P14.04 AO: Actual Flow Rate Default: AO V103.AO2

Alternative: AO V103.AO2
n/a
Actual Flow Rate: The Actual Flow Rate value is the feedrate that the feeder is currently
delivering. This is the default signal source for Analog Output 2 (Set by P01.04 Analog
Channel A11). The analog output is scaled to P02.05 Nominal Flow Rate Io

Parameters
P14.05 Flow Rate Offset Default: 4 mA

P14.06 Flow Rate Range Default: 20 mA

P14.07 AO: Belt Load Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
AO
Belt Load: The Belt Load value is the current weight of material on the belt per unit length.
The analog output is scaled to the nominal belt load, which is calculated using P02.05 No-
minal Flow Rate Io and P02.06 Nominal Speed.
P14.08 Belt Load Offset Default: 4 mA

P14.09 Belt Load Range Default: 20 mA

P14.10 AO: Speed Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
AO
Speed: The Speed value is the current belt speed. The analog output is scaled to P02.06
Nominal Speed.
P14.11 Speed Offset Default: 4 mA


Parameters
P14.12 Speed Range Default: 20 mA

P14.13 AO: Deviation Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
AO
Deviation: The Setpoint value indicates the amount that the actual feedrate deviates from
the feedrate setpoint.
P14.14 Deviation Offset Default: 4 mA

See P14.15 Deviation Range.
P14.15 Deviation Range Default: 20 mA

The output signal is generated as follows:
Current = 10 mA + (P14.14/ 2) + (P14.16 - P14.15) X (Deviation / 100)
Note: Deviation can have either a positive or a negative value.
P14.16 AO: Actual Flow Rate (2nd) Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
AO
This parameter is used when a second analog output proportional to feedrate is required. A
second analog output card is required and is normally installed in position A10. In this case
both parameter P01.03 Analog Channel A10 and P14.16 AO: Actual Flow Rate (2nd) must
be set to AO 3.
Actual Flow Rate: The Actual Flow Rate value is the feedrate that the feeder is currently
delivering. This is the default signal source for Analog Output 2 (Set by P01.04 Analog
Channel A11). The analog output is scaled to P02.05 Nominal Flow Rate Io.

Parameters
10.2.2.15 Parameter Block 15 - Digital Inputs

The parameters in this group are used to associate various controller functions with specific digital input
channels and to associate events with those functions. Most of the functions specified in this group are hard
wired on the controller and cannot be changed.
P15.01 DI: Acknowledge Events Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
This parameter specifies the digital input used to remotely acknowledge error conditions.
This function is not normally used and this parameter should be set to n/a (not used).
P15.02 DI: Local Mode Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
This parameter specifies the digital input used to indicate that the VMO is in local mode.
This function is not used and this parameter should always be set to n/a (not used).
P15.03 Event: External Event 1 Default: IG

The parameter specifies the event that is generated when the input specified in P15.04 DI:
External Event 1 is active.
The function is not used and the parameter should be set to IG (Ignore).
Cause of event:
- External event 1 (see P15.04) is enabled, and external event 1 input (see P15.03 ) is ac-
tive.
P15.04 DI: External Event 1 Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
This parameter specifies the digital input used to remotely generate External Event 1.
This function is not used and this parameter should be set to n/a (not used).

Parameters
P15.05 Event: NAMUR Error V103-DI13 Default: IG

The parameter specifies the event that is generated when the signal to the NAMUR device
on DI 13 (NAMUR Belt Motion Monitor) is lost. This normally indicates damage to the wiring
or the device.
Note: Loss of signal to the NAMUR Belt Motion Monitor will generate a BMM error in addi-
tion to a NAMUR error. This event should only be enabled when a NAMUR sensor is con-
nected to DI 13.
Note: This function is not used and this parameter should be set to IG (Ignore).
Cause of event:
- The connection to the sensor on DI 13 (X5-5 and X5-6) has been lost.
- Short circuit or interruption in speed transducer connecting cable.
If other devices are connected (not Namur), event message must be of the IG type. Exter-
nal Namur adaptors, resistor circuits, etc. are not required.
Action:
- Insure that a NAMUR device is connected to DI 13.
- Check the DI 13 wiring.
P15.06 Event: NAMUR Error V103-DI14 Default: IG

The parameter specifies the event that is generated when the signal to the NAMUR device
on DI 14 (NAMUR Tachometer) is lost. This normally indicates damage to the wiring or the
device.
Note: Loss of signal to the NAMUR Tachometer will generate a Loss of Tachometer error
in addition to a NAMUR error. This event should only be enabled when a NAMUR sensor is
connected to DI 14.
Cause of event:
- Short circuit or interruption in NAMUR sensor connecting cable.
Action:

Parameters
P15.07 DI: Reset Totalizer 1 Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
This parameter specifies the digital input used to remotely reset totalizer 1. The totalizer is
reset on the rising edge of the signal.
P15.08 DI: Reset Totalizer 2 Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
This parameter specifies the digital input used to remotely reset totalizer 2. The totalizer is
reset on the rising edge of the signal.
P15.09 DI: Discharge Pluggage Default: DI V103.DI5 High

n/a
This parameter specifies the digital input used for the discharge pluggage switch (LSFD). It
is internally programmed as a failsafe input. When the parameter is set to HIGH, open con-
tact (low signal) on the input will produce an event.
109.
P15.10 Discharge Pluggage Delay Default: 2 s

Min: 0 s Max: 50 s
This parameter specifies the delay between the time that a discharge pluggage is detected
and the time that the discharge pluggage event is generated. It is the same as Setup 16
(Discharge Pluggage Delay) on the 196NT.

Parameters
P15.11 Event: Discharge Pluggage Default: A

The parameter specifies the event that is generated when a discharge pluggage is de-
tected.
The parameter is normally set to A (Stop feeder). It can be set to IG (Ignore) to disable the
discharge pluggage event.
Cause of event:
- The discharge pluggage switch (LSFD) detected a build up of coal at the feeder dis-
charge. This is a fail safe input. The event is generated when the LSFD signal is lost.
Action:
- Insure that discharge is clear.
- Check LSFD wiring.
P15.12 DI: Coal on belt switch Default: DI V103.DI7 High

n/a
This parameter specifies the digital input used for the Coal on belt switch (LSFB),
108 if a coal on belt switch is installed on the feeder. It can be set to n/a (not use) to disable
the coal on belt input.
P15.13 Loss of Flow Trip Delay Default: 1 s

Min: 0 s Max: 50 s
This parameter specifies the delay between the time that a loss of material on the belt is
detected (coal on belt switch is inactive) and the time that the Loss of material event is
generated. It is the same as Setup 39 (Loss of Flow Delay) on the 196NT.
Note: The loss of flow event can be disabled by setting P15.14 Event: Loss of material to
IG (Ignore).

Parameters
P15.14 Event: Loss of material Default: IG

The parameter specifies the event that is generated when a loss of material is detected
(coal on belt switch is inactive).
The parameter is normally set to A (Stop feeder). It can be set to IG (Ignore) to disable the
Loss of material event.
Cause of event:
- The coal on belt switch (LSFB) has indicated a loss of material on the belt while running in
Remote.
P15.15 Event: Coal on Belt Default: A

The parameter specifies the event that is generated when the feeder attempts to run in
Local mode with material on the belt (coal on belt switch is active).
The parameter should always be set to A (Stop feeder).
Cause of event:
- Coal was detected by the coal on belt switch (LSFB) when the feeder was running in local
or calibrate mode.
P15.16 Belt Paddle Feedback Permissive Default: prop to Rate

Alternative: prop to Rate
Low. Lim. if empty
This parameter specifies the source for the feedback signal when a loss of material (coal on
belt switch is inactive) on the belt is detected. If it is set to Prop to Rate, the feedback signal
always follows the actual feedrate value; if it is set to Low Lim if Empty, the feedback signal
is set to zero when a loss of material is detected (coal on belt switch is inactive). It is similar
to Setup 24 – (Belt Paddle Feedback Permissive) on the 196NT.
Note: This parameter should always be set to Low Lim. If Empty when the DT-9 is used on
a volumetric feeder.
P15.17 DI: Motor feedback Default: DI V103.DI4 High

n/a
This parameter specifies the digital input used to indicate that the motor speed control has
been energized.
110.

Parameters
P15.18 Event: Motor Start Default: A

The parameter specifies the type of event that is generated when the motor feedback signal
(P15.17) does not follow the motor start signal (P16.04 through P16.07).
The parameter should always be set to A (Stop Feeder)
Cause of event:
- The motor starter of VFD has failed to start the feeder when instructed to by the controller.
P15.19 DI: Coal Flow Monitor Default: DI V103.DI10 High

n/a
This parameter specifies the digital input used to indicate that the coal flow monitor has
detected a loss of flow.
This parameter is normally set to DI 10 – High (terminal block X4-7) and is connected to
wire 116.
P15.20 Level/Temperatur Sensor Delay Default: 100 lb

Min: 0 lb Max: 10000000 lb
This parameter specifies the delay between the time that a loss of material flow is indicated
by the coal flow monitor (P15.19) and the time that the Coal Flow Error event is generated.
It is specified in units of weight so that a head seal can be maintained regardless of the
feedrate. It is similar to Setup 18 (Level/Temperature Sensor Delay) on the 196NT.
This parameter is normally set to 100 lbs (50 kg) to provide a quick response without nuis-
ance trips.
P15.21 Event: Coal Flow Default: A

The parameter specifies the type of event that is generated when a loss of material flow is
detected.
The parameter should be set to A (Stop Feeder) when a coal flow monitor is installed and
IG (ignore) when one is not.
Cause of event:
- The (optional) coal flow monitor has indicated a loss of material in the downspout above
the feeder.

Parameters
P15.22 DI: Configuration Lock Default: DI V103.DI6 High

n/a
This parameter specifies the digital input used to prevent the parameters from being
changed.
117.
P15.23 DI: Remote CTRL Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
This parameter specifies the digital input used to force the feeder into Remote mode.
118.
Note: This input is only active when parameter P03.12 Mode Select Enable/Disable is set
to Keyboard, Remote & Local.
P15.24 DI: OFF/Maint CTRL Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
This parameter specifies the digital input used to force the feeder into Off mode.
P15.25 DI: Local Start Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
This parameter specifies the digital input used to force the feeder into Local mode.
119.
Note: This input is only active when parameter P03.12 Mode Select Enable/Disable is set
to Keyboard & Local or Keyboard, Remote & Local.
P15.26 DI: Jog forward Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
This parameter specifies the digital input used to jog the feeder forward.

Parameters
P15.27 DI: Jog backward Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
This parameter specifies the digital input used to jog the feeder in reverse.

Cause of event:
tive.

Alternative: n/a
DI

Cause of event:
tive.

Alternative: n/a
DI

Parameters

Cause of event:
tive.

Alternative: n/a
DI
P15.34 DI: Volumetric Mode Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
This parameter defines the digital input to force the feed rate control into volumetric mode.
The beltspeed is not influenced by the beltload in volumetric control operation.
10.2.2.16 Parameter Block 16 - Digital Outputs

The parameters in this group are used to associate various controller functions with specific digital output
channels. Most of the functions specified in this group are hard wired at assembly.
P16.01 DO: Scale Start Default: DO V103.DO11 High

n/a
This parameter specifies the digital output used to start the feeder.
This parameter is normally set to DO 11 – High and is connected to wires 7 and 8.
P16.02 DO: Feeder Started Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
This parameter specifies the digital output used to indicate that the feeder is running.
This function is not used and this parameter should be set to n/a (Not used).

Parameters
P16.03 DO: Feeder running (2nd) Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
This parameter specifies the digital output used to indicate that the feeder is running. This
output is a duplicate of P16.02 DO: Feeder Started.
P16.04 DO: Feeder Run Forward Default: DO V103.DO7 High

n/a
This parameter specifies the digital output used to start the feeder running forward. This
output is similar to the K6 relay on the 196 NT.
This parameter must be set to DO 7 – High and is connected to wires 177-179.
P16.05 DO: Feeder Run Forward (2nd) Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
This parameter specifies the second digital output used to start the feeder running forward.
This output is a duplicate of P16.04 DO: Feeder Run Forward.
P16.06 DO: Feeder Run Reverse Default: DO V103.DO2 High

n/a
This parameter specifies the digital output used to start the feeder in reverse. This output is
similar to the K2 relay on the 196 NT.
P16.07 DO: Feeder Run Reverse (2nd) Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
This parameter specifies the second digital output used to start the feeder in reverse. This
output is a duplicate of P16.06 DO: Feeder Run Reverse.

Parameters
P16.08 DO: Start Prefeeder Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
This parameter specifies the digital output used to start the pre-feeder.
P16.09 DO: ALARM Default: DO V103.DO1 High

n/a
This parameter specifies the digital output used to annunciate an alarm condition (Event
type A feeder Stopped). This output is similar to the K1 relay on the 196 NT.
Note: Set this parameter to DO 1 – Low to simulate the K1 failsafe function of the 196NT.
P16.10 DO: ALARM (2nd) Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
This parameter specifies the digital output used to annunciate an alarm condition (Event
type A feeder Stopped). This output is a duplicate of P16.09 DO: ALARM.
P16.11 DO: Deviation Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
This parameter specifies the digital output used to indicate that a deviation event is active.
P16.12 DO: I-MIN Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
This parameter specifies the digital output used to indicate that a low flow rate event is
active.

Parameters
P16.13 DO: I-MAX Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
This parameter specifies the digital output used to indicate that a high flow rate event is
active.
P16.14 DO: Q-MIN Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
This parameter specifies the digital output used to indicate that a low belt load event is
active.
P16.15 DO: Q-MAX Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
This parameter specifies the digital output used to indicate that a high belt load event is
active.
P16.16 DO: v-MIN Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
This parameter specifies the digital output used to indicate that a low belt speed event is
active.
P16.17 DO: v-MAX Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
This parameter specifies the digital output used to indicate that a high belt speed event is
active.

Parameters
P16.18 DO: Volumetric Mode Default: DO V103.DO5 High

n/a
This parameter specifies the digital output used to indicate that the feeder is in volumetric
mode. This output is similar to the K4 relay on the 196 NT.
P16.19 DO: Volumetric Mode (2nd) Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
This parameter specifies the digital output used to indicate that the feeder is in volumetric
mode. This output is a duplicate of P16.18 DO: Volumetric Mode.
P16.20 DO: Local Mode Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
This parameter specifies the digital output used to indicate that the feeder is in VMO Mode.
P16.21 DO: WARNING Default: DO V103.DO8 High

n/a
This parameter specifies the digital output used to annunciate a warning condition (Event
type W1 or W2). This output is similar to the K7 relay on the 196 NT.
Note: Set this parameter to DO 8 – Low to simulate the K7 failsafe function of the 196NT.
P16.22 DO: WARNING (2nd) Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
This parameter specifies the digital output used to annunciate a warning condition (Event
type W1 or W2). This output is a duplicate of P16.21 DO: WARNING.

Parameters
P16.23 DO: Feeding Default: DO V103.DO6 High

n/a
This parameter specifies the digital output used to indicate that the belt drive motor is run-
ning and there is material on the belt. This output is similar to the K5 relay on the 196 NT.
P16.24 DO: Feeding (2nd) Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
This parameter specifies the digital output used to indicate that the belt drive motor is run-
ning and there is material on the belt. This output is a duplicate of P16.23 DO: Feeding.
P16.25 DO: Remote CTRL Default: DO V103.DO4 High

n/a
This parameter specifies the digital output used to indicate that the feeder is in remote
mode. This output is similar to the Kx relay on the 196 NT.
P16.26 DO: Remote CTRL (2nd) Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
This parameter specifies the digital output used to indicate that the feeder is in remote
mode. This output is a duplicate of P16.25 DO: Remote CTRL.
10.2.2.17 Parameter Block 17 - Analog calibration

The parameters in this group are used to trim the analog output values. They can be set manually but they
are normally set using the Analog Trim Function.
P17.01 Analog Input 1 Min Default: 4 mA

Min: 1 mA Max: 7 mA
See section Analog Trim Function.

Parameters
P17.02 Analog Input 1 Max Default: 20 mA


Min: 1 mA Max: 7 mA


Min: 1 mA Max: 7 mA


Min: 1 mA Max: 7 mA


Min: 1 mA Max: 7 mA


Parameters
P17.11 Analog Output 1 Min Default: 4 mA

Min: 1 mA Max: 7 mA
P17.12 Analog Output 1 Max Default: 20 mA


Min: 1 mA Max: 7 mA


Min: 1 mA Max: 7 mA


Min: 1 mA Max: 7 mA


Min: 1 mA Max: 7 mA

Parameters


Min: 1 mA Max: 7 mA

10.2.2.18 Parameter Block 18 - 2-Sensor Slip

The parameters in this group control the DT-9 belt slip sensor system. This system is not currently supported
and is disabled and hidden by default.
P18.01 2-Sensor Slip active Default: NO

Alternative: NO
YES
This parameter is used to enable the DT-9 slip sensor system.
P18.02 Source Sensor 1 Default: Speed

Alternative: Speed
DI
This parameter specifies the type of input used for the first of the two sensors used in slip
detection.
P18.03 DI: Sensor 1 Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
This parameter specifies the digital input used for the first slip sensor. It is only active if
P18.02 Source Sensor 1 is set to DI.
P18.04 Characteristic Value Sensor 1 Default: 100 P/inch

Min: 0.01 P/inch Max: 1000000 P/inch
This parameter specifies the number of pulses that the first slip sensor generates in one
inch (or cm) of belt travel.

Parameters
P18.05 DI: Sensor 2 Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DI
This parameter specifies the digital input used for the second slip sensor.
P18.06 Characteristic Value Sensor 2 Default: 100 P/inch

Min: 0.01 P/inch Max: 1000000 P/inch
This parameter specifies the number of pulses that the second slip sensor generates in one
inch (cm) of belt travel.
P18.07 Slip Value 2 Default: 2 % LB

This parameter specifies the minimum difference between the two sensors (in percent of
total belt length, LB) required to generate a belt slip event.
P18.08 Event: Slip 2 Default: IG

The parameter specifies the type of event that is generated when belt slippage is detected.
Cause of event:
- The difference between the belt speed calculated using sensor 1 (P18.02) and sensor 2
(P18.05) has exceeded the limit specified by P18.07 Slip Value 2.
P18.09 DO: Slip 2 Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
This parameter specifies the digital output that is activated when a belt slippage event is
generated.
10.2.2.19 Parameter Block 19 - Maintenance interval

The parameters in this group allow an event to be generated to indicate that periodic maintenance is re-
quired.
P19.01 Maintenance Electric Default: 3000 h

Min: 1 h Max: 10000 h
This parameter specifies the time intervals between maintenance events based on the total
amount of time the DT-9 is powered.

Parameters
P19.02 Event: Maint. Electric Default: IG

The parameter specifies the type of event that is generated when the time interval specified
in P19.01 Maintenance Electric has expired.
This parameter is normally set to IG to disable the maintenance event.
P19.03 Maintenance Feeder Run Default: 3000 h

Min: 1 h Max: 10000 h
This parameter specifies the time intervals between maintenance events based on the total
amount of time the belt drive motor is energized.
P19.04 Event: Maint.Feeder Run Default: IG

The parameter specifies the type of event that is generated when the time interval specified
in P19.03 Maintenance Feeder Run has expired.
The parameter is normally set to IG to disable the maintenance event.
Cause of event:
- Total of scale run times exceeds "Scale ON-Time". After every time interval elapsed, a
message is output. This message simply informs you that service work is required.
10.2.2.20
10.2.2.20 Parameter Block 20 - Data Logging
The parameters in this group are used to specify the time that material total data logging occurs.
P20.01 Hourly Total Time Default: 0 min

Min: 0 min Max: 59 min
This parameter specifies the time that the hourly total is saved to the total data logging
system. It is the same as Setup 37 (Hourly total time) on the 196NT.
P20.02 Daily Total Time Default: 0 min

Min: 0 min Max: 1439 min
This parameter specifies the time that the daily total is saved to the total data logging sys-
tem. It is the same as Setup 38 (Daily total time) on the 196NT.

Parameters
10.2.2.21 Parameter Block 21 - Communication EasyServe

The parameters in this group control serial communication between EasyServe and the DT-9.
Note: EasyServe is normally connected using Ethernet and these parameters are not used.
P21.01 Own Address Default: 1

Min: 1 Max: 1
This parameter specifies the serial loop address of the DT-9. This address and baud rates
(see below) much match the address specified in EasyServe.
Note: The station address is designed for systems with Service bus. If Service bus is not
used, select address 1.
P21.02 Baud Rate Default: 38400

Alternative: 38400
This parameter specifies the baud rate used for serial communication with EasyServe.
P21.03 Format Data Default: 8-N-1

Alternative: 8-N-1
This parameter specifies the communications protocol used for serial communication be-
tween EasyServe and the DT-9.
10.2.2.22 Parameter Block 22 - Communication Fieldbus

The parameters in this group are used to control the various types of fieldbus communications that are sup-
ported by the DT-9. Contact us for a detailed description of Fieldbus communications.
Note: Fieldbus communications are disabled and hidden by default.

Parameters
P22.01 Protocol Type Default: NO

Alternative: NO
MODBUS
PROFIBUS DP
DEVICE NET
MODBUS/TCP
ETHERNET/IP
Type of communication protocol. Some types of fieldbus need their respective fieldbus
card. Further details on card installation can be found in the system manual BV-H2406. The
manual 'DISOCONT Tersus Data Communication' (BV-H2448) contains further information
on the data structures.
NO: MODBUS/TCP can be used to read but write-accesses will not be processed.
MODBUS: Modbus RTU protocol; RS232-, RS422- or RS485 interface; fieldbus interface
card VSS 28020 must be installed.
PROFIBUS DP: Fieldbus interface card VPB 28020 must be installed.
DEVICE NET: Fieldbus interface card VCB 28020 must be installed.
MODBUS/TCP: Complete communication (read/write) using ethernet and the main VCU
RJ45 plug.
ETHERNET/IP: Communication via Ethernet and the RJ45 plug on the main VCU.
The red-coded RJ45 socket X96 may not be used for communication with the host comput-
er.
P22.02 Timeout Host Default: 5 s

Min: 1 s Max: 600 s
Interface monitoring
P22.03 Event: Cyclic Communication Default: A

Cyclical serial communication with the higher-order plant control system has been inter-
rupted for longer than the timeout-period.
To rectify: check the cable connections.
P22.04 Modbus-Version Default: compatible Stock

Alternative: compatible Stock
STANDARD

Parameters
P22.05 Word Sequence Default: I:std/L:std

Alternative: I:std/L:std
I:swp/L:std
I:std/L:swp
I:swp/L:swp
P22.06 Byte Sequence Default: High - Low

Alternative: High - Low
Low - High
P22.07 Configuration Default: FIXED_COMP_8_16

Alternative: NO_PARA_ID_3_6
NO_PARA_ID_4_12
PARA_ID_6_15
FIXED_COMP_8_16
VARIABLE COMPATIBLE
Configuration of the data in the transfer protocol.
For details see manual 'DISOCONT Tersus Data Communication' (BV-H2448).
NO_PARA_ID_3_6: parameters are not transferred, 3 control values, 6 query values
NO_PARA_ID_4_12: parameters are not transferred, 4 control values, 12 query values
PARA_ID_6_15: parameters are transferred, 6 control values, 15 query values
FIXED_COMP_8_16: fixed data compatibility mode, 8 control values, 16 query values
VARIABLE_COMPATIBLE: variable format compatible with DISOCONT
P22.08 Address Default: 1

Min: 1 Max: 254
Address of the slaves (DISOCONT Tersus) at the modbus. Each address may be used at a
bus once only.
P22.09 Resolution Default: 4096

Min: 1 Max: 32767
The maximum resolution in analog format or integer format of the measured value trans-
ferred.

Parameters
P22.10 Baud rate Default: 19200

Alternative: 9600
4800
2400
19200
38400
Data transmission rate.
P22.11 Data Format Default: 8-O-1

Alternative: 8-O-1
8-E-1
8-N-1
Modbus always uses an 11-bit character frame.
Example: 8-O-1 means:

1 start bit, 8 data bit, odd parity, 1 stop bit
N = no parity, E = even parity)
P22.12 Physics Default: RS232

Alternative: RS485 2-wire
RS485 4-wire
RS232
Select the type of electrical interface

Min: 0 Max: 126
The address of the slave at the Profibus
P22.14 FLOAT-Format Default: IEEE

Alternative: IEEE
SIEMENS-KG
Information on the formats for all setpoints, measuring values and floating point parame-
ters.

Min: 0 Max: 63
Address of the scales at the DeviceNet.

Parameters
P22.16 Baud rate Default: 125K

Alternative: 125K
250K
500K
Data transmission rate. The rate must suit the higher-order system.
P22.17 Parameter Default: NO

Alternative: NO
YES
Select whether the user data package has a parameter block or not.
Relevant only in case P22.07 = "VARIABLE COMPATIBLE"
P22.18 Preset Count Default: 2

Min: 2 Max: 4
Number of control words in a telegram that can be set by the higher-order plant control
system.
P22.19 READ_ID Count Default: 6

Min: 0 Max: 12
Number of freely selectable measuring and status values (scales --> master) that are que-
ried in a telegram.
P22.20 Access Rights Control Default: NO

Alternative: NO
COMPATIBLE DISOCONT
REMOTE IP
Definition of the rights to control the feeder via fieldbus:
NO: No restrictions
COMPATIBLE DISOCONT: The partner writing a control command first gets the exclusive
right to control. All others are allowed to read process values.
REMOTE IP: The partner with the specified IP-address in P22.21 Remote IP Address only
is allowed to control the feeder.

Parameters
P22.21 Remote IP Address Default: 192.168.240.250
IP-address of the communication partner having the rights to control the feeder.
See also: P22.20 Access Rights Control
10.2.2.23 Parameter Block 23 - Ethernet

The parameters in this group control the DT-9 Ethernet ports.
P23.01 IP Address Default: 192.168.240.1
This parameter specifies the DT-9 IP address.
This parameter should be set to the default value of 192.168.240.1 for normal communica-
tion with EasyServe and the (optional) touch screen display.
P23.02 Net Mask Default: 255.255.255.0
This parameter specifies the DT-9 subnet mask.
P23.03 Gateway Default: 0.0.0.0
This parameter specifies the network gate way used to connect the DT-9.
10.2.2.24 Parameter Block 24 - PLC Outputs

This parameter group is used to specify analog and digital output channels that are under Fieldbus control.
Contact us for a detailed description of Fieldbus communications.
P24.01 DO: PLC 1 Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
Definition of the binary output channel controlled by PCS command 1.

Alternative: n/a
DO
Similar P24.01 DO: PLC 1

Parameters

Alternative: n/a
DO

Alternative: n/a
DO

Alternative: n/a
DO

Alternative: n/a
DO

Alternative: n/a
DO

Alternative: n/a
DO
P24.09 AO: PLC 1 Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
AO
Definition of the analog output channel controlled by PCS analog command word 1.

Parameters
P24.10 AO: PLC 2 Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
AO
Similar P24.09 AO: PLC 1
10.2.2.25 Parameter Block 25 - Fixed mode configuration

This parameter group is used to specify fixed data points that are used with Fieldbus communication. Con-
tact us for a detailed description of Fieldbus communications.
P25.01 ID Preset Value 1 Default: 320
Used to select the first control command in the fieldbus telegram. The value's number (ID)
can be found in the manual 'DISOCONT Tersus Data Communication' (BV-H2448).
Similar to P25.01 ID Preset Value 1

Parameters
P25.09 ID Read Value 1 Default: 752
Used to select the value from the DISOCONT Tersus to be read first in the fieldbus tele-
gram. The value's number (ID) can be found in the manual 'DISOCONT Tersus Data
Communication' (BV-H2448).
Similar to P25.09 ID Read Value 1

Parameters

Parameters
10.2.2.26 Parameter Block 26 - FCB analog outputs

This parameter group is used to associate Function Block analog outputs with physical I/O points. Contact us
for a detailed description of Function Control Blocks.
Note: Function Control Block parameters are disabled and hidden by default.
P26.01 FCB_AO 01 Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
AO
Allocation of the physical output signal for the PLC's analog output 1.
P26.02 Offset FCB_AO 1 Default: 4 mA

Output current for a PLC signal of 0.
P26.03 Range FCB_AO 1 Default: 20 mA

Output current for a PLC signal of 100%
Reference value: P26.04 Reference FCB_AO 1
See also: P26.01 FCB_AO 01
P26.04 Reference FCB_AO 1 Default: 1000

Min: 1 Max: 1000000
Maximum value of the signal at the PLC analog output.
See also: P26.01 FCB_AO 01, P26.03 Range FCB_AO 1

Parameters

Alternative: n/a
AO
Similar to P26.01 FCB_AO 01

Description see:
P26.01 FCB_AO 01
P26.02 Offset FCB_AO 1
P26.03 Range FCB_AO 1
P26.04 Reference FCB_AO 1

Description see:
P26.01 FCB_AO 01

Min: 1 Max: 1000000
Description see:
P26.01 FCB_AO 01

Alternative: n/a
AO

Description see:
P26.01 FCB_AO 01

Parameters

Description see:
P26.01 FCB_AO 01

Min: 1 Max: 1000000
Description see:
P26.01 FCB_AO 01

Alternative: n/a
AO

Description see:
P26.01 FCB_AO 01

Description see:
P26.01 FCB_AO 01

Parameters

Min: 1 Max: 1000000
Description see:
P26.01 FCB_AO 01

Alternative: n/a
AO

Description see:
P26.01 FCB_AO 01

Description see:
P26.01 FCB_AO 01

Min: 1 Max: 1000000
Description see:
P26.01 FCB_AO 01
10.2.2.27 Parameter Block 27 - FCB digital outputs

This parameter group is used to associate Function Block digital outputs with physical I/O points. Contact us
for a detailed description of Function Control Blocks.
Note: Function Control Block parameters are disabled and hidden by default.

Parameters
P27.01 FCB_DO 01 Default: n/a

Alternative: n/a
DO
Allocation of the physical output channel to the binary output signal of the internal PLC.

Alternative: n/a
DO

Alternative: n/a
DO

Alternative: n/a
DO

Alternative: n/a
DO

Alternative: n/a
DO

Alternative: n/a
DO

Parameters

Alternative: n/a
DO

Alternative: n/a
DO

Alternative: n/a
DO

Alternative: n/a
DO

Alternative: n/a
DO

Alternative: n/a
DO

Alternative: n/a
DO

Parameters

Alternative: n/a
DO

Alternative: n/a
DO

Alternative: n/a
DO

Alternative: n/a
DO

Alternative: n/a
DO

Alternative: n/a
DO
10.2.2.28 Parameter Block 28 - Configuration HMI Values

The parameters in this group define the process variables to be displayed on the 'Values' page of the operat-
ing panel. EasyServe can be used for easy configuration or the settings can be made with the help of the
allocation map in the data description of the serial interface in the operating panel.
The values in sample intervals of 0.1 seconds are available in a special log at the Ethernet interface for in-
ternal Schenck Process use.

Parameters
P28.01 HMI Value 01 Default: 1884
Identification number (ID) of the process variable.

Parameters

Event (Error) Messages
11 Event (Error) Messages

Event messages report abnormal states, e.g. errors or limit value excess.
STRICTLY OBSERVE
Always correct the cause of a fault before acknowledging it.
The feeder has the potential to cause injuries or damage if this is not done.
There are four different event classes:

Event Class Code Display / Effect
Alarm A All measuring and control operations are aborted. System goes to safe state.
This type of event is the same as a feeder trip on the 196NT.
Warning 1 W1 The event is annunciated and remains active until it has been acknowledged.
Measuring and control tasks are not affected. This type of event is similar to
some type of alarms on the 196NT.
Warning 2 W2 The event is annunciated and remains active until the cause has been cor-
rected. It is not necessary to acknowledge this type of event. Measuring and
control tasks are not affected. This type of event is similar to some type of
alarms on the 196NT.
Ignore IG Event is not annunciated. Measuring and control tasks are not affected.
Events are classified in the following groups with the priority shown:
Event Group Symbol
System message SY
Sequence monitoring SC
Electrical system WE
Mechanical system WM
Material flow MF
Interlocking IL
Controllers CO
Calibration CA
Maximum HI
Minimum LO
Note: In the following list, parameters related to the indicated event are shown in parentheses.

11.1 Events Details
11.1.1 Event Group: Calibration

CA01 Event: Error LC Input (P06.04)
The parameter selects the error condition generated when the load cell signal is
invalid. If P05.01 Volum on LC failure is set to YES, this condition will force the feed-
er into volumetric mode, regardless of the value selected here.
Cause of event:
- Load cell cable wrong.
- Measuring amplifier A/D converter is in saturated state.
- Supply voltage is below 19V.
- Error must be available for minimum 3s.
Action:
- Check cabling.
- If cabling is OK, load cell amplifier could be defective.
- Check for either possibility. If scale cannot be restarted after remedy of fault, turn
device off and restart.
CA02 Event: Tachometer Input (P06.03)

The parameter selects the error condition generated when the tachometer signal is
lost or is greater than 3600 Hz.
The parameter should be set to A (Stop Feeder).
Cause of event:
- Input frequency is zero or exceeds 3600 Hz.
Action:
- Insure that the motor is turning.
- Insure that parameter P04.06 Speed Measurement is set to the correct input.
- Check the tachometer wiring.
- Check the tachometer signal using a frequency counter or oscilloscope.
CA09 Event: Primary Tacho Failure (P06.17)

Event is detected in case the primary tachometer doesn't deliver pulses during nor-
mal operation.

11.1.2 Event Group: Controller

CO01 Event: Controller Limited (P06.13)
The parameter selects the error condition generated when the motor speed control
demand signal reaches its upper limit.
Cause of event:
- Feed rate controller control magnitude has reached upper response threshold. After
some time, message HI-5 (Deviation) is additionally output.
1. Material flow missing or irregular.

2. External feed rate controller wrongly set.
Action:
- Check material discharge and control magnitude (service value Y). At nominal feed
rate, Y should be 10 to 14mA.
CO05 Event: Volum on failure (P05.02)

The parameter is used to specify the type of error that is generated in the event of a
weighing system failure. This event is independent of volumetric mode.
Cause of event:
- Indicates that the system is in volumetric mode due to failure in the weighing sys-
tem.
Action:
- Check for load cell wiring errors or imbalanced load cell inputs.
11.1.3 Event Group: Electrical

Electrical System
WE01 Event: Power Failure (P06.08)
The parameter selects the error condition generated when the controller restarts after
a loss of power. If it is set to A, the feeder will not restart after power is lost during
normal remote mode operation.
Cause of event:
- Power failure. Power supply failed or cut off. During power failure, no totalization
takes place. Scale does not start automatically, independent of event class.

WE02 Event: Namur Error VCU1-DI6 (P15.05)

The parameter specifies the event that is generated when the signal to the NAMUR
device on DI 13 (NAMUR Belt Motion Monitor) is lost. This normally indicates dam-
age to the wiring or the device.
Note: Loss of signal to the NAMUR Belt Motion Monitor will generate a BMM error in
addition to a NAMUR error. This event should only be enabled when a NAMUR sen-
sor is connected to DI 13.
Cause of event:
- Short circuit or interruption in speed transducer connecting cable.
If other devices are connected (not Namur), event message must be of the IG type.
External Namur adaptors, resistor circuits, etc. are not required.
Action:
WE03 Event: Namur Error VCU1-DI7 (P15.06)

The parameter specifies the event that is generated when the signal to the NAMUR
device on DI 14 (NAMUR Tachometer) is lost. This normally indicates damage to the
wiring or the device.
Note: Loss of signal to the NAMUR Tachometer will generate a Loss of Tachometer
error in addition to a NAMUR error. This event should only be enabled when a NA-
MUR sensor is connected to DI 14.
Cause of event:
- Short circuit or interruption in NAMUR sensor connecting cable.
Action:

WE08 Event: Analog Input < Offset (P06.15)

The parameter selects the error condition generated when the analog feedrate de-
mand signal is more then 0.4 mA below the minimum value (P03.04 Setpoint Offset).
Cause of event:
- The signal available across an analog input is smaller than the offset. A tolerance
space of 0.4 mA is built in for ensuring that events are not constantly set and deleted
with noisy input signals around the offset.
Action:
- Check analog input (Sig+ & Sig-) wiring.
11.1.4 Event Group: Interlock

IL01 Event: Run Disabled (P03.11)
The parameter selects the method used to annunciate the error condition when the
Run Enable input is not active. Setting the parameter to IG does not disable the Run
Enable feature but it does prevent an error from being generated.
The parameter is normally set to W2 so that there is an indication on the display

when the feeder is disabled.
Cause of event:
- When a touch screen HMI is used, parameter P03.10 Source Run Enable must be
set to DI 8, which is connected to the stop switch mounted under the HMI. This
switch is used to stop the feeder in the event that the HMI is disabled or discon-
nected.
Action:
- Check the position of the Run Enable switch.
- Check the wiring to the Run Enable switch.
Note: The Run Enable switch is not normally used with the Stock 196NT display and
in this case P03.10 Source Run Enable must be set to n/a to allow motor operation.
11.1.5
11.1.5 Event Group: Material Flow
MF05 Event: Moisture MAX (P12.10)
Cause of event:
- The value of the moisture input signal is greater than the maximum signal set by
P12.08 Moisture MAX.

MF14 Event: Remote TCI too small (P02.15)

The parameter selects the error condition generated when totalizer pulses for the
Total Coal Integrator (TCI) output are generated faster then the TCI output can oper-
ate. See parameter P02.14 Pulse Length Total for more information.
This parameter should be set to W2.
Action: Set P02.13 Totalizer Increment and/or P02.14 Pulse Length Total to a small-
er value.
11.1.6 Event Group: MAX

HI01 Event: LC Input > MAX (P06.06)
The parameter selects the error condition generated when either of the load cell sig-
nals is greater than the maximum allowable value. If P05.01 Volum on LC failure is
set to YES, this condition will force the feeder into volumetric mode regardless of the
value selected here.
Cause of event:
- Load cell load is higher than 110% of load cells rated capacities.
Full scale value:
125% with 2.85mV/V load cells
175% with 2mV/V load cells
Action:
- Check material infeed.
HI02 Event: Actual Flow Rate MAX (P09.04)

The parameter determines the type of event that is generated when the feedrate
exceeds the value specified in P09.03 Limit: Actual Flow Rate MAX.
This parameter is normally set to IG (Ignore)
Cause of event:
- Flow rate exceeds set maximum value.
HI03 Event: Belt Load MAX (P09.08)

exceeds the value specified in P09.07 Limit: Belt Load MAX.
Cause of event:
- Belt load exceeds set maximum value.

HI04 Event: Speed MAX (P09.12)

exceeds the value specified in P09.01 Limit: Actual Flow Rate MIN.
Cause of event:
- Belt speed exceeds set maximum value.
HI05 Event: Deviation (P06.12)

The parameter specifies the event that is generated when the actual feedrate can
differ from the feedrate setpoint by an amount greater than P06.10 Threshold Devia-
tion for a time greater than P06.09 Time Deviation.
The parameter is similar to the 196NT Feedrate Error and should be set to W2.
Action:
- Check for loss or material on belt.
11.1.7 Event Group: Mechanic

WM02 Event: Slip (P07.08)
The parameter selects the error condition generated when the belt slip exceeds the
limit specified in parameter P07.07 Slip Value.
The parameter is normally set to IG.
WM03 Event: Belt Skew (P07.16)

Belt has run off-center. Feeder is no longer operable.
Action: See Event: Belt Drift
Related threshold: Belt Skew
WM04 Event: Belt Drift (P07.14)

Belt out of tolerance.
Action:
1. Clean tail and drive pulleys.
2. Align belt.
Monitoring can be faulty. Watch belt circuit sensor service value; if need be, remedy
fault.
Related threshold: Belt Drift

WM05 Event: Slip 2 (P18.08)

The parameter specifies the type of event that is generated when belt slippage is
detected.
Cause of event:
- The difference between the belt speed calculated using sensor 1 (P18.02) and sen-
sor 2 (P18.05) has exceeded the limit specified by P18.07 Slip Value 2.
WM06 Event: Chain Motion Monitor (P13.06)

The parameter selects the error condition generated when the Chain Motion Monitor
(CMM) pulse delay is exceeded.
The parameter is normally set to A (Stop Feeder) if a CMM is installed and IG (Ig-
nore) if not.
Cause of event:
- The Chain Motion Monitor (CMM) pulse delay (P13.05) has been exceeded.
WM07 Event: Discharge Pluggage (P15.11)

The parameter specifies the event that is generated when a discharge pluggage is
detected.
The parameter is normally set to A (Stop feeder). It can be set to IG (Ignore) to disa-
ble the discharge pluggage event.
Cause of event:
- The discharge pluggage switch (LSFD) detected a build up of coal at the feeder
discharge. This is a fail safe input. The event is generated when the LSFD signal is
lost.
Action:
- Insure that discharge is clear.
- Check LSFD wiring.
WM08 Event: Loss of material (P15.14)

The parameter specifies the event that is generated when a loss of material is de-
tected (coal on belt switch is inactive).
The parameter is normally set to A (Stop feeder). It can be set to IG (Ignore) to disa-
ble the Loss of material event.
Cause of event:
- The coal on belt switch (LSFB) has indicated a loss of material on the belt while
running in Remote.

WM09 Event: Motor Start (P15.18)

The parameter specifies the type of event that is generated when the motor feedback
signal (P15.17) does not follow the motor start signal (P16.04 through P16.07).
The parameter should always be set to A (Stop Feeder)
Cause of event:
- The motor starter of VFD has failed to start the feeder when instructed to by the
controller.
WM10 Event: Belt Motion Monitor (P07.03)

The parameter selects the error condition generated when the belt motion monitor
(BMM) pulse delay is exceeded.
The parameter is normally set to A (Stop Feeder) if a BMM is installed. Setting it to

IG (Ignore) will disable the BMM feature.
Cause of event:
- The Belt Motion Monitor (BMM) pulse delay (P07.02) has been exceeded.
WM11 Event: Coal Flow (P15.21)

The parameter specifies the type of event that is generated when a loss of material
flow is detected.
The parameter should be set to A (Stop Feeder) when a coal flow monitor is installed
and IG (ignore) when one is not.
Cause of event:
- The (optional) coal flow monitor has indicated a loss of material in the downspout
above the feeder.
WM12 Event: Coal on Belt (P15.15)

The parameter specifies the event that is generated when the feeder attempts to run
in Local mode with material on the belt (coal on belt switch is active).
The parameter should always be set to A (Stop feeder).
Cause of event:
- Coal was detected by the coal on belt switch (LSFB) when the feeder was running
in local or calibrate mode.

11.1.8 Event Group: MIN

LO01 Event: LC Input < MIN (P06.05)
The parameter selects the error condition generated when either of the load cell sig-
nals is less than 3% of the full scale value. If P05.01 Volum on LC failure is set to
YES, this condition will force the feeder into volumetric mode regardless of the value
selected here.
LO02 Event: Actual Flow Rate MIN (P09.02)

The parameter determines the type of event that is generated when the feedrate is
less than the value specified in P09.01 Limit: Actual Flow Rate MIN.
LO03 Event: Belt Load MIN (P09.06)

less than the value specified in P09.05 Limit: Belt Load MIN. Set this value to W2 to
simulate the 196NT low density alarm.
Cause of event:
- Belt load smaller than set minimum value.
LO04 Event: Speed MIN (P09.10)

less than the value specified in P09.09 Limit: Speed MIN.
Cause of event:
- Belt speed is smaller than set minimum value.

11.1.9 Event Group: Sequence Monitoring

Monitoring
SC01 Event: Setpoint Limited (P06.07)
The parameter selects the error condition generated when the feedrate demand sig-
nal is greater than the feedrate limit as determined by the operating mode. In gravi-
metric mode, the limit is the lesser of P02.05 Nominal Flow Rate Io or P03.05 Maxi-
mum Feedrate. In volumetric mode, the limit is 3 times P02.05 Nominal Flow Rate Io.
Depending on selected mode:

a) In gravimetric mode, setpoint is limited to nominal feed rate.
b) In volumetric mode, limitation starts from values exceeding 3 times the nominal
value.
c) Emergency setpoint is active.
SC02 Event: Stand-By (P06.01)

The parameter selects the error condition generated when the belt drive motor is
stopped because the motor demand signal is less than the limit specified in P06.02
Stand-By Limit Value.
Cause of event:
- Scale is in standby mode, i.e. setpoint is smaller than set standby limit (Parameter
P06.02 Stand-By Limit Value ). Material pre-feeder cuts off.
SC03 Event: Maint.Feeder Run (P19.04)

The parameter specifies the type of event that is generated when the time interval
specified in P19.03 Maintenance Feeder Run has expired.
The parameter is normally set to IG to disable the maintenance event.
Cause of event:
- Total of scale run times exceeds "Scale ON-Time". After every time interval
elapsed, a message is output. This message simply informs you that service work is
required.
SC04 Event: Maint. Electric (P19.02)

The parameter specifies the type of event that is generated when the time interval
specified in P19.01 Maintenance Electric has expired.
This parameter is normally set to IG to disable the maintenance event.

SC05 Event: External Event 1 (P15.03)

The parameter specifies the event that is generated when the input specified in
P15.04 DI: External Event 1 is active.
Cause of event:
- External event 1 (see P15.04) is enabled, and external event 1 input (see P15.03 )
is active.

Cause of event:
is active.

Cause of event:
is active.

Cause of event:
is active.

11.1.10 Event Group: System Message

SY01 Event: Memory (P06.14)
The parameter selects the error condition generated when the controller detects an
error in the internal non-volatile memory. Reload the non-volatile memory by using
the "Load Default Parameters" function to correct this error. If the problem persists,
the controller must be replaced.
The parameter should be set to A (Stop feeder).
Note: The Load Default Parameters function will reset all of the controller's internal
parameters, including Calibration and Trim. After this operation is performed, all pa-
rameters must be reset, the feeder must be recalibrated and the analog I/O channels
must be re-trimmed.
SY07 Event: Communication VHM (P01.01)

The parameter selects the error condition generated when communications between
the DT-9 and the touch screen HMI are lost for more then 10 seconds. The touch
screen HMI must be connected to the X96 Ethernet port. This connector is located
toward the center of the board, is marked in red and is keyed for a special cable.
The parameter should be set to W2 (Warning with automatic reset).
Actions:
- Check operation of touch screen display (see display section).
- Check cable connections.
- Is correct Ethernet connection used?
SY08 Event: Cyclic Communication (P22.03)

Cyclical serial communication with the higher-order plant control system has been
interrupted for longer than the timeout-period.
To rectify: check the cable connections.
SY12 Event: Communication ARM7 (P01.02)

The parameter selects the error condition generated when communications between
the ARM9 main processor and the ARM7 auxiliary processor are lost.
The parameter must always be set to A (Stop feeder) because the controller can not
operate when communications are lost.
Action:
- Check cable connections between boards.
- Replace controller.

Default I/O Points
12 Default I/O Points
12.1 Default Digital Inputs

Note: The default parameter must be set to n/a if the digital input is reallocated.
Input Terminal Wire Default Comments:

Number Block Number Parameter
DI 1 X1-6 118 P15.23 DI: Remote CTRL Not normally used. P03.12 must be set to
Keyboard Only or Keyboard & Local if this
point is reallocated.
DI 2 X1-4 112 P03.01 Feeder Start Start contact from customer DCS
DI 3 X1-2 113 P03.07 DI: Raise Setpoint Not Normally used. Must be enabled when
P03.02 Feedrate Setpoint is set to R-L.
DI 4 X2-6 110 P15.17 DI: Motor feedback Running contact from motor speed control
DI 5 X2-4 109 P15.09 DI: Discharge Pluggage Limit Switch Feeder Discharge (LSFD)
DI 6 X2-2 117 P15.22 DI: Configuration Lock Keyboard lock
DI 7 X3-6 108 P15.12 DI: Coal on belt switch Limit Switch Feeder Belt (LSFB)
DI 8 X3-4 111 P03.10 Source Run Enable Must be enabled when (optional) touch
screen HMI is used.
DI 9 X3-2 119 P15.25 DI: Local Start Not normally used. P03.12 must be set to
Keyboard Only if this point is reallocated.
DI 10 X4-7 116 P15.19 DI: Coal Flow Monitor Set P15.21 Event: Coal Flow to A, W1 or
W2 to enable the coal flow monitor or IG to
disable it.
DI 11 X4-5 114 P03.08 DI: Lower Setpoint Not Normally used. Must be enabled when
P03.02 Feedrate Setpoint is set to R-L.
DI 12 X4-2 115 P07.01 DI: Belt Motion Monitor Set P07.03 Event: Belt Motion Monitor to A,
W1 or W2 to enable the belt motion monitor
or IG to disable it.
DI 13 X5-5 n/a P07.01 DI: Belt Motion Monitor NAMUR BMM input
X5-6
DI 14 X5-3 n/a P04.06 Speed Measurement NAMUR Tachometer input
X5-4
DI 15 X5-1 145 P04.06 Speed Measurement Can only be used for tachometer input.
X5-2 146

Default I/O Points
12.2 Default Digital Outputs

Note: The default parameter must be set to n/a if the digital output is reallocated.
Each output is a single form C contact (NO, C, NC).
Output Terminal Wire Default Comments:

DO 1 X10-1 thru 150-152 P16.09 DO: ALARM Feeder has tripped.

X10-3
DO 2 X10-4 thru 156-158 P16.06 DO: Feeder Run Re-
X10-6 verse
DO 3 X11-1 thru 159-161 P16.07 DO: Feeder Run Re-

X11-3 verse (2nd)
DO 4 X11-4 thru 162-164 P16.25 DO: Remote CTRL Feeder is ready for normal (remote) operation.
X11-6
DO 5 X13-1 thru 165-167 P16.18 DO: Volumetric Mode Weigh system error. Feeding in volumetric
X13-3 mode.
DO 6 X13-4 thru 171-173 P16.23 DO: Feeding Running in Remote with coal on the belt.
X13-6
DO 7 X14-1 thru 177-179 P16.04 DO: Feeder Run For-
X14-3 ward
DO 8 X14-4 thru 180-182 P16.21 DO: WARNING Minor error condition.

X14-6
DO 9 X15-1 thru 194-196 n/a Spare Contact
X15-3
DO 10 X15-4 thru 197-198 P13.01 DO: CleanOut Timer
X15-6
DO 11 X16-1 7, 8 P16.01 DO: Scale Start
X16-2
DO 12 X16-3 thru 186-189 P02.12 DO: Pulse Counter Pulsed based on amount of coal delivered.
X16-6
DO 13 X6-1 134, 135 P02.17 DO: FRI Frequency Frequency signal proportional to feedrate.
X6-2

Default I/O Points
12.3 Default Analog I/O

I/O Terminal Wire Default Comments:
AI 1 X6-3 Sig +, Sig- P03.02 Feedrate Setpoint Customer Demand Signal

X6-4
AO 1 X6-8 142-144 P11.03 AO: Motor Speed
X6-9 Control
AO 2 X6-7 139-141 P14.04 AO: Actual Flow Rate Customer Feedback Signal
X6-8
A 10 X12-1 n/a P01.03 Analog Channel A10 Not used
X12-2
X12-4
X12-6
X12-8

Trending Data
13 Trending Data
This item lists the most important data addresses available with the trending display.
Data Data Value: Unit Comments:

Address:
1872 Feedrate lb/h
1874 Totalizer 1 lb
1876 Totalizer 2 lb
1878 Totalizer 3 lb
1880 Belt Load lb/f
1884 Belt Speed f/s
1894 Setpoint lb/h
1904 Deviation %
1906 Moisture %
1908 Corrected Feedrate lb/h
1910 Totalizer 1 corrected lb
1920 Analog Output 1 mA
1938 Belt Slip %
1942 Relative Feedrate %
1944 Relative Belt Load %
1946 External Setpoint lb/h
1950 Tachometer 1 Hz
1952 Utilization LC %
1954 Loadcell VAP mV/V
1956 Loadcell BIC mV/V
1958 Loadcell mv/V
1960 Controller Magnitude mA
1996 Nominal Belt Load lb/f
2008 Actual Tare lb/f
2042 Relative Setpoint %
2078 Corr. Rel. Feedrate %
2082 2-Sensor Slip %
2214 Analog Input 1 mA
2224 Loadcell 1 mV/V
2226 Loadcell 2 mV/V
2228 Utilization LC 2 %

Trending Data

Address:
2230 Gravimetric Total lb

2232 Volumetric Total lb
2234 Material Total lb
2236 Rate lb/h
2246 Analog Input 1 (A10) mA
2252 Analog Input 4 cor. mA
2254 Analog Input 5 cor. mA
2264 Analog Output 1 (A10) mA
2270 Analog Output 4 cor. mA
2272 Analog Output 5 cor. mA
2274 Analog Output 6 cor mA
2276 Speed rpm
2278 Belt Speed inch/s
2280 Nominal Belt Load lb/inch
2282 Actual Tare lb/inch
2284 Belt Load lb/inch
2286 Speed Setpoint rpm
2288 FRI output Hz
3
2290 Nominal Density lb/ft
3
2292 Density lb/ft
2294 Gravimetric Total corr. lb
2296 Volumetric Total corr. lb
2298 Material Total corr. lb
2300 Belt Load (average) lb/inch

Trending Data

Address:
2310 Belt Motion Counter s

2312 Digital Mode output Hz
2316 Belt Speed %

Appendix
14 Appendix
14.1 PLC Functionality (Optional)

As with a PLC, the functionality for simple additional tasks can be expanded using signal links and function
blocks. The function block links can only be configured using EasyServe. A configuration can be loaded into
or read out of the control using EasyServe. The link becomes active immediately after being loaded.
All signals available in the fieldbus are available as input signals for the function blocks. The output signals
are integrated into the DISOCONT Tersus' standard signal processing via the parameters of the groups 'FCB
analog outputs' and 'FCB digital outputs'.
A loaded and active link is displayed on the operating panel above the 'Help' button next to the information
on the program. The 'Empty' link signifies the factory settings with no additional links.
Fig. 3: Example of a function block link
In the example, a binary input signal, e.g. a DISOCONT Tersus input contact, is read in through the input
block 'GP-Din 1' output to the AND gate 'And 1-4' through the delay 'Delay 1' and an inverter. The other in-
puts are connected to the constant '1' and a frequency generator 'Cycle 1'. This provides the output with a
cyclical signal when the waiting period has elapsed after the input has been set. The output of the AND gate
is connected to an output of the DISOCONT Tersus standard control. The signal must be connected to a
digital output via P27.01 'FCB_DO 01' to enable physical output.
Note: The Schenck Process software DISOPLAN must be installed on the PC to allow working with function
blocks.

Appendix
14.1.1 Handling the Function Blocks

Function blocks can be processed and linked using EasyServe in expert mode only. The detailed description
of the function block editor is contained in a separate manual.
CAUTION: Links may be created and altered by Schenck Process personnel only.
Configurations can be read out of and into the control. They can be stored on PCs and be called up from
there. Links must be given a name. The 'empty link' as a factory default has the name 'Empty' and should not
be used for other links.
WARNING
Possible loss of functions after replacing the VCU.
Function blocks are not automatically stored with the parameters in
EasyServe. If a function block link is loaded it will be necessary to store it
separately in EasyServe. If the VCU is replaced then both the parameters
and the function block links must be loaded separately in order to restore
full functionality. Alternatively the additional tool DISOPLAN, that contains
both the parameters and the function block links, can be used to make a
complete backup. However, this backup can then no longer be used with an
updated version of the scales program.
It is not necessary in a system with the 'Empty' link (see Cleaning the Screen and Information) to reload the
link after a VCU replacement as no functions are expanded using function blocks.
14.1.2 Function Blocks for Binary Signals

The following function blocks are available.
Fig. 4: Binary function blocks

Appendix
No. Type Quantity Parameters Function
1 Binary inputs 20 Process variable as per the descrip- Connection between the function
'GP-DIn' tion of the fieldbus data interface block logic and the function of the
standard program
2 Binary output 20 - Makes output signals available. Con-
'GP-Dout' nect using the parameter in the 'FCB
digital outputs' block. All outputs are
available as status information in the
fieldbus interface.
3 Clock generator 2 Periodic time Signal generator for a periodic signal
'Cycle'
4 Bin 0 1 - Generator for the binary constants 1 =
Bin 1 1 True and 0 = False
5 Pulse generator 1 Time for the impulse The timer has three outputs that
'Time' supply an impulse of 0.1 seconds
duration at the time set.
6 AND 6 - And-link of two input signals
'And'
AND 4 - And-link of four input signals
'And 4'
7 OR 6 - Or-link of two input signals
'Or'
OR 8 - Or-link of four input signals
'Or 4'
8 Negation 10 - Invert the signal
'Not'
9 Delay 8 Delay time in seconds Delays the input signal by the speci-
'Delay' fied time
Tab. 6 : Blocks available for processing binary signals

Appendix
14.1.3 Function
Function Blocks for Analog Signals
Analog signals can be processed with the following function blocks
Fig. 5: Analog function blocks
No. Type Quantity Parameter Function
1 Analog input 20 Process variable as per Input for a continuous variable.

'GP-Ain' the description of the
fieldbus data interface
2 Analog output 20 - Makes output signals available. Connect using the
parameter in the 'FCB analog outputs' block. Only 5
FKB outputs can be configured to physical outputs.
All outputs are available as measured values in the
fieldbus interface.
3 Comparator 6 Upper and lower com- Supplies the value 'True' if the input signal lies out-
'Comparator' parative value side of the threshold values.
4 'Limit' 10 Upper and lower thre- Limits the input signal and becomes 'True' if limita-
shold value tion arises.
5 Multiplicator 5 - Supplies the product of the input values at the out-
'Multiplicator' put
6 Memory 2 - The input value at 'MemInp' is tied to 'Acquire' with

'Memory' the increasing slope. It is available at the output. At
the same time the 'Hold' output indicates that a
value was stored. The memory can be cleared with
'Reset'.

Appendix
No. Type Quantity Parameter Function

7 Addition 5 - Makes the sum of the input values available at the
'Add' output.
8 Subtraction 5 - Makes the difference of the input values available at

'Subtract' the output
9 Counter 6 Start value Supplies the numbered input impulses at the output
'Counter'
10 Switch 1 - Switches one of the three inputs to the output
'Analog switch'
11 Multiplication 20 Dividend Multiplies or divides by a fixed factor
'Factor' Divisor
12 Constant 5 Value of the constants Supplies the numerical value to the output
'Constant'
13 Offset 10 Dividend
'Offset' Divisor
14.2 Checking
Checking the Weight Measurement Instrumentation
Most of the function errors are signaled by event messages.
A test connector can be used to perform a basic function inspection if a displayed weight value is evidently
wrong despite correct parameterization.
A simple voltage metering check cannot be made using a measuring instrument due to the alternating vol-
tage supply to the load cells.
A test connector can show up any errors between the load cells, cabling and the measuring electronics.
Fig. 6: Test connector
The test connector is plugged into the load cell cable input on the DISOCONT Tersus.
Once plugged in, the raw measured value can be read off at the service values of the measuring electronics.
It must be: raw measured value 1.5 mV/V ± 3%.
Note: If other resistance values are used in the test connector, the raw measuring value can be calculated
using this formula: raw measuring value ~ 500 * R2 / R1 [mV/V].
The measuring amplifier is working properly if the raw measuring value lies within this range.
The measured load display in kg depends on the setting of the scales' characteristic data. A weight value of
ca. 75 kg is shown if the parameter factory settings are used.

Appendix
14.3
14.3.1 Dimensions and Position of the Plugs
Fig. 7: VCU 20103 in 3D representation with mounting kit

Appendix
Fig. 8: Dimensions and position of the plugs VCU 20103 with mounting kit
I Required installation area
4 x Ø6,8 4 x boreholes for fastening bolts

Appendix
14.3.2 General Technical Data

Operating temperature range (outside of housing) -25 °C ... +50 °C
Storage temperature range -40 °C ... +85 °C
Humidity 20 % ... 90 % relative humidity, non-condensing
Protection class IP20 (intended for installation in a housing)
Weight xxxxx
Approbation CE, UL, ATEX see separate chapter
14.4 Basics of EMC-

EMC-Compliant Cabling
Cabling
All units of the DISOCONT Tersus have been designed and tested for the anti-interference required of a
device in an industrial environment. They meet the following specifications:
EN 61000-6-2 (Immunity to Interference for Industrial Environments)
EN 61999-6-4 (Electromagnetic Interference for Industrial Environments)
It is not authorized for use in living areas.
Certain steps must be taken when cabling to guarantee the high interference resistance.
The following figure shows correctly mounted cables.
Fig. 9: Cable mounting with cable binders and screen clamps
1 Cable binders for the pull relief
2 Connecting cable shielding braid
3 Screen clamp
There are several slits beneath each cable lead-through. The cable clamps will press the cable screen
against the shielding plate if they are inserted into these slits. This will correctly earth the screening.
M-shaped slits can also be used as pull relief for cable binders.

Appendix
14.4.1 Thoughts on the Cable Connections

The small number of components makes a DISOCONT Tersus system quite simple to assemble. Neverthe-
less you should always check to see what cables are required and whether their quantity and size will fit
through the existing lead-throughs (refer to the table in the section 'Accessories → Recommended Cables').
The correct plug type for each input (and output) can be found in the technical specifications of the individual
units, e.g. Phoenix MSTB, grid size 3.5 mm. Each type has a maximum cable diameter that can be used.
2
The maximum wire cross section for Phoenix MSTB plug-in connectors with a grid size of 5 mm is 2.5 mm ,
2
for MSTB connectors with a grid size of 3.5 mm maximum 1.5 mm .
Correct cabling is indispensable for optimal electromagnetic interference protection. Please follow the cor-
responding recommendations.
14.4.2 Screened Cables

The screen of screened cables in generally connected at both ends to GND with a broad-contact connection.
The DISOCONT Tersus is supplied with mounting plates that have an appropriate contact surface in the
area around the cable feed. The outer sheathing is removed from the cables and the cables are then
clamped with the special screen clamps against the contact surface. The screen shielding braid can also be
attached to the mounting plates using a cable binder if clamps are not available.
If the contact point of the signal wires is far from the contact point of the screen, the screen should be left all
the way up to the connecting point of the cable. Then the outer sheathing need only be removed from the
cable at the contact point of the screen. The screen can then be fit as described above.
14.4.3 Unscreened
Unscreened Cables
Unscreened cables can be strain relieved mechanically with the screening plate. There are T-shaped metal
stays on the mounting plate to which cable binders can be connected.

Appendix
14.5 EC Declaration of Conformity

Index
Index
.PAR Files ......................................................................................................................................................................... 43
2-Sensor Slip................................................................................................................................................................... 126
2-Sensor Slip active ........................................................................................................................................................ 126
About This Manual .............................................................................................................................................................. 1
Access Rights Control ..................................................................................................................................................... 133
Access to Feeder Commands and Parameters................................................................................................................. 43
Address ................................................................................................................................................................... 131, 132
Afterflow Totalizer ............................................................................................................................................................. 85
AI Moisture Measurement .............................................................................................................................................. 103
Analog calibration ............................................................................................................................................................ 123
Analog Channel A10 ......................................................................................................................................................... 71
Analog Channel A11 ......................................................................................................................................................... 71
Analog Channel A12 ......................................................................................................................................................... 71
Analog Channel A13 ......................................................................................................................................................... 72
Analog I/O Points .............................................................................................................................................................. 21
Analog Input 1 Max ......................................................................................................................................................... 124
Analog Input 1 Min .......................................................................................................................................................... 123
Analog Input 2 Max ......................................................................................................................................................... 124
Analog Input 2 Min .......................................................................................................................................................... 124
Analog Input 3 Max ......................................................................................................................................................... 124
Analog Input 3 Min .......................................................................................................................................................... 124
Analog Input 4 Max ......................................................................................................................................................... 124
Analog Input 4 Min .......................................................................................................................................................... 124
Analog Input 5 Max ......................................................................................................................................................... 124
Analog Input 5 Min .......................................................................................................................................................... 124
Analog Output 1 Max ...................................................................................................................................................... 125
Analog Output 1 Min ....................................................................................................................................................... 125
Analog Outputs ............................................................................................................................................................... 107
Analog Trim Function ........................................................................................................................................................ 21
Angle ................................................................................................................................................................................. 83
AO Actual Flow Rate ...................................................................................................................................................... 107
AO Actual Flow Rate (2nd)............................................................................................................................................. 109
AO Belt Load .................................................................................................................................................................. 108
AO Deviation .................................................................................................................................................................. 109
AO Flow Rate corrected ................................................................................................................................................. 105
AO Flow Rate Offset ...................................................................................................................................................... 105
AO Flow Rate Range ..................................................................................................................................................... 105
AO Motor Speed Control ................................................................................................................................................ 102
AO PLC 1 ....................................................................................................................................................................... 135
AO PLC 2 ....................................................................................................................................................................... 136
AO Setpoint .................................................................................................................................................................... 107
AO Speed....................................................................................................................................................................... 108
Appendix ......................................................................................................................................................................... 171
Basic (CAL 1) .................................................................................................................................................................... 17
Basic Tare ....................................................................................................................................................................... 101
Basics of EMC-Compliant Cabling .................................................................................................................................. 178
Baud rate................................................................................................................................................................. 132, 133
Baud Rate ....................................................................................................................................................................... 129
Belt Circuit No. ................................................................................................................................................................ 101
Belt Circuit Time .............................................................................................................................................................. 100
Belt Drift ............................................................................................................................................................................ 94
Belt Drift Monitoring ........................................................................................................................................................... 22
Belt Influence Compensation (BIC) ................................................................................................................................... 23

Index
Belt Load ............................................................................................................................................................................. 8

Belt Load Offset .............................................................................................................................................................. 108
Belt Load Range ............................................................................................................................................................. 108
Belt Load, Nominal ............................................................................................................................................................ 21
Belt Monitoring .................................................................................................................................................................. 22
Belt Monitoring .................................................................................................................................................................. 91
Belt Motion Monitor Delay ................................................................................................................................................. 92
Belt Paddle Feedback Permissive ................................................................................................................................... 114
Belt Skew .......................................................................................................................................................................... 94
Belt Slippage Monitoring ................................................................................................................................................... 24
Belt Slippage with Belt Marking ......................................................................................................................................... 24
Belt Speed........................................................................................................................................................................... 9
BIC Active ......................................................................................................................................................................... 93
Byte Sequence ................................................................................................................................................................ 131
CA01 Event Error LC Input............................................................................................................................................ 150
CA02 Event Tachometer Input ...................................................................................................................................... 150
CA09 Event Primary Tacho Failure ............................................................................................................................... 150
Calibrating the Feeder ....................................................................................................................................................... 38
Calibration ................................................................................................................................................................. 45, 150
Calibration ......................................................................................................................................................................... 15
Calibration Data ................................................................................................................................................................ 99
Calibration probe location............................................................................................................................................ 17, 18
Calibration Probe Span ..................................................................................................................................................... 99
Calibration Weight ........................................................................................................................................................... 100
Calibration Weight Test ..................................................................................................................................................... 49
Chain Motion Delay ......................................................................................................................................................... 106
Chain Test ......................................................................................................................................................................... 49
Characteristic Value Sensor 1 ......................................................................................................................................... 126
Characteristic Value Sensor 2 ......................................................................................................................................... 127
Checking the Weight Measurement Instrumentation....................................................................................................... 175
Cleanout control .............................................................................................................................................................. 106
CleanOut OFF Time ........................................................................................................................................................ 106
CleanOut ON Time .......................................................................................................................................................... 106
CO01 Event Controller Limited ...................................................................................................................................... 151
CO05 Event Volum on failure ........................................................................................................................................ 151
Codepage.......................................................................................................................................................................... 77
Commonly Changed Parameters ...................................................................................................................................... 13
Communication EasyServe ............................................................................................................................................. 129
Communication Fieldbus ................................................................................................................................................. 129
Configuration ................................................................................................................................................................... 131
Configuration HMI Values ............................................................................................................................................... 145
Connecting a PC with EasyServe to a Scales Controller (VCU) ....................................................................................... 29
Connecting to Feeder ........................................................................................................................................................ 42
Connection between a VHM Operating Panel and a Scales Controller (VCU) .................................................................. 27
Connection between a Web Browser and a VCU Scales Controller ................................................................................. 30
Connection via Bluetooth ............................................................................................................................................ 28, 30
Connection via Ethernet .................................................................................................................................................... 29
Connection via Ethernet Cable.......................................................................................................................................... 28
Connection via RS-232 ..................................................................................................................................................... 29
Connection via RS-485 ..................................................................................................................................................... 28
Connection via WLAN ....................................................................................................................................................... 29
Control Sources ................................................................................................................................................................ 78
Controller......................................................................................................................................................................... 151
Controller Magnitude Offset ............................................................................................................................................ 102
Counter 1 Unit ................................................................................................................................................................... 74
Counter 2 Unit ................................................................................................................................................................... 74
Counter 3 Unit ................................................................................................................................................................... 75
Daily Total Time .............................................................................................................................................................. 128
Damaged / Defective Electrical Components ...................................................................................................................... 6
Data Format .................................................................................................................................................................... 132
Data Log Values................................................................................................................................................................ 36
Data Logging ................................................................................................................................................................... 128
DC_Mode .......................................................................................................................................................................... 77
Default Analog I/O ........................................................................................................................................................... 165
Default Digital Inputs ....................................................................................................................................................... 163
Default Digital Outputs .................................................................................................................................................... 164

Index
Default I/O Points ............................................................................................................................................................ 163

Definitions ........................................................................................................................................................................... 8
Density Setpoint ................................................................................................................................................................ 82
Deviation Offset............................................................................................................................................................... 109
Deviation Range.............................................................................................................................................................. 109
DI Acknowledge Events ................................................................................................................................................. 110
DI Belt Motion Monitor ...................................................................................................................................................... 91
DI BIC freeze.................................................................................................................................................................... 93
DI Chain Motion Monitor................................................................................................................................................. 106
DI Coal Flow Monitor ...................................................................................................................................................... 115
DI Coal on belt switch..................................................................................................................................................... 113
DI Configuration Lock ..................................................................................................................................................... 116
DI Discharge Pluggage .................................................................................................................................................. 112
DI External Event 1 ........................................................................................................................................................ 110
DI Jog backward ............................................................................................................................................................ 117
DI Jog forward ................................................................................................................................................................ 116
DI Local Mode ................................................................................................................................................................ 110
DI Local Start ................................................................................................................................................................. 116
DI Lower Setpoint............................................................................................................................................................. 80
DI Motor feedback .......................................................................................................................................................... 114
DI OFF/Maint CTRL ....................................................................................................................................................... 116
DI Raise Setpoint ............................................................................................................................................................. 79
DI Remote CTRL ............................................................................................................................................................ 116
DI Reset Totalizer 1 ....................................................................................................................................................... 112
DI Reset Totalizer 2 ....................................................................................................................................................... 112
DI Sensor 1 .................................................................................................................................................................... 126
DI Sensor 2 .................................................................................................................................................................... 127
DI Source Belt Sensor ...................................................................................................................................................... 92
DI Volumetric Mode ........................................................................................................................................................ 118
Digital Inputs ................................................................................................................................................................... 110
Digital Outputs................................................................................................................................................................. 118
Dimensions and Position of the Plugs ............................................................................................................................. 176
Discharge Pluggage Delay .............................................................................................................................................. 112
Display Filters.................................................................................................................................................................... 95
Display Formats ................................................................................................................................................................ 73
Display Functions .............................................................................................................................................................. 34
DO ALARM .................................................................................................................................................................... 120
DO ALARM (2nd) ........................................................................................................................................................... 120
DO Belt Drift ..................................................................................................................................................................... 95
DO Belt Skew ................................................................................................................................................................... 95
DO Belt Slip...................................................................................................................................................................... 93
DO CleanOut Timer ....................................................................................................................................................... 106
DO Deviation .................................................................................................................................................................. 120
DO Dual Tacho active ...................................................................................................................................................... 91
DO Feeder Run Forward ................................................................................................................................................ 119
DO Feeder Run Forward (2nd) ...................................................................................................................................... 119
DO Feeder Run Reverse................................................................................................................................................ 119
DO Feeder Run Reverse (2nd) ...................................................................................................................................... 119
DO Feeder running (2nd) ............................................................................................................................................... 119
DO Feeder Started ......................................................................................................................................................... 118
DO Feeding .................................................................................................................................................................... 123
DO Feeding (2nd) .......................................................................................................................................................... 123
DO FRI Frequency ........................................................................................................................................................... 77
DO I-MAX ....................................................................................................................................................................... 121
DO I-MIN ........................................................................................................................................................................ 120
DO Local Mode .............................................................................................................................................................. 122
DO Moisture active ......................................................................................................................................................... 104
DO Moisture MAX .......................................................................................................................................................... 105
DO PLC 1 ....................................................................................................................................................................... 134
DO PLC 2 ....................................................................................................................................................................... 134
DO PLC 3 ....................................................................................................................................................................... 135
DO PLC 4 ....................................................................................................................................................................... 135
DO PLC 5 ....................................................................................................................................................................... 135

Index
DO PLC 6 ....................................................................................................................................................................... 135

DO PLC 7 ....................................................................................................................................................................... 135
DO PLC 8 ....................................................................................................................................................................... 135
DO Pulse Counter ............................................................................................................................................................ 75
DO Q-MAX ..................................................................................................................................................................... 121
DO Q-MIN ...................................................................................................................................................................... 121
DO Remote CTRL .......................................................................................................................................................... 123
DO Remote CTRL (2nd)................................................................................................................................................. 123
DO Scale Start ............................................................................................................................................................... 118
DO Slip 2 ........................................................................................................................................................................ 127
DO Start Prefeeder ........................................................................................................................................................ 120
DO v-MAX ...................................................................................................................................................................... 121
DO v-MIN ....................................................................................................................................................................... 121
DO Volumetric Mode ...................................................................................................................................................... 122
DO Volumetric Mode (2nd)............................................................................................................................................. 122
DO WARNING ............................................................................................................................................................... 122
DO WARNING (2nd) ...................................................................................................................................................... 122
DT-9 Parameter List .......................................................................................................................................................... 56
DT-9 Setup ........................................................................................................................................................................ 11
EC Declaration of Conformity .......................................................................................................................................... 180
Effective Platform Length .................................................................................................................................................. 83
Electrical System............................................................................................................................................................. 151
Ethernet........................................................................................................................................................................... 134
Event Actual Flow Rate MAX ................................................................................................................................... 97, 154
Event Actual Flow Rate MIN .................................................................................................................................... 96, 158
Event Analog Input < Offset ..................................................................................................................................... 91, 153
Event Belt Drift ......................................................................................................................................................... 94, 155
Event Belt Load MAX ............................................................................................................................................... 98, 154
Event Belt Load MIN ................................................................................................................................................ 97, 158
Event Belt Motion Monitor ........................................................................................................................................ 92, 157
Event Belt Skew ....................................................................................................................................................... 95, 155
Event Chain Motion Monitor ................................................................................................................................... 107, 156
Event Coal Flow ..................................................................................................................................................... 115, 157
Event Coal on Belt ................................................................................................................................................. 114, 157
Event Communication ARM7 ................................................................................................................................... 71, 161
Event Communication VHM ..................................................................................................................................... 70, 161
Event Controller Limited ........................................................................................................................................... 90, 151
Event Cyclic Communication.................................................................................................................................. 130, 161
Event Deviation ........................................................................................................................................................ 89, 155
Event Discharge Pluggage ..................................................................................................................................... 113, 156
Event Error LC Input ................................................................................................................................................ 87, 150
Event External Event 1 ........................................................................................................................................... 110, 160
Event LC Input < MIN ............................................................................................................................................... 87, 158
Event LC Input > MAX.............................................................................................................................................. 88, 154
Event Loss of material ............................................................................................................................................ 114, 156
Event Maint. Electric............................................................................................................................................... 128, 159
Event Maint.Feeder Run ........................................................................................................................................ 128, 159
Event Memory .......................................................................................................................................................... 90, 161
Event Moisture MAX............................................................................................................................................... 105, 153
Event Motor Start ................................................................................................................................................... 115, 157
Event NAMUR Error V103-DI13 ..................................................................................................................................... 111
Event NAMUR Error V103-DI14 ..................................................................................................................................... 111
Event Namur Error VCU1-DI6 ........................................................................................................................................ 152
Event Namur Error VCU1-DI7 ........................................................................................................................................ 152
Event Power Failure ................................................................................................................................................. 88, 151
Event Primary Tacho Failure .................................................................................................................................... 91, 150
Event Remote TCI too small .................................................................................................................................... 76, 154
Event Run Disabled ................................................................................................................................................. 81, 153
Event Setpoint Limited ............................................................................................................................................. 88, 159
Event Slip ................................................................................................................................................................. 93, 155
Event Slip 2 ............................................................................................................................................................ 127, 156
Event Speed MAX .................................................................................................................................................... 99, 155
Event Speed MIN ..................................................................................................................................................... 98, 158

Index
Event Stand-By ........................................................................................................................................................ 86, 159

Event Tachometer Input ........................................................................................................................................... 87, 150
Event Volum on failure ............................................................................................................................................. 85, 151
Event (Error) Messages .................................................................................................................................................. 149
Event Group: Calibration ................................................................................................................................................. 150
Event Group: Controller................................................................................................................................................... 151
Event Group: Electrical System ....................................................................................................................................... 151
Event Group: Interlock..................................................................................................................................................... 153
Event Group: Material Flow ............................................................................................................................................. 153
Event Group: MAX .......................................................................................................................................................... 154
Event Group: Mechanic ................................................................................................................................................... 155
Event Group: MIN ........................................................................................................................................................... 158
Event Group: Sequence Monitoring ................................................................................................................................ 159
Event Group: System Message ....................................................................................................................................... 161
Event Groups ............................................................................................................................................................ 55, 149
Event Log Values .............................................................................................................................................................. 36
Events ............................................................................................................................................................................... 45
Events Details ................................................................................................................................................................. 150
Exiting HMI Configuration.................................................................................................................................................. 34
Expert Mode ...................................................................................................................................................................... 44
Factor Deviation ................................................................................................................................................................ 89
FCB analog outputs ........................................................................................................................................................ 139
FCB digital outputs .......................................................................................................................................................... 142
FCB_AO 01 ..................................................................................................................................................................... 139
FCB_AO 02 ..................................................................................................................................................................... 140
FCB_AO 03 ..................................................................................................................................................................... 140
FCB_AO 04 ..................................................................................................................................................................... 141
FCB_AO 05 ..................................................................................................................................................................... 142
FCB_DO 01 ..................................................................................................................................................................... 143
FCB_DO 02 ..................................................................................................................................................................... 143
FCB_DO 03 ..................................................................................................................................................................... 143
FCB_DO 04 ..................................................................................................................................................................... 143
FCB_DO 05 ..................................................................................................................................................................... 143
FCB_DO 06 ..................................................................................................................................................................... 143
FCB_DO 07 ..................................................................................................................................................................... 143
FCB_DO 08 ..................................................................................................................................................................... 144
FCB_DO 09 ..................................................................................................................................................................... 144
FCB_DO 10 ..................................................................................................................................................................... 144
FCB_DO 11 ..................................................................................................................................................................... 144
FCB_DO 12 ..................................................................................................................................................................... 144
FCB_DO 13 ..................................................................................................................................................................... 144
FCB_DO 14 ..................................................................................................................................................................... 144
FCB_DO 15 ..................................................................................................................................................................... 145
FCB_DO 16 ..................................................................................................................................................................... 145
FCB_DO 17 ..................................................................................................................................................................... 145
FCB_DO 18 ..................................................................................................................................................................... 145
FCB_DO 19 ..................................................................................................................................................................... 145
FCB_DO 20 ..................................................................................................................................................................... 145
Feedback Filter Override Threshold .................................................................................................................................. 96
Feeder control ................................................................................................................................................................... 85
Feeder Definition ............................................................................................................................................................... 72
Feeder Monitoring ............................................................................................................................................................. 86
Feeder Start ...................................................................................................................................................................... 78
Feedrate Control ................................................................................................................................................................. 9
Feedrate Setpoint.............................................................................................................................................................. 78
Fig. 1: Weigh Roller Adjustment ........................................................................................................................................ 16
Fig. 2: Principle of belt-drift monitoring .............................................................................................................................. 22
Fig. 3: Example of a function block link ........................................................................................................................... 171
Fig. 4: Binary function blocks .......................................................................................................................................... 172
Fig. 5: Analog function blocks ......................................................................................................................................... 174
Fig. 6: Test connector...................................................................................................................................................... 175
Fig. 7: VCU 20103 in 3D representation with mounting kit .............................................................................................. 176
Fig. 8: Dimensions and position of the plugs VCU 20103 with mounting kit .................................................................... 177
Fig. 9: Cable mounting with cable binders and screen clamps........................................................................................ 178
Filter Actual Flow Rate ..................................................................................................................................................... 95
Filter Actual Flow Rate analog ......................................................................................................................................... 95

Index
Filter Belt Load ................................................................................................................................................................. 96

Filter Belt Speed ............................................................................................................................................................... 96
Filter Deviation ................................................................................................................................................................. 96
Five Safety Rules of Electrical Engineering......................................................................................................................... 6
Fixed mode configuration ................................................................................................................................................ 136
FLOAT-Format ................................................................................................................................................................ 132
Flow Rate Offset ............................................................................................................................................................. 108
Flow Rate Range ............................................................................................................................................................ 108
Flow Rate Units ................................................................................................................................................................. 74
Format Data .................................................................................................................................................................... 129
Function Blocks for Analog Signals ................................................................................................................................. 174
Function Blocks for Binary Signals .................................................................................................................................. 172
Gateway .......................................................................................................................................................................... 134
General Information .......................................................................................................................................................... 51
General Technical Data................................................................................................................................................... 178
Gravimetric ........................................................................................................................................................................ 10
Handling the Function Blocks .......................................................................................................................................... 172
Hardware Modules ............................................................................................................................................................ 70
HI01 Event LC Input > MAX .......................................................................................................................................... 154
HI02 Event Actual Flow Rate MAX ................................................................................................................................ 154
HI03 Event Belt Load MAX............................................................................................................................................ 154
HI04 Event Speed MAX ................................................................................................................................................ 155
HI05 Event Deviation..................................................................................................................................................... 155
HMI Value 01 .................................................................................................................................................................. 146
HMI Value 02 .................................................................................................................................................................. 146
HMI Value 03 .................................................................................................................................................................. 146
HMI Value 04 .................................................................................................................................................................. 146
HMI Value 05 .................................................................................................................................................................. 146
HMI Value 06 .................................................................................................................................................................. 146
HMI Value 07 .................................................................................................................................................................. 146
HMI Value 08 .................................................................................................................................................................. 146
HMI Value 09 .................................................................................................................................................................. 147
HMI Value 10 .................................................................................................................................................................. 147
Hourly Total Time ............................................................................................................................................................ 128
I-Component TN.............................................................................................................................................................. 101
ID Preset Value 1 ............................................................................................................................................................ 136
ID Preset Value 2 ............................................................................................................................................................ 136
ID Preset Value 3 ............................................................................................................................................................ 136
ID Preset Value 4 ............................................................................................................................................................ 136
ID Preset Value 5 ............................................................................................................................................................ 136
ID Preset Value 6 ............................................................................................................................................................ 136
ID Preset Value 7 ............................................................................................................................................................ 137
ID Preset Value 8 ............................................................................................................................................................ 137
ID Read Value 1 .............................................................................................................................................................. 137
ID Read Value 10 ............................................................................................................................................................ 138
ID Read Value 11 ............................................................................................................................................................ 138
ID Read Value 12 ............................................................................................................................................................ 138
ID Read Value 13 ............................................................................................................................................................ 138
ID Read Value 14 ............................................................................................................................................................ 138
ID Read Value 15 ............................................................................................................................................................ 139
ID Read Value 16 ............................................................................................................................................................ 139
ID Read Value 2 .............................................................................................................................................................. 137
ID Read Value 3 .............................................................................................................................................................. 137
ID Read Value 4 .............................................................................................................................................................. 137
ID Read Value 5 .............................................................................................................................................................. 137
ID Read Value 6 .............................................................................................................................................................. 137
ID Read Value 7 .............................................................................................................................................................. 138
ID Read Value 8 .............................................................................................................................................................. 138
ID Read Value 9 .............................................................................................................................................................. 138
IL01 Event Run Disabled............................................................................................................................................... 153
Initial Configuration ........................................................................................................................................................... 33
Installation ......................................................................................................................................................................... 41
Interlock........................................................................................................................................................................... 153
IP Address....................................................................................................................................................................... 134
KP speed controller ......................................................................................................................................................... 102
Language .......................................................................................................................................................................... 72

Index
LB: Pulses per Belt............................................................................................................................................................ 20

LC Characteristic Value..................................................................................................................................................... 82
LC Filter............................................................................................................................................................................. 95
LC Rated Capacity ............................................................................................................................................................ 82
Level/Temperatur Sensor Delay ...................................................................................................................................... 115
Lever Ratio ........................................................................................................................................................................ 83
Limit Actual Flow Rate MAX ............................................................................................................................................. 97
Limit Actual Flow Rate MIN .............................................................................................................................................. 96
Limit Belt Load MAX ......................................................................................................................................................... 97
Limit Belt Load MIN .......................................................................................................................................................... 97
Limit Speed MAX ............................................................................................................................................................. 98
Limit Speed MIN............................................................................................................................................................... 98
Limit Values....................................................................................................................................................................... 96
LO01 Event LC Input < MIN .......................................................................................................................................... 158
LO02 Event Actual Flow Rate MIN ................................................................................................................................ 158
LO03 Event Belt Load MIN............................................................................................................................................ 158
LO04 Event Speed MIN ................................................................................................................................................ 158
Load cross section ............................................................................................................................................................ 84
Loading Custom Default Parameters ................................................................................................................................ 44
Loading Factory Default Parameters ................................................................................................................................. 44
Local Mode........................................................................................................................................................................ 10
Loss of Flow Trip Delay ................................................................................................................................................... 113
Lower Limit ...................................................................................................................................................................... 102
Maintenance Electric ....................................................................................................................................................... 127
Maintenance Feeder Run ................................................................................................................................................ 128
Maintenance interval ....................................................................................................................................................... 127
Maintenance Speed .......................................................................................................................................................... 76
Material Flow ................................................................................................................................................................... 153
Material Test ..................................................................................................................................................................... 50
MAX ................................................................................................................................................................................ 154
Maximum Feedrate ........................................................................................................................................................... 79
Measuring Principle ............................................................................................................................................................. 8
Mechanic ......................................................................................................................................................................... 155
MF05 Event Moisture MAX ........................................................................................................................................... 153
MF14 Event Remote TCI too small ............................................................................................................................... 154
MIN.................................................................................................................................................................................. 158
Minimum Feedrate ............................................................................................................................................................ 79
Minimum System Requirements ....................................................................................................................................... 41
Modbus-Version .............................................................................................................................................................. 130
Mode Select Enable/Disable ............................................................................................................................................. 81
Moisture .......................................................................................................................................................................... 103
Moisture Active................................................................................................................................................................ 103
Moisture MAX.................................................................................................................................................................. 104
Moisture Offset ................................................................................................................................................................ 104
Moisture Range ............................................................................................................................................................... 104
Moisture Select ............................................................................................................................................................... 103
Monitoring Standstill after Startup ..................................................................................................................................... 24
Net Mask ......................................................................................................................................................................... 134
Nominal Belt Load ............................................................................................................................................................. 21
Nominal Flow Rate Io ........................................................................................................................................................ 73
Nominal Moisture ............................................................................................................................................................ 104
Nominal Speed.................................................................................................................................................................. 73
Offset FCB_AO 1 ............................................................................................................................................................ 139
Offset FCB_AO 2 ............................................................................................................................................................ 140
Offset FCB_AO 3 ............................................................................................................................................................ 140
Offset FCB_AO 4 ............................................................................................................................................................ 141
Offset FCB_AO 5 ............................................................................................................................................................ 142
Operating and Control Access .......................................................................................................................................... 27
Operating Modes – OFF/Maintenance .............................................................................................................................. 10
Operating Modes - Remote ................................................................................................................................................. 9
Operating the Feeder ........................................................................................................................................................ 45
Operating the HMI in 'Off/Maintenance' Mode................................................................................................................... 34
Operating the HMI in 'Remote' Mode ................................................................................................................................ 35
Operation Using EasyServe .............................................................................................................................................. 41
Operation Using the 196NT Display .................................................................................................................................. 39
Operation Using the Touch Screen HMI............................................................................................................................ 33

Index
Options .............................................................................................................................................................................. 47
Overview ............................................................................................................................................................................. 7
Own Address................................................................................................................................................................... 129
P01 - Hardware Modules................................................................................................................................................... 70
P01.01 - Event Communication VHM ............................................................................................................................... 70
P01.02 - Event Communication ARM7 ............................................................................................................................. 71
P01.03 - Analog Channel A10 ........................................................................................................................................... 71
P02 - Feeder Definition ..................................................................................................................................................... 72
P02.01 - Language ............................................................................................................................................................ 72
P02.02 - Units ................................................................................................................................................................... 72
P02.03 - Scale Name ........................................................................................................................................................ 72
P02.04 - Password ............................................................................................................................................................ 72
P02.05 - Nominal Flow Rate Io ......................................................................................................................................... 73
P02.06 - Nominal Speed ................................................................................................................................................... 73
P02.07 - Display Formats .................................................................................................................................................. 73
P02.08 - Flow Rate Units .................................................................................................................................................. 74
P02.09 - Counter 1 Unit..................................................................................................................................................... 74
P02.10 - Counter 2 Unit..................................................................................................................................................... 74
P02.11 - Counter 3 Unit..................................................................................................................................................... 75
P02.12 - DO Pulse Counter.............................................................................................................................................. 75
P02.13 - Totalizer Increment ............................................................................................................................................. 75
P02.14 - Pulse Length Total .............................................................................................................................................. 76
P02.15 - Event Remote TCI too small .............................................................................................................................. 76
P02.16 - Maintenance Speed ............................................................................................................................................ 76
P02.17 - DO FRI Frequency............................................................................................................................................. 77
P02.18 - Remote FRI Frequency ...................................................................................................................................... 77
P02.20 - Codepage ........................................................................................................................................................... 77
P02.21 - DC_Mode ............................................................................................................................................................ 77
P03 - Control Sources ....................................................................................................................................................... 78
P03.01 - Feeder Start ........................................................................................................................................................ 78
P03.02 - Feedrate Setpoint ............................................................................................................................................... 78
P03.03 - Setpoint Range ................................................................................................................................................... 78
P03.04 - Setpoint Offset .................................................................................................................................................... 79
P03.05 - Maximum Feedrate ............................................................................................................................................. 79
P03.06 - Minimum Feedrate .............................................................................................................................................. 79
P03.07 - DI Raise Setpoint ............................................................................................................................................... 79
P03.08 - DI Lower Setpoint .............................................................................................................................................. 80
P03.09 - Raise/Lower Response Time .............................................................................................................................. 80
P03.10 - Source Run Enable............................................................................................................................................. 80
P03.11 - Event Run Disabled ........................................................................................................................................... 81
P03.12 - Mode Select Enable/Disable ............................................................................................................................... 81
P03.13 - Speed Setpoint ................................................................................................................................................... 82
P03.14 - Run Mode Select ................................................................................................................................................ 82
P03.15 - Density Setpoint.................................................................................................................................................. 82
P04 - Rated Data .............................................................................................................................................................. 82
P04.01 - LC Characteristic Value ...................................................................................................................................... 82
P04.02 - LC Rated Capacity.............................................................................................................................................. 82
P04.03 - Effective Platform Length .................................................................................................................................... 83
P04.04 - Lever Ratio ......................................................................................................................................................... 83
P04.05 - Angle .................................................................................................................................................................. 83
P04.06 - Speed Measurement .......................................................................................................................................... 83
P04.07 - Source Load Cell ................................................................................................................................................ 84
P04.08 - Source Load Cell 2 ............................................................................................................................................. 84
P04.09 - Tachometer Pulses per Rev .............................................................................................................................. 84
P04.10 - Load cross section .............................................................................................................................................. 84
P05 - Feeder control ......................................................................................................................................................... 85
P05.01 - Volum on LC failure ............................................................................................................................................ 85
P05.02 - Event Volum on failure ....................................................................................................................................... 85
P05.03 - Afterflow Totalizer ............................................................................................................................................... 85
P05.04 - Zero Drop-Out Active .......................................................................................................................................... 85
P05.05 - Zero Drop-Out Limit ............................................................................................................................................ 86
P06 - Feeder Monitoring.................................................................................................................................................... 86
P06.01 - Event Stand-By .................................................................................................................................................. 86

Index
P06.02 - Stand-By Limit Value .......................................................................................................................................... 86

P06.03 - Event Tachometer Input .................................................................................................................................... 87
P06.04 - Event Error LC Input .......................................................................................................................................... 87
P06.05 - Event LC Input < MIN ........................................................................................................................................ 87
P06.06 - Event LC Input > MAX ....................................................................................................................................... 88
P06.07 - Event Setpoint Limited ....................................................................................................................................... 88
P06.08 - Event Power Failure .......................................................................................................................................... 88
P06.09 - Time Deviation .................................................................................................................................................... 89
P06.10 - Threshold Deviation ............................................................................................................................................ 89
P06.11 - Factor Deviation.................................................................................................................................................. 89
P06.12 - Event Deviation.................................................................................................................................................. 89
P06.13 - Event Controller Limited .................................................................................................................................... 90
P06.14 - Event Memory.................................................................................................................................................... 90
P06.15 - Event Analog Input < Offset ............................................................................................................................... 91
P06.16 - DO Dual Tacho active ........................................................................................................................................ 91
P06.17 - Event Primary Tacho Failure ............................................................................................................................. 91
P07 - Belt Monitoring ......................................................................................................................................................... 91
P07.01 - DI Belt Motion Monitor ....................................................................................................................................... 91
P07.02 - Belt Motion Monitor Delay ................................................................................................................................... 92
P07.03 - Event Belt Motion Monitor.................................................................................................................................. 92
P07.04 - DI Source Belt Sensor ....................................................................................................................................... 92
P07.05 - BIC Active ........................................................................................................................................................... 93
P07.06 - DI BIC freeze ..................................................................................................................................................... 93
P07.07 - Slip Value ........................................................................................................................................................... 93
P07.08 - Event Slip .......................................................................................................................................................... 93
P07.09 - DO Belt Slip ....................................................................................................................................................... 93
P07.10 - Sensor Length .................................................................................................................................................... 94
P07.11 - Sensor Width ...................................................................................................................................................... 94
P07.12 - Sensor Offset ...................................................................................................................................................... 94
P07.13 - Belt Drift .............................................................................................................................................................. 94
P07.14 - Event Belt Drift ................................................................................................................................................... 94
P07.15 - Belt Skew............................................................................................................................................................ 94
P07.16 - Event Belt Skew................................................................................................................................................. 95
P07.17 - DO Belt Drift....................................................................................................................................................... 95
P07.18 - DO Belt Skew .................................................................................................................................................... 95
P08 - Display Filters .......................................................................................................................................................... 95
P08.01 - LC Filter .............................................................................................................................................................. 95
P08.02 - Filter Actual Flow Rate ....................................................................................................................................... 95
P08.03 - Filter Actual Flow Rate analog ........................................................................................................................... 95
P08.04 - Feedback Filter Override Threshold ................................................................................................................... 96
P08.05 - Filter Belt Load................................................................................................................................................... 96
P08.06 - Filter Belt Speed ................................................................................................................................................ 96
P08.07 - Filter Deviation ................................................................................................................................................... 96
P09 - Limit Values ............................................................................................................................................................. 96
P09.01 - Limit Actual Flow Rate MIN ............................................................................................................................... 96
P09.02 - Event Actual Flow Rate MIN .............................................................................................................................. 96
P09.03 - Limit Actual Flow Rate MAX .............................................................................................................................. 97
P09.04 - Event Actual Flow Rate MAX ............................................................................................................................. 97
P09.05 - Limit Belt Load MIN ........................................................................................................................................... 97
P09.06 - Event Belt Load MIN .......................................................................................................................................... 97
P09.07 - Limit Belt Load MAX .......................................................................................................................................... 97
P09.08 - Event Belt Load MAX......................................................................................................................................... 98
P09.09 - Limit Speed MIN ................................................................................................................................................ 98
P09.10 - Event Speed MIN............................................................................................................................................... 98
P09.11 - Limit Speed MAX ............................................................................................................................................... 98
P09.12 - Event Speed MAX ............................................................................................................................................. 99
P10 - Calibration Data ....................................................................................................................................................... 99
P10.01 - Calibration Probe Span....................................................................................................................................... 99
P10.02 - Pulses per length ................................................................................................................................................ 99
P10.03 - Range Correction TW ......................................................................................................................................... 99
P10.04 - Range Correction TC ........................................................................................................................................ 100
P10.05 - Range Correction TM ....................................................................................................................................... 100
P10.06 - Belt Circuit Time ............................................................................................................................................... 100
P10.07 - Simulation Travel (Belt Rev.) ............................................................................................................................ 100
P10.08 - Calibration Weight ............................................................................................................................................ 100
P10.09 - Test Chain Weight ............................................................................................................................................ 101

Index
P10.10 - Basic Tare ........................................................................................................................................................ 101

P10.11 - Belt Circuit No. .................................................................................................................................................. 101
P11 - Rate controller ....................................................................................................................................................... 101
P11.01 - P-Component KP .............................................................................................................................................. 101
P11.02 - I-Component TN ............................................................................................................................................... 101
P11.03 - AO Motor Speed Control ................................................................................................................................. 102
P11.04 - Lower Limit ....................................................................................................................................................... 102
P11.05 - Upper Limit ....................................................................................................................................................... 102
P11.06 - Controller Magnitude Offset .............................................................................................................................. 102
P11.07 - Position at STOP .............................................................................................................................................. 102
P11.08 - KP speed controller .......................................................................................................................................... 102
P11.09 - VAP Active ........................................................................................................................................................ 103
P11.10 - Platform Dis.Length .......................................................................................................................................... 103
P12 - Moisture ................................................................................................................................................................. 103
P12.01 - Moisture Active ................................................................................................................................................. 103
P12.02 - Moisture Select ................................................................................................................................................. 103
P12.03 - AI Moisture Measurement ................................................................................................................................ 103
P12.04 - Nominal Moisture .............................................................................................................................................. 104
P12.05 - Moisture Offset ................................................................................................................................................. 104
P12.06 - Moisture Range ................................................................................................................................................ 104
P12.07 - DO Moisture active .......................................................................................................................................... 104
P12.08 - Moisture MAX ................................................................................................................................................... 104
P12.09 - DO Moisture MAX ............................................................................................................................................ 105
P12.10 - Event Moisture MAX ........................................................................................................................................ 105
P12.11 - AO Flow Rate corrected .................................................................................................................................. 105
P12.12 - AO Flow Rate Offset ........................................................................................................................................ 105
P12.13 - AO Flow Rate Range ....................................................................................................................................... 105
P12.14 - Pulse Counter corrected ................................................................................................................................... 105
P13 - Cleanout control..................................................................................................................................................... 106
P13.01 - DO CleanOut Timer ......................................................................................................................................... 106
P13.02 - CleanOut ON Time ........................................................................................................................................... 106
P13.03 - CleanOut OFF Time ......................................................................................................................................... 106
P13.04 - DI Chain Motion Monitor .................................................................................................................................. 106
P13.05 - Chain Motion Delay .......................................................................................................................................... 106
P13.06 - Event Chain Motion Monitor ............................................................................................................................ 107
P14 - Analog Outputs ...................................................................................................................................................... 107
P14.01 - AO Setpoint ..................................................................................................................................................... 107
P14.02 - Setpoint Offset .................................................................................................................................................. 107
P14.03 - Setpoint Range ................................................................................................................................................. 107
P14.04 - AO Actual Flow Rate ....................................................................................................................................... 107
P14.05 - Flow Rate Offset ............................................................................................................................................... 108
P14.06 - Flow Rate Range .............................................................................................................................................. 108
P14.07 - AO Belt Load ................................................................................................................................................... 108
P14.08 - Belt Load Offset ................................................................................................................................................ 108
P14.09 - Belt Load Range ............................................................................................................................................... 108
P14.10 - AO Speed ........................................................................................................................................................ 108
P14.11 - Speed Offset ..................................................................................................................................................... 108
P14.12 - Speed Range .................................................................................................................................................... 109
P14.13 - AO Deviation.................................................................................................................................................... 109
P14.14 - Deviation Offset ................................................................................................................................................ 109
P14.15 - Deviation Range ............................................................................................................................................... 109
P14.16 - AO Actual Flow Rate (2nd) .............................................................................................................................. 109
P15 - Digital Inputs .......................................................................................................................................................... 110
P15.01 - DI Acknowledge Events ................................................................................................................................... 110
P15.02 - DI Local Mode.................................................................................................................................................. 110
P15.03 - Event External Event 1 .................................................................................................................................... 110
P15.04 - DI External Event 1 .......................................................................................................................................... 110
P15.05 - Event NAMUR Error V103-DI13 ...................................................................................................................... 111
P15.06 - Event NAMUR Error V103-DI14 ...................................................................................................................... 111
P15.07 - DI Reset Totalizer 1 ......................................................................................................................................... 112
P15.08 - DI Reset Totalizer 2 ......................................................................................................................................... 112
P15.09 - DI Discharge Pluggage .................................................................................................................................... 112
P15.10 - Discharge Pluggage Delay ............................................................................................................................... 112
P15.11 - Event Discharge Pluggage .............................................................................................................................. 113
P15.12 - DI Coal on belt switch ...................................................................................................................................... 113
P15.13 - Loss of Flow Trip Delay .................................................................................................................................... 113

Index
P15.14 - Event Loss of material ..................................................................................................................................... 114

P15.15 - Event Coal on Belt ........................................................................................................................................... 114
P15.16 - Belt Paddle Feedback Permissive .................................................................................................................... 114
P15.17 - DI Motor feedback ........................................................................................................................................... 114
P15.18 - Event Motor Start ............................................................................................................................................. 115
P15.19 - DI Coal Flow Monitor ....................................................................................................................................... 115
P15.20 - Level/Temperatur Sensor Delay ....................................................................................................................... 115
P15.21 - Event Coal Flow............................................................................................................................................... 115
P15.22 - DI Configuration Lock ...................................................................................................................................... 116
P15.23 - DI Remote CTRL ............................................................................................................................................. 116
P15.24 - DI OFF/Maint CTRL ......................................................................................................................................... 116
P15.25 - DI Local Start ................................................................................................................................................... 116
P15.26 - DI Jog forward ................................................................................................................................................. 116
P15.27 - DI Jog backward .............................................................................................................................................. 117
P15.34 - DI Volumetric Mode ......................................................................................................................................... 118
P16 - Digital Outputs ....................................................................................................................................................... 118
P16.01 - DO Scale Start ................................................................................................................................................. 118
P16.02 - DO Feeder Started .......................................................................................................................................... 118
P16.03 - DO Feeder running (2nd)................................................................................................................................. 119
P16.04 - DO Feeder Run Forward ................................................................................................................................. 119
P16.05 - DO Feeder Run Forward (2nd) ........................................................................................................................ 119
P16.06 - DO Feeder Run Reverse ................................................................................................................................. 119
P16.07 - DO Feeder Run Reverse (2nd) ........................................................................................................................ 119
P16.08 - DO Start Prefeeder .......................................................................................................................................... 120
P16.09 - DO ALARM ...................................................................................................................................................... 120
P16.10 - DO ALARM (2nd)............................................................................................................................................. 120
P16.11 - DO Deviation ................................................................................................................................................... 120
P16.12 - DO I-MIN ......................................................................................................................................................... 120
P16.13 - DO I-MAX ........................................................................................................................................................ 121
P16.14 - DO Q-MIN ........................................................................................................................................................ 121
P16.15 - DO Q-MAX....................................................................................................................................................... 121
P16.16 - DO v-MIN ......................................................................................................................................................... 121
P16.17 - DO v-MAX ....................................................................................................................................................... 121
P16.18 - DO Volumetric Mode ....................................................................................................................................... 122
P16.19 - DO Volumetric Mode (2nd) .............................................................................................................................. 122
P16.20 - DO Local Mode ................................................................................................................................................ 122
P16.21 - DO WARNING ................................................................................................................................................. 122
P16.22 - DO WARNING (2nd)........................................................................................................................................ 122
P16.23 - DO Feeding ..................................................................................................................................................... 123
P16.24 - DO Feeding (2nd) ............................................................................................................................................ 123
P16.25 - DO Remote CTRL ........................................................................................................................................... 123
P16.26 - DO Remote CTRL (2nd) .................................................................................................................................. 123
P17 - Analog calibration .................................................................................................................................................. 123
P17.01 - Analog Input 1 Min ............................................................................................................................................ 123
P17.02 - Analog Input 1 Max ........................................................................................................................................... 124
P17.11 - Analog Output 1 Min ......................................................................................................................................... 125
P17.12 - Analog Output 1 Max ........................................................................................................................................ 125

Index

P18 - 2-Sensor Slip ......................................................................................................................................................... 126
P18.01 - 2-Sensor Slip active .......................................................................................................................................... 126
P18.02 - Source Sensor 1 ............................................................................................................................................... 126
P18.03 - DI Sensor 1 ...................................................................................................................................................... 126
P18.04 - Characteristic Value Sensor 1 .......................................................................................................................... 126
P18.05 - DI Sensor 2 ...................................................................................................................................................... 127
P18.06 - Characteristic Value Sensor 2 .......................................................................................................................... 127
P18.07 - Slip Value 2 ...................................................................................................................................................... 127
P18.08 - Event Slip 2...................................................................................................................................................... 127
P18.09 - DO Slip 2 ......................................................................................................................................................... 127
P19 - Maintenance interval.............................................................................................................................................. 127
P19.01 - Maintenance Electric ........................................................................................................................................ 127
P19.02 - Event Maint. Electric ........................................................................................................................................ 128
P19.03 - Maintenance Feeder Run ................................................................................................................................. 128
P19.04 - Event Maint.Feeder Run .................................................................................................................................. 128
P20 - Data Logging ......................................................................................................................................................... 128
P20.01 - Hourly Total Time ............................................................................................................................................. 128
P20.02 - Daily Total Time ................................................................................................................................................ 128
P21 - Communication EasyServe ................................................................................................................................... 129
P21.01 - Own Address .................................................................................................................................................... 129
P21.02 - Baud Rate ......................................................................................................................................................... 129
P21.03 - Format Data ...................................................................................................................................................... 129
P22 - Communication Fieldbus ....................................................................................................................................... 129
P22.01 - Protocol Type.................................................................................................................................................... 130
P22.02 - Timeout Host .................................................................................................................................................... 130
P22.03 - Event Cyclic Communication ........................................................................................................................... 130
P22.04 - Modbus-Version................................................................................................................................................ 130
P22.05 - Word Sequence ................................................................................................................................................ 131
P22.06 - Byte Sequence ................................................................................................................................................. 131
P22.07 - Configuration .................................................................................................................................................... 131
P22.08 - Address ............................................................................................................................................................ 131
P22.09 - Resolution ......................................................................................................................................................... 131
P22.10 - Baud rate .......................................................................................................................................................... 132
P22.11 - Data Format ...................................................................................................................................................... 132
P22.12 - Physics ............................................................................................................................................................. 132
P22.13 - Address ............................................................................................................................................................ 132
P22.14 - FLOAT-Format.................................................................................................................................................. 132
P22.15 - Address ............................................................................................................................................................ 132
P22.16 - Baud rate .......................................................................................................................................................... 133
P22.17 - Parameter ......................................................................................................................................................... 133
P22.18 - Preset Count ..................................................................................................................................................... 133
P22.19 - READ_ID Count ................................................................................................................................................ 133
P22.20 - Access Rights Control ...................................................................................................................................... 133
P22.21 - Remote IP Address........................................................................................................................................... 134
P23 - Ethernet ................................................................................................................................................................. 134
P23.01 - IP Address ........................................................................................................................................................ 134
P23.02 - Net Mask .......................................................................................................................................................... 134
P23.03 - Gateway ........................................................................................................................................................... 134
P24 - PLC Outputs .......................................................................................................................................................... 134
P24.01 - DO PLC 1 ........................................................................................................................................................ 134
P24.02 - DO PLC 2 ........................................................................................................................................................ 134
P24.03 - DO PLC 3 ........................................................................................................................................................ 135
P24.04 - DO PLC 4 ........................................................................................................................................................ 135
P24.05 - DO PLC 5 ........................................................................................................................................................ 135
P24.06 - DO PLC 6 ........................................................................................................................................................ 135
P24.07 - DO PLC 7 ........................................................................................................................................................ 135
P24.08 - DO PLC 8 ........................................................................................................................................................ 135
P24.09 - AO PLC 1 ........................................................................................................................................................ 135
P24.10 - AO PLC 2 ........................................................................................................................................................ 136
P25 - Fixed mode configuration ...................................................................................................................................... 136
P25.01 - ID Preset Value 1.............................................................................................................................................. 136

Index
P25.02 - ID Preset Value 2.............................................................................................................................................. 136

P25.03 - ID Preset Value 3.............................................................................................................................................. 136
P25.04 - ID Preset Value 4.............................................................................................................................................. 136
P25.05 - ID Preset Value 5.............................................................................................................................................. 136
P25.06 - ID Preset Value 6.............................................................................................................................................. 136
P25.07 - ID Preset Value 7.............................................................................................................................................. 137
P25.08 - ID Preset Value 8.............................................................................................................................................. 137
P25.09 - ID Read Value 1 ............................................................................................................................................... 137
P25.10 - ID Read Value 2 ............................................................................................................................................... 137
P25.11 - ID Read Value 3 ............................................................................................................................................... 137
P25.12 - ID Read Value 4 ............................................................................................................................................... 137
P25.13 - ID Read Value 5 ............................................................................................................................................... 137
P25.14 - ID Read Value 6 ............................................................................................................................................... 137
P25.15 - ID Read Value 7 ............................................................................................................................................... 138
P25.16 - ID Read Value 8 ............................................................................................................................................... 138
P25.17 - ID Read Value 9 ............................................................................................................................................... 138
P25.18 - ID Read Value 10 ............................................................................................................................................. 138
P25.19 - ID Read Value 11 ............................................................................................................................................. 138
P25.20 - ID Read Value 12 ............................................................................................................................................. 138
P25.21 - ID Read Value 13 ............................................................................................................................................. 138
P25.22 - ID Read Value 14 ............................................................................................................................................. 138
P25.23 - ID Read Value 15 ............................................................................................................................................. 139
P25.24 - ID Read Value 16 ............................................................................................................................................. 139
P26 - FCB analog outputs ............................................................................................................................................... 139
P26.01 - FCB_AO 01 ...................................................................................................................................................... 139
P26.02 - Offset FCB_AO 1 .............................................................................................................................................. 139
P26.03 - Range FCB_AO 1 ............................................................................................................................................. 139
P26.04 - Reference FCB_AO 1 ....................................................................................................................................... 139
P26.05 - FCB_AO 02 ...................................................................................................................................................... 140
P26.06 - Offset FCB_AO 2 .............................................................................................................................................. 140
P26.07 - Range FCB_AO 2 ............................................................................................................................................. 140
P26.09 - FCB_AO 03 ...................................................................................................................................................... 140
P26.10 - Offset FCB_AO 3 .............................................................................................................................................. 140
P26.11 - Range FCB_AO 3 ............................................................................................................................................. 141
P26.13 - FCB_AO 04 ...................................................................................................................................................... 141
P26.14 - Offset FCB_AO 4 .............................................................................................................................................. 141
P26.15 - Range FCB_AO 4 ............................................................................................................................................. 141
P26.17 - FCB_AO 05 ...................................................................................................................................................... 142
P26.18 - Offset FCB_AO 5 .............................................................................................................................................. 142
P26.19 - Range FCB_AO 5 ............................................................................................................................................. 142
P27 - FCB digital outputs ................................................................................................................................................ 142
P27.01 - FCB_DO 01 ...................................................................................................................................................... 143
P27.02 - FCB_DO 02 ...................................................................................................................................................... 143
P27.03 - FCB_DO 03 ...................................................................................................................................................... 143
P27.04 - FCB_DO 04 ...................................................................................................................................................... 143
P27.05 - FCB_DO 05 ...................................................................................................................................................... 143
P27.06 - FCB_DO 06 ...................................................................................................................................................... 143
P27.07 - FCB_DO 07 ...................................................................................................................................................... 143
P27.08 - FCB_DO 08 ...................................................................................................................................................... 144
P27.09 - FCB_DO 09 ...................................................................................................................................................... 144
P27.10 - FCB_DO 10 ...................................................................................................................................................... 144
P27.11 - FCB_DO 11 ...................................................................................................................................................... 144
P27.12 - FCB_DO 12 ...................................................................................................................................................... 144
P27.13 - FCB_DO 13 ...................................................................................................................................................... 144
P27.14 - FCB_DO 14 ...................................................................................................................................................... 144
P27.15 - FCB_DO 15 ...................................................................................................................................................... 145
P27.16 - FCB_DO 16 ...................................................................................................................................................... 145
P27.17 - FCB_DO 17 ...................................................................................................................................................... 145
P27.18 - FCB_DO 18 ...................................................................................................................................................... 145
P27.19 - FCB_DO 19 ...................................................................................................................................................... 145
P27.20 - FCB_DO 20 ...................................................................................................................................................... 145
P28 - Configuration HMI Values ...................................................................................................................................... 145

Index
P28.01 - HMI Value 01 .................................................................................................................................................... 146

P28.02 - HMI Value 02 .................................................................................................................................................... 146
P28.03 - HMI Value 03 .................................................................................................................................................... 146
P28.04 - HMI Value 04 .................................................................................................................................................... 146
P28.05 - HMI Value 05 .................................................................................................................................................... 146
P28.06 - HMI Value 06 .................................................................................................................................................... 146
P28.07 - HMI Value 07 .................................................................................................................................................... 146
P28.08 - HMI Value 08 .................................................................................................................................................... 146
P28.09 - HMI Value 09 .................................................................................................................................................... 147
P28.10 - HMI Value 10 .................................................................................................................................................... 147
Parameter ....................................................................................................................................................................... 133
Parameter Block 01 - Hardware Modules.......................................................................................................................... 70
Parameter Block 02 - Feeder Definition ............................................................................................................................ 72
Parameter Block 03 - Control Sources .............................................................................................................................. 78
Parameter Block 04 - Rated Data ..................................................................................................................................... 82
Parameter Block 05 - Feeder control ................................................................................................................................ 85
Parameter Block 06 - Feeder Monitoring........................................................................................................................... 86
Parameter Block 07 - Belt Monitoring ................................................................................................................................ 91
Parameter Block 08 - Display Filters ................................................................................................................................. 95
Parameter Block 09 - Limit Values .................................................................................................................................... 96
Parameter Block 10 - Calibration Data .............................................................................................................................. 99
Parameter Block 11 - Rate controller .............................................................................................................................. 101
Parameter Block 12 - Moisture ........................................................................................................................................ 103
Parameter Block 13 - Cleanout control ........................................................................................................................... 106
Parameter Block 14 - Analog Outputs ............................................................................................................................. 107
Parameter Block 15 - Digital Inputs ................................................................................................................................. 110
Parameter Block 16 - Digital Outputs .............................................................................................................................. 118
Parameter Block 17 - Analog calibration ......................................................................................................................... 123
Parameter Block 18 - 2-Sensor Slip ................................................................................................................................ 126
Parameter Block 19 - Maintenance interval..................................................................................................................... 127
Parameter Block 20 - Data Logging ................................................................................................................................ 128
Parameter Block 21 - Communication EasyServe .......................................................................................................... 129
Parameter Block 22 - Communication Fieldbus .............................................................................................................. 129
Parameter Block 23 - Ethernet ........................................................................................................................................ 134
Parameter Block 24 - PLC Outputs ................................................................................................................................. 134
Parameter Block 25 - Fixed mode configuration ............................................................................................................. 136
Parameter Block 26 - FCB analog outputs ...................................................................................................................... 139
Parameter Block 27 - FCB digital outputs ....................................................................................................................... 142
Parameter Block 28 - Configuration HMI Values ............................................................................................................. 145
Parameter Details ............................................................................................................................................................. 70
Parameter Log Values....................................................................................................................................................... 36
Parameter Overview ......................................................................................................................................................... 56
Parameter Set ................................................................................................................................................................... 43
Parameter Setup ............................................................................................................................................................... 36
Parameters........................................................................................................................................................................ 51
Password .......................................................................................................................................................................... 72
P-Component KP ............................................................................................................................................................ 101
Performing Calibrations ..................................................................................................................................................... 16
Physics ............................................................................................................................................................................ 132
Platform Dis.Length ......................................................................................................................................................... 103
PLC Functionality (Optional) ........................................................................................................................................... 171
PLC Outputs.................................................................................................................................................................... 134
Position at STOP............................................................................................................................................................. 102
Preset Count ................................................................................................................................................................... 133
Print Parameters ............................................................................................................................................................... 45
Probe Error.................................................................................................................................................................. 17, 18
Program EasyServe VPC 20150 ....................................................................................................................................... 41
Protocol Type .................................................................................................................................................................. 130
Pulse Counter corrected.................................................................................................................................................. 105
Pulse Length Total ............................................................................................................................................................ 76
Pulses per length .............................................................................................................................................................. 99
Raise/Lower Response Time ............................................................................................................................................ 80
Range Correction TC ...................................................................................................................................................... 100
Range Correction TM ...................................................................................................................................................... 100
Range Correction TW........................................................................................................................................................ 99
Range FCB_AO 1 ........................................................................................................................................................... 139

Index
Range FCB_AO 2 ........................................................................................................................................................... 140

Range FCB_AO 3 ........................................................................................................................................................... 141
Range FCB_AO 4 ........................................................................................................................................................... 141
Range FCB_AO 5 ........................................................................................................................................................... 142
Rate controller ................................................................................................................................................................. 101
Rated Data ........................................................................................................................................................................ 82
Read/change Parameters ................................................................................................................................................. 43
READ_ID Count .............................................................................................................................................................. 133
Reference FCB_AO 1...................................................................................................................................................... 139
Reference FCB_AO 2...................................................................................................................................................... 140
Reference FCB_AO 3...................................................................................................................................................... 141
Reference FCB_AO 4...................................................................................................................................................... 142
Reference FCB_AO 5...................................................................................................................................................... 142
Remote FRI Frequency ..................................................................................................................................................... 77
Remote IP Address ......................................................................................................................................................... 134
Resolution ....................................................................................................................................................................... 131
Restoring the Factory Default Settings .............................................................................................................................. 37
Retro-reflective Tape Clips .......................................................................................................................................... 17, 18
Run Mode Select............................................................................................................................................................... 82
Safety notes ........................................................................................................................................................................ 3
SC01 Event Setpoint Limited ........................................................................................................................................ 159
SC02 Event Stand-By ................................................................................................................................................... 159
SC03 Event Maint.Feeder Run ..................................................................................................................................... 159
SC04 Event Maint. Electric............................................................................................................................................ 159
SC05 Event External Event 1 ........................................................................................................................................ 160
Scale Name....................................................................................................................................................................... 72
Scale Operation Screens .................................................................................................................................................. 45
Screened Cables ............................................................................................................................................................. 179
Sensor Length ................................................................................................................................................................... 94
Sensor Offset .................................................................................................................................................................... 94
Sensor Width..................................................................................................................................................................... 94
Sequence Monitoring ...................................................................................................................................................... 159
Service Values .................................................................................................................................................................. 46
Setpoint Offset .......................................................................................................................................................... 79, 107
Setpoint Range ......................................................................................................................................................... 78, 107
Setting the Current Time and Date .................................................................................................................................... 38
Setting Time ...................................................................................................................................................................... 47
Setup Notes ...................................................................................................................................................................... 11
Setup Parameters ............................................................................................................................................................. 12
Signal Words ....................................................................................................................................................................... 4
Signal Words for Application Notes ..................................................................................................................................... 5
Signal Words for Safety Warnings ...................................................................................................................................... 4
Simulation Mode ............................................................................................................................................................... 38
Simulation Travel (Belt Rev.)........................................................................................................................................... 100
Slip Value .......................................................................................................................................................................... 93
Slip Value 2 ..................................................................................................................................................................... 127
Source Load Cell ............................................................................................................................................................... 84
Source Load Cell 2 ............................................................................................................................................................ 84
Source Run Enable ........................................................................................................................................................... 80
Source Sensor 1 ............................................................................................................................................................. 126
Span (CAL 2) .................................................................................................................................................................... 18
Speed Measurement ......................................................................................................................................................... 83
Speed Offset ................................................................................................................................................................... 108
Speed Range .................................................................................................................................................................. 109
Speed Setpoint.................................................................................................................................................................. 82
Stand-By Limit Value ......................................................................................................................................................... 86
Start Program and Connect to Feeder .............................................................................................................................. 41
Startup and Functional Check ........................................................................................................................................... 12
SY01 Event Memory ..................................................................................................................................................... 161
SY07 Event Communication VHM ................................................................................................................................ 161
SY08 Event Cyclic Communication ............................................................................................................................... 161
SY12 Event Communication ARM7 .............................................................................................................................. 161
System Message ............................................................................................................................................................. 161

Index
TA: Tare ............................................................................................................................................................................ 20

Tab.1: Parameter for BIC and for belt motion monitoring .................................................................................................. 23
Tab.2: Sequence for adjustment and commissioning ........................................................................................................ 23
Tab.3: Setting and adjusting the two-sensor belt slippage monitoring .............................................................................. 25
Tab.4: Operating access ................................................................................................................................................... 27
Tab.5: Functions available on the controller web page ..................................................................................................... 31
Tab.6: Blocks available for processing binary signals ..................................................................................................... 173
Tachometer Pulses per Rev ............................................................................................................................................. 84
TC: Span Calibration ......................................................................................................................................................... 19
Test Chain Weight........................................................................................................................................................... 101
Testing .............................................................................................................................................................................. 49
The 'Calibration' Screen .................................................................................................................................................... 34
The 'Communication' Screen ............................................................................................................................................ 34
The 'Configuration' Screen ................................................................................................................................................ 34
The 'Display Settings' Screen............................................................................................................................................ 33
The 'Feeder' Screen .......................................................................................................................................................... 34
The 'Home' Screen ............................................................................................................................................................ 34
The 'Network' Screen ........................................................................................................................................................ 33
The 'Setup' Screen ............................................................................................................................................................ 36
The 'Trend' Screen ............................................................................................................................................................ 35
The 'Values' Screen .......................................................................................................................................................... 35
Thoughts on the Cable Connections ............................................................................................................................... 179
Threshold Deviation .......................................................................................................................................................... 89
Time Deviation .................................................................................................................................................................. 89
Timeout Host ................................................................................................................................................................... 130
Totalizer Increment ........................................................................................................................................................... 75
Totals .................................................................................................................................................................................. 9
Trending Data ................................................................................................................................................................. 167
Trends ............................................................................................................................................................................... 47
Trimming the Analog Inputs and Outputs .......................................................................................................................... 37
Two-Sensor Belt Slippage Monitoring ............................................................................................................................... 25
Typical Operating Procedures ........................................................................................................................................... 38
Units .................................................................................................................................................................................. 72
Unscreened Cables ......................................................................................................................................................... 179
Upper Limit ...................................................................................................................................................................... 102
VAP Active ...................................................................................................................................................................... 103
Volum on LC failure ........................................................................................................................................................... 85
Volumetric ......................................................................................................................................................................... 10
Volumetric Control ............................................................................................................................................................. 10
WE01 Event Power Failure ........................................................................................................................................... 151
WE02 Event Namur Error VCU1-DI6 ............................................................................................................................ 152
WE03 Event Namur Error VCU1-DI7 ............................................................................................................................ 152
WE08 Event Analog Input < Offset................................................................................................................................ 153
Web Server in the Scales Controller VCU ......................................................................................................................... 31
Weigh Roller Adjustment ................................................................................................................................................... 16
Weigh Span Length ............................................................................................................................................................. 9
What is the DISOCONT Tersus/DT-9?................................................................................................................................ 7
WM02 Event Slip ........................................................................................................................................................... 155
WM03 Event Belt Skew ................................................................................................................................................. 155
WM04 Event Belt Drift ................................................................................................................................................... 155
WM05 Event Slip 2 ........................................................................................................................................................ 156
WM06 Event Chain Motion Monitor............................................................................................................................... 156
WM07 Event Discharge Pluggage ................................................................................................................................ 156
WM08 Event Loss of material ....................................................................................................................................... 156
WM09 Event Motor Start ............................................................................................................................................... 157
WM10 Event Belt Motion Monitor .................................................................................................................................. 157
WM11 Event Coal Flow ................................................................................................................................................. 157
WM12 Event Coal on Belt ............................................................................................................................................. 157
Word Sequence .............................................................................................................................................................. 131
Zero Drop-Out Active ........................................................................................................................................................ 85
Zero Drop-Out Limit .......................................................................................................................................................... 86

DriveIT Low Voltage AC Drives
User’s Manual
ACS510-01 Drives (1.1…110 kW)

2 ACS510 User’s Manual
ACS510 Drive Manuals The IndustrialIT wordmark and Product names in the form
GENERAL MANUALS DriveIT are registered or pending trademarks of ABB.
CANopen is a registered trademark of CAN in Automation
e.V.
ACS510-01 User's Manual (1.1…110 kW)
ControlNet is a registered trademark of ControlNet
• Safety International.
• Installation DeviceNet is a registered trademark of Open DeviceNet
• Start-Up Vendor Association.
• Embedded Fieldbus DRIVECOM is a registered trademark of DRIVECOM User
• Fieldbus Adapter Organization.
• Diagnostics Interbus is a registered trademark of Interbus Club.
• Maintenance LonWorks is a registered trademark of Echelon Corp.
• Technical Data Metasys is a registered trademark of Johnson Controls Inc.
Modbus and Modbus Plus are registered trademarks of
Schneider Automation Inc.
OPTION MANUALS
Profibus is a registered trademark of Profibus Trade Org.
(Fieldbus Adapters, I/O Extension Modules etc., manuals
delivered with optional equipment) Profibus-DP is a registered trademark of Siemens AG.
Relay Output Extension Module (typical title)

• Installation
• Start-Up
• Diagnostics
• Technical Data
© 2005 ABB Inc. All Rights Reserved.

ACS510 User’s Manual 3
Safety
Warning! The ACS510 adjustable speed AC drive should ONLY be installed by a

qualified electrician.
Warning! Even when the motor is stopped, dangerous voltage is present at the
Power Circuit terminals U1, V1, W1 and U2, V2, W2 and, depending on the frame
size, UDC+ and UDC-, or BRK+ and BRK-.
Warning! Dangerous voltage is present when input power is connected. After
disconnecting the supply, wait at least 5 minutes (to let the intermediate circuit
capacitors discharge) before removing the cover.
Warning! Even when power is removed from the input terminals of the ACS510,
there may be dangerous voltage (from external sources) on the terminals of the relay
outputs R01…R03.
Warning! When the control terminals of two or more drive units are connected in
parallel, the auxiliary voltage for these control connections must be taken from a
single source which can either be one of the units or an external supply.
Warning! The ACS510-01 is not a field repairable unit. Never attempt to repair a
malfunctioning unit; contact the factory or your local Authorized Service Center for
replacement.
Warning! The ACS510 will start up automatically after an input voltage interruption if
the external run command is on.
Warning! The heat sink may reach a high temperature. See "Technical Data" on
page 210.
Warning! If the drive will be used in a floating network, remove screws at EM1 and
EM3 (Frame size R1…R4), or F1 and F2 (Frame size R5 or R6). See diagrams on
page 15 and page 16 respectively. Also see "Unsymmetrically Grounded Networks"
and "Floating Networks" on page 217.
Warning! Do not attempt to install or remove EM1, EM3, F1 or F2 screws while
power is applied to the drive’s input terminals.
Note! For more technical information, contact the factory or your local ABB sales
representative.
Safety
Use of Warnings and Notes

There are two types of safety instructions throughout this manual:
• Notes draw attention to a particular condition or fact, or give information on a
subject.
• Warnings caution you about conditions which can result in serious injury or death
and/or damage to the equipment. They also tell you how to avoid the danger. The
warning symbols are used as follows:
Dangerous voltage warning warns of high voltage which can cause physical injury
and/or damage to the equipment.
General warning warns about conditions, other than those caused by electricity,
which can result in physical injury and/or damage to the equipment
Safety
Table of Contents
Safety
Use of Warnings and Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Table of Contents
Installation
Installation Flow Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Preparing for Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Installing the Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Start-Up
Control Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Assistant Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Basic Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Application Macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Complete Parameter List for ACS510 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Complete Parameter Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Embedded Fieldbus
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Mechanical and Electrical Installation – EFB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Communication Set-up – EFB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Activate Drive Control Functions – EFB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Feedback from the Drive – EFB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Diagnostics – EFB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Modbus Protocol Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
ABB Control Profiles Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Fieldbus Adapter
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Mechanical and Electrical Installation – FBA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Communication Set-up – FBA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Activate Drive Control Functions – FBA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Feedback from the Drive – FBA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Diagnostics – FBA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
ABB Drives Profile Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Generic Profile Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Diagnostics
Diagnostic Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Correcting Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Correcting Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Table of Contents
Maintenance
Maintenance Intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Heatsink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Main Fan Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Internal Enclosure Fan Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Capacitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Technical Data
Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Input Power Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Motor Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Brake Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Control Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Efficiency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Dimensions and Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Degrees of Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Ambient Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Applicable Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Liability Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Index
Table of Contents
Installation
Study these installation instructions carefully before proceeding. Failure to observe

the warnings and instructions may cause a malfunction or personal hazard.
Warning! Before you begin read "Safety" on page 3.
Installation Flow Chart

The installation of the ACS510 adjustable speed AC drive follows the outline below.
The steps must be carried out in the order shown. At the right of each step are
references to the detailed information needed for the correct installation of the unit.
Task See
PREPARE for installation "Preparing for Installation" on page 8.
PREPARE the Mounting Location "Prepare the Mounting Location" on page 11.
REMOVE the front cover "Remove Front Cover" on page 11.
MOUNT the drive "Mount the Drive" on page 12.
INSTALL wiring "Wiring Overview" on page 13 and

"Install the Wiring" on page 18.
CHECK installation "Check Installation" on page 23.
RE-INSTALL the cover "Re-install Cover" on page 24.
APPLY power "Apply Power" on page 25.
START-UP "Start-Up" on page 25.
Installation
Preparing for Installation
Lifting the Drive

Lift the drive only by the metal
chassis.
Unpack the Drive

1. Unpack the drive.
2. Check for any damage and
notify the shipper immediately
if damaged components are
found. IP2040
3. Check the contents against

the order and the shipping label to verify that all parts have been received.
Drive Identification
Drive Labels
To determine the type of drive you are installing, refer to either:
• Serial number label attached on upper part of the chokeplate between the
mounting holes.
ACS510-01-09A4-4+N688
U1 3~ 380...480 V
I2N 9.4 A
Ser. no. *3050700001*
PN 4 kW
• Type code label attached on the heat sink – on the right side of the unit cover.
Input U1 3~ 380...480 V
I1N 9.4 A
f1 48...63 Hz
Output U2 3~ 0...U1V
I2N 9.4 A
Ser. no. *3050700001*
f2 0...50 Hz
Motor PN 4 kW
ACS510-01-09A4-4+N688
Installation
Type Code
Use the following chart to interpret the type code found on either label.
ACS510-01-09A4-4+...
AC, Standard Drive – 510 product series
Construction (region specific)

01 = Setup and parts specific to IEC installation and compliance
Output current rating

See Ratings chart for details
Voltage rating
4 = 380…480 VAC
Degree of protection Enclosure and/or other options

No specification = IP 21
B055 = IP 54
N688 = GO-mark approval with 50Hz limit
N689 = GO-mark approval with 55Hz limit
Ratings and Frame Size

The chart in "Ratings" on page 211 lists technical specifications, and identifies the
drive’s frame size – significant, since some instructions in this document, vary,
depending on the drive’s frame size. To read the Ratings table, you need the “Output
current rating” entry from the type code. Also, when using the Ratings table, note
that the table is broken into sections based on the drive’s “Voltage rating”.
Motor Compatibility
The motor, drive, and supply power must be compatible:
Motor
Verify Reference
Specification
Motor type 3-phase induction motor –
Nominal current Motor value is within this • Type code label on drive, entry for Output I2n,
range: 0.2…2.0 * I2n or
• Type code on drive and rating table in
"Technical Data" on page 211.
Nominal frequency 10…500 Hz –
N688:10...50Hz
N689:10...55Hz
Voltage range Motor is compatible with 380…480 V
the ACS510 voltage range.
Tools Required
To install the ACS510 you need the following:
• Screwdrivers (as appropriate for the mounting hardware used)
• Wire stripper
Installation
• Tape measure
• Drill
• Mounting hardware: screws or nuts and bolts, four each. The type of hardware
depends on the mounting surface and the frame size:
Frame Size Mounting Hardware
R1…R4 M5 #10
R5 M6 1/4 in
R6 M8 5/16 in
Suitable Environment and Enclosure

Confirm that the site meets the environmental requirements. To prevent damage
prior to installation, store and transport the drive according to the environmental
requirements specified for storage and transportation. See "Ambient Conditions" on
page 235.
Confirm that the enclosure is appropriate, based on the site contamination level:
• IP 21 enclosure. The site must be free of airborne dust, corrosive gases or
liquids, and conductive contaminants such as condensation, carbon dust, and
metallic particles.
• IP 54 enclosure. This enclosure provides protection from airborne dust and light
sprays or splashing water from all directions.
Suitable Mounting Location

Confirm that the mounting location meets the following constraints:
• The drive must be mounted vertically on a smooth, solid surface, and in a suitable
environment as defined above.
• The minimum space requirements for the drive are the outside dimensions (see
"Outside Dimensions" on page 233), plus air flow space around the unit (see
"Cooling" on page 230).
• The distance between the motor and the drive is limited by the maximum motor
cable length. See either "Motor Connection Specifications" on page 220, or "Motor
Cable Requirements for CE Compliance" on page 221.
• The mounting site must support the drive’s modest weight. See "Weight" on page
234.
Installation
Installing the Drive
Warning! Before installing the ACS510, ensure the input power supply to the drive is
off.
Prepare the Mounting Location

The ACS510 should only be mounted where all of the
requirements defined in "Preparing for Installation" on
page 8 are met.
1. Mark the position of the mounting holes. 1
2. Drill the holes. X0002
Note! Frame sizes R3 and R4 have four holes along the top. Use only two. If
possible, use the two outside holes (to allow room to remove the fan for
maintenance).
Note! ACS400 drives can be replaced using the original mounting holes. For R1 and
R2 frame sizes, the mounting holes are identical. For R3 and R4 frame sizes, the
inside mounting holes on the top of ACS510 drives match ACS400 mounts.
Remove Front Cover

3
IP 21
1. Remove the control panel, if attached.
2
2. Loosen the captive screw at the top.
3. Pull near the top to remove the cover.
IP2000
Installation
IP 54
1. If hood is present: Remove screws (2) holding
hood in place. 1
2
2. If hood is present: Slide hood up and off of the
cover.
3. Loosen the captive screws around the edge of
the cover.
4. Remove the cover.
4
FM
Mount the Drive 1
IP 21
1. Position the ACS510 onto the mounting screws
or bolts and securely tighten in all four corners.
Note! Lift the ACS510 by its metal chassis.

2
2. Non-English speaking locations: Add a warning
sticker in the appropriate language over the
existing warning on the top of the module.
IP 54 IP2002
For the IP54 enclosures, rubber plugs are required in the holes provided for access
to the drive mounting slots.
1. As required for access, remove the rubber plugs. 3
Push plugs out from the back of the drive.
2. R5 & R6: Align the sheet metal hood (not shown)
in front of the drive’s top mounting holes. (Attach
as part of next step.) 1, 4
3. Position the ACS510 onto the mounting screws
or bolts and securely tighten in all four corners.
Note! Lift the ACS510 by its metal chassis.
4. Re-install the rubber plugs.

FM
5. Non-English speaking locations: Add a warning
sticker in the appropriate language over the existing warning on the top of the
module.
Installation
Wiring Overview
Conduit/Gland Kit
Wiring drives with the IP 21 Enclosure requires a conduit/gland kit with the following
items:
• Conduit/gland box
• Five (5) cable clamps
• Screws
• Cover
The kit is included with IP 21 Enclosures.
Wiring Requirements
Warning! Ensure the motor is compatible for use with the ACS510. The ACS510
must be installed by a competent person in accordance with the considerations
defined in "Preparing for Installation" on page 8. If in doubt, contact your local ABB
sales or service office.
As you install the wiring, observe the following:

• There are four sets of wiring instructions – one set for each combination of drive
enclosure type (IP 21 and IP 54 ), and wiring type (conduit or cable). Be sure to
select the appropriate procedure.
• Determine electro-magnetic compliance (EMC) requirements per local codes.
See "Motor Cable Requirements for CE Compliance" on page 221. In general:
– Follow local codes for cable size.
– Keep these four classes of wiring separated: input power wiring, motor wiring,
control/communications wiring, and braking unit wiring.
• When installing input power and motor wiring, refer to the following, as
appropriate:
Terminal Description Specifications and Notes
U1, V1, W1 3-phase power supply input "Input Power Connections" on page 214.
PE Protective Ground "Ground Connections" on page 216.
U2, V2, W2 Power output to motor "Motor Connections" on page 220.
• To locate input power and motor connection terminals, see "Power Connection
Diagrams" starting on page 15. For specifications on power terminals, see
"Drive’s Power Connection Terminals" on page 218.
• For frame sizes R1…R4 in unsymmetrically grounded networks, see
"Unsymmetrically Grounded Networks" on page 217.
• For floating (or impedance grounded) networks, see "Floating Networks" on page
217.
• For frame size R6, see "Power Terminal Considerations – R6 Frame Size" on
page 218 to install the appropriate cable lugs.
Installation
• For drives using braking (optional), refer to the following, as appropriate:

Frame Size Terminal Description Braking Accessory
R1, R2 BRK+, BRK- Braking resistor Braking resistor. See "Brake
Components" on page 225.
R3, R4, R5, R6 UDC+, UDC- DC bus Contact your ABB representative to
order either:
• Braking unit or
• Chopper and resistor
• When installing control wiring, refer to the following, as appropriate:

– "Control Terminals Table" on page 17.
– "Control Connections" on page 229.
– "Application Macros" on page 41.
– "Complete Parameter Descriptions" on page 63.
– "Embedded Fieldbus" on page 143.
– "Fieldbus Adapter" on page 175.
Installation
Power Connection Diagrams

The following diagram shows the terminal layout for frame size R3, which, in
general, applies to frame sizes R1…R6, except for the R5/R6 power and ground
terminals.
J1 – DIP Switches for Analog Inputs Diagram shows the R3 frame.
Other frames have similar layouts.
J1
AI1: (in Voltage Position)
ON
Panel Connector
AI2: (in Current Position)
ON
X1 – Analog Inputs and Outputs

(and 10 V Ref. Voltage Output) Power LED (Green)
Fault LED (Red)
X1 – Digital Inputs
(and 24 V Aux. Voltage Output)
X1 – Relay Outputs
J2 – DIP Switch Optional Module 1

for RS485 Termination
J2 J2 X1 – Communications
(RS485)
ON
ON
Optional Module 2
off position on position
Power Input Power Output to Motor

(U1, V1, W1) (U2, V2, W2)
Frame Sizes
R5/R6 differ.
See EM3
next page. EM1
GND
PE
X0003
Optional braking
Frame Terminal
Brake Options
Size Labels
R1, R2 BRK+, BRK- Brake resistor
R3, R4 UDC+, UDC- • Braking unit
Warning! For floating, impedance grounded, or unsymmetrically grounded

networks, disconnect the internal RFI filter by removing:
- screws EM1 and EM3.
See "Floating Networks" on page 217.
Installation
The following diagram shows the power and ground terminal layout for frame sizes
R5 and R6
R5 R6
F2
F1
F2
PE GND
X0011
GND

(U1, V1, W1) (U2, V2, W2) F1
Optional braking
Frame Terminal
Brake Options
Size Labels
R5, R6 UDC+, UDC- • Braking unit
X0013
PE GND
(U1, V1, W1) (U2, V2, W2)
Warning! For floating, impedance grounded, or unsymmetrically grounded

networks, disconnect the internal RFI filter by removing screws: F1 and F2.
See "Floating Networks" on page 217.
Installation
Control Terminals Table

The following provides information for connecting control wiring at X1 on the drive.
X1 Hardware Description
1 SCR Terminal for signal cable screen. (Connected internally to chassis ground.)
2 AI1 Analog input channel 1, programmable. Default2 = frequency reference. Resolution
0.1%, accuracy ±1%.
J1:AI1 OFF: 0…10 V (Ri = 312 kΩ)
ON
J1:AI1 ON: 0…20 mA (Ri = 100 Ω)
ON
3 AGND Analog input circuit common (connected internally to chassis gnd. through 1 MΩ).
4 +10 V Potentiometer reference source: 10 V ±2%, max. 10 mA (1kΩ < R < 10kΩ).
Analog I/O
5 AI2 Analog input channel 2, programmable. Default2 = not used. Resolution 0.1%,
accuracy ±1%.
J1:AI2 OFF: 0…10 V (Ri = 312 kΩ)
ON
J1:AI2 ON: 0…20 mA (Ri = 100 Ω)
ON
6 AGND Analog input circuit common (connected internally to chassis gnd. through 1 MΩ).
7 AO1 Analog output, programmable. Default2 = frequency. 0…20 mA (load < 500 Ω).
8 AO2 Analog output, programmable. Default2 = current. 0…20 mA (load < 500 Ω).
9 AGND Analog output circuit common (connected internally to chassis gnd. through 1 MΩ).
10 +24 V Auxiliary voltage output 24 VDC / 250 mA (reference to GND), short circuit
protected.
11 GND Auxiliary voltage output common (connected internally as floating).
12 DCOM Digital input common. To activate a digital input, there must be ≥+10 V
(or ≤-10 V) between that input and DCOM. The 24 V may be provided by the
Digital Inputs1
ACS510 (X1-10) or by an external 12…24 V source of either polarity.

13 DI1 Digital input 1, programmable. Default2 = start/stop.
14 DI2 Digital input 2, programmable. Default2 = fwd/rev.
15 DI3 Digital input 3, programmable. Default2 = constant speed sel (code).
16 DI4 Digital input 4, programmable. Default2 = constant speed sel (code).
17 DI5 Digital input 5, programmable. Default2 = ramp pair selection (code).
18 DI6 Digital input 6, programmable. Default2 = not used.
19 RO1C Relay output 1, programmable. Default2 = Ready
20 RO1A Maximum: 250 VAC / 30 VDC, 2 A
Minimum: 500 mW (12 V, 10 mA)
21 RO1B
Relay Outputs
22 RO2C Relay output 2, programmable. Default2 = Running

24 RO2B
25 RO3C Relay output 3, programmable. Default2 = Fault (-1)
27 RO3B
1
Digital input impedance 1.5 kΩ. Maximum voltage for digital inputs is 30 V.
2
Default values depend on the macro used and software options. Values specified are for the default
macro. See "Application Macros" on page 41.
Installation
Note! Terminals 3, 6, and 9 are at the same potential.
Note! For safety reasons the fault relay signals a “fault” when the ACS510 is
powered down.
You can wire the digital input terminals in either a PNP or NPN configuration.
PNP connection (source) NPN connection (sink)
X1 X1
10 +24 V 10 +24 V
11 GND 11 GND
12 DCOM 12 DCOM
13 DI1 13 DI1
14 DI2 14 DI2
15 DI3 15 DI3
16 DI4 16 DI4
17 DI5 17 DI5
18 DI6 18 DI6
Install the Wiring

Checking Motor and Motor Cable Insulation
Warning! Check the motor and motor cable insulation before connecting the drive to
input power. For this test, make sure that motor cables are NOT connected to the
drive.
1. Complete motor cable connections to the motor, but NOT to the drive output
terminals (U2, V2, W2).
2. At the drive end of the motor cable, measure the insulation
resistance between each motor cable phase and Protective M
Earth (PE): Apply a voltage of 1 kV DC and verify that ohm
resistance is greater than 1 Mohm.
PE
Installation
Wiring IP 21 Enclosure with Cables

1. Open the appropriate knockouts in the conduit/gland
box. (See "Conduit/Gland Kit" above.)
2
2. Install the cable clamps for the power/motor cables.
1 X0004
3. On the input power cable, strip the sheathing back 6

far enough to route individual wires.
7
4. On the motor cable, strip the sheathing back far
enough to expose the copper wire screen so that the 6
4
screen can be twisted into a pig-tail. Keep the short 3
pig-tail short to minimize noise radiation.
8
IP2001
5. Route both cables through the clamps.
6. Strip and connect the power/motor wires, and the 8
power ground wire to the drive terminals.
Note! For R5 frame size, the minimum power cable

size is 25 mm2 (4 AWG).
For R6 frame size, refer to "Power Terminal X0005
Considerations – R6 Frame Size" on page 218.
7. Connect the pig-tail created from the motor cable screen.

8. Install conduit/gland box and tighten the cable clamps.
9. Install the cable clamp(s) for the control cable(s).
(Power/motor cables and clamps not shown in
figure.)
10. Strip control cable sheathing and twist the copper
screen into a pig-tail. 9
X0006
11. Route control cable(s) through clamp(s) and tighten
clamp(s).
12
12. Connect the ground screen pig-tail for digital and
analog I/O cables at X1-1. (Ground only at drive 14
end.)
13. Connect the ground screen pig-tail for RS485 cables
at X1-28 or X1-32. (Ground only at drive end.)
14. Strip and connect the individual control wires to the
drive terminals. See "Control Terminals Table" on
page 17. 11
15. Install the conduit/gland box cover (1 screw).

IP2003
Installation
Wiring IP 21 Enclosure with Conduit

1. Open the appropriate knockouts in the conduit/gland
box. (See "Conduit/Gland Kit" above.)
2. Install thin-wall conduit clamps (not supplied).
2 X0007
3. Install conduit/gland box.

4. Connect conduit runs to box. 3
X0005
5. Route input power and motor wiring through conduits

7
(must be separate conduit runs).
6. Strip wires.
7
7. Connect power, motor, and ground wires to the drive
terminals. 5
4 IP2004
Note! For R5 frame size, the minimum power cable
size is 25 mm2 (4 AWG).
For R6 frame size, refer to "Power Terminal Considerations – R6 Frame Size" on
page 218.
8. Route the control cable through the conduit (must be

separate from input power and motor conduit runs).
10
9. Strip the control cable sheathing and twist the copper
screen into a pig-tail. 12
analog I/O cables at X1-1. (Ground only at drive end.)
11. Connect the ground screen pig-tail for RS485 cables
at X1-28 or X1-32. (Ground only at drive end.)
8
12. Strip and connect the individual control wires to the
drive terminals. See "Control Terminals Table" on
page 17.
13. Install the conduit/gland box cover (1 screw).
IP2005
Installation
Wiring IP 54 Enclosure with Cables

1. Cut the cable seals as needed for the power,
motor, and control cables. (The cable seals are
cone-shaped, rubber seals on the bottom of the
drive.)
1 IP5003
2. On the input power cable, strip the sheathing back

far enough to route individual wires.
5
3. On the motor cable, strip the sheathing back far
enough to expose the copper wire screen so that 2
3
the screen can be twisted into a pig-tail. Keep the 4 4
short pig-tail short to minimize noise radiation.
4. Route both cables through the clamps and tighten
the clamps.
5. Strip and connect the power/motor wires, and the IP5004
power ground wire to the drive terminals.
Note! For R5 frame size, the minimum power cable size is 25 mm2 (4 AWG).
page 218.
6. Connect the pig-tail created from the motor cable

screen.
7. Strip control cable sheathing and twist the copper
screen into a pig-tail.
8. Route control cable(s) through clamp(s) and
tighten clamp(s). 9…11
analog I/O cables at X1-1. (Ground only at drive
end.)
10. Connect the ground screen pig-tail for RS485
cables at X1-28 or X1-32. (Ground only at drive
end.) 8
11. Strip and connect the individual control wires to
the drive terminals. See "Control Terminals Table"
on page 17. IP5005
Installation
Wiring IP 54 Enclosure with Conduit

1. Depends on Frame Size: R1…R4
• R1…R4: Remove and discard the cable seals
where conduit will be installed. (The cable seals are
cone-shaped, rubber seals on the bottom of the
drive.)
1 IP5013
• R5 and R6: Use punch to create holes for conduit R5, R6
connections as needed.
1
IP5023
2. For each conduit run, install water tight conduit
connectors (not supplied).
IP5016
3. Route the power wiring through the conduit.
6
4. Route the motor wiring through the conduit.
5. Strip the wires.
6. Connect the power, motor, and ground wires to the
drive terminals. 3
4
Note! For R5 frame size, the minimum power cable IP5007

2 (4 AWG).
size is 25 mm
page 218.
7. Route the control cable through the conduit.

8. Strip the control cable sheathing and twist the copper screen into a pig-tail.
9. Connect the ground screen pig-tail for digital and analog I/O cables at X1-1. (Ground
only at drive end.)
10. Connect the ground screen pig-tail for RS485 cables at X1-28 or X1-32. (Ground
only at drive end.)
11. Strip and connect the individual control wires to the drive terminals. See "Control
Terminals Table" on page 17.
Installation
Check Installation
Before applying power, perform the following checks.
Check
Installation environment conforms to the drive’s specifications for ambient conditions.
The drive is mounted securely.
Space around the drive meets the drive’s specifications for cooling.
The motor and driven equipment are ready for start.
For floating networks: The internal RFI filter is disconnected (screws EM1 & EM3 or F1 & F2).
The drive is properly grounded.
The input power (mains) voltage matches the drive nominal input voltage.
The input power (mains) connections at U1, V1, and W1 are connected and tightened as
specified.
The input power (mains) fuses are installed.
The motor connections at U2, V2, and W2 are connected and tightened as specified.
The motor cable is routed away from other cables.
NO power factor compensation capacitors are in the motor cable.
The control connections are connected and tightened as specified.
NO tools or foreign objects (such as drill shavings) are inside the drive.
NO alternate power source for the motor (such as a bypass connection) is connected – no
voltage is applied to the output of the drive.
Installation
Re-install Cover
1
IP 21
1. Align the cover and slide it on.
2. Tighten the captive screw. 2
3. Re-install the control panel.
IP2009
IP 54
1. Align the cover and slide it on.
4
2. Tighten the captive screws around the edge of 3
the cover.
3. R1…R4: Slide the hood down over the top of
the cover.
4. R1…R4: Install the two screws that attach the
hood.
5
5. Install the control panel.
6
Note! The control panel window must be
closed to comply with IP 54/UL type 12.
1
6. Optional: Add a lock (not supplied) to secure 2 FM
the control panel window.
Installation
Apply Power
Always re-install the front cover before turning power on.
Warning! The ACS510 will start up automatically at power up, if the external run
command is on.
1. Apply input power.

When power is applied to the ACS510, the green LED comes on.
Note! Before increasing motor speed, check that the motor is running in the desired
direction.
Start-Up
The ACS510 has default parameter settings that are sufficient for many situations.
However, review the following situations. Perform the associated procedures as
appropriate.
Motor Data
The motor data on the ratings plate may differ from the defaults in the ACS510. The
drive provides more precise control and better thermal protection if you enter the
rating plate data.
1. Gather the following from the motor ratings plate:
• Voltage
• Nominal motor current
• Nominal frequency
• Nominal speed
• Nominal power
2. Edit parameters 9905…9909 to the correct values.
Macros
Note! Selecting the appropriate macro should be part of the original system design,
since the wiring installed in "Control Terminals Table" on page 17 depends on the
macro used.
1. Review the macro descriptions in "Application Macros" on page 41. Use the macro
that best fits system needs.
2. Edit parameter 9902 to select the appropriate macro.
• Assistant Control Panel
– Refer to "Parameters Mode" on page 30, for parameter editing instructions.
Installation
• Basic Control Panel: Refer to "Parameters Mode" on page 38, for parameter
editing instructions.
Tuning – Parameters
The system can benefit from one or more of the ACS510 special features, and/or
fine tuning.
1. Review the parameter descriptions in "Complete Parameter Descriptions" starting on
page 63. Enable options and fine tune parameter values as appropriate for the
system.
2. Edit parameters as appropriate.
Fault and Alarm Adjustments
The ACS510 can detect a wide variety of potential system problems. For example,
initial system operation may generate faults or alarms that indicate set-up problems.
1. Faults and alarms are reported on the control panel with a number. Note the number
reported.
2. Review the description provided for the reported fault/alarm:
• Use the fault and alarm listings on pages 197 and 203 respectively (or page 205
for the Basic Control Panel’s alarm listing), or
• Press the help key (Assistant Control Panel only) while fault or alarm is displayed.
3. Adjust the system or parameters as appropriate.
Installation
Start-Up
Start-up configures the drive. This process sets parameters that define how the drive
operates and communicates. Depending on the control and communication
requirements, the start-up process may require any or all of the following:
• Application macros can be selected to define common, alternate system
configurations, using the default settings. See "Application Macros" on page 41.
• Additional refinements can be made using the control panel to manually select
and set individual parameters. See "Complete Parameter Descriptions" on page
63.
Control Panels
Use a control panel to control the ACS510, to read status data, and to adjust
parameters. The ACS510 works with either of two different control panel types:
• Assistant Control Panel – This panel (described below) includes multi-mode to
display and control the ACS510.
• Basic control panel – This panel (described in a later section) provides basic tools
for manual entry of parameter values.
Assistant Control Panel
Features
The ACS510 Assistant Control Panel features:
• Alphanumeric control panel with a LCD display
• Language selection for the display
• Drive connection that can be made or detached at any time
• Copy function – Parameters can be copied to the Control Panel memory for later
transfer to other drives, or for backup of a particular system.
• Context sensitive help
Start-Up
Controls/Display Overview
The following table summarizes the button functions and displays on the Assistant
Control Panel.
LCD Display – Divided into three main areas:

• Top line – variable, depending on the mode of operation. For example,
see "Status Information" on page 29.
Status LED – Green for normal • Middle area – variable, in general, shows parameter values, menus or
operation. If LED is flashing, or red, lists.
see Diagnostics.
• Bottom line – shows current function of the two soft keys.
Soft key 2 – Function varies, and is

Soft key 1 – Function varies, and is defined by the text in the lower-right
defined by the text in the lower-left corner of the LCD display.
corner of the LCD display. LOC 400RPM
1200 RPM Down –
Up – 12.4 A • Scrolls down through a menu or list
• Scrolls up through a menu or list 405 dm3/s displayed in the middle of the LCD
displayed in the middle of the LCD DIR 12:45 MENU Display.
Display. • Decrements a value if a parameter
• Increments a value if a parameter is selected.
is selected. • Decrements the reference if the
• Increments the reference if the upper-right corner is highlighted (in
upper-right corner is highlighted (in reverse video).
reverse video).
Help – Displays context sensitive
LOC/REM – Changes between local information when the button is
and remote control of the drive. pressed. The information displayed
describes the item currently
highlighted in the middle area of the
STOP – Stops the drive in display.
local control.
START – Starts the drive in

local control.
General Display Features

Soft Key Functions
The soft key functions are defined by text displayed just above each key.
Display Contrast
To adjust display contrast, simultaneously press the MENU key and UP or DOWN,
as appropriate.
Output Mode
Use the Output mode to read information on the drive’s status and to operate the
drive. To reach the Output mode, press EXIT until the LCD display shows status
information as described below.
Start-Up
Status Information
Top. The top line of the LCD display shows the basic status information of the drive.
• LOC – indicates that the drive control is local, that is, from the control panel.
• REM – indicates that the drive control is remote, such as the basic I/O (X1) or
fieldbus.
• – indicates the drive and motor rotation status as follows:
Control Panel Display Significance
Rotating arrow (clockwise or counter • Drive is running and at setpoint
clockwise) • Shaft direction is forward or reverse
Rotating dotted blinking arrow Drive is running but not at setpoint.
Stationary dotted arrow Start command is present, but motor is not
running. E.g. start enable is missing.
• Upper right – shows the active reference.

Middle. Using parameter Group 34, the middle of the LCD display can be configured
to display:
• Up to three parameter values.
– By default, the display shows three parameters
0103 (OUTPUT FREQUENCY), 0104 (CURRENT),
0105 (TORQUE).
– Use parameters 3401, 3408, and 3415 to select
the parameters (from Group 01) to display.
Entering “parameter” 0100 results in no parameter displayed. For example, if
3401 = 0100 and 3415 = 0100, then only the parameter specified by 3408
appears in the Control Panel display.
– You can also scale each parameter in the display, for example, to convert the
motor speed to a display of conveyor speed. Parameters 3402…3405 scale
the parameter specified by 3401, parameters 3409…3412 scale the parameter
specified by 3408, etc.
• A bar graph rather than any of the parameter values.
– Enable bar graph displays using parameters
3404, 3411 and 3418.
Bottom. The bottom of the LCD display shows:
Lower corners – show the functions currently assigned
to the two soft keys.
Operating the Drive
LOC/REM – The very first time the drive is powered up, it is in the remote control
(REM) mode, and is controlled from the Control Terminal Block X1.
To switch to local control (LOC) and control the drive using the control panel, press
and hold the LOC
REM button until first, LOCAL CONTROL, or later, LOCAL, KEEP RUN,
is displayed:
Start-Up
• Release the button while LOCAL CONTROL is displayed to set the panel
reference to the current external reference. The drive stops.
• Release the button when LOCAL, KEEP RUN is displayed, to copy the current
run/stop status and the reference from the user I/O.
To switch back to remote control (REM) press and hold the LOC
REM button until
REMOTE CONTROL is displayed.
Start/Stop – To start and stop the drive press the START and STOP buttons.
Shaft direction – To change the shaft direction press DIR (parameter 1003 must be
set to 3 (REQUEST)).
Reference – To modify the reference (only possible if the display in the upper right
corner is highlighted) press the UP or DOWN buttons (the reference changes
immediately).
The reference can be modified when in local control (LOC), and can be
parameterized (using Group 11: Reference Select) to also allow modification when in
remote control (REM).
Note! The Start/Stop, Shaft direction and Reference functions are only valid in local
control (LOC) mode.
Other Modes
Besides the Output mode, the Assistant Control Panel has:
• Other operating modes that are available through the main menu.
• A fault mode that is triggered by faults. The fault mode includes a diagnostic
assistant mode.
• An alarm mode that is triggered by drive alarms.
Access to Main Menu and the Other Modes
To reach the main menu:
1. Press EXIT, as necessary, to step back through the menus or lists associated with a
particular mode. Continue until you are back to the Output mode.
2. Press MENU from the Output mode.
At this point, the middle of the display is a listing of the other modes, and the top-
right text says “Main menu”
3. Press UP/DOWN to scroll to the desired mode.
4. Press ENTER to enter the mode that is highlighted.
The following sections describe each of the other modes.
Parameters Mode
Use the Parameters mode to view and edit parameter values:
1. Select PARAMETERS in the Main Menu.
Start-Up
2. Press UP/DOWN to highlight the appropriate parameter

group, then press SEL.
3. Press UP/DOWN to highlight the appropriate parameter

in a group.
NOTE! The current parameter value appears below the

highlighted parameter.
4. Press EDIT.
5. Press UP/DOWN to step to the desired parameter value.
Note! To view the parameter default value: In the set mode, press UP/DOWN
simultaneously.
6. Press SAVE to store the modified value or press

CANCEL to leave the set mode. Any modifications not
saved are cancelled.
7. Press EXIT to return to the listing of parameter groups,
and again to return to the main menu.
Start-Up
Changed Parameters Mode

Use the Changed Parameters mode to view (and edit) a listing of all parameters that
have been changed from macro default values.
Procedure:
1. Select CHANGED PAR in the Main Menu.
The display lists all changed parameters.
2. Press ENTER.
3. Press UP/DOWN to select a changed parameter.
As each parameter is highlighted, the parameter value appears.
4. Press EDIT to edit the parameter value.
5. Press UP/DOWN to select a new value / edit the parameter value. (Pressing both
keys at the same time sets a parameter to its default value.)
6. Press SAVE to save the new parameter value. (If the new value is the default value,
the parameter will no longer appear on the Changed Parameters listing.)
Fault Logger Mode

Use the Fault Logger Mode to see drive fault history, fault state details and help for
the faults.
1. Select FAULT LOGGER in the Main Menu.
2. Press ENTER to see the latest faults (up to 10 faults, maximum).
3. Press DETAIL to see details for the selected fault.
Details are available for the three latest faults.
4. Press DIAG to see the help description for the fault. See "Diagnostics" section.
Note! If a power off occurs, only the three latest faults will remain (with details only
for the most recent fault).
Par Backup Mode

The Assistant Control Panel can store a full set of drive parameters.
The Par Backup mode has these functions:
• Upload to Panel – Copies all parameters from the drive to the Control Panel.
This includes user sets of parameters (if defined) and internal parameters. The
Control Panel memory is non-volatile.
• Download Full Set – Restores the full parameter set from the Control Panel to
the drive. Use this option to restore a drive, or to configure identical drives. This
download does not include user sets of parameters.
Start-Up
Note! Download Full Set writes all parameters to the drive, including motor
parameters. Only use this function to restore a drive, or to transfer parameters to
systems that are identical to the original system.
• Download Application – Copies a partial parameter set from the Control Panel
to a drive. The partial set does not include internal motor parameters, parameters
9905…9909, 1605, 1607, 5201, nor any Group 51 and 53 parameters. Use this
option to transfer parameters to systems that use similar configurations – the
drive and motor sizes do not need to be the same.
• Download User Set 1 - Copies USER S1 parameters (user sets are saved using
parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO) from the Control Panel to the drive.
• Download User Set 2 - Copies USER S2 parameters from the Control Panel to the
drive.
The general procedure for parameter backup operations is:
1. Select PAR BACKUP in the Main Menu.
2. Press UP/DOWN to step to the desired option.
3. Press ENTER.
The parameter set is transferred as directed. During the transfer, the display shows
the transfer status as a percent of completion.
4. Press EXIT to step back to the Output mode.
Handling Inexact Downloads
In some situations, an exact copy of the download is not appropriate for the target
drive. Some examples:
• A download to an old drive specifies parameters/values that are not available on
the old drive.
• A download (from an old drive) to a new drive does not have definitions for the
new parameters – parameters that did not originally exist.
• A download can include an illegal value for the target drive, e.g. a backup from a
small drive can have a switching frequency of 12 kHz whereas a big drive can
only handle 8 kHz.
As a default, the control panel handles these situations by:
• Discarding parameters/values not available on
the target drive. LOC DIFFERENCES ----
VALUES UNDER MIN 3
• Using parameter default values when the VALUES OVER MAX 2
download provides no values or invalid values. INVALID VALUES 1
• Providing a Differences List – A listing of the EXTRA PARS 5
type and number of items that the target cannot MISSING VALUES 7
accept exactly as specified. READY SEL
You can either accept the default edits by pressing
READY, or view and edit each item as follows:
Start-Up
1. Highlight an item type in the Differences List (left screen below) and press SEL to
see the details for the selected type (right screen below).
LOC DIFFERENCES ---- LOC INVALID VAL
VALUES UNDER MIN 3 9902 APLIC MACRO
VALUES OVER MAX 2 2606*SWITCHING FREQ
INVALID VALUES 1 12 kHz
8 kHz
EXTRA PARS 5 3401*DISP 1 SEL
MISSING VALUES 7
READY SEL EXIT EDIT
In the above-right “details” screen:

• The first item that requires editing is automatically highlighted and includes
details: In general, the first item listed in the details is the value defined by the
backup file. The second item listed is the “default edit.”
• For tracking purposes, an asterisk initially appears by each item. As edits are
made, the asterisks disappear.
2. In the illustrated example, the backup specifies a switching frequency of 12 kHz, but
the target drive is limited to 8 kHz.
3. Press EDIT to edit the parameter. The display is the target drive’s standard edit
screen for the selected parameter.
4. Highlight the desired value for the target drive.
5. Press SAVE to save setting.
6. Press EXIT to step back to the differences view and continue for each remaining
exception.
7. When your editing is complete, press READY in the Differences List and then select
“Yes, save parameters.”
Download Failures
In some situations, the drive may be unable to accept a download. In those cases,
the control panel display is: “Parameter download failed” plus one of the following
causes:
• Set not found – You are attempting to download a data set that was not defined in
the backup. The remedy is to manually define the set, or upload the set from a
drive that has the desired set definitions.
• Par lock – The remedy is to unlock the parameter set (parameter 1602).
• Incompat drive/model – The remedy is to perform backups only between drives of
the same type (ACS/industrial or ACH/HVAC) and the same model (all ACS510).
• Too many differences – The remedy is to manually define a new set, or upload the
set from a drive that more closely resembles the target drive.
I/O Settings Mode

Use the I/O Setting mode to check (and edit) the setting at any I/O terminal.
1. Select I/O SETTINGS in the Main Menu.
Start-Up
2. Press UP/DOWN to step to the desired I/O group, for example, digital inputs.
3. Press ENTER.
4. Press UP/DOWN to step to a particular item, for example DI1.
After a brief pause, the displays shows the current setting for the selection.
5. Press EDIT.
6. Press UP/DOWN to select a new setting.
7. Press SAVE to save.
Start-Up
Basic Control Panel
Features
The Basic Control Panel features:
• Numeric control panel with a LCD display.
• Drive connection that can be made or detached at any time
• Copy function – Parameters can be copied to the Control Panel memory for later
transfer to other drives, or for backup of a particular system.
Controls/Display Overview
The following table summarizes the button functions and displays on the Basic
Control Panel.
LCD DISPLAY – Divided into five areas:
• Upper left – Identifies control location, local (LOC) or remote (REM).
• Upper right – Identifies parameter units.
• Center – Variable, in general, shows parameter values, menus or lists.
Also displays a code for control panel errors (See "Alarm Codes (Basic
Control Panel)" on page 205).
• Lower left – “OUTPUT” in the control mode, or “MENU” when selecting
alternate modes.
• Lower right – Motor rotation direction, and indicates when a value can be
edited ( SET ).
MENU/ENTER key – Enters deeper

into menu level. At deepest menu
level, saves display value as new
REM A
1.1
EXIT/RESET key – Exits to next setting.
higher menu level. Does not save
changed values. OUTPUT FWD Down –
• Scrolls down through a menu or
Up – EXIT/ MENU/ list.
RESET ENTER • Decreases a value if a parameter
• Scrolls up through a menu or list.
is selected.
• Increases a value if a parameter is
selected. • Decreases the reference when in
the reference mode of operation.
• Increases the reference when in
the reference mode of operation.
DIR key – Changes the motor’s
LOC/REM – Changes between local direction of rotation.
and remote control of the drive.
STOP – Stops the drive. START – Starts the drive.

FM
Output Mode
Use the Output mode to read information on the drive’s status and to operate the
drive. To reach the Output mode, press EXIT/RESET until the display shows status
information as described below.
Start-Up
Status Information
When the Basic Control Panel is in the Output mode, the display:
• Top-left shows the control location:
REM A
– LOC – indicates that the drive control is local, that
is, from the control panel.
OUTPUT
1.1FWD
– REM – indicates that the drive control is remote,
such as the basic I/O (X1) or fieldbus.
• The center of the display provides one Group 01 parameter value at a time, and
makes up to three parameter values available (press UP or DOWN to scroll
through available parameters).
– By default, the display can scroll through three parameters 0103 (OUTPUT
FREQUENCY), 0104 (CURRENT) and 0105 (TORQUE).
– To change the defaults, use parameters 3401, 3408, and 3415 to select the
parameters (from Group 01) in the scroll list. Enter value 0100 to disable any
of the three items in the scroll list. For example, if 3401 = 0100 and 3415 =
0100, then scrolling is disabled and only the parameter specified by 3408
appears in the Control Panel display.
– You can also scale each item in the scroll list, for example, to convert motor
speed to a display of conveyor speed. Parameters 3402…3405 scale the
parameter specified by 3401, parameters 3409…3412 scale the parameter
specified by 3408, etc.
• Top-right shows the units for the parameter value.
• Bottom-left shows OUTPUT.
• Bottom-right shows the motor direction of rotation. Text display (FWD or REV) is:
– Steady when the motor is up to speed
– Flashing slowly when the motor is stopped.
– Flashing quickly when the motor is accelerating.
Operating the Drive
LOC/REM – The very first time the drive is powered up, it is in the remote control
(REM) mode, and is controlled from the Control Terminal Block X1.
To switch to local control (LOC) and control the drive using the control panel, press
REM . If you:
LOC
• Press and release (the display flashes “LOC”), then: the drive stops. Use the
Reference Mode to set the local control reference.
• Press and hold for about 2 seconds (release when the display changes from
“LoC” to “LoC r”), then the drive continues as before. The drive copies the current
remote values for run/stop status and the reference, and uses them as the initial
local control commands.
To switch back to remote control (REM) press LOC
REM .
Start/Stop – To start and stop the drive press the START and STOP buttons.
Start-Up
Shaft direction – To change the shaft direction press DIR (parameter 1003 must
be set to 3 (REQUEST)).
Reference – See "Reference Mode" below.
Reference Mode
Use the Reference Mode to set the frequency reference. Normally this reference
control is only possible when the drive is under Local (LOC) control. However, the
drive can be set up (using Group 11: Reference Select) to also allow reference
modification when the drive is under remote (REM) control.
1. Starting from the Output mode, press MENU/ENTER.
The display shows one of the following alternate modes:
• reF (Reference)
• PAr (Parameter)
• CoPY (Copy)
2. Use UP or DOWN arrow key to step through to the “reF” (Reference Mode).
3. Press MENU/ENTER.
The display shows the current reference value with SET under the value.
Note! Normally, reference adjustment is only possible here when under LOC control,
but settings in Group 11, do allow reference adjustments under REM control. The
SET display indicates when reference adjustment is possible at the control panel.
4. Use UP or DOWN arrow key to step to the desired reference value.

5. Press EXIT/RESET to step back to the Output mode.
Parameters Mode
Use the Parameter Mode to set parameter values.
• reF (Reference)
• PAr (Parameter)
• CoPY (Copy)
2. Use UP or DOWN arrow key to step through to the “PAr” (Parameter Mode).
The display shows one of the parameter groups:
• “01”
• …
• “99”
Start-Up
4. Use UP or DOWN arrow key to step through to the desired group, for example “03”.
The display shows one of the parameters in the selected parameter group. For
example, “0301”.
6. Use UP or DOWN arrow key to step through to the desired parameter.
7. Press MENU/ENTER, either:
• Press and hold for about 2 seconds or
• Press the key twice in quick succession
The display shows the value of the selected parameter with SET under the value.
Note! Briefly pressing the MENU/ENTER key displays the parameter’s current value
for about 2 seconds. During this display, pressing the MENU/ENTER key again also
enables SET .
8. Use UP or DOWN arrow key to step to the desired parameter value.
Note! In SET , pressing the UP and DOWN arrow keys simultaneously displays the
default parameter value.
9. In SET , press MENU/ENTER to save the parameter value being displayed.
Note! If, instead, you press EXIT/RESET the original, or last saved, parameter value
is the active value.
Par Backup Mode

The Basic Control Panel can store a full set of drive parameters. If two sets of
parameters are defined, both are copied and transferred when using this feature.
The Par Backup mode has three functions:
• uL (Upload) – Copies all parameters from the drive to the Control Panel. This
includes a second set of parameters (if defined) and internal parameters. The
Control Panel memory is non-volatile.
• rE A (Restore All) – Restores the full parameter set(s) from the Control Panel to
the drive. Use this option to restore a drive, or to configure identical drives.
Note! The Restore All function writes all parameters to the drive, including motor
parameters. Only use this function to restore a drive, or to transfer parameters to
systems that are identical to the original system.
Start-Up
• dL P (Download Partial) – Copies a partial parameter set from the Control Panel
to a drive. The partial set does not include internal motor parameters, parameters
9905…9909, 1605, 1607, 5201, nor any Group 51 and Group 53 parameters. Use
this option to transfer parameters to systems that use similar configurations – the
drive and motor sizes do not need to be the same.
• dL u1 (Download User Set 1) – Copies USER S1 parameters (user sets are saved
using parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO) from the Control Panel to the drive.
• dl u2 (Download User Set 2) – Copies USER S2 parameters from the Control
Panel to the drive.
• reF (Reference)
• PAr (Parameter)
• CoPY (Copy)
2. Use UP or DOWN arrow key to step through to the “CoPY” (Copy) Mode.
The display shows one of the following copy options:
• uL (Upload)
• rE A (Restore All)
• dL P (Download Partial)
4. Use UP or DOWN arrow key to step to the desired option.
The parameter set is transferred as directed. During the transfer, the display shows
the transfer status as a percent of completion.
Handling Inexact Downloads
In some situations, an exact copy of the download is not appropriate for the target
drive. The Basic control panel automatically handles these situations by:
• Discarding parameters/values not available on the target drive.
• Using parameter default values when the download provides no values or invalid
values.
Alarm Codes
The Basic Control Panel indicates Control Panel alarms with a code of the form
A5xxx. See "Alarm Codes (Basic Control Panel)" on page 205 for a list of the alarm
codes and descriptions.
Start-Up
Application Macros
Macros change a group of parameters to new, predefined values. Use macros to
minimize the need for manual editing of parameters. Selecting a macro sets all other
parameters to their default values, except:
• Group 99: Start-up Data parameters
• The PARAMETER LOCK 1602
• The PARAM SAVE 1607
• The COMM FAULT FUNC 3018 and COMM FAULT TIME 3019
• The COMM PROT SEL 9802
• Groups 51…53 parameters
After selecting a macro, additional parameter changes can be made manually using
the control panel.
Application macros are enabled by setting the value for parameter 9902 APPLIC
MACRO. By default, 1, ABB Standard, is the enabled macro.
The following sections describe each of the application macros and provide a
connection example for each macro.
The last section below, "Macro Default Values for Parameters" lists the parameters
that the macros change, and the default values established by each macro.
Start-Up
Application Macro: ABB Standard (Default)

This macro provides a general purpose, 2-wire I/O configuration, with three (3)
constant speeds. This is the default macro. Parameter values are the default values
defined in the "Complete Parameter List for ACS510" on page 51.
Connection example:
X1 1 SCR Signal cable shield (screen)
2 AI1 External frequency reference 1: 0…10 V
3 AGND Analog input circuit common
4 10 V Reference voltage 10 VDC
5 AI2 Not used
7 AO1 Output frequency: 0…20 mA
8 AO2 Output current: 0…20 mA
9 AGND Analog output circuit common
10 24 V Auxiliary voltage output +24 VDC

11 GND Auxiliary voltage output common
12 DCOM Digital input common for all
13 DI1 Start/Stop: Activate to start
14 DI2 Fwd/Rev: Activate to reverse rotation direction
15 DI3 Constant speed selection1
17 DI5 Ramp pair selection: Activate to select 2nd acc/dec ramp pair
18 DI6 Not used
19 RO1C Relay output 1, programmable Note 1. Code:

Default operation: 0 = open, 1 = connected
20 RO1A
21 RO1B Ready =>19 connected to 21 DI3 DI4 Output
22 RO2C Relay output 2, programmable 0 0 Reference through AI1
23 RO2A Default operation: 1 0 CONSTANT SPEED 1 (1202)
24 RO2B Running =>22 connected to 24 0 1 CONSTANT SPEED 2 (1203)
25 RO3C Relay output 3, programmable 1 1 CONSTANT SPEED 3 (1204)
26 RO3A Default operation:
27 RO3B Fault (-1) =>25 connected to 27
(Fault => 25 connected to 26)
Input signals Output signals Jumper Setting

• Analog reference (AI1) • Analog output AO1: Frequency
• Start, stop and direction (DI1,2) • Analog output AO2: Current J1
AI1: 0…10 V
ON
• Constant speed selection (DI3,4) • Relay output 1: Ready

AI2: 0(4)…20 mA
ON
• Ramp pair (1 of 2) selection (DI5) • Relay output 2: Running

• Relay output 3: Fault (-1)
Start-Up
Application Macro: 3-wire

This macro is used when the drive is controlled using momentary push-buttons, and
provides three (3) constant speeds. To enable, set the value of parameter 9902 to 2
(3-WIRE).
Note! When the stop input (DI2) is deactivated (no input), the control panel start/stop
buttons are disabled.
Connection example:
5 AI2 Not used
7 AO1 Motor output speed: 0…20 mA

13 DI1 Start: Momentary activation with DI2 activated starts the drive
14 DI2 Stop: Momentary deactivation stops the drive
15 DI3 Fwd/Rev: Activation reverses rotation direction
18 DI6 Not used
19 RO1C Relay output 1, programmable

Note 1. Code:
21 RO1B Ready =>19 connected to 21
0 = open, 1 = connected
23 RO2A Default operation: DI4 DI5 Output
24 RO2B Running =>22 connected to 24 0 0 Reference through AI1
27 RO3B Fault (-1) =>25 connected to 27 1 1 CONSTANT SPEED 3 (1204)

• Analog reference (AI1) • Analog output AO1: Speed
• Start, stop and direction (DI1,2,3) • Analog output AO2: Current J1
AI1: 0…10 V
ON

AI2: 0(4)…20 mA
ON
• Relay output 2: Running

Start-Up
Application Macro: Alternate

This macro provides an I/O configuration adopted to a sequence of DI control
signals used when alternating the rotation direction of the drive. To enable, set the
value of parameter 9902 to 3 (ALTERNATE).
Connection example:
5 AI2 Not used

13 DI1 Start fwd: If DI1 state is the same as DI2, drive stops
14 DI2 Start reverse
17 DI5 Ramp pair selection: Activation selects 2nd acc/dec ramp pair
18 DI6 Run enable: Deactivation always stops the drive

20 RO1A Default operation: Note 1. Code:
21 RO1B Ready =>19 connected to 21 0 = open, 1 = connected
23 RO2A Default operation: DI4 DI5 Output
24 RO2B Running =>22 connected to 24 0 0 Reference through AI1
25 RO3C 1 0 CONSTANT SPEED 1 (1202)
Relay output 3, programmable
27 RO3B Fault (-1) =>25 connected to 27 1 1 CONSTANT SPEED 3 (1204)

• Start, stop and direction (DI1,2) • Analog output AO2: Current J1
AI1: 0…10 V
ON

AI2: 0(4)…20 mA
ON
• Ramp pair 1/2 selection (DI5) • Relay output 2: Running

• Run enable (DI6) • Relay output 3: Fault (-1)
Start-Up
Application Macro: Motor Potentiometer

This macro provides a cost-effective interface for PLCs that vary the speed of the
drive using only digital signals. To enable, set the value of parameter 9902 to 4
(MOTOR POT).
Connection example:
2 AI1 Not used
5 AI2 Not used

13 DI1 Start/stop: Activation starts the drive.
14 DI2 Forward/reverse: Activation reverses rotation direction.
15 DI3 Reference up: Activation increases the reference1
16 DI4 Reference down: Activation decreases the reference1
17 DI5 Constant speed 1: 1202
18 DI6 Run enable: Deactivation always stops the drive.

22 RO2C Relay output 2, programmable Note 1. For DI3 and DI4:
• If both are active or inactive the
24 RO2B Running =>22 connected to 24 reference is unchanged.
25 RO3C Relay output 3, programmable • The existing reference is stored
26 RO3A Default operation: during stop or power down.

• Start, stop and direction (DI1,2) • Analog output AO1: Speed
• Reference up/down (DI3,4) • Analog output AO2: Current J1
AI1: 0…10 V
ON
• Constant speed selection (DI5) • Relay output 1: Ready

AI2: 0(4)…20 mA
ON
• Run enable (DI6) • Relay output 2: Running

Start-Up
Application macro: Hand-Auto

This macro provides an I/O configuration that is typically used in HVAC applications.
To enable, set the value of parameter 9902 to 5 (HAND/AUTO).
Note! Parameter 2108 START INHIBIT must remain in the default setting, 0 (OFF).
Connection example:
X1 Signal cable shield (screen)
1 SCR
2 AI1 External reference 1: 0…10 V (Hand Control)
5 AI2 External reference 2: 0…20 mA (Auto Control)

13 DI1 Start/Stop (Hand): Activation starts the drive
14 DI2 Forward/Reverse (Hand): Activation reverses rotation direction
15 DI3 EXT1/EXT2 Selection: Activation selects auto control
17 DI5 Forward/Reverse (Auto): Activation reverses rotation direction
18 DI6 Start/Stop (Auto): Activation starts the drive
24 RO2B Running =>22 connected to 24

• Two analog references (AI1, 2) • Analog output AO1: Speed
• Start/stop – hand/auto (DI1, 6) • Analog output AO2: Current J1
AI1: 0…10 V
ON
• Direction – hand/auto (DI2, 5) • Relay output 1: Ready

AI2: 0(4)…20 mA
ON
• Control location selection (DI3) • Relay output 2: Running

• Run enable (DI4) • Relay output 3: Fault (-1)
Start-Up
Application Macro: PID Control

This macro provides parameter settings for closed-loop control systems such as
pressure control, flow control, etc. To enable, set the value of parameter 9902 to 6
(PID CTRL).
Connection example:
2 AI1 External ref. 1 (Manual) or Ext ref. 2 (PID): 0…10 V1
Note 1.
4 10 V Reference voltage 10 VDC Manual: 0…10 V => freq. reference
5 AI2 Actual signal (PID): 0…20 mA PID: 0…10 V => 0…100% PID
6 AGND Analog input circuit common setpoint

13 DI1 Start/Stop (Hand): Activation starts the drive
14 DI2 EXT1/EXT2 selection: Activation selects PID control
15 DI3 Constant speed selection 1: (Not used in PID control)2
16 DI4 Constant speed selection 2: (Not used in PID control)2
18 DI6 Start/Stop (PID): Activation starts the drive

20 RO1A Default operation: Note 2. Code:
21 RO1B Ready =>19 connected to 21 0 = open, 1 = connected
22 RO2C Relay output 2, programmable DI3 DI4 Output
23 RO2A Default operation: 0 0 Reference through AI1
1 0 CONSTANT SPEED 1 (1202)

• Actual value (AI2) • Analog output AO2: Current J1
AI1: 0…10 V
ON
• Start/stop – hand/PID (DI1, 6) • Relay output 1: Ready

AI2: 0(4)…20 mA
ON
• EXT1/EXT2 selection (DI2) • Relay output 2: Running

• Constant speed selection (DI3, 4) • Relay output 3: Fault (-1)
• Run enable (DI5)
Start-Up
Application Macro: PFC

This macro provides parameter settings for pump and fan control (PFC) applications.
To enable, set the value of parameter 9902 to 7 (PFC CONTROL).
Connection example:
2 AI1 External ref. 1 (Manual) or Ext ref. 2 (PID/PFC): 0…10 V1
3 AGND Analog input circuit common Note 1.
4 10 V Reference voltage 10 VDC Manual: 0…10 V => 0…50 Hz
5 AI2 Actual signal (PID): 4…20 mA PID/PFC: 0…10 V => 0…100%
6 AGND Analog input circuit common PID setpoint
8 AO2 Actual 1 (PI controller actual value): 0(4)…20 mA

13 DI1 Start/Stop (Manual): Activation starts the drive
16 DI4 Interlock: Deactivation always stops the drive
17 DI5 Interlock: Deactivation stops constant speed motor
18 DI6 Start/Stop (PFC): Activation starts the drive

24 RO2B Fault (-1) =>22 connected to 24 (Fault => 22 connected to 23)
27 RO3B Auxiliary motor switched on=>25 connected to 27

• Analog ref. and actual (AI1, 2) • Analog output AO1: Frequency
• Start/stop – manual/PFC (DI1, 6) • Analog output AO2: Actual 1 J1
AI1: 0…10 V
ON

AI2: 0(4)…20 mA
ON
• EXT1/EXT2 selection (DI3) • Relay output 2: Fault (-1)

• Interlock (DI4, 5) • Relay output 3: Aux. motor ON
Start-Up
Application Macro: SPFC

This macro provides parameter settings for pump and fan control (PFC) applications
with cycle soft start function. To enable, set the value of parameter 9902 to 15 (SPFC
CONTROL).
Connection example:
2 AI1 External ref. 1 (Manual) or Ext ref. 2 (PID/PFC): 0…10 V1
3 AGND Analog input circuit common Note 1.
4 10 V Reference voltage 10 VDC Manual: 0…10 V => 0…50 Hz
5 AI2 Actual signal (PID): 4…20 mA PID/PFC: 0…10 V => 0…100%
6 AGND Analog input circuit common PID setpoint
8 AO2 Actual 1 (PI controller actual value): 0(4)…20 mA

13 DI1 Start/Stop (Manual): Activation starts the drive
16 DI4 Interlock: Deactivation always stops the drive
17 DI5 Interlock: Deactivation stops constant speed motor
18 DI6 Start/Stop (PFC): Activation starts the drive

24 RO2B Fault (-1) =>22 connected to 24 (Fault => 22 connected to 23)
27 RO3B Auxiliary motor switched on=>25 connected to 27

• Analog ref. and actual (AI1, 2) • Analog output AO1: Frequency
• Start/stop – manual/PFC (DI1, 6) • Analog output AO2: Actual 1 J1
AI1: 0…10 V
ON

AI2: 0(4)…20 mA
ON
• EXT1/EXT2 selection (DI3) • Relay output 2: Fault (-1)

• Interlock (DI4, 5) • Relay output 3: Aux. motor ON
Start-Up
Macro Default Values for Parameters

Parameter default values are listed in "Complete Parameter List for ACS510".
Changing from the default macro (ABB Standard), that is, editing the value of
parameter 9902, changes the parameter default values as defined in the following
tables.
ACS510-01
Potentiometer
SPFC Control
PFC Control
PID Control
Hand-auto
Alternate
Standard
3-wire
Motor
ABB
Parameter
9902 APPLIC MACRO 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 15

1001 EXT1 COMMANDS 2 4 9 2 2 1 1 1
1002 EXT2 COMMANDS 0 0 0 0 7 6 6 6
1003* DIRECTION 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1
1102 EXT1/EXT2 SEL 0 0 0 0 3 2 3 3
1103 REF1 SELECT 1 1 1 12 1 1 1 1
1106 REF2 SELECT 2 2 2 2 2 19 19 19
1201 CONST SPEED SEL 9 10 9 5 0 9 0 0
1304 MINIMUM AI2 0 0 0 0 20 20 20 20
1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2
1402 RELAY OUTPUT 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 31
1403 RELAY OUTPUT 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 31 31
1501 AO1 CONTENT 103 102 102 102 102 102 103 103
1503 AO1 CONTENT MAX 50 50 50 50 50 50 52 52
1507 AO2 CONTENT 104 104 104 104 104 104 130 130
1510 MINIMUM AO2 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 4
1601 RUN ENABLE 0 0 6 6 4 5 2 2
2008 MAXIMUM FREQ 50 50 50 50 50 50 52 52
2201 ACC/DEC 1/2 SEL 5 0 5 0 0 0 0 0
3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM 103 102 102 102 102 102 103 103
3401 SIGNAL 1 PARAM 103 102 102 102 102 102 103 103
4001 GAIN 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 25 2.5
4002 INTEGRATION TIME 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
4101 GAIN 1 1 1 1 1 1 2,5 2.5
4102 INTEGRATION TIME 60 60 60 60 60 60 3 3
8118 AUTOCHG INTERV 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.1
8123 PFC ENABLE 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 2
* This parameter is not available in software option +N688 and +N689.
Start-Up
Complete Parameter List for ACS510

The following table lists all parameters. Table header abbreviations are:
• S = Parameters can be modified only when the drive is stopped.
• User = Space to enter desired parameter values
Some values vary depending on the drive software options. This is indicated by
“+N688:” or “+N689 in the table below. Refer to the type code on the drive namplate.
For example ACS510-01...+N688 .
Code Name Range Resolution Default User S
Group 99: Start-Up Data
9901 LANGUAGE 0…2 1 0
9902 APPLIC MACRO -3…7, 15 1 1 9
9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT 200…600 V / 1V 400 V 9
9906 MOTOR NOM CURR 0.2*I2n…2.0*I2n 0.1 A 1.0*I2n 9
9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ 10.0…500.0 Hz / 0.1 Hz 50.0 Hz / 9
+N688:10.0...50.0 Hz / +N688:50.0 Hz /
+N689:10.0...55.0 Hz +N689:55.0 Hz
9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED 50…30,000 rpm 1 rpm Size dependent 9
9909 MOTOR NOM POWER 0.2…3.0*Pn 0.1 kW 1.0 * Pn 9
Group 01: Operating Data
0101 SPEED & DIR 0…30000 rpm 1 rpm -
0102 SPEED 0…30000 rpm 1 rpm -
0103 OUTPUT FREQ 0.0…500.0 Hz / 0.1 Hz -
+N688:0.0...50.0 Hz /
+N689:0.0...55.0 Hz
0104 CURRENT 0…2.0*I2n 0.1 A -
0105 TORQUE -200.0…200.0% 0.1% -
0106 POWER -2.0…2.0*Pn 0.1 kW -
0107 DC BUS VOLTAGE 0…2.5*VdN 1V -
0109 OUTPUT VOLTAGE 0…2.0*VdN 1V -
0110 DRIVE TEMP 0.0…150.0 °C 0.1 °C -
0111 EXTERNAL REF 1 0.0…500.0 Hz / 0.1 Hz -
+N688:0.0...50.0 Hz /
+N689:0.0...55.0 Hz
0112 EXTERNAL REF 2 0.0…100.0% 0.1% -
0113 CTRL LOCATION 0 = local, 1 = ext1, 2 = ext2 1 -
0114 RUN TIME (R) 0…9999 h 1h 0h
0115 KWH COUNTER (R) 0…9999 kWh 1 kWh -
0116 APPL BLK OUTPUT 0.0…100.0% 0.1% -
0118 DI 1-3 STATUS 000…111 (0…7 decimal) 1 -
0119 DI 4-6 STATUS 000…111 (0…7 decimal) 1 -
0120 AI1 0.0…100.0% 0.1% -
0121 AI2 0.0…100.0% 0.1% -
0122 RO 1-3 STATUS 000…111 (0…7 decimal) 1 -
0123 RO 4-6 STATUS 000…111 (0…7 decimal) 1 -
0124 AO1 0.0…20.0 mA 0.1 mA -
Start-Up

0125 AO2 0.0…20.0 mA 0.1 mA -
0126 PID 1 OUTPUT -1000.0…1000.0% 0.1% -
0127 PID 2 OUTPUT -100.0…100.0% 0.1% -
0128 PID 1 SETPNT Unit and scale defined by par. 4006/ - -
4106 and 4007/4107
0129 PID 2 SETPNT Unit and scale defined by par. 4206 and
4207
0130 PID 1 FBK Unit and scale defined by par. 4006/ - -
4106 and 4007/4107
0131 PID 2 FBK Unit and scale defined by par. 4206 and - -
4207
0132 PID 1 DEVIATION Unit and scale defined by par. 4006/ - -
4106 and 4007/4107
0133 PID 2 DEVIATION Unit and scale defined by par. 4206 and - -
4207
0134 COMM RO WORD 0…65535 1 0
0135 COMM VALUE 1 -32768…+32767 1 0
0136 COMM VALUE 2 -32768…+32767 1 0
0137 PROCESS VAR 1 - 1
0140 RUN TIME 0.00…499.99 kh 0.01 kh 0 kh
0141 MWH COUNTER 0…9999 MWh 1 MWh -
0142 REVOLUTION CNTR 0…65535 1 0
0143 DRIVE ON TIME (HI) Days 1 day 0
0144 DRIVE ON TIME (LO) hh.mm.ss 1 = 2s 0
0145 MOTOR TEMP -10...200 °C/ 0...5000 Ohm / 0…1 1 0
0146… Not used
0148
0149 OVERRIDE ACTIVED 0..1 1 0
0150 CB TEMP - 0.1 °C -
0151 INPUT KWH (R) 0.1 kWh -
0152 INPUT MWH 1 MWh -
0158 PID COMM VALUE 1 1 -
0159 PID COMM VALUE 2 1 -
Group 03: FB Actual Signals
0301 FB CMD WORD 1 - - -
0302 FB CMD WORD 2 - - -
0303 FB STS WORD 1 - - -
0304 FB STS WORD 2 - 1 0
0305 FAULT WORD 1 - 1 0
0306 FAULT WORD 2 - 1 0
0307 FAULT WORD 3 - 1 0
0308 ALARM WORD 1 - 1 0
0309 ALARM WORD 2 - 1 0
Group 04: Fault History
0401 LAST FAULT Fault codes (panel displays as text) 1 0
Start-Up

0402 FAULT TIME 1 Date dd.mm.yy / power-on time in days 1 0
0403 FAULT TIME 2 Time hh.mm.ss 2s 0
0404 SPEED AT FLT - 1 rpm 0
0405 FREQ AT FLT - 0.1 Hz 0
0406 VOLTAGE AT FLT - 0.1 V 0
0407 CURRENT AT FLT - 0.1 A 0
0408 TORQUE AT FLT - 0.1% 0
0409 STATUS AT FLT - 1 0
0410 DI 1-3 AT FLT 000…111 (0…7 decimal) 1 0
0411 DI 4-6 AT FLT 000…111 (0…7 decimal) 1 0
0412 PREVIOUS FAULT 1 as Par. 0401 1 0
0413 PREVIOUS FAULT 2 as Par. 0401 1 0
Group 10: Start/Stop/Dir
1001 EXT1 COMMANDS 0…14 1 2 9
+N688:1
+N689:1
1002 EXT2 COMMANDS 0…14 1 0 9
1003 DIRECTION 1…3 1 3 9
(NOTE)
Group 11: Reference Select
1101 KEYPAD REF SEL 1…2 1 1
1102 EXT1/EXT2 SEL -6…12 1 0 9
1103 REF1 SELECT 0…17, 20…21 1 1 9
1104 REF1 MIN 0.0…500.0 Hz / 0.1 Hz 0.0 Hz
+N688:0.0...50.0 Hz /
+N689:0.0...55.0 Hz
1105 REF1 MAX 0.0…500.0 Hz / 0.1 Hz 50.0 Hz /
+N688:0.0...50.0 Hz / +N688:50.0 Hz /
+N689:0.0...55.0 Hz +N689:55.0 Hz
1106 REF2 SELECT 0…17, 19…21 1 2 9
1107 REF2 MIN 0.0…100.0% 0.1% 0.0%
1108 REF2 MAX 0.0…100.0% 0.1% 100.0%
Group 12: Constant Speeds
1201 CONST SPEED SEL -14 …19 1 9 9
1202 CONST SPEED 1 0.0…500.0 Hz / 0.1 Hz 5.0 Hz /
+N688:0.0...50.0 Hz / +N688:5.0 Hz /
+N689:0.0...55.0 Hz +N689:5.5Hz
+N688:0.0...50.0 Hz / +N688:10.0 Hz /
+N689:0.0...55.0 Hz +N689:11.0 Hz
+N688:0.0...50.0 Hz / +N688:15.0 Hz /
+N689:0.0...55.0 Hz +N689:16.5Hz
+N688:0.0...50.0 Hz / +N688:20.0 Hz /
+N689:0.0...55.0 Hz +N689:22.0 Hz
Start-Up

+N688:0.0...50.0 Hz / +N688:25.0 Hz /
+N689:0.0...55.0 Hz +N689:27.5Hz
+N688:0.0...50.0 Hz / +N688:40.0 Hz /
+N689:0.0...55.0 Hz +N689:44.0 Hz
+N688:0.0...50.0 Hz / +N688:50.0 Hz /
+N689:0.0...55.0 Hz +N689:55.0 Hz
Group 13: Analogue Inputs
1301 MINIMUM AI1 0.0…100.0% 0.1% 0.0%
1302 MAXIMUM AI1 0.0…100.0% 0.1% 100.0%
1303 FILTER AI1 0.0…10.0 s 0.1 s 0.1 s
1304 MINIMUM AI2 0.0…100.0% 0.1% 0.0%
1305 MAXIMUM AI2 0.0…100.0% 0.1% 100.0%
1306 FILTER AI2 0.0…10.0 s 0.1 s 0.1 s
Group 14: Relay Outputs
1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 0…46 1 1
1402 RELAY OUTPUT 2 0…46 1 2
1403 RELAY OUTPUT 3 0…46 1 3
1404 RO 1 ON DELAY 0.0…3600.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s
1405 RO 1 OFF DELAY 0.0…3600.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s
1406 RO 2 ON DELAY 0.0…3600.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s
1407 RO 2 OFF DELAY 0.0…3600.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s
1408 RO 3 ON DELAY 0.0…3600.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s
1409 RO 3 OFF DELAY 0.0…3600.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s
1410 RELAY OUTPUT 4 0…46,52 1 0
1411 RELAY OUTPUT 5 0…46,52 1 0
1412 RELAY OUTPUT 6 0…46,52 1 0
1413 RO 4 ON DELAY 0.0…3600.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s
1414 RO 4 OFF DELAY 0.0…3600.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s
1415 RO 5 ON DELAY 0.0…3600.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s
1416 RO 5 OFF DELAY 0.0…3600.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s
1417 RO 6 ON DELAY 0.0…3600.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s
1418 RO 6 OFF DELAY 0.0…3600.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s
Group 15: Analogue Outputs
1501 AO1 CONTENT SEL 99...159 1 103
1502 AO1 CONTENT MIN - - Defined by par. 0103
1503 AO1 CONTENT MAX - - Defined by par. 0103
1504 MINIMUM AO1 0.0…20.0 mA 0.1 mA 0.0 mA
1505 MAXIMUM AO1 0.0…20.0 mA 0.1 mA 20.0 mA
1506 FILTER AO1 0.0…10.0 s 0.1 s 0.1 s
1507 AO2 CONTENT SEL 99…159 1 104
1508 AO2 CONTENT MIN - - Defined by par. 0104
1509 AO2 CONTENT MAX - - Defined by par. 0104
1510 MINIMUM AO2 0.0…20.0 mA 0.1 mA 0.0 mA
Start-Up

1511 MAXIMUM AO2 0.0…20.0 mA 0.1 mA 20.0 mA
1512 FILTER AO2 0.0…10.0 s 0.1 s 0.1 s
Group 16: System Controls
1601 RUN ENABLE 0…7, -1…-6 1 0 9
1602 PARAMETER LOCK 0…2 1 1
1603 PASS CODE 0…65535 1 0
1604 FAULT RESET sEL 0…8, -1…-6 1 0
1605 USER PAR SET CHG 0…6, -1…-6 1 0
1606 LOCAL LOCK 0…8, -1…-6 1 0
1607 PARAM SAVE 0 = DONE, 1 = SAVE 1 0
1608 START ENABLE 1 0…7, -1…-6 1 0
1609 START ENABLE 2 0…7, -1…-6 1 0
1610 DISPLAY ALARMS 0...1 1 0
Group 17:Override Mode
1701 OVERRIDE SEL 0…6, -1…-6 1 0
1702 OVERRIDE FREQ 0.0…500.0 Hz / 0.1Hz 0.0
+N688:0.0...50.0 Hz /
+N689:-0.0...55.0 Hz
1704 OVERRIDE PASSCODE 0...65535 1 0
1705 OVERRIDE ENABLE 0...2 1 0
1706 OVERRIDE DIR -6...7 1 0
1707 OVERRIDE REF 1...2 1 1
Group 20: Limits
2003 MAX CURRENT 0… 1.1 * I2n 0.1 A 1.1 * I2n 9
2005 OVERVOLT CTRL 0 = DISABLE, 1 = ENABLE 1 1
2006 UNDERVOLT CTRL 0 = DISABLE, 1 = ENABLE (TIME), 1 1
2 = ENABLE
2007 MINIMUM FREQ -500.0…500.0 Hz / 0.1 Hz 0.0 Hz 9
+N688:-50.0...50.0 Hz /
+N689:-55.0...55.0 Hz
2008 MAXIMUM FREQ 0…500.0 Hz / 0.1 Hz 50.0 Hz / 9
+N688:0...50.0 Hz / +N688:50.0 Hz /
+N689:0...55.0 Hz +N689:55.0 Hz
Group 21: Start/Stop
2101 START FUNCTION 2…5, 8 1 8 9
2102 STOP FUNCTION 1 = COAST, 2 = RAMP 1 1
2103 DC MAGN TIME 0.00…10.00 s 0.01 s 0.30 s
2104 DC CURR CTL 0, 2 - 0 9
2106 DC CURR REF 0%…100% 1% 30%
2107 DC BRAKE TIME 0.0…250.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s
2108 START INHIBIT 0 = OFF, 1 = ON 1 0 9
2109 EM STOP SEL 0…6, -1…-6 1 0
2110 TORQ BOOST CURR 15…300% 1 100%
2113 START DELAY 0.00…60.00 s 0.01 s 0.00 s
Start-Up

Group 22: Accel/Decel
2201 ACC/DEC 1/2 SEL 0…7, -1…-6 1 5
2202 ACCELER TIME 1 0.0…1800.0 s 0.1 s 30.0 s
2203 DECELER TIME 1 0.0…1800.0 s 0.1 s 30.0 s
2204 RAMP SHAPE 1 0=LINEAR; 0.1...1000.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s
2205 ACCELER TIME 2 0.0…1800.0 s 0.1 s 60.0 s
2206 DECELER TIME 2 0.0…1800.0 s 0.1 s 60.0 s
2207 RAMP SHAPE 2 0=LINEAR; 0.1...1000.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s
2208 EM DEC TIME 0.0…1800.0 s 0.1 s 30.0 s
2209 RAMP INPUT 0 0…6, -1…-6 1 0
Group 25: Critical Speeds
2501 CRIT SPEED SEL 0 = OFF, 1 = ON 1 0
2502 CRIT SPEED 1 LO 0.0…500.0 Hz / 0.1 Hz 0.0 Hz
+N688:0.0...50.0 Hz /
+N689:0.0...55.0 Hz
2503 CRIT SPEED 1 HI 0.0…500.0 Hz / 0.1 Hz 0.0 Hz
+N688:0.0...50.0 Hz /
+N689:0.0...55.0 Hz
+N688:0.0...50.0 Hz /
+N689:0.0...55.0 Hz
+N688:0.0...50.0 Hz /
+N689:0.0...55.0 Hz
+N688:0.0...50.0 Hz /
+N689:0.0...55.0 Hz
+N688:0.0...50.0 Hz /
+N689:0.0...55.0 Hz
Group 26: Motor Control
2601 FLUX OPTIMIZATION 0 = OFF, 1 = ON 1 1
2602 FLUX BRAKING 0 = OFF, 1 = ON 1 0
2603 IR COMP VOLT 0…100 V 1 0
2604 IR COMP FREQ 0…100% 1 80%
2605 U/F RATIO 1 = LINEAR, 2 = SQUARED, 3 = FREELY 1 2
DEFINED
2606 SWITCHING FREQ 1,4,8, 12 kHz - 4 kHz
2607 SW FREQ CTRL 0 = OFF, 1 = ON - 1
2608 SLIP COMP RATIO 0…200% 1 0
2609 NOISE SMOOTHING 0 = DISABLE, 1 = ENABLE 1 0
2610 USER U1 0...480 V 1V 76 V
2611 USER F1 0.0…500.0 Hz / 0.1 Hz 10.0 Hz /
+N688:0.0...50.0 Hz / +N688:10.0 Hz /
+N689:0.0...55.0 Hz +N689:11.0 Hz
2612 USER U2 0...480 V 1V 152 V
Start-Up

2613 USER F2 0.0…500.0 Hz / 0.1 Hz 20.0 Hz /
+N688:0.0...50.0 Hz / +N688:20.0 Hz /
+N689:0.0...55.0 Hz +N689:22.0 Hz
2614 USER U3 0...480 V 1V 228 V
2615 USER F3 0.0…500.0 Hz / 0.1 Hz 30.0 Hz /
+N688:0.0...50.0 Hz / +N688:30.0 Hz /
+N689:0.0...55.0 Hz +N689:33.0 Hz
2616 USER U4 0...480 V 1V 304 V
2617 USER F4 0.0…500.0 Hz / 0.1 Hz 40.0 Hz /
+N688:0.0...50.0 Hz / +N688:40.0 Hz /
+N689:0.0...55.0 Hz +N689:44.0 Hz
2618 FW VOLTAGE 190...480 V 1V 380 V
2619 DC STABILIZER 0…1 1 0
Group 30: Fault Functions
3001 AI<MIN FUNCTION 0…3 1 0
3002 PANEL COMM ERR 1…3 1 1
3003 EXTERNAL FAULT 1 0…6, -1…-6 1 0
3004 EXTERNAL FAULT 2 0…6, -1…-6 1 0
3005 MOT THERM PROT 0 = NOT SEL, 1 = FAULT, 2 = WARNING 1 1 (FAULT)
3006 MOT THERM TIME 256…9999 s 1 1050 s
3007 MOT LOAD CURVE 50…150% 1 100%
3008 ZERO SPEED LOAD 25…150% 1 70%
3009 BREAK POINT FREQ 1…250 Hz 1 35 Hz
3010 STALL FUNCTION 0…2 1 0 (NOT SEL)
3011 STALL FREQUENCY 0.5…50.0 Hz 0.1 Hz 20.0 Hz
3012 STALL TIME 10…400 s 1s 20 s
3017 EARTH FAULT 0 = DISABLE, 1 = ENABLE 1 1 (ENABLE)
3018 COMM FAULT FUNC 0 = NOT SEL, 1 = FAULT, 2 = CONST SP7, 1 0 (NOT SEL)
3 = LAST SPEED
3019 COMM FAULT TIME 0.0…60.0 s 0.1 s 10.0 s
3021 AI1 FAULT LIMIT 0.0…100.0% 0.1% 0.0%
3022 AI2 FAULT LIMIT 0.0…100.0% 0.1% 0.0%
3023 WIRING FAULT 0 = DISABLE, 1 = ENABLE 1 1
3024 CB TEMP FAULT 0…1 1 1
Group 31: Automatic Reset
3101 NR OF TRIALS 0…5 1 5
3102 TRIAL TIME 1.0…600.0 s 0.1 s 30.0 s
3103 DELAY TIME 0.0…120.0 s 0.1 s 6.0 s
3104 AR OVERCURRENT 0 = DISABLE, 1 = ENABLE 1 1
3105 AR OVERVOLTAGE 0 = DISABLE, 1 = ENABLE 1 1
3106 AR UNDERVOLTAGE 0 = DISABLE, 1 = ENABLE 1 1
3107 AR AI<MIN 0 = DISABLE, 1 = ENABLE 1 1
3108 AR EXTERNAL FLT 0 = DISABLE, 1 = ENABLE 1 1
Group 32: Supervision
3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM 101…159 1 103
3202 SUPERV 1 LIM LO - - 0
Start-Up

3203 SUPERV 1 LIM HI - - 0
3204 SUPERV 2 PARAM 101…159 1 103
3207 SUPERV 3 PARAM 101…159 1 103
Group 33: Information
3301 FW VERSION 0000...FFFF hex 1 Firmware version
3302 LP VERSION 0000...FFFF hex 1 0
3303 TEST DATE yy.ww 1 0
3304 DRIVE RATING - - -
3305 PARAMETER TABLE 0000...FFFF 十六进制 1
Group 34: Panel Display / Process Variables
3401 SIGNAL 1 PARAM 100...159 1 103
3402 SIGNAL 1 MIN - 1 -
3403 SIGNAL 1 MAX - 1 -
3404 OUTPUT 1 DSP FORM 0…9 1 9
3405 OUTPUT 1 UNIT 0...127 1 .
3406 OUTPUT 1 MIN - 1 -
3407 OUTPUT 1 MAX - 1 -
3408 SIGNAL 2 PARAM 100...159 1 104
3409 SIGNAL 2 MIN - 1 -
3410 SIGNAL 2 MAX - 1 -
3411 OUTPUT 2 DSP FORM 0…8 1 -
3412 OUTPUT 2 UNIT -128...127 1 .
3413 OUTPUT 2 MIN - 1 -
3414 OUTPUT 2 MAX - 1 -
3415 SIGNAL 3 PARAM 100...159 1 105
3416 SIGNAL 3 MIN - 1 -
3417 SIGNAL 3 MAX - 1 -
3418 OUTPUT 3 DSP FORM 0…8 1 -
3419 OUTPUT 3 UNIT -128…127 1 .
3420 OUTPUT 3 MIN - 1 -
3421 OUTPUT 3 MAX - 1 -
Group 35: Motor Temp Meas
3501 SENSOR TYPE 0…6 1 0
3502 INPUT SELECTION 1…8 1 1
3503 ALARM LIMIT -10...200 °C / 0...5000 Ohm / 0…1 1 110 °C / 1500 Ohm / 0
3504 FAULT LIMIT -10...200 °C / 0...5000 Ohm / 0…1 1 130 °C / 4000 Ohm / 0
Group 37: 用户可调节负载曲线
3701 USER LOAD C MODE 0…3 1 0
3702 USER LOAD C FUNC 1…2 1 1
3703 USER LOAD C TIME 10...400 s 1s 20 s
3704 LOAD FREQ 1 0...500 Hz 1 Hz 5 Hz
Start-Up

3705 LOAD TORQ LOW 1 0%...600% 1% 10%
3706 LOAD TORQ HIGH 1 0%...600% 1% 300%
3707 LOAD FREQ 2 0...500 Hz 1 Hz 25 Hz
3708 LOAD TORQ LOW 2 0%...600% 1% 15%
3709 LOAD TORQ HIGH 2 0%...600% 1% 300%
3710 LOAD FREQ 3 0...500 Hz 1 Hz 43 Hz
3711 LOAD TORQ LOW 3 0%...600% 1% 25%
3712 LOAD TORQ HIGH 3 0%...600% 1% 300%
3713 LOAD FREQ 4 0...500 Hz 1 Hz 50 Hz
3714 LOAD TORQ LOW 4 0%...600% 1% 30%
3715 LOAD TORQ HIGH 4 0%...600% 1% 300%
3716 LOAD FREQ 5 0...500 Hz 1 Hz 500 Hz
3717 LOAD TORQ LOW 5 0%...600% 1% 30%
3718 LOAD TORQ HIGH 5 0%...600% 1% 300%
Group 40: Process PID Set 1
4001 GAIN 0.1…100 0.1 2.5
4002 INTEGRATION TIME 0.0s = NOT SEL, 0.1…3600.0 s 0.1 s 3.0 s
4003 DERIVATION TIME 0…10.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s
4004 PID DERIV FILTER 0…10.0 s 0.1 s 1.0 s
4005 ERROR VALUE INV 0 = NO, 1 = YES - 0
4006 UNITS 0…31 - 4
4007 UNIT SCALE 0…4 1 1
4008 0% VALUE Unit and scale defined by par. 4006 and 0.1% 0.0%
4007
4007
4010 SET POINT SEL 0…2, 8...19 1 1 9
4011 INTERNAL SETPNT Unit and scale defined by par. 4006 and 0.1% 40.0%
4007
4012 SETPOINT MIN -500.0%…500.0% 0.1% 0.0%
4013 SETPOINT MAX -500.0%…500.0% 0.1% 100.0%
4014 FBK SEL 1…13 1 1
4015 FBK MULTIPLIER -32.768…32.767 (0 = not used) 0.001 0
4016 ACT1 INPUT 1…7 1 2 9
4017 ACT2 INPUT 1…7 1 2 9
4018 ACT1 MINIMUM -1000…1000% 1% 0%
4019 ACT1 MAXIMUM -1000…1000% 1% 100%
4020 ACT2 MINIMUM -1000…1000% 1% 0%
4021 ACT2 MAXIMUM -1000…1000% 1% 100%
4022 SLEEP SELECTION 0…7, -1…-6 - 0
4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL 0.0…500.0 Hz / 0.1 Hz 0.0 Hz
+N688:0.0...50.0 Hz /
+N689:0.0...55.0 Hz
4024 PID SLEEP DELAY 0.0…3600.0 s 0.1 s 60.0 s
4025 WAKE-UP DEV Unit and scale defined by par. 4006 and 1 -
4007
Start-Up

4026 WAKE-UP DELAY 0…60 s 0.01 s 0.50 s
4027 PID 1 PARAM sET -6…11 1 0
4101 GAIN 0.1…100 0.1 2.5
4102 INTEGRATION TIME 0.0s = NOT SEL, 0.1…3600 s 0.1 s 3.0 s
4103 DERIVATION TIME 0.0…10.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s
4104 PID DERIV FILTER 0.0…10.0 s 0.1 s 1.0 s
4106 UNITS 0…31 - 4
4107 UNIT SCALE 0…4 1 1
4107
4107
4110 SET POINT SEL 0…19 1 1 9
4107
4112 SETPOINT MIN -500.0%…500.0% 0.1% 0.0%
4113 SETPOINT MAX -500.0%…500.0% 0.1% 100.0%
4114 FBK SEL 1…13 - 1
4115 FBK MULTIPLIER -32.768…32.767 (0 = NOT USED) 0.001 0
4116 ACT1 INPUT 1…7 - 2 9
4117 ACT2 INPUT 1…7 - 2 9
4118 ACT1 MINIMUM -1000…1000% 1% 0%
4119 ACT1 MAXIMUM -1000…1000% 1% 100%
4120 ACT2 MINIMUM -1000…1000% 1% 0%
4121 ACT2 MAXIMUM -1000…1000% 1% 100%
4122 SLEEP SELECTION 0…7, -1…-6 - 0
4123 PID SLEEP LEVEL 0.0…500.0 Hz / 0.1 Hz 0.0 Hz
+N688:0.0...50.0 Hz /
+N689:0.0...55.0 Hz
4124 PID SLEEP DELAY 0.0…3600.0 s 0.1 s 60.0 s
4125 WAKE-UP DEV Unit and scale defined by par. 4106 and - -
4107
4126 WAKE-UP DELAY 0.00…60.00 s 0.01 s 0.50 s
Group 42: Ext / Trim PID
4201 GAIN 0.1…100.0 0.1 1.0
4202 INTEGRATION TIME 0.0s = NOT SEL, 0.1…3600.0 s 0.1 s 60.0 s
4203 DERIVATION TIME 0.0…10.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s
4204 PID DERIV FILTER 0.0…10.0 s 0.1 s 1.0 s
4206 UNITS 0…31 - 4
4207 UNIT SCALE 0…4 1 1
4208 0% VALUE Unit and scale defined by par. 4206 and 1 0%
4207
4209 100% VALUE Unit and scale defined by par. 4206 and 1 100%
4207
Start-Up

4210 SET POINT SEL 0…19 1 1 9
4207
4212 SETPOINT MIN -500.0%…500.0% 0.1% 0.0%
4213 SETPOINT MAX -500.0%…500.0% 0.1% 100.0%
4214 FBK SEL 1…13 - 1
4215 FBK MULTIPLIER -32.768…32.767 (0 = NOT USED) 0.001 0.000
4216 ACT1 INPUT 1…7 - 2 9
4217 ACT2 INPUT 1…7 - 2 9
4218 ACT1 MINIMUM -1000…1000% 1% 0%
4219 ACT1 MAXIMUM -1000…1000% 1% 100%
4220 ACT2 MINIMUM -1000…1000% 1% 0%
4221 ACT2 MAXIMUM -1000…1000% 1% 100%
4228 ACTIVATE -6…12 - 0
4229 OFFSET 0.0…100.0% 0.1% 0.0%
4230 TRIM MODE 0…2 1 0
4231 TRIM SCALE -100.0%…100.0% 0.1% 0.0%
4232 CORRECTION SRC 1…2 1 1 (PID2 REF)
Group 51: Ext Comm Module
5101 FBA TYPE - 1 0
5102 … FBA PAR 2…26 0...65535 1 0
5126
5127 FBA PAR REFRESH 0 = done, 1 = refresh 1 0 9
5128 FILE CPI FW REV 0...0xFFFF (hex) 1 0
5129 FILE CONFIG ID 0...0xFFFF (hex) 1 0
5130 FILE CONFIG REV 0...0xFFFF (hex) 1 0
5131 FBA STATUS 0…6 1 0
5132 FBA CPI FW REV 0...0xFFFF (hex) 1 0
5133 FBA APPL FW REV 0...0xFFFF (hex) 1 0
Group 53: EFB Protocol
5301 EFB PROTOCOL ID 0...0xFFFF 1 0
5302 EFB STATION ID 0…65535 1 1 9
5303 EFB BAUD RATE 1.2, 2.4, 4.8, … 38.4, 57.6, 76.8 kbits/s - 9.6 kbits/s
5304 EFB PARITY 0 = 8N1, 1 = 8N2, 2 = 8E1, 3 = 8O1 0
5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE 0 = ABB DRV LIM, 1 = DCU PROFILE, 1 0 (ABB DRV LIM)
2 = ABB DRV FULL
5306 EFB OK MESSAGES 0…65535 1 0
5307 EFB CRC ERRORS 0…65535 1 0
5308 EFB UART ERRORS 0…65535 1 0
5309 EFB STATUS 0…65535 1 0 (IDLE)
5310 EFB PAR 10 0…65535 1 0 (NOT SEL)
5311 EFB PAR 11 0…65535 1 0 (NOT SEL)
5312 EFB PAR 12 0…65535 1 0 (NOT SEL)
5313 EFB PAR 13 0…65535 1 0 (NOT SEL)
5314 EFB PAR 14 0…65535 1 0 (NOT SEL)
5315 EFB PAR 15 0…65535 1 0 (NOT SEL)
Start-Up

5316 EFB PAR 16 0…65535 1 0 (NOT SEL)
5317 EFB PAR 17 0…65535 1 0 (NOT SEL)
5318 EFB PAR 18 0...65535 1 0
5319 EFB PAR 19 0...0xFFFF (hex) 1 0
5320 EFB PAR 20 0...0xFFFF (hex) 1 0
Group 81: PFC Control
8103 REFERENCE STEP 1 0.0…100.0% 0.1% 0.0%
8104 REFERENCE STEP 2 0.0…100.0% 0.1% 0.0%
8105 REFERENCE STEP 3 0.0…1000.% 0.1% 0.0%
8109 START FREQ 1 0.0…500.0 Hz / 0.1 Hz 50.0 Hz /
+N688:0.0...50.0 Hz / +N688:48.0 Hz /
+N689:0.0...55.0 Hz +N689:53.0 Hz
+N688:0.0...50.0 Hz / +N688:48.0 Hz /
+N689:0.0...55.0 Hz +N689:53.0 Hz
+N688:0.0...50.0 Hz / +N688:48.0 Hz /
+N689:0.0...55.0 Hz +N689:53.0 Hz
8112 LOW FREQ 1 0.0…500.0 Hz / 0.1 Hz 25.0 Hz /
+N688:0.0...50.0 Hz / +N688:25.0 Hz /
+N689:0.0...55.0 Hz +N689:27.5Hz
8113 LOW FREQ 2 0.0…500.0 Hz / 0.1 Hz 25.0 Hz /
+N688:0.0...50.0 Hz / +N688:25.0 Hz /
+N689:0.0...55.0 Hz +N689:27.5Hz
8114 LOW FREQ 3 0.0…500.0 Hz / 0.1 Hz 25.0 Hz /
+N688:0.0...50.0 Hz / +N688:25.0 Hz /
+N689:0.0...55.0 Hz +N689:27.5Hz
8115 AUX MOT START D 0.0…3600.0 s 0.1 s; 1 s 5.0 s
8116 AUX MOT STOP D. 0.0…3600.0 s 0.1 s; 1 s 20.0 s
8117 NR OF AUX MOT 0…6 1 1 9
8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV -0.1…336.0 h 0.1 h 0.0 h (NOT SEL) 9
8119 AUTOCHNG LEVEL 0.0…100.0% 0.1% 50.0%
8120 INTERLOCKS 0…6 1 4 9
8121 REG BYPASS CTRL 0…1 1 0 (NO)
8122 PFC START DELAY 0.00…10.00 s 0.01 s 0.50 s
8123 PFC ENABLE 0…2 - 0 (NOT SEL) 9
8124 ACC IN AUX STOP 0.0...1800.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s (NOT SEL)
8125 DEC IN AUX START 0.0...1800.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s (NOT SEL)
8127 MOTORS 1…7 1 2
8128 AUX START ORDER 1…2 1 1
Group 98: Options
9802 COMM PROT SEL 0…4 1 0 (NOT SEL) 9
NOTE: This parameter 1003 is not available in software option +N688 and +N689.
Start-Up
Complete Parameter Descriptions

This section describes the actual signals and parameters for ACS510.
Some values vary depending on the drive software options. This is indicated by
“+N688:” or “+N689 in the table below. Refer to the type code on the drive namplate.
For example ACS510-01...+N688
Term Definition
Actual signal Signal measured or calculated by the drive. Can be monitored by the
user. No user setting possible.
FbEq Fieldbus equivalent: The scaling between the value shown on the panel
and the integer used in serial communication.
Parameter A user-adjustable operation instruction of the drive.
Group 99: Start-up Data

This group defines special Start-up data required to:
• Set up the drive.
• Enter motor information.
Code Description
9901 LANGUAGE
Selects the display language.
0 = ENGLISH 1 = CHINESE 2 = KOREAN

9902 APPLIC MACRO
Selects an application macro. Application macros automatically edit parameters to configure the ACS510 for a
particular application.
1 = ABB STANDARD 2 = 3-WIRE 3 = ALTERNATE 4 = MOTOR POT 5 = HAND/AUTO

6 = PID CONTROL 7 = PFC CONTROL 15 = SPFC CONTROL
0 = USER S1 LOAD -1 = USER S1 SAVE -2 = USER S2 LOAD -3 = USER S2 SAVE
9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT

Output voltage
Defines the nominal motor voltage.
• Must equal the value on the motor rating plate.
• The ACS510 cannot supply the motor with a voltage greater than the
mains voltage. P 9905
9906 MOTOR NOM CURR
Defines the nominal motor current.
• Must equal the value on the motor rating plate. Output
• Range allowed: (0.2…2.0) · I2n. frequency
9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ P 9907
Defines the nominal motor frequency.
• Range: 10…500 Hz,or 10...50 HZ (+N688), or 10...55 HZ (+N689).
• Sets the frequency at which output voltage equals the MOTOR NOM
VOLT.
• Field weakening point = Nom Freq * Supply Volt / Mot Nom Volt
9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED
Defines the nominal motor speed.
Must equal the value on the motor rating plate.
Start-Up
9909 MOTOR NOM POWER

Defines the nominal motor power.
Must equal the value on the motor rating plate.
Start-Up
Group 01: Operating Data

This group contains drive operating data, including actual signals. The drive sets the
values for actual signals, based on measurements or calculations. You cannot set
these values.
Code Description
0101 SPEED & DIR
The calculated speed of the motor (rpm) & motor direction. (Signed motor speed actual value)
0102 SPEED
The calculated speed of the motor (rpm).
0103 OUTPUT FREQ
The frequency (Hz) applied to the motor. (Also shown by default in OUTPUT display.)
0104 CURRENT
The motor current, as measured by the ACS510. (Also shown by default in OUTPUT display.)
0105 TORQUE
Output torque. Calculated value of torque on motor shaft in % of motor nominal torque.
0106 POWER
The measured motor power in kW.
0107 DC BUS VOLTAGE
The DC bus voltage in VDC, as measured by the ACS510.
0109 OUTPUT VOLTAGE
The voltage applied to the motor.
0110 DRIVE TEMP
The temperature of the drive power transistors in Centigrade.
0111 EXTERNAL REF 1
External reference, REF1, in Hz.
0112 EXTERNAL REF 2
External reference, REF2, in %.
0113 CTRL LOCATION
Active control location. Alternatives are:
0 = LOCAL
1 = EXT1
2 = EXT2
0114 RUN TIME (R)
The drive’s accumulated running time in hours (h).
Can be reset by pressing UP and DOWN buttons simultaneously when in parameter set mode.
0115 KWH COUNTER (R)
The drive’s accumulated power consumption in kilowatt hours.
Can be reset by pressing UP and DOWN buttons simultaneously when in parameter set mode.
0116 APPL BLK OUTPUT
Application block output signal. Value is from either:
• PFC control, if PFC Control is active, or
• Parameter 0112 EXTERNAL REF 2.
0118 DI1-3 STATUS
Status of the three digital inputs.
• Status is displayed as a binary number.
• 1 indicates that the input is activated.
• 0 indicates that the input is deactivated.
0119 DI4-6 STATUS DI 1 DI 2 DI 3
Status of the three digital inputs.
See parameter 0118 DI1-3 STATUS.
Start-Up
Code Description
0120 AI1
Relative value of analog input 1 in %.
0121 AI2
The relative value of analog input 2 in %.
0122 RO1-3 STATUS
Status of the three relay outputs.
• 1 indicates that the relay is energized.
• 0 indicates that the relay is de-energized.
0123 RO4-6 STATUS RELAY 1 STATUS
Status of the three relay outputs. See parameter 0122. RELAY 2 STATUS
RELAY 3 STATUS
0124 AO1
The analog output 1 value in milliamperes.
0125 AO2
The analog output 2 value in milliamperes.
0126 PID 1 OUTPUT
The PID Controller 1 output value in %.
0127 PID 2 OUTPUT
The PID Controller 2 output value in %.
0128 PID 1 SETPNT
The PID 1 controller setpoint signal.
Units and scale defined by PID parameters.
0129 PID 2 SETPNT
The PID 2 controller setpoint signal.
0130 PID 1 FBK
The PID 1 controller feedback signal.
0131 PID 2 FBK
The PID 2 controller feedback signal.
0132 PID 1 DEVIATION
The difference between the PID 1 controller reference value and actual value.
0133 PID 2 DEVIATION
The difference between the PID 2 controller reference value and actual value.
0134 COMM RO WORD
Free data location that can be written from serial link.
• Used for relay output control.
• See parameter 1401.
0135 COMM VALUE 1
0136 COMM VALUE 2
0137 PROCESS VAR 1
Process variable 1
Defined by parameters in Group 34: Panel Display / Process Variables.
Start-Up
Code Description
0138 PROCESS VAR 2
Process variable 2
0139 PROCESS VAR 3
Process variable 3
0140 RUN TIME
The drive’s accumulated running time in thousands of hours (kh).
0141 MWH COUNTER
The drive’s accumulated power consumption in megawatt hours. Can not be reset.
0142 REVOLUTION CNTR
The motor’s accumulated revolutions in millions of revolutions.
0143 DRIVE ON TIME (HI)
The drive’s accumulated power on time in days.
0144 DRIVE ON TIME (LO)
The drive’s accumulated power on time in 2 second ticks (30 ticks = 60 seconds).
0145 MOTOR TEMP
Motor temperature in degrees centigrade / PTC resistance in Ohms.
Applies only if motor temperature sensor is set up. See parameter 3501.
0146 NOT USED
…
0148
0149 OVERRIDE ACTIVED
Override mode actived recorder.
1 = Drive is in override mode. Parameter setting or drive control is not possible. Please see paramerter group 17.
0 = Drive is in normal operating mode (in override mode).
Note! If override mode actived, this ACS510 module is out of warranty.
0150 CB TEMP
Temperature of the drive control board in degrees Celsius/Fahrenheit.
Note: Some drives have a control board (OMIO) that does not support this feature. These drives always show the
constant value of 25.0 °C.
0151 INPUT KWH (R)
The drives accumulated input power consumption in kilowatt hours. This value can be reset to zero by pressing the
UP and DOWN buttons simultaneously when in the parameter set mode.
0152 INPUT MWH
The drives accumulated input power consumption in megawatt hours. This value cannot be reset.
0158 PID COMM VALUE 1
Data received from fieldbus for PID control (PID1 and PID2).
0159 PID COMM VALUE 2
Data received from fieldbus for PID control (PID1 and PID2).
Start-Up
Group 03: FB Actual Signals

This group monitors fieldbus communications.
Code Description
0301 FB CMD WORD 1
Read-only copy of the Fieldbus Bit # 0301, FB CMD WORD 1 0302, FB CMD WORD 2
Command Word 1. 0 STOP Reserved
• The fieldbus command is the
1 START Reserved
principal means for controlling the
drive from a fieldbus controller. The 2 REVERSE Reserved
command consists of two Command 3 LOCAL Reserved
Words. Bit-coded instructions in the
Command Words switch the drive 4 RESET Reserved
between states. 5 EXT2 Reserved
• To control the drive, using the
6 RUN_DISABLE Reserved
Command Words, an external
location (EXT1 or EXT2) must be 7 STPMODE_R Reserved
active and set to COMM. (See 8 STPMODE_EM Reserved
parameters 1001 and 1002.)
• The control panel displays the word 9 STPMODE_C Reserved
in hex. For example, all zeros and a 1 10 RAMP_2 Reserved
in Bit 0 displays as 0001. All zeros
11 RAMP_OUT_0 REF_CONST
and a 1 in Bit 15 displays as 8000.
12 RAMP_HOLD REF_AVE
0302 FB CMD WORD 2
Read-only copy of the Fieldbus 13 RAMP_IN_0 LINK_ON
Command Word 2. 14 RREQ_LOCALLOC REQ_STARTINH
See parameter 0301. 15 Reserved OFF_INTERLOCK
0303 FB STS WORD 1

Read-only copy of the Status Word 1. Bit # 0303, STS CMD WORD 1 0304, FB STS WORD 2
• The drive sends status information to 0 READY ALARM
the fieldbus controller. The status
1 ENABLED REQ_MAINT
consists of two Status Words.
• The control panel displays the word 2 STARTED DIRLOCK
in hex. For example, all zeros and a 1 3 RUNNING LOCALLOCK
and a 1 in Bit 15 displays as 8000. 4 ZERO_SPEED CTL_MODE
0304 FB STS WORD 2 5 ACCELERATE Reserved
Read-only copy of the Status Word 2. 6 DECELERATE Reserved
See parameter 0303. 7 AT_SETPOINT Reserved
8 LIMIT Reserved
9 SUPERVISION Reserved
10 REV_REF REQ_CTL
11 REV_ACT REQ_REF1
12 PANEL_LOCAL REQ_REF2
13 FIELDBUS_LOCAL REQ_REF2EXT
14 EXT2_ACT ACK_STARTINH
15 FAULT ACK_OFF_ILCK
Start-Up
0305 FAULT WORD 1

Read-only copy of the Fault Word 1. Bit # 0305,FAULT WORD 1 0306, FAULT WORD 2 0307, FAULT WORD 3
• When a fault is active, the
0 OVERCURRENT UNDERLOAD EFB 1
corresponding bit for the active fault
is set in the Fault Words. 1 DC OVERVOLT THERM FAIL EFB 2
• Each fault has a dedicated bit 2 DEV OVERTEMP OPEX LINK EFB 3
allocated within Fault Words.
• See "Fault Listing" on page 197 for a 3 SHORT CIRC OPEX PWR Incompatible software
description of the faults. type
• The control panel displays the word 4 Reserved CURR MEAS Reserved
in hex. For example, all zeros and a 1 5 DC UNDERVOLT SUPPLY PHASE Reserved
and a 1 in Bit 15 displays as 8000. 6 AI1 LOSS Reserved Reserved
0306 FAULT WORD 2 7 AI2 LOSS Reserved Reserved
Read-only copy of the Fault Word 2. 8 MOT OVERTEMP Reserved Reserved
See parameter 0305. 9 PANEL LOSS DRIVE ID Reserved
0307 FAULT WORD 3 10 Reserved CONFIG FILE System error
Read-only copy of the Fault Word 3. 11 MOTOR STALL SERIAL 1 ERR System error
See parameter 0305.
12 Reserved EFB CON FILE System error
13 EXT FLT 1 FORCE TRIP System error
14 EXT FLT 2 MOTOR PHASE Hardware error
15 EARTH FAULT OUTPUT WIRING Param. setting fault
0308 ALARM WORD 1

• When an alarm is active, the Bit # 0308, ALARM WORD 1 0309, ALARM WORD 2
corresponding bit for the active alarm
is set in the Alarm Words. 0 OVERCURRENT Reserved
• Each alarm has a dedicated bit 1 OVERVOLTAGE PID SLEEP
allocated within Alarm Words.
2 UNDERVOLTAGE Reserved
• Bits remain set until the whole alarm
word is reset. (Reset by writing zero 3 DIRLOCK Reserved
to the word.) 4 I/O COMM START ENABLE 1 MISSING
• The control panel displays the word
in hex. For example, all zeros and a 1 5 AI1 LOSS START ENABLE 2 MISSING
in Bit 0 displays as 0001. All zeros 6 AI2 LOSS EMERGENCY STOP
and a 1 in Bit 15 displays as 8000.
7 PANEL LOSS Reserved
0309 ALARM WORD 2
8 DEVICE OVERTEMP Reserved
See parameter 0308.
9 MOT OVERTEMP Reserved
10 UNDERLOAD Reserved
11 MOTOR STALL Reserved
12 AUTORESET Reserved
13 PFC AUTOCHANGE Reserved
14 PFC INTERLOCK Reserved
15 Reserved Reserved
Start-Up
Group 04: Fault History

This group stores a recent history of the faults reported by the drive.
Code Description
0401 LAST FAULT
0 = Clear the fault history (on panel = NO RECORD).
n = Fault code of the last recorded fault.
0402 FAULT TIME 1
The day on which the last fault occurred.
The number of days after power on .
0403 FAULT TIME 2
The time at which the last fault occurred...
The time since power on (less the whole days reported in 0402), in format hh:mm:ss.
0404 SPEED AT FLT
The motor speed (rpm) at the time the last fault occurred.
0405 FREQ AT FLT
The frequency (Hz) at the time the last fault occurred.
0406 VOLTAGE AT FLT
The DC bus voltage (V) at the time the last fault occurred.
0407 CURRENT AT FLT
The motor current (A) at the time the last fault occurred.
0408 TORQUE AT FLT
The motor torque (%) at the time the last fault occurred.
0409 STATUS AT FLT
The drive status (hex code word) at the time the last fault occurred.
0410 DI 1-3 AT FLT
The status of digital inputs 1…3 at the time the last fault occurred.
0411 DI 4-6 AT FLT
The status of digital inputs 4…6 at the time the last fault occurred.
0412 PREVIOUS FAULT 1
Fault code of the second last fault. Read-only.
0413 PREVIOUS FAULT 2
Fault code of the third last fault. Read-only.
Start-Up
Group 10: Start/Stop/Dir

This group:
• Defines external sources (EXT1, and EXT2) for commands that enable start, stop
and direction changes.
• Locks direction or enables direction control.
To select between the two external locations use the next group (parameter 1102).
Code Description
1001 EXT1 COMMANDS
Defines external control location 1 (EXT1) – the configuration of start, stop and direction commands.
0 = NOT SEL – No external start, stop and direction command source.
1 = DI1 – Two-wire Start/Stop.
• Start/Stop is through digital input DI1 (DI1 activated = Start; DI1 de-activated = Stop).
• Parameter 1003 defines the direction. Selecting 1003 = 3 (REQUEST) is the same as 1003 = 1 (FWD).
2 = DI1, 2 – Two-wire Start/Stop, Direction.
• Direction control (requires parameter 1003 = 3 (REQUEST)) is through digital input DI2
(DI2 activated = Reverse; de-activated = Forward).
3 = DI1P, 2P – Three-wire Start/Stop.
• Start/Stop commands are through momentary push-buttons (the P stands for “pulse”).
• Start is through a normally open push-button connected to digital input DI1. In order to start the drive, the digital
input DI2 must be activated prior to the pulse in DI1.
• Connect multiple Start push-buttons in parallel.
• Stop is through a normally closed push-button connected to digital input DI2.
• Connect multiple Stop push-buttons in series.
4 = DI1P, 2P, 3 – Three-wire Start/Stop, Direction.
• Start/Stop commands are through momentary push-buttons, as described for DI1P, 2P.
• Direction control (requires parameter 1003 = 3 (REQUEST)) is through digital input DI3
5 = DI1P, 2P, 3P – Start Forward, Start Reverse, and Stop.
• Start and Direction commands are given simultaneously with two separate momentary push-buttons (the P stands
for “pulse”).
• Start Forward command is through a normally open push-button connected to digital input DI1. In order to start the
drive, the digital input DI3 must be activated prior to the pulse in DI1.
• Start Reverse command is through a normally open push-button connected to digital input DI2. In order to start
the drive, the digital input DI3 must be activated during the pulse in DI2.
• Connect multiple Start push-buttons in parallel.
• Stop is through a normally closed push-button connected to digital input DI3.
• Connect multiple Stop push-buttons in series.
• Requires parameter 1003 = 3 (REQUEST).
6 = DI6 – Two-wire Start/Stop.
7 = DI6, 5 – Two-wire Start/Stop/Direction.
• Direction control (requires parameter 1003 = 3 (REQUEST)) is through digital input DI5.
8 = KEYPAD – Control Panel.
• Start/Stop and Direction commands are through the control panel when EXT1 is active.
• Direction control requires parameter 1003 = 3 (REQUEST).
9 = DI1F, 2R – Start/Stop/Direction commands through DI1 and DI2 combinations.
• Start forward = DI1 activated and DI2 de-activated.
• Start reverse = DI1 de-activated and DI2 activated.
• Stop = both DI1 and DI2 activated, or both de-activated.
• Requires parameter 1003 = 3 (REQUEST).
10 = COMM – Assigns the fieldbus Command Word as the source for the start/stop and direction commands.
• Bits 0,1, 2 of Command Word 1 (parameter 0301) activates the start/stop and direction commands.
• See Fieldbus user’s manual for detailed instructions.
Start-Up
Code Description
1002 EXT2 COMMANDS
Defines external control location 2 (EXT2) – the configuration of start, stop and direction commands.
See parameter 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS above.
1003 DIRECTION
Defines the control of motor rotation direction.
1 = FORWARD – Rotation is fixed in the forward direction.
2 = REVERSE – Rotation is fixed in the reverse direction.
3 = REQUEST – Rotation direction can be changed on command.
Note! This parameter is not available in software option +N688 and +N689.
Start-Up
Group 11: Reference Select

This group defines:
• How the drive selects between command sources.
• Characteristics and sources for REF1 and REF2.
Code Description
1101 KEYPAD REF SEL
Selects the reference controlled in local control mode.
1 = REF1 (Hz) – Frequency reference as hertz.
2 = REF2 (%) – Reference as percentage.
1102 EXT1/EXT2 SEL
Defines the source for selecting between the two external control locations EXT1 or EXT2. Thus, defines the source for
Start/Stop/Direction commands and reference signals.
0 = EXT1 – Selects external control location 1 (EXT1).
• See parameter 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS for EXT1’s Start/Stop/Dir definitions.
• See parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT for EXT1’s reference definitions.
1 = DI1 – Assigns control to EXT1 or EXT2 based on the state of DI1 (DI1 activated = EXT2; DI1 de-activated = EXT1).
2…6 = DI2…DI6 – Assigns control to EXT1 or EXT2 based on the state of the selected digital input. See DI1 above.
7 = EXT2 – Selects external control location 2 (EXT2).
• See parameter 1002 EXT2 COMMANDS for EXT2’s Start/Stop/Dir definitions.
• See parameter 1106 REF2 SELECT for EXT2’s reference definitions.
8 = COMM – Assigns control of the drive via external control location EXT1 or EXT2 based on the fieldbus control word.
• Bit 5 of the Command Word 1 (parameter 0301) defines the active external control location (EXT1 or EXT2).
• See Fieldbus user’s manual for detailed instructions.
-1 = DI1(INV) – Assigns control to EXT1 or EXT2 based on the state of DI1 (DI1 activated = EXT1; DI1 de-activated =
EXT2).
-2…-6 = DI2(INV)…DI6(INV) – Assigns control to EXT1 or EXT2 based on the state of the selected digital input. See
DI1(INV) above.
1103 REF1 SELECT
EXT REF 1 MAX
Selects the signal source for external reference REF1.
0 = KEYPAD – Defines the control panel as the reference
source.
1 = AI1 – Defines analog input 1 (AI1) as the reference EXT REF 1 MIN
source.
2 = AI2 – Defines analog input 2 (AI2) as the reference - EXT REF 1 MIN
source. 10 V /
3 = AI1/JOYST – Defines analog input 1 (AI1), configured for 20 mA
joystick operation, as the reference source. - EXT REF 1 MAX
• The minimum input signal runs the drive at the maximum
reference in the reverse direction. Define the minimum 2 V / 4 mA
0 V / 0 mA
using parameter 1104. EXT REF 1 MIN
• The maximum input signal runs the drive at maximum -2 % +2 %
reference in the forward direction. Define the maximum - EXT REF 1 MIN
using parameter 1105.
• Requires parameter 1003=3 (REQUEST). Hysteresis 4 % of Full Scale
Warning! Because the low end of the reference range
commands full reverse operation, do not use 0 V as the lower end of the reference range. Doing so means that if
the control signal is lost (which is a 0 V input) the result is full reverse operation. Instead, use the following set-up
so that loss of the analog input triggers a fault, stopping the drive:
• Set parameter 1301 MINIMUM AI1 (1304 MINIMUM AI2) at 20% (2 V or 4 mA).
• Set parameter 3021 AI1 FAULT LIMIT to a value 5% or higher.
• Set parameter 3001 AI<MIN FUNCTION to 1 (FAULT).
4 = AI2/JOYST – Defines analog input 2 (AI2), configured for joystick operation, as the reference source.
• See above (AI1/JOYST) description.
Start-Up
5 = DI3U,4D(R) – Defines digital inputs as the frequency reference source (motor potentiometer control).
• Digital input DI3 increases the speed (the U stands for “up”).
• Digital input DI4 decreases the speed (the D stands for “down”).
• A Stop command resets the reference to zero (the R stands for “reset”).
• Parameter 2205 ACCELER TIME 2 controls the reference signal’s rate of change.
6 = DI3U,4D – Same as above (DI3U,4D(R)), except:
• A Stop command does not reset the reference to zero. The reference is stored.
• When the drive restarts, the motor ramps up (at the selected acceleration rate) to the stored reference.
7 = DI5U,6D – Same as above (DI3U,4D), except that DI5 and DI6 are the digital inputs used.
8 = COMM – Defines the fieldbus as the reference source.
9 = COMM+AI1 – Defines a fieldbus and analog input 1 (AI1) combination as the reference source. See Analog Input
Reference Correction below.
10 = COMM*AI1 – Defines a fieldbus and analog input 1 (AI1) combination as the reference source. See Analog Input
11 = DI3U, 4D(RNC) – Same as DI3U,4D(R) above, except that:
• Changing the control source (EXT1 to EXT2, EXT2 to EXT1, LOC to REM) does not copy the reference.
12 = DI3U,4D(NC) – Same as DI3U,4D above, except that:
13 = DI5U,6D(NC) – Same as DI5U,6D above, except that:
14 = AI1+AI2 – Defines an analog input 1 (AI1) and analog input 2 (AI2) combination as the reference source. See
Analog Input Reference Correction below.
15 = AI1*AI2 – Defines an analog input 1 (AI1) and analog input 2 (AI2) combination as the reference source. See
16 = AI1-AI2 – Defines an analog input 1 (AI1) and analog input 2 (AI2) combination as the reference source. See
17 = AI1/AI2 – Defines an analog input 1 (AI1) and analog input 2 (AI2) combination as the reference source. See
20 = KEYPAD(RNC) – Defines the control panel as the reference source. A stop command resets the reference to zero
(R stands for reset). Changing the control source (EXT1 to EXT2, EXT2 to EXT1) does not copy the reference.
21 = KEYPAD(NC) – Defines the control panel as the reference source. A stop command dose not reset the reference
to zero. The reference is stored. Changing the control source (EXT1 to EXT2, EXT2 to EXT1) does not copy the
reference.
Analog Input Reference Correction
Parameter values 9, 10, and 14…17 use the formula in the following table.
Value AI reference is calculated as following:
Setting
C+B C value + (B value - 50% of reference value)
C*B C value * (B value / 50% of reference value)
C-B (C value + 50% of reference value) - B value
C/B (C value * 50% of reference value) / B value
Where:
• C = Main Reference value 120
( = COMM for values 9, 10 and 17 (/)
= AI1 for values 14…17). 100
• B = Correcting reference
( = AI1 for values 9, 10 and 80
= AI2 for values 14…17). 9, 14 (+)
Example: 60
The figure shows the reference source curves for value 40 10, 15 (*)
settings 9, 10, and 14…17, where:
• C = 25%. 20
• P 4012 SETPOINT MIN = 0. 16 (-)
• P 4013 SETPOINT MAX = 0. 0
0 100% B
• B varies along the horizontal axis.
Start-Up
1104 REF1 MIN Ext ref

Sets the minimum for external reference 1.
• The minimum analog input signal (as a percent of
the full signal in volts or amps) corresponds to REF1 P 1105
MIN in Hz. (MAX)
• Parameter 1301 MINIMUM AI1 or 1304 MINIMUM AI2
sets the minimum analog input signal.
• These parameters (reference and analog min. and
max. settings) provide scale and offset adjustment
for the reference. P 1104 Analog
(MIN) input signal
1105 REF1 MAX
Sets the maximum for external reference 1. P 1301 P 1302
• The maximum analog input signal (as a percent of or 1304 or 1305
full the signal in volts or amps) corresponds to REF1
MAX in Hz.
• Parameter 1302 MAXIMUM AI1 or 1305 MAXIMUM AI2 Ext ref
sets the maximum analog input signal.
P 1104
(MIN)
P 1105
(MAX)
Analog
P 1301 P 1302 input signal

or 1304 or 1305
1106 REF2 SELECT
Selects the signal source for external reference REF2.
0…17 – Same as for parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT.
19 = PID1OUT – The reference is taken from the PID1 output. See Groups 40 and 41.
If PFC is used
19=PID1 REF2 LIMIT
SELECT MAX (1107, 1108) PFC
1…17 MIN (1107, 1108)
1107 REF2 MIN

Sets the minimum for external reference 2.
• The minimum analog input signal (in volts or amps) corresponds to REF2 MIN in %.
• Parameter 1301 MINIMUM AI1 or 1304 MINIMUM AI2 sets the minimum analog input signal.
• This parameter sets the minimum frequency reference.
• The value is a percentage of the:
– maximum frequency.
– maximum process reference
1108 REF2 MAX

Sets the maximum for external reference 2.
• The maximum analog input signal (in volts or amps) corresponds to REF2 MAX in Hz.
• Parameter 1302 MAXIMUM AI1 or 1305 MAXIMUM AI2 sets the maximum analog input signal.
• This parameter sets the maximum frequency reference.
• The value is a percentage of the:
– maximum frequency.
– maximum process reference
Start-Up
Group 12: Constant Speeds

This group defines a set of constant speeds. In general:
• You can program up to 7 constant speeds.
• Values must be positive (No negative speed values for constant speeds).
• Constant speed selections are ignored if:
– the process PID reference is followed, or
– the drive is in local control mode, or
– PFC (Pump-Fan Control) is active.
Note! Parameter 1208 CONST SPEED 7 acts also as a so-called fault speed which
may be activated if the control signal is lost. For example, see parameters 3001
AI<MIN FUNCTION, 3002 PANEL COMM ERROR and 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC.
Code Description
1201 CONST SPEED SEL
Defines the digital inputs used to select Constant Speeds. See general comments in introduction.
0 = NOT SEL – Disables the constant speed function.
1 = DI1 – Selects Constant Speed 1 with digital input DI1.
• Digital input activated = Constant Speed 1 activated.
2…6 = DI2…DI6 – Selects Constant Speed 1 with digital input DI2…DI6. See above.
7 = DI1,2 – Selects one of three Constant Speeds (1…3) using DI1 and DI2.
• Uses two digital inputs, as defined below (0 = DI de-activated, 1 = DI activated):
DI1 DI2 Function
0 0 No constant speed
1 0 Constant speed 1 (1202)
• Can be set up as a so-called fault speed, which is activated if the control signal is lost. Refer to parameter 3001
AI<MIN function and parameter 3002 PANEL COMM ERR.
• See above (DI1,2) for code.
12 = DI1,2,3 – Selects one of seven Constant Speeds (1…7) using DI1, DI2 and DI3.
• Uses three digital inputs, as defined below (0 = DI de-activated, 1 = DI activated):
DI1 DI2 DI3 Function
0 0 0 No constant speed
1 0 0 Constant speed 1 (1202)
Start-Up
Code Description
• See above (DI1,2,3) for code.
• See above (DI1,2,3) for code.
-1 = DI1(INV) – Selects Constant Speed 1 with digital input DI1.
• Inverse operation: Digital input de-activated = Constant Speed 1 activated.
-2…- 6 = DI2(INV)…DI6(INV) – Selects Constant Speed 1 with digital input. See above.
-7 = DI1,2(INV) – Selects one of three Constant Speeds (1…3) using DI1 and DI2.
• Inverse operation uses two digital inputs, as defined below (0 = DI de-activated, 1 = DI activated):
DI1 DI2 Function
1 1 No constant speed
• See above (DI1,2(INV)) for code.
-12 = DI1,2,3(INV) – Selects one of seven Constant Speeds (1…3) using DI1, DI2 and DI3.
• Inverse operation uses three digital inputs, as defined below (0 = DI de-activated, 1 = DI activated):
DI1 DI2 DI3 Function
1 1 1 No constant speed
• See above (DI1,2,3(INV)) for code.
• See above (DI1,2,3(INV)) for code.
1202 CONST SPEED 1
Sets value for Constant Speed 1.
• The range depend on software option type.
• Standare software: 0...500 HZ.
• +N688: 0...50 HZ.
• +N689: 0...55 HZ.
1203 CONST SPEED 2…CONST SPEED 7
… Each sets a value for a Constant Speed. See CONST SPEED 1 above.
1208
Start-Up
Group 13: Analog Inputs

This group defines the limits and the filtering for analog inputs.
Code Description
1301 MINIMUM AI1
Defines the minimum value of the analog input.
• Define value as a percent of the full analog signal range. See example below.
• The minimum analog input signal corresponds to 1104 REF1 MIN or 1107 REF2 MIN.
• MINIMUM AI cannot be greater than MAXIMUM AI.
• These parameters (reference and analog min. and max. settings) provide scale and offset adjustment for the
reference.
• See figure at parameter 1104.
Example. To set the minimum analog input value to 4 mA:
• Configure the analog input for 0…20 mA current signal.
• Calculate the minimum (4 mA) as a percent of full range (20 mA) = 4 mA / 20 mA * 100% = 20%
1302 MAXIMUM AI1
Defines the maximum value of the analog input.
• Define value as a percent of the full analog signal range.
• The maximum analog input signal corresponds to 1105 REF1 MAX or 1108 REF2 MAX.
• See figure at parameter 1104.
1303 FILTER AI1 Unfiltered signal
%
Defines the filter time constant for analog input 1 (AI1).
The filtered signal reaches 63% of a step change within the time
specified. 100
63
Filtered signal
t
Time constant
1304 MINIMUM AI2
Defines the minimum value of the analog input.
Please See parameter 1302 MINIMUM AI1.
1305 MAXIMUM AI2
Defines the maximum value of the analog input.
Please See parameter 1302 MINIMUM AI1.
1306 FILTER AI2
Defines the filter time constant for analog input 2 (AI2).
Please See parameter 1303 FILTER AI1.
Start-Up
Group 14: Relay Outputs

This group defines the condition that activates each of the relay outputs.
Code Description
1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1
Defines the event or condition that activates relay 1 – what relay output 1 means.
0 = NOT SEL – Relay is not used and is de-energized.
1 = READY – Energize relay when drive is ready to function. Requires:
• Run enable signal present.
• No faults exist.
• Supply voltage is within range.
• Emergency Stop command is not on.
2 = RUN – Energize relay when the drive is running.
3 = FAULT (-1) – Energize relay when power is applied. De-energizes when a fault occurs.
4 = FAULT – Energize relay when a fault is active.
5 = ALARM – Energize relay when an alarm is active.
6 = REVERSED – Energize relay when motor rotates in reverse direction.
7 = STARTED – Energize relay when drive receives a start command (even if Run Enable signal is not present). De-
energized relay when drive receives a stop command or a fault occurs.
8= SUPRV1 OVER – Energize relay when first supervised parameter (3201) exceeds the limit (3203).
• See "Group 32: Supervision" starting on page 104.
9 = SUPRV1 UNDER – Energize relay when first supervised parameter (3201) drops below the limit (3202).
10 = SUPRV2 OVER – Energize relay when second supervised parameter (3204) exceeds the limit (3206).
11 = SUPRV2 UNDER – Energize relay when second supervised parameter (3204) drops below the limit (3205).
12 = SUPRV3 OVER – Energize relay when second supervised parameter (3207) exceeds the limit (3209).
13 = SUPRV3 UNDER – Energize relay when second supervised parameter (3207) drops below the limit (3208).
14 = AT SET POINT – Energize relay when the output frequency is equal to the reference frequency.
15 = FAULT (RST) – Energize relay when the drive is in a fault condition and will reset after the programmed auto-reset
delay.
• See parameter 3103 delay time.
16 = FLT/ALARM – Energize relay when fault or alarm occurs.
17 = EXT CTRL – Energize relay when external control is selected.
18 = REF 2 SEL – Energize relay when EXT2 is selected.
19 = CONST FREQ – Energize relay when a constant speed is selected.
20 = REF LOSS – Energize relay when reference or active control place is lost.
21 = OVERCURRENT – Energize relay when an overcurrent alarm or fault occurs.
22 = OVERVOLTAGE – Energize relay when an overvoltage alarm or fault occurs.
23 = DRIVE TEMP – Energize relay when a drive overtemperature alarm or fault occurs.
24 = UNDERVOLTAGE – Energize relay when an undervoltage alarm or fault occurs.
25 = AI1 LOSS – Energize relay when AI1 signal is lost.
26 = AI2 LOSS – Energize relay when AI2 signal is lost.
27 = MOTOR TEMP – Energize relay when a motor overtemperature alarm or fault occurs.
28 = STALL – Energize relay when a stall alarm or fault exists.
29 = USER LOAD C – Energize relay when an user load curve alarm or fault occurs.
30 = PID SLEEP – Energize relay when the PID sleep function is active.
31 = PFC – Use relay to start/stop motor in PFC control (See Group 81: PFC Control).
• Use this option only when PFC control is used.
• Selection activated / deactivated when drive is not running.
32 = AUTOCHANGE – Energize relay when PFC autochange operation is performed.
• Use this option only when PFC control is used.
33 = FLUX READY – Energize relay when the motor is magnetized and able to supply nominal torque (motor has
reached nominal magnetizing).
34 = USER S2 – Energize relay when User Parameter Set 2 is active.
Start-Up
Code Description
35 = COMM – Energize relay based on input from fieldbus communication.
• Fieldbus writes binary code in parameter 0134 that can energize relay 1…relay 6 according to the following:
Par. 0134 Binary RO6 RO5 RO4 RO3 RO2 RO1
0 000000 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 000001 0 0 0 0 0 1
2 000010 0 0 0 0 1 0
3 000011 0 0 0 0 1 1
4 000100 0 0 0 1 0 0
5…62 … … … … … … …
63 111111 1 1 1 1 1 1
• 0 = De-energize relay, 1 = Energize relay.

36 = COMM(-1) – Energize relay based on input from fieldbus communication.
• Fieldbus writes binary code in parameter 0134 that can energize relay 1…relay 6 according to the following:
Par. 0134 Binary RO6 RO5 RO4 RO3 RO2 RO1
0 000000 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 000001 1 1 1 1 1 0
2 000010 1 1 1 1 0 1
3 000011 1 1 1 1 0 0
4 000100 1 1 1 0 1 1
5…62 … … … … … … …
63 111111 0 0 0 0 0 0
• 0 = De-energize relay, 1 = Energize relay.
45 = OVERRIDE – Energize relay when override mode is active.
46 = START DELAY – Energize relay when a start delay is active.
1402 RELAY OUTPUT 2
See 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1.
1403 RELAY OUTPUT 3
See 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1.
1404 RO 1 ON DELAY
Defines the switch-on delay for relay 1. Control event
On / off delays are ignored when relay output 1401 is set to PFC.
1405 RO 1 OFF DELAY
Relay status
Defines the switch-off delay for relay 1.
On / off delays are ignored when relay output 1401 is set to PFC. 1404 ON DELAY 1405 OFF DELAY
1406 RO 2 ON DELAY
Defines the switch-on delay for relay 2.
See RO 1 ON DELAY.
1407 RO 2 OFF DELAY
See RO 1 OFF DELAY.
1408 RO 3 ON DELAY
See RO 1 ON DELAY.
1409 RO 3 OFF DELAY
Switch-off delay for relay 3.
See RO 1 OFF DELAY.
Start-Up
Code Description
1410 RELAY OUTPUT 4…6
… Defines the event or condition that activates relay 4…6 – what relay output 4…6 means.
1412 See 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1.
1413 RO 4 ON DELAY
See RO 1 ON DELAY.
1414 RO 4 OFF DELAY
See RO 1 OFF DELAY.
1415 RO 5 ON DELAY
See RO 1 ON DELAY.
1416 RO 5 OFF DELAY
See RO 1 OFF DELAY.
1417 RO 6 ON DELAY
See RO 1 ON DELAY.
1418 RO 6 OFF DELAY
See RO 1 OFF DELAY.
Start-Up
Group 15: Analog Outputs

This group defines the drive’s analog (current signal) outputs. The drive’s analog
outputs can be:
• Any parameter of the Operating Data group (Group 01).
• Limited to programmable minimum and maximum values of output current.
• Scaled (and/or inverted) by defining the minimum and maximum values of the
source parameter (or content). Defining an maximum value (parameter 1503 or
1509) that is less than the content minimum value (parameter 1502 or 1508)
results in an inverted output.
• Filtered.
Code Description
1501 AO1 CONTENT SEL
Defines the content for analog output AO1.
99 = EXCITE PTC – Provides a current source for sensor type PTC. Output = 1.6 mA. See Group 35.
100 = EXCITE PT100 – Provides a current source for sensor type Pt100. Output = 9.1 mA. See Group 35.
101…145 – Output corresponds to a parameter in the Operating Data group (Group 01).
Parameter defined by value (value 102 = parameter 0102)
1502 AO1 CONTENT MIN AO (mA)
Sets the minimum content value. P 1505 /
• Content is the parameter selected by parameter 1501. P 1511
• Minimum value refers to the minimum content value that will be
converted to an analog output.
• These parameters (content and current min. and max. settings)
provide scale and offset adjustment for the output. See figure.
1503 AO1 CONTENT MAX P 1504 /
P 1510 AO CONTENT
Sets the maximum content value
• Content is the parameter selected by parameter 1501. P 1502 / 1508
• Maximum value refers to the maximum content value that will P 1503 / 1509
be converted to an analog output. AO (mA)
P 1505 /
1504 MINIMUM AO1 P 1511
Sets the minimum output current.
1505 MAXIMUM AO1
Sets the maximum output current.
1506 FILTER AO1
P 1504 /
Defines the filter time constant for AO1. P 1510
• The filtered signal reaches 63% of a step change within the time AO CONTENT
specified.
• See figure in parameter 1303. P 1502 / 1508
P 1503 / 1509
1507 AO2 CONTENT SEL
Defines the content for analog output AO2. See AO1 CONTENT above.
1508 AO2 CONTENT MIN
Sets the minimum content value. See AO1 CONTENT MIN above.
1509 AO2 CONTENT MAX
Sets the maximum content value. See AO1 CONTENT MAX above.
1510 MINIMUM AO2
Sets the minimum output current. See MINIMUM AO1 above.
1511 MAXIMUM AO2
Sets the maximum output current. See MAXIMUM AO1 above.
Start-Up
Code Description
1512 FILTER AO2
Defines the filter time constant for AO2. See FILTER AO1 above.
Start-Up
Group 16: System Controls

This group defines a variety of system level locks, resets and enables.
Code Description
1601 RUN ENABLE
Selects the source of the run enable signal.
0 = NOT SEL – Allows the drive to start without an external run enable signal.
1 = DI1 – Defines digital input DI1 as the run enable signal.
• This digital input must be activated for run enable.
• If the voltage drops and de-activates this digital input, the drive will coast to stop and not start until the run enable
signal resumes.
2…6 = DI2…DI6 – Defines digital input DI2…DI6 as the run enable signal.
• See DI1 above.
7 = COMM – Assigns the fieldbus Command Word as the source for the run enable signal.
• Bit 6 of the Command Word 1 (parameter 0301) activates the run disable signal.
• See fieldbus user’s manual for detailed instructions.
-1 = DI1(INV) – Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the run enable signal.
• This digital input must be de-activated for run enable.
• If this digital input activates, the drive will coast to stop and not start until the run enable signal resumes.
-2…-6 = DI2(INV)…DI6(INV) – Defines an inverted digital input DI2…DI6 as the run enable signal.
• See DI1(INV) above.
1602 PARAMETER LOCK
Determines if the control panel can change parameter values.
• This lock does not limit parameter changes made by macros.
• This lock does not limit parameter changes written by fieldbus inputs.
• This parameter value can be changed only if the correct pass code is entered. See parameter 1603, PASS CODE.
0 = LOCKED – You cannot use the control panel to change parameter values.
• The lock can be opened by entering the valid pass code to parameter 1603.
1 = OPEN – You can use the control panel to change parameter values.
2 = NOT SAVED – You can use the control panel to change parameter values, but they are not stored in permanent
memory.
• Set parameter 1607 PARAM SAVE to 1 (SAVE) to store changed parameter values to memory.
1603 PASS CODE
Entering the correct pass code allows you to change the parameter lock.
• See parameter 1602 above.
• The code 358 allows you to change the value of the parameter 1602 once.
• This entry reverts back to 0 automatically.
1604 FAULT RESET SEL
Selects the source for the fault reset signal. The signal resets the drive after a fault trip if the cause of the fault no
longer exists.
0 = KEYPAD – Defines the control panel as the only fault reset source.
• Fault reset is always possible with control panel.
1 = DI1 – Defines digital input DI1 as a fault reset source.
• Activating the digital input resets the drive.
2…6 = DI2…DI6 – Defines digital input DI2…DI6 as a fault reset source.
• See DI1 above.
7 = START/STOP – Defines the Stop command as a fault reset source.
• Do not use this option when fielbus communication provides the start, stop and direction commands.
8 = COMM – Defines the fieldbus as a fault reset source.
• The Command Word is supplied through fieldbus communication.
• The bit 4 of the Command Word 1 (parameter 0301) resets the drive.
-1 = DI1(INV) – Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as a fault reset source.
• De-activating the digital input resets the drive.
-2…-6 = DI2(INV)…DI6(INV) – Defines an inverted digital input DI2…DI6 as a fault reset source.
Start-Up
Code Description
1605 USER PAR SET CHG
Defines control for changing the user parameter set.
• See parameter 9902 (APPLIC MACRO).
• The drive must be stopped to change User Parameter Sets.
• During a change, the drive will not start.
Note: Always save the User Parameter Set after changing any parameter settings, or performing a motor
identification.
• Whenever the power is cycled, or parameter 9902 (APPLIC MACRO) is changed, the drive loads the last settings
saved. Any unsaved changes to a user parameter set are lost.
Note: The value of this parameter (1605) is not included in the User Parameter Sets, and does not change if User
Parameter Sets change.
Note: You can use a relay output to supervise the selection of User Parameter Set 2.
• See parameter 1401.
0 = NOT SEL – Defines the control panel (using parameter 9902) as the only control for changing User Parameter
Sets.
1 = DI1 – Defines digital input DI1 as a control for changing User Parameter Sets.
• The drive loads User Parameter Set 1 on the falling edge of the digital input.
• The drive loads User Parameter Set 2 on the rising edge of the digital input.
• The User Parameter Set changes only when the drive is stopped.
2…6 = DI2…DI6 – Defines digital input DI2…DI6 as a control for changing User Parameter Sets.
• See DI1 above.
-1 = DI1(INV) – Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as a control for changing User Parameter Sets.
• The drive loads User Parameter Set 1 on the rising edge of the digital input.
• The drive loads User Parameter Set 2 on the falling edge of the digital input.
• The User Parameter Set changes only when the drive is stopped.
-2…-6 = DI2(INV)…DI6(INV) – Defines an inverted digital input DI2…DI6 as a control for changing User Parameter Sets.
1606 LOCAL LOCK
Defines control for the use of the LOC mode. The LOC mode allows drive control from the control panel.
• When LOCAL LOCK is active, the control panel cannot change to LOC mode.
0 = NOT SEL – Disables the lock. The control panel can select LOC and control the drive.
1 = DI1 – Defines digital input DI1 as the control for setting the local lock.
• Activating the digital input locks out local control.
• De-activating the digital input enable the LOC selection.
2…6 = DI2…DI6 – Defines digital input DI2…DI6 as the control for setting the local lock.
• See DI1 above.
7 = ON – Sets the lock. The control panel cannot select LOC, and cannot control the drive.
8 = COMM – Defines bit 14 of the Command Word 1 as the control for setting the local lock.
• The Command Word is supplied through fieldbus communication.
• The Command Word is 0301.
-1 = DI1(INV) – Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the control for setting the local lock.
• De-activating the digital input locks out local control.
• Activating the digital input enable the LOC selection.
-2…-6 = DI2(INV)…DI6(INV) – Defines an inverted digital input DI2…DI6 as the control for setting the local lock.
1607 PARAM. SAVE
Saves all altered parameters to permanent memory.
• Parameters altered through a fieldbus are not automatically saved to permanent memory. To save, you must use
this parameter.
• If 1602 PARAMETER LOCK = 2 (NOT SAVED), parameters altered from the control panel are not saved. To save, you
must use this parameter.
• If 1602 PARAMETER LOCK = 1 (OPEN), parameters altered from the control panel are stored immediately to
permanent memory.
0 = DONE – Value changes automatically when all parameters are saved.
1 = SAVE – Saves altered parameters to permanent memory.
Start-Up
Code Description
1608 START ENABLE 1
Selects the source of the start enable 1 signal.
Note: Start enable functionality differs from the run enable functionality.
0 = NOT SEL – Allows the drive to start without an external start enable signal.
1 = DI1 – Defines digital input DI1 as the start enable 1 signal.
• This digital input must be activated for start enable 1 signal.
• If the voltage drops and de-activates this digital input, the drive will coast to stop and show alarm 2021 on the
panel display. The drive will not start until start enable 1 signal resumes.
2…6 = DI2…DI6 – Defines digital input DI2…DI6 as the start enable 1 signal.
• See DI1 above.
7 = COMM – Assigns the fieldbus Command Word as the source for the start enable 1 signal.
• Bit 2 of the Command word 2 (parameter 0302) activates the start disable 1 signal.
• See fieldbus user’s manual for detailed instructions.
(-1) = DI1(INV) – Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the start enable 1 signal.
(-2)…(-6) = DI2 (INV)…DI6(INV) – Defines an inverted digital input DI2…DI6 as the start enable 1 signal.
• See DI1 (INV) above.
Drive Started
START/STOP
COMMAND
(Par Group 10)
START ENABLE
SIGNAL
(Params.
1608 & 1609)
Relay Energized
Relay STARTED
De-energized RELAY STATUS
(Par Group 14)
Damper Open
Damper Damper
Closed Closed DAMPER
STATUS
Damper Damper
Opening Closing
Time Time
RUN ENABLE SIGNAL

from the damper end
switch when the
damper is fully opened.
(Parameter 1601)
MOTOR STATUS
Acceleration Deceleration
Time Time
(Par 2202) (Par 2203)
Start-Up
Code Description
1609 START ENABLE 2
Selects the source of the start enable 2 signal.
Note: Start enable functionality differs from the run enable functionality.
0 = NOT SEL – Allows the drive to start without an external start enable signal.
1 = DI1 – Defines digital input DI1 as the start enable 2 signal. This digital input must be activated for start enable 2
signal. If the voltage drops and de-activates this digital input, the drive will coast to stop and show alarm 2022 on
panel display. The drive will not start until start enable 2 signal resumes.
2…6 = DI2…DI6 – Defines digital input DI2…DI6 as the start enable 2 signal. See DI1 above.
7 = COMM – Assigns the fieldbus Command Word as the source for the start enable 2 signal. Bit 3 of the Command
word 2 (parameter 0302) activates the start disable 2 signal. See fieldbus user’s manual for detailed instructions.
(-1) = DI1(INV) – Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the start enable 2 signal.
(-2)…(-6) = DI2(INV)…DI6(INV) – Defines an inverted digital input DI2…DI6 as the start enable 2 signal.
1610 DISPLAY ALARMS
Controls the visibility of the following alarms:
• 2001, Overcurrent alarm
• 2002, Overvoltage alarm
• 2003, Undervoltage alarm
• 2009, Device overtemperature alarm
0 = NO – The above alarms are suppressed.
1 = YES – All of the above alarms are enabled.
Start-Up
Group 17: Override

This group defines the source for the override activation signal, the override speed/
frequency and pass code and how the override is enabled and disabled.
Warning! When override DI is activated, the normal control of the drive using the
panel or I/O interface is not possible. See the explanation below. Ensure this will not
cause any danger in the application. note also that the drive is out of the factory
warranty when it is in the overide mode.
When override DI is activated, the drive stops and then accelerates to the preset
speed or frequency. When the DI is deactivated the drive stops and reboots.
When override is active:
• Drive runs at preset speed
• Drive ignores all keypad commands
• Drive ignores all commands from communication links
• Drive ignores all digital inputs except override activation/deactivation.
• Drive displays alarm message “2020 OVERRIDE MODE”
Following faults are ignored:
3 DEVICE OVERTEMP
5 OVERLOAD
6 DC UNDERVOLT
7 AI1 LOSS
8 AI2 LOSS
9 MOTOR TEMP
10 PANEL LOSS
12 MOTOR STALL
14 EXTERNAL FLT 1
15 EXTERNAL FLT 2
17 UNDERLOAD
18 THERM FAIL
21 CURR MEAS
22 SUPPLY PHASE
28 SERIAL 1 ERR
29 EFB CONFIG FILE
30 FORCE TRIP
31 EFB 1
32 EFB 2
33 EFB 3
34 MOTOR PHASE
1001 PAR PFC REFNEG
1002 PAR PFC IOCONF
Start-Up
1003 PAR AI SCALE

1004 PAR AO SCALE
1006 PAR EXTROMISSING
1007 PAR FBUSMISSING
Commissioning the override mode:

1. Enter the parameters in all groups as needed, except group 17.
2. Select the digital input that will activate override mode P1701.
3. Enter the frequency reference for override mode, P1702.
4. Enter the pass code P1704 (358).
5. Enable the override mode P1705.
Changing the override parameters:

1. If override mode is already enabled, disable it:
• Enter the pass code P1704.
• Disable the override mode P1705.
2. If needed, load the override parameter set P9902.
3. Change the parameters as needed, except group 17.
4. Change the parameters in group 17 as needed:
• Digital input for override mode P1701.
• Frequency reference P1702.
5. Enter the pass code P1704.
6. Enable the override mode P1705. The drive replaces the override parameter set with
new values of all parameters.
Code Description
1701 OVERRIDE SEL
Selects the source of the override activation signal.
0 = NOT SEL - Override activation signal not selected.
1 = DI1 - Defines digital input DI1 as the override activation signal.
• This digital input must be activated for override activation signal.
2...6 = DI2...DI6 - Defines digital input DI2...DI6 as the override activation signal.
• See DI1 above.
(-1) = DI1(INV) - Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the override activation signal.
(-2)...(-6) = DI2 (INV)...DI6(INV) - Defines an inverted digital input DI2...DI6 as the override activation
signal.
1702 OVERRIDE FREQ
Defines a preset frequency for the override.
Start-Up
Code Description
1704 OVERRIDE PASS CODE
Entering the correct pass code unlocks parameter 1705 for one change.
• Enter the pass code always before changing the value of the parameter 1705.
• See parameter 1705 below.
• The pass code is 358.
• The entry reverts back to zero automatically.
1705 OVERRIDE ENABLE
Selects whether the override is enabled or disabled..
0 = OFF - Override disabled.
1 = ON - Override enabled.
2 = LOAD - Loads a previously saved Override Para set to be the active Para of the drive.
• When enabled, the drive stores the values of all parameters into an override parameter set (see
parameter 9902) and the parameters in Group 17 will be write protected (except parameter 1704). To
change the other parameters in the Group 17, override has to be disabled.
1706 OVERRIDE DIR
Selects the source of the override direction signal.
0 = FORWARD - Assigns foward as the override direction.
1 = DI1 - Defines digital input DI1 as the override direction signal.
• Activating the digital input selects the forward direction.
• De-activating the digital input selects the reverse direction.
2...6 = DI2...DI6 - Defines digital input DI1... DI6 as the override direction signal.
• See DI1 above.
7 = REVERSE - Assigns reverse as the override direction.
-1 = DI1( INV ) - Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the override direction signal.
• De-activating the digital input selects the forward direction.
• Activating the digital input selects the reverse direction.
-2...-6 = DI2 ( INV ) ...DI6 ( INV ) - Defines an inverted digital input DI1... DI6 as the override direction signal.
1707 OVERRIDE REF
Selects the source of the override reference.
1 = CONSTANT - Selects a preset frequency or speed for the override. The frequency value is defined by parameter
1702 OVERRIDE FREQ and the speed value by paremeter 1703 OVERRIDE SPEED.
2 = PID - The reference is taken from the PID output, see group 40 PROCESS PID SET1.
• Note：The following conditions must be met when using PID in the override mode:
• PID1 set point(parameter 4010 SET POINT SEL)can be either A1, A2 or INTERNAL.
• PID1 parameter set 1 must be active(parameter 4027 PID 1 PARAM SET = SET 1).
• Override direction (parameter 1706 OVERRIDE DIR)can be either 0 = FORWARD or 7 = REVERSE.
Start-Up
Group 20: Limits

This group defines minimum and maximum limits to follow in driving the motor –
frequency, current, etc.
Code Description
2003 MAX CURRENT
Defines the maximum output current (A) supplied by the drive to the motor.
2005 OVERVOLT CTRL
Sets the DC overvoltage controller on or off.
Fast braking of a high inertia load causes the DC bus voltage to rise to the overvoltage control limit. To prevent the
DC voltage from exceeding the trip limit, the overvoltage controller automatically decreases the braking torque by
increasing output frequency.
0 = DISABLE – Disables controller.
1 = ENABLE – Enables controller
Warning! If a braking chopper or a braking resistor is connected to the drive, this parameter value must be set to 0
to ensure proper operation of the chopper.
2006 UNDERVOLT CTRL
Sets the DC undervoltage controller on or off. When on:
• If the DC bus voltage drops due to loss of input power, the undervoltage controller decreases the motor speed in
order to keep the DC bus voltage above the lower limit.
• When the motor speed decreases, the inertia of the load causes regeneration back into the drive, keeping the DC
bus charged, and preventing an undervoltage trip.
• The DC undervoltage controller increases power loss ride-through on systems with a high inertia, such as a
centrifuge or a fan.
0 = DISABLE – Disables controller.
1 = ENABLE (TIME) – Enables controller with 500 ms time limit for operation.
2 = ENABLE – Enables controller without maximum time limit for operation.
2007 MINIMUM FREQ Freq 2007 value is< 0
Defines the minimum limit for the drive output frequency. P 2008
• A positive or zero minimum frequency value defines two
ranges, one positive and one negative.
• A negative minimum frequency value defines one speed range. Frequency range allowed
0 Time
See figure.
Note! Keep MINIMUM FREQ ≤ MAXIMUM FREQ.
P 2007
2008 MAXIMUM FREQ
Defines the maximum limit for the drive output frequency.
Freq 2007 value is > 0
P 2008
Frequency range allowed
P 2007
0 Time
-(P 2007)
Frequency range allowed
-(P 2008)
Start-Up
Group 21: Start/Stop

This group defines how the motor starts and stops. The ACS510 supports several
start and stop modes.
Code Description
2101 START FUNCTION
Selects the motor start method.
2 = DC MAGN – Selects the DC Magnetizing start mode.
Note! Mode cannot start a rotating motor.
Note! The drive starts when the set pre-magnetizing time (param. 2103) has passed, even if motor magnetization is
not complete.
• Magnetizes the motor within the time determined by the parameter 2103 DC MAGN TIME using DC current. The
normal control is released exactly after the magnetizing time.
3 = SCALAR FLYSTART – Selects the flying start mode.
• The drive automatically selects the correct output frequency to start a rotating motor – useful if the motor is
already rotating and if the drive will start smoothly at the current frequency.
4 = TORQ BOOST – Selects the automatic torque boost mode .
• May be necessary in drives with high starting torque.
• Torque boost is only applied at start, ending when output frequency exceeds 20 Hz or when output frequency is
equal to reference.
• In the beginning the motor magnetizes within the time determined by the parameter 2103 DC MAGN TIME using DC
current.
• See parameter 2110 TORQ BOOST CURR.
5 = FLYSTART + TORQ BOOST – Selects both the flying start and the torque boost mode .
• Flying start routine is performed first and the motor is magnetized. If the speed is found to be zero, the torque
boost is done.
8 = RAMP – Immediate start from zero frequency.
2102 STOP FUNCTION
Selects the motor stop method.
1 = COAST – Selects cutting off the motor power as the stop method. The motor coasts to stop.
2 = RAMP – Selects using a deceleration ramp
• Deceleration ramp is defined by 2203 DECELER TIME 1 or 2206 DECELER TIME 2 (whichever is active).
2103 DC MAGN TIME
Defines the pre-magnetizing time for the DC Magnetizing start mode.
• Use parameter 2101 to select the start mode.
• After the start command, the drive pre-magnetizes the motor for the time defined here, and then starts the motor.
• Set the pre-magnetizing time just long enough to allow full motor magnetization. Too long a time heats the motor
excessively.
2104 DC CURR CTL
Selects whether DC current is used for braking or DC Hold.
0 = NOT SEL – Disables the DC current operation.
2 = DC BRAKING – Enables the DC Injection Braking after modulation has stopped.
• If parameter 2102 STOP FUNCTION is 1 (COAST), braking is applied after start is removed.
• If parameter 2102 STOP FUNCTION is 2 (RAMP), braking is applied after ramp.
2106 DC CURR REF
Defines the DC current control reference as a percentage of parameter 9906 (MOTOR NOM CURR).
2107 DC BRAKE TIME
Defines the DC brake time after modulation has stopped, if parameter 2104 is 2 (DC BRAKING).
2108 START INHIBIT
Sets the Start inhibit function on or off. The Start inhibit function ignores a pending start command in any of the
following situations (a new start command is required):
• A fault is reset.
• Run Enable (parameter 1601) activates while start command is active.
• Mode changes from local to remote.
• Control switches from EXT1 to EXT2.
• Control switches from EXT2 to EXT1.
0 = OFF – Disables the Start inhibit function.
1 = ON – Enables the Start inhibit function.
Start-Up
Code Description
2109 EM STOP SEL
Defines control of the Emergency stop command. When activated:
• Emergency stop decelerates the motor using the emergency stop ramp (parameter 2208 EM DEC TIME).
• Requires an external stop command and removal of the emergency stop command before drive can restart.
0 = NOT SEL – Disables the Emergency stop function through digital inputs.
1 = DI1 – Defines digital input DI1 as the control for Emergency stop command.
• Activating the digital input issues an Emergency stop command.
• De-activating the digital input removes the Emergency stop command.
2…6 = DI2…DI6 – Defines digital input DI2…DI6 as the control for Emergency stop command.
• See DI1 above.
-1 = DI1(INV) – Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the control for Emergency stop command.
• De-activating the digital input issues an Emergency stop command.
• Activating the digital input removes the Emergency stop command.
-2…-6 = DI2(INV)…DI6(INV) – Defines an inverted digital input DI2…DI6 as the control for Emergency stop command.
2110 TORQ BOOST CURR
Sets the maximum supplied current during torque boost.
See parameter 2101 START FUNCTION.
2113 START DELAY
Defines the Start delay. After the conditions for start have been fulfilled, the drive waits until the delay has elapsed
and then starts the motor. Start delay can be used with all start modes.
• If START DELAY = ZERO, the delay is disabled.
Start-Up
Group 22: Accel/Decel

This group defines ramps that control the rate of acceleration and deceleration. You
define these ramps as a pair, one for acceleration and one for deceleration. You can
define two pairs of ramps and use a digital input to select one or the other pair.
Code Description
2201 ACC/DEC 1/2 SEL
Defines control for selection of acceleration/deceleration ramps.
• Ramps are defined in pairs, one each for acceleration and deceleration.
• See below for the ramp definition parameters.
0 = NOT SEL – Disables selection, the first ramp pair is used.
1 = DI1 – Defines digital input DI1 as the control for ramp pair selection.
• Activating the digital input selects ramp pair 2.
• De-activating the digital input selects ramp pair 1.
2…6 = DI2…DI6 – Defines digital input DI2…DI6 as the control for ramp pair selection.
• See DI1 above.
7 = COMM – Defines serial communication as the control for ramp pair selection.
-1 = DI1(INV) – Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the control for ramp pair selection.
• De-activating the digital input selects ramp pair 2
• Activating the digital input selects ramp pair 1.
-2…-6 = DI2(INV)…DI6(INV) – Defines an inverted digital input DI2…DI6 as the control for ramp pair selection.
2202 ACCELER TIME 1
MAX Linear
Sets the acceleration time for zero to maximum frequency for ramp pair 1. See A in FREQ
figure.
• Actual acceleration time also depends on 2204 RAMP SHAPE.
• See 2008 MAXIMUM FREQUENCY.
2203 DECELER TIME 1 B (=0)
Sets the deceleration time for maximum frequency to zero for ramp pair 1.
T
• Actual deceleration time also depends on 2204 RAMP SHAPE.
• See 2008 MAXIMUM FREQUENCY.
MAX S-curve
2204 RAMP SHAPE 1 FREQ
Selects the shape of the acceleration/deceleration ramp for ramp pair 1. See B in
figure.
• Shape is defined as a ramp, unless additional time is specified here to reach the
maximum frequency. A longer time provides a softer transition at each end of the
slope. The shape becomes an s-curve.
B
• Rule of thumb: 1/5 is a suitable relation between the ramp shape time and the T
acceleration ramp time. A
0.0 = LINEAR – Specifies linear acceleration/deceleration ramps for ramp pair 1.
A = 2202 ACCELERATION TIME
0.1…1000.0 = S-CURVE – Specifies s-curve acceleration/deceleration ramps for
ramp pair 1. B = 2204 RAMP SHAPE
2205 ACCELER TIME 2

Sets the acceleration time (s) for zero to maximum frequency for ramp pair 2. See 2202 ACCELER TIME 1.
2206 DECELER TIME 2
Sets the deceleration time for maximum frequency to zero for ramp pair 2. See 2203 DECELER TIME 1.
2207 RAMP SHAPE 2
Selects the shape of the acceleration/deceleration ramp for ramp pair 2. See 2204 RAMP SHAPE 1.
2208 EM DEC TIME
Sets the deceleration time for maximum frequency to zero for an emergency.
• See parameter 2109 EM STOP SEL.
• Ramp is linear.
Start-Up
Code Description
2209 RAMP INPUT ZERO
Defines control for forcing the ramp input to zero.
0 = NOT SEL
1 = DI1 – Defines digital input DI1 as the control for forcing the ramp input to zero.
• Activating the digital input forces ramp input to zero. Ramp output will ramp to zero according to the currently
used ramp time, after which it will stay at zero.
• De-activating the digital input: ramp resumes normal operation.
2…6 = DI2…DI6 – Defines digital input DI2…DI6 as the control for forcing the ramp input to zero.
• See DI1 above.
-1 = DI1(INV) – Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the control for forcing the ramp input to zero.
• De-activating the digital input forces ramp input to zero.
• Activating the digital input: ramp resumes normal operation.
-2…-6 = DI2(INV)…DI6(INV) – Defines an inverted digital input DI2…DI6 as the control for forcing the ramp function
generator input to zero.
Start-Up
Group 25: Critical Speeds

This group defines up to three critical speeds or ranges of speeds that are to be
avoided due, for example, to mechanical resonance problems at certain speeds.
Code Description
2501 CRIT SPEED SEL foutput
Sets the critical speeds function on or off. The critical speed
function avoids specific speed ranges.
0 = OFF – Disables the critical speeds function. 52
1 = ON – Enables the critical speeds function. 46
Example: To avoid speeds at which a fan system vibrates badly:
• Determine problem speed ranges. Assume they are found to 23
be: 18…23 Hz and 46…52 Hz. 18
• Set 2501 CRIT SPEED SEL = 1.
• Set 2502 CRIT SPEED 1 LO = 18 Hz.
• Set 2503 CRIT SPEED 1 HI = 23 Hz. fREF (Hz)
• Set 2504 CRIT SPEED 2 LO = 46 Hz. f1L f1H f2L f2H
• Set 2505 CRIT SPEED 2 HI = 52 Hz. 18 23 46 52
2502 CRIT SPEED 1 LO
Sets the minimum limit for critical speed range 1.
• The value must be less than or equal to 2503 CRIT SPEED 1 HI.
• Units are Hz.
2503 CRIT SPEED 1 HI
Sets the maximum limit for critical speed range 1.
• The value must be greater than or equal to 2502 CRIT SPEED 1 LO.
• Units are Hz.
See parameter 2502.
See parameter 2503.
See parameter 2502.
See parameter 2503.
Start-Up
Group 26: Motor Control
Code Description
2601 FLUX OPTIMIZATION
Changes the magnitude of the flux depending on the actual load. Flux Optimization can reduce the total energy
consumption and noise, and should be enabled for drives that usually operate below nominal load.
0 = Disables the feature.
1 = Enables the feature.
2602 FLUX BRAKING Braking
Provides faster deceleration by raising the level of Torque (%) Rated Motor Power
magnetization in the motor when needed, instead of 120% 1 2.2 kW
limiting the deceleration ramp. By increasing the flux in W/O Flux Braking
2 15 kW
the motor, the energy of the mechanical system is 3 37 kW
changed to thermal energy in the motor. 80 4 75 kW
0 = Disables the feature. 1 5 250 kW
1 = Enables the feature.
40 3
4
2 5
0
5 10 20 30 40 50
f (Hz)
120% With Flux Braking
80
1
40 2
4 3
5
0
5 10 20 30 40 50
f (Hz)
2603 IR COMP VOLT IR Compensation
Sets the IR compensation voltage used for 0 Hz. • When enabled, IR Compensation provides an extra
• Keep IR compensation as low as possible to prevent voltage boost to the motor at low speeds. Use IR
overheating. Compensation, for example, in applications that require a
• Typical IR compensation values are: high breakaway torque.
Motor
380…480 V Units Voltage
PN (kW) 3 7.5 15 37 132
A
IR comp (V) 18 15 12 8 3
A = IR Compensated
2604 IR COMP FREQ B = No compensation
P 2603
Sets the frequency at which IR compensation is 0 V (in
% of motor frequency). f (Hz)
B
P 2604
Start-Up
Code Description
2605 U/f RATIO
Selects the form for the U/f (voltage to frequency) ratio
below field weakening point. Motor
Voltage
1 = LINEAR – Preferred for constant torque applications. P2618
2 = SQUARE – Preferred for centrifugal pump and fan FW VOL
applications. (Square is more silent for most operating P2616
frequencies.) USER U4
3 = FREELY DEFINED - Freely defined by parameter P2614
USER U3
2610 ... 2618.
See figure.
P2612
USER U2
P2610
USER U1
P2603 f (Hz)
IP COMP
P2611 P2613 P2615 P2617 P9907
USER F1 F2 F3 F4 MOTOR
NOM FREQ
2606 SWITCHING FREQ

Sets the switching frequency for the drive. Also see parameter 2607 SW FREQ CTRL and "Switching Frequency
Derating" on page 212.
• Higher switching frequencies mean less noise.
• The 12 kHz switching frequency is available only on frame sizes R1…R6
2607 SW FREQ CTRL
The switching frequency may be reduced if the ACS510 internal temperature rises above a limit. See Figure. This
function allows the highest possible switching frequency to be used based on operating conditions. Higher switching
frequency results in lower acoustic noise.
0 = OFF – The function is disabled.
1 = ON – The switching frequency is limited according to the figure.
fsw
Limit R1…R6 Drives
12 kHz
8 kHz ACS510
Temperature
4 kHz
80 °C 90 °C 100 °C
2608 SLIP COMP RATIO
Sets gain for slip compensation (in %).
A squirrel-cage motor slips under load. Increasing the frequency as the motor torque increases compensates for the
slip.
0 = No slip compensation.
1…200 = Increasing slip compensation. 100% means full slip compensation.
2609 NOISE SMOOTHING
This parameter introduces a random component to the switching frequency. Noise smoothing distributes the acoustic
motor noise over a range of frequencies instead of a single tonal frequency resulting in lower peak noise intensity.
The random component has an average of 0 Hz and is added to the switching frequency set by parameter 2606
(SWITCHING FREQ). This parameter has no effect if parameter 2606 = 12 kHz.
0 = DISABLE
1 = ENABLE
2610 USER U1
This parameter define the output voltage reference (in Volts) at P2611 USER F1.
Please see parmeter 2605.
Start-Up
Code Description
2611 USER F1
Frequency(in Hz), at which output voltage reference is P2610 USER U1.
2612 USER U2
2613 USER F2
2614 USER U3
2615 USER F3
2616 USER U4
2617 USER F4
2618 FW VOLTAGE
Maximum output voltage of drive when the output frequency is controlled to level defined by parameter P9907
MOTOR NOM FREQ.
NOTE!
• The actual output voltage reference is the lower value of the values of parameters P9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT and
P2618 FW VOLTAGE.
• Requirements for parameters setting: P2618>P2616>P2614>P2612>P2610 and
P9907>P2617>P2615>P2613>P2611. If this not true, FAULT 1015 ( PAR USER DEFINED U/F ) is generated (only
when P2605 u/f RATIO = 3).
2619 DC STABILIZER
Enables or disables the DC voltage stabilizer. The DC stabilizer is used in scalar control mode to prevent possible
voltage oscillations in the drive DC bus caused by motor load or weak supply network. In case of voltage variation the
drive tunes the frequency reference to stabilize the DC bus voltage and therefore the load torque oscillation.
0 = DISABLE – Disables DC stabilizer.
1 = ENABLE – Enables DC stabilizer.
Start-Up
Group 30: Fault Functions

This group defines situations that the drive should recognize as potential faults and
defines how the drive should respond if the fault is detected.
Code Description
3001 AI<MIN FUNCTION
Defines the drive response if the analog input (AI) signal drops below the fault limits and AI is used in reference chain.
3021 AI1 FAULT LIMIT and 3022 AI2 FAULT LIMIT set the fault limits
0 = NOT SEL – No response.
1 = FAULT – Displays a fault (7, AI1 LOSS or 8, AI2 LOSS) and the drive coasts to stop.
2 = CONST SP7 – Displays a warning (2006, AI1 LOSS or 2007, AI2 LOSS) and sets speed using 1208 CONST SPEED 7.
3 = LAST SPEED – Displays a warning (2006, AI1 LOSS or 2007, AI2 LOSS) and sets speed using the last operating level.
This value is the average speed over the last 10 seconds.
Warning! If you select CONST SP7 or LAST SPEED, make sure that continued operation is safe when the analog input
signal is lost.
3002 PANEL COMM ERR
Defines the drive response to a control panel communication error.
1 = FAULT – Displays a fault (10, PANEL LOSS) and the drive coasts to stop.
2 = CONST SP7 – Displays a warning (2008, PANEL LOSS) and sets speed using 1208 CONST SPEED 7.
3 = LAST SPEED – Displays a warning (2008, PANEL LOSS) and sets speed using the last operating level. This value is
the average speed over the last 10 seconds.
Warning! If you select CONST SP7 or LAST SPEED, make sure that continued operation is safe when the control panel
communication is lost.
3003 EXTERNAL FAULT 1
Defines the External Fault 1 signal input and the drive response to an external fault.
0 = NOT SEL – External fault signal is not used.
1 = DI1 – Defines digital input DI1 as the external fault input.
• Activating the digital input indicates a fault. The drive displays a fault (14, EXT FAULT 1) and the drive coasts to
stop.
2…6 = DI2…DI6 – Defines digital input DI2…DI6 as the external fault input.
• See DI1 above.
-1 = DI1(INV) – Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the external fault input.
• De-activating the digital input indicates a fault. The drive displays a fault (14, EXT FAULT 1) and the drive coasts to
stop.
-2…-6 = DI2(INV)…DI6(INV) – Defines an inverted digital input DI2…DI6 as the external fault input.
3004 EXTERNAL FAULT 2
Defines the External Fault 2 signal input and the drive response to an external fault.
• See parameter 3003 above.
3005 MOT THERM PROT
Defines the drive response to motor overheating.
0 = NOT SEL – No response and/or motor thermal protection not set up.
1 = FAULT – When the calculated motor temperature exceeds 90 C, displays a warning (2010, MOT OVERTEMP). When
the calculated motor temperature exceeds 110 C, displays a fault (9, MOT OVERTEMP) and the drive coasts to stop.
2 = WARNING – When the calculated motor temperature exceeds 90 C, displays a warning (2010, MOT OVERTEMP).
3006 MOT THERM TIME Motor load
Sets the motor thermal time constant for the motor temperature
model.
• This is the time required for the motor to reach 63% of the final t
temperature with steady load.
• For thermal protection according to UL requirements for NEMA Temp. Rise
class motors, use the rule of thumb: MOTOR THERM TIME equals 100%
35 times t6, where t6 (in seconds) is specified by the motor 63%
manufacturer as the time that the motor can safely operate at six
times its rated current. t
• The thermal time for a Class 10 trip curve is 350 s, for a Class
}
P 3006
20 trip curve 700 s, and for a Class 30 trip curve 1050 s.
Start-Up
Code Description
3007 MOT LOAD CURVE Output current (%) relative
Sets the maximum allowable operating load of the motor. to 9906 MOTOR NOM CURR
• When set to 100%, the maximum allowable load is equal to the value
of Start-up Data parameter 9906 MOTOR NOM CURRENT. 150
• Adjust the load curve level if the ambient temperature differs from
nominal.
P 3007 100
3008 ZERO SPEED LOAD
Sets the maximum allowable current at zero speed.
P 3008 50
Value is relative to 9906 MOTOR NOM CURR.
3009 BREAK POINT FREQ Frequency
Sets the break point frequency for the motor load curve.
P 3009
Example: Thermal protection trip times when parameters 3005 MOT THERM TIME, 3006 MOT LOAD CURVE and 3007
ZERO SPEED LOAD have default values.
IO/IN A
3.5
3.0 60 s
IO = Output current
2.5 90 s IN = Nominal motor current
2.0 fO = Output frequency
180 s fBRK = Break point frequency
1.5 300 s A = Trip time
600 s
1.0 ∞
0.5
fO/fBRK
0
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2
3010 STALL FUNCTION
This parameter defines the operation of the Stall function. This
protection is active if the drive operates in the stall region (see figure)
for the time defined by 3012 STALL TIME.
0 = NOT SEL – Stall protection is not used.
Torque
1 = FAULT – When the drive operates in the stall region for the time set
by 3012 STALL TIME:
• The drive coasts to stop.
• A fault indication is displayed. Stall region
2 = WARNING – When the drive operates in the stall region for the time 95%
set by 3012 STALL TIME:
motor
• A warning indication is displayed.
normal
• The warning disappears when the drive is out of the stall region for
half the time set by parameter 3012 STALL TIME. load
3011 STALL FREQUENCY

f
This parameter sets the frequency value for the Stall function. Refer to
Figure. 3011
STALL FREQ HI
3012 STALL TIME
This parameter sets the time value for the Stall function.
3017 EARTH FAULT
Defines the drive response if the drive detects a ground fault in the motor or motor cables. The drive monitors for
ground faults while the drive is running, and while the drive is not running. Also see parameter 3023 WIRING FAULT.
0 = DISABLE – No drive response to ground faults.
1 = ENABLE – Ground faults display fault 16 (EARTH FAULT), and (if running) the drive coasts to stop.
Start-Up
Code Description
3018 COMM FAULT FUNC
Defines the drive response if the fieldbus communication is lost.
0 = NOT SEL – No response.
1 = FAULT – Displays a fault (28, SERIAL 1 ERR) and the drive coasts to stop.
2 = CONST SP7 – Displays a warning (2005, I/O COMM) and sets speed using 1208 CONST SPEED 7. This “alarm speed”
remains active until the fieldbus writes a new reference value.
3 = LAST SPEED – Displays a warning (2005, I/O COMM) and sets speed using the last operating level. This value is the
average speed over the last 10 seconds. This “alarm speed” remains active until the fieldbus writes a new
reference value.
Caution: If you select CONST SP7, or LAST SPEED, make sure that continued operation is safe when fieldbus
communication is lost.
3019 COMM FAULT TIME
Sets the communication fault time used with 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC.
Brief interruptions in the fieldbus communication are not treated as faults if they are less than the COMM FAULT TIME
value.
3021 AI1 FAULT LIMIT
Sets a fault level for analog input 1. See 3001 AI<MIN FUNCTION.
3022 AI2 FAULT LIMIT
Sets a fault level for analog input 2. See 3001 AI<MIN FUNCTION.
3023 WIRING FAULT
Defines the drive response to cross wiring faults and to ground faults detected when the drive is NOT running. When
the drive is not running it monitors for:
• Improper connections of input power to the drive output (the drive can display fault 35, OUTPUT WIRING if improper
connections are detected).
• Ground faults (the drive can display fault 16, EARTH FAULT if a ground fault is detected). Also, see parameter 3017
EARTH FAULT.
0 = DISABLE – No drive response to either of the above monitoring results.
1 = ENABLE – The drive displays faults when this monitoring detects problems.
3024 CB TEMP FAULT
Defines the drive response to control board overheating.
0 = DISABLE – No response
1 = ENABLE – Displays faults 37 (CB OVERTEMP) and the drive coasts to stop.
Start-Up
Group 31: Automatic Reset

This group defines conditions for automatic resets. An automatic reset occurs after a
particular fault is detected. The drive holds for a set delay time, then automatically
restarts. You can limit the number of resets in a specified time period, and you can
set up automatic resets for a variety of faults.
Code Description
3101 NR OF TRIALS Example: Three faults have occurred in
Sets the number of allowed automatic resets within a trial period defined the trial time. The last is reset only if the
by 3102 TRIAL TIME. value for 3101 NR OF TRIALS is 3 or more.
• If the number of automatic resets exceeds this limit (within the trial
time), the drive prevents additional automatic resets and remains Trial time
stopped. Time
• Starting then requires a successful reset performed from the control X X X
panel or from a source selected by 1604 FAULT RESET SEL.
3102 TRIAL TIME x = Automatic reset
Sets the time period used for counting and limiting the number of resets.
• See 3101 NR OF TRIALS.
3103 DELAY TIME
Sets the delay time between a fault detection and attempted drive restart.
If DELAY TIME = zero, the drive resets immediately.
3104 AR OVERCURRENT
Sets the automatic reset for the overcurrent function on or off.
0 = DISABLE – Disables automatic reset.
1 = ENABLE – Enables automatic reset.
• Automatically resets the fault (OVERCURRENT) after the delay set by 3103 DELAY TIME, and the drive resumes
normal operation.
3105 AR OVERVOLTAGE
Sets the automatic reset for the overvoltage function on or off.
• Automatically resets the fault (DC OVERVOLT) after the delay set by 3103 DELAY TIME, and the drive resumes
normal operation.
3106 AR UNDERVOLTAGE
Sets the automatic reset for the undervoltage function on or off.
• Automatically resets the fault (DC UNDERVOLTAGE) after the delay set by 3103 DELAY TIME, and the drive resumes
normal operation.
3107 AR AI<MIN
Sets the automatic reset for the analog input less than minimum value function on or off.
• Automatically resets the fault (AI<MIN) after the delay set by 3103 DELAY TIME, and the drive resumes normal
operation.
Warning! When the analog input signal is restored, the drive may restart, even after a long stop. Make sure that
automatic, long delayed starts will not cause physical injury and/or damage equipment.
3108 AR EXTERNAL FAULT
Sets the automatic reset for external faults function on or off.
• Automatically resets the fault (EXTERNAL FAULT 1 or EXTERNAL FAULT 2) after the delay set by 3103 DELAY TIME, and
the drive resumes normal operation.
Start-Up
Group 32: Supervision

This group defines supervision for up to three signals from Group 01, Operating
Data. Supervision monitors a specified parameter and energizes a relay output if the
parameter passes a defined limit. Use Group 14, Relay Outputs, to define the relay
and whether the relay activates when the signal is too low or too high.
Code Description
3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM
Selects the first supervised parameter.
• Must be a parameter number from Group 01 Operating
Data.
• If the supervised parameter passes a limit, a relay output is LO ≤ HI
energized. Note! Case LO ≤ HI represents a normal hysteresis.
• The supervision limits are defined in this group. Value of supervised parameter
• The relay outputs are defined in Group 14 Relay Outputs
(definition also specifies which supervision limit is HI (3203)
monitored). LO (3202)
LO ≤ HI
t
Operating data supervision using relay outputs, when LO≤HI.
• Case A = Parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 (or 1402 RELAY Case A
OUTPUT 2, etc.) value is SUPRV1 OVER or SUPRV 2 OVER.
Use for monitoring when/if the supervised signal exceeds a Energized (1)
given limit. The relay remains active until the supervised t
0
value drops below the low limit.
• Case B = Parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 (or 1402 RELAY Case B
OUTPUT 2, etc.) value is SUPRV 1 UNDER or SUPRV 2 UNDER. Energized (1)
Use for monitoring when/if the supervised signal falls t
below a given limit. The relay remains active until the 0
supervised value rises above the high limit.
LO > HI LO > HI
Operating data supervision using relay outputs, when LO>HI. Note! Case LO>HI represents a special hysteresis with
two separate supervision limits.
The lowest limit (HI 3203) is active initially, and remains
active until the supervised parameter goes above the highest Value of Supervised Parameter Active Limit
limit (LO 3202), making that limit the active limit. That limit
remains active until the supervised parameter goes below LO (3202)
the lowest limit (HI 3203), making that limit active.
• Case A = Parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 (or 1402 RELAY HI (3203)
OUTPUT 2, etc.) value is SUPRV1 OVER or SUPRV2 OVER. t
Initially the relay is de-energized. It is energized whenever
the supervised parameter goes above the active limit. Case A
• Case B = Parameter 1402 RELAY OUTPUT 1 (or 1402 RELAY Energized (1)
OUTPUT 2, etc.) value is SUPRV1 UNDER or SUPRV2 UNDER. t
Initially the relay is energized. It is de-energized whenever 0
the supervised parameter goes below the active limit. Case B
3202 SUPERV 1 LIM LO Energized (1)
Sets the low limit for the first supervised parameter. See t
3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM above. 0
3203 SUPERV 1 LIM HI
Sets the high limit for the first supervised parameter. See
3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM above.
3204 SUPERV 2 PARAM
Selects the second supervised parameter. See 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM above.
3205 SUPERV 2 LIM LO
Sets the low limit for the second supervised parameter. See 3204 SUPERV 2 PARAM above.
Sets the high limit for the second supervised parameter. See 3204 SUPERV 2 PARAM above.
3207 SUPERV 3 PARAM
Selects the third supervised parameter. See 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM above.
Start-Up
Code Description
3208 SUPERV 3 LIM LO
Sets the low limit for the third supervised parameter. See 3207 SUPERV 3 PARAM above.
Sets the high limit for the third supervised parameter. See 3207 SUPERV 3 PARAM above.
Start-Up
Group 33: Information

This group provides access to information about the drive’s current programs:
versions and test date.
Code Description
3301 FW VERSION
Contains the version of the drive’s firmware.
3302 LP VERSION
Contains the version of the loading package.
3303 TEST DATE
Contains the test date (yy.ww).
3304 DRIVE RATING
Indicates the drive’s current and voltage rating. The format is XXXY, where:
• XXX = The nominal current rating of the drive in amps. If present, an “A” indicates a decimal point in the rating for
the current. For example XXX = 9A4, indicates a nominal current rating of 9.4Amps.
• Y = The voltage rating of the drive, where Y = :
• 4 indicates a 380…480 Volt rating.
3305 PARAMETER TABLE
Contains the parameter table version of the drive’s firmware.
Start-Up
Group 34: Panel Display Process Variables

This group defines the content for control panel display (middle area), when the
control panel is in the output mode.
Code Description
3401 SIGNAL1 PARAM P 3404 P 3405
Selects the first parameter (by number) displayed on the control panel.
• Definitions in this group define display content when the control panel is in P 0137
the control mode.
• Any Group 01 parameter number can be selected. P 0138
• Using the following parameters, the display value can be scaled, converted
to convenient units, and/or displayed as a bar graph. P 0139
• The figure identifies selections made by parameters in this group.
100 = not selected – First parameter not displayed.
101…199 = Displays parameter 0101…0199. If parameter does not exist, the display shows “n.a.”
3402 SIGNAL1 MIN
Display
Defines the minimum expected value for the first display parameter. Value
Use parameters 3402, 3403, 3406, and 3407, for example to convert
a Group 01 parameter, such as 0102 SPEED (in rpm) to the speed of a P 3407
conveyor driven by the motor (in ft/min). For such a conversion, the
source values in the figure are the min. and max. motor speed, and
the display values are the corresponding min. and max. conveyor
speed. Use parameter 3405 to select the proper units for the display. P 3406
Note! Selecting units does not convert values.
3403 SIGNAL1 MAX P3402 P 3403
Defines the maximum expected value for the first display parameter. Source Value
3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM
3404 Value Display Range
Defines the decimal point location for the first display parameter.
0 +3 -32768…+32767
1…7 – Defines the decimal point location.
1 + 3.1 (Signed)
• Enter the number of digits desired to the right of the decimal
point. 2 + 3.14
• See table for example using pi (3.14159). 3 + 3.142
8 = BAR METER – Specifies a bar meter display. 4 3 0…65535
9 = DIRECT – Decimal point location and units of measure are 5 3.1 (Unsigned)
identical to the source signal. See Group 01 parameter listing in 6 3.14
“Complete Parameter List” for resolution (which indicates the
7 3.142
decimal point location) and the units of measure.
3405 OUTPUT1 UNIT
Selects the units used with the first display parameter.
0 = NOT SEL 9 = °C 18 = MWh 27 = ft 36 = l/s 45 = Pa 54 = lb/m 63 = Mrev

1=A 10 = lb ft 19 = m/s 28 = MGD 37 = l/min 46 = GPS 55 = lb/h 64 = d
2=V 11 = mA 20 = m3/h 29 = inHg 38 = l/h 47 = gal/s 56 = FPS 65 = inWC
3 = Hz 12 = mV 21 = dm3/s 30 = FPM 39 = m3/s 48 = gal/m 57 = ft/s 66 = m/min
4=% 13 = kW 22 = bar 31 = kb/s 40 = m3/m 49 = gal/h 58 = inH2O
5=s 14 = W 23 = kPa 32 = kHz 41 = kg/s 50 = ft3/s 59 = in wg
6=h 15 = kWh 24 = GPM 33 = Ohm 42 = kg/m 51 = ft3/m 60 = ft wg
7 = rpm 16 = °F 25 = PSI 34 = ppm 43 = kg/h 52 = ft3/h 61 = lbsi
8 = kh 17 = hp 26 = CFM 35 = pps 44 = mbar 53 = lb/s 62 = ms
117 = %ref 119 = %dev 121 = % SP 123 = Iout 125 = Fout 127 = Vdc
118 = %act 120 = %LD 122 = %FBK 124 = Vout 126 = Tout
3406 OUTPUT1 MIN

Sets the minimum value displayed for the first display parameter.
3407 OUTPUT1 MAX
Sets the maximum value displayed for the first display parameter.
Start-Up
Code Description
3408 SIGNAL 2 PARAM
Selects the second parameter (by number) displayed on the control panel. See parameter 3401.
3409 SIGNAL 2 MIN
Defines the minimum expected value for the second display parameter. See parameter 3402.
3410 SIGNAL 2 MAX
Defines the maximum expected value for the second display parameter. See parameter 3403.
3411 OUTPUT 2 DSP FORM
Defines the decimal point location for the second display parameter. See parameter 3404.
3412 OUTPUT 2 DSP UNIT
Selects the units used with the second display parameter. See parameter 3405.
3413 OUTPUT 2 MIN
Sets the minimum value displayed for the second display parameter. See parameter 3406.
3414 OUTPUT 2 MAX
Sets the maximum value displayed for the second display parameter. See parameter 3407.
3415 SIGNAL 3 PARAM
Selects the third parameter (by number) displayed on the control panel. See parameter 3401.
3416 SIGNAL 3 MIN
Defines the minimum expected value for the third display parameter. See parameter 3402.
3417 SIGNAL 3 MAX
Defines the maximum expected value for the third display parameter. See parameter 3403.
3418 OUTPUT 3 DSP FORM
Defines the decimal point location for the third display parameter. See parameter 3404.
3419 OUTPUT 3 DSP UNIT
Selects the units used with the third display parameter. See parameter 3405.
3420 OUTPUT 3 MIN
Sets the minimum value displayed for the third display parameter. See parameter 3406.
3421 OUTPUT 3 MAX
Sets the maximum value displayed for the third display parameter. See parameter 3407.
Start-Up
Group 35: Motor Temp Meas

This group defines the detection and reporting for a particular potential fault – motor
overheating, as detected by a temperature sensor. Typical connections are defined
below.
One Sensor
Three Sensors
AI1
AI1
Motor Motor AGND
AGND
T
T T T
AO1
AO1
AGND
AGND
10 nF
10 nF
Warning! IEC 60664 requires double or reinforced insulation between live parts and
the surface of accessible parts of electrical equipment which are either non-
conductive or conductive but not connected to the protective earth.
To fulfil this requirement, connect a thermistor (and other similar components) to the
drive’s control terminals using any of these alternatives:
• Separate the thermistor from live parts of the motor with double reinforced
insulation.
• Protect all circuits connected to the drive’s digital and analog inputs. Protect
against contact, and insulate from other low voltage circuits with basic insulation
(rated for the same voltage level as the drive’s main circuit).
• Use an external thermistor relay. The relay insulation must be rated for the same
voltage level as the drive’s main circuit.
The figure below shows alternate thermistor connections. At the motor end the cable
shield should be earthed through a 10 nF capacitor. If this is not possible, leave the
shield unconnected.
Thermistor Relay: Thermistor (0) or (1) Thermistor (0)
Thermistor
relay
OMIO board
OMIO board
DI6
+24 VDC DI6
+24 VDC
T 10 nF
T Motor
Motor
Start-Up
For other faults, or for anticipating motor overheating using a model, see Group 30:
Fault Functions.
Code Description
3501 SENSOR TYPE
Identifies the type of motor temperature sensor used, PT100 (°C) or PTC (ohms).
See parameters 1501 and 1507.
0 = NONE
1 = 1 x PT100 – Sensor configuration uses one PT 100 sensor.
• Analog output AO1 or AO2 feeds constant current through the sensor.
• The sensor resistance increases as the motor temperature rises, as does the voltage over the sensor.
• The temperature measurement function reads the voltage through analog input AI1 or AI2 and converts it to
degrees centigrade.
2 = 2 x PT100 – Sensor configuration uses two PT 100 sensors.
• Operation is the same as for above 1 x PT100.
3 = 3 x PT100 – Sensor configuration uses three PT 100 sensors. Ohm

• Operation is the same as for above 1 x PT100. 4000
4 = PTC – Sensor configuration uses PTC.
• The analog output feeds a constant current through the sensor. 1330
• The resistance of the sensor increases sharply as the motor
temperature rises over the PTC reference temperature (Tref), as does 550
the voltage over the resistor. The temperature measurement function
reads the voltage through analog input AI1 and converts it into ohms.
• The figure shows typical PTC sensor resistance values as a function of 100
the motor operating temperature.
Temperature Resistance
Normal 0 … 1.5 kohm T
Excessive > 4 kohm
5 = THERMISTOR (0) – Sensor configuration uses a thermistor.
• Motor thermal protection is activated through a digital input. Connect either a PTC sensor or a normally closed
thermistor relay to a digital input. The drive reads the digital input states as shown in the above table.
• When the digital input is ‘0’ the motor is overheated.
• See the figures in the introduction to this Group.
6 = THERMISTOR (1) – Sensor configuration uses a thermistor.
• Motor thermal protection is activated through a digital input. Connect a normally open thermistor relay to a digital
input. The drive reads the digital input states as shown in the above table.
• When the digital input is ‘1’ the motor is overheated.
• See the figures in the introduction to this Group.
3502 INPUT SELECTION
Defines the input used for the temperature sensor.
1 = AI1 – PT100 and PTC.
2 = AI2 – PT100 and PTC.
3…8 = DI1…DI6 – Thermistor
3503 ALARM LIMIT
Defines the alarm limit for motor temperature measurement.
At motor temperatures above this limit, the drive displays an alarm (2010, MOTOR OVERTEMP)
For thermistors:
0 = de-activated
1 = activated
3504 FAULT LIMIT
Defines the fault limit for motor temperature measurement.
At motor temperatures above this limit, the drive displays a fault (9, MOTOR OVERTEMP) and stops the drive.
For thermistors:
0 = de-activated
1 = activated
Start-Up
Group 37: User Adjustable Load Curves

This group defines supervision of user adjustable load curves (motor torque as a
function of frequency). The curve is defined by five points. -The function replaces
deleted underload parameters 3013...3015.
Code Description
3701 USER LOAD C MODE Motor torque (%)
Supervision mode for the user adjustable load
curves. This functionality replaces the former
underload supervision in Group 30: Fault Overload area
Functions.
0 = NOT SEL – Supervision is not active. P3706 P3709
P3712
1 = UNDERLOAD – Supervision for the torque P3718
P3715
dropping below the underload curve.
P3714 P3717
2 = OVERLOAD – Supervision for the torque
exceeding the overload curve.
3 = BOTH – Supervision for the torque dropping P3711
P3705
below the underload curve or exceeding the
overload curve. P3708 Underload area
P3704 P3707 P3710 P3713 P3716

Output frequency (Hz)
3702 USER LOAD C FUNC

Action wanted during load supervision.
1 = FAULT – A fault is generated when the condition defined by 3701 USER LOAD C MODE has been valid longer than the
time set by 3703 USER LOAD C TIME.
2 = ALARM – An alarm is generated when the condition defined by 3701 USER LOAD C MODE has been valid longer than
half of the time defined by 3703 USER LOAD C TIME.
3703 USER LOAD C TIME
Defines the time limit for generating a fault. Half of this time is used as the limit for generating an alarm.
3704 LOAD FREQ 1
Defines the frequency value of the first curve definition point. Must be smaller than 3707 LOAD FREQ 2.
3705 LOAD TORQ LOW 1
Defines the torque value of the first underload curve definition point. Must be smaller than 3706 LOAD TORQ HIGH 1.
3706 LOAD TORQ HIGE 1
Defines the torque value of the first overload curve definition point.
3707 LOAD FREQ 2
Defines the frequency value of the second curve definition point. Must be smaller than 3710 LOAD FREQ 3.
Defines the torque value of the second underload curve definition point. Must be smaller than 3709 LOAD TORQ HIGH 2.
Defines the torque value of the second overload curve definition point.
3710 LOAD FREQ 3
Defines the frequency value of the third load curve definition point.
Defines the torque value of the third underload curve definition point. Must be smaller than 3712 LOAD TORQ HIGH 3.
Defines the torque value of the third overload curve definition point.
3713 LOAD FREQ 4
Defines the frequency value of the fourth load curve definition point.
Defines the torque value of the fourth underload curve definition point. Must be smaller than 3715 LOAD TORQ HIGH 4.
Defines the torque value of the fourth overload curve definition point.
Start-Up
Code Description
3716 LOAD FREQ 5
Defines the frequency value of the fifth load curve definition point.
Defines the torque value of the fifth underload curve definition point. Must be smaller than 3718 LOAD TORQ HIGH 5.
Defines the torque value of the fifth overload curve definition point.
Start-Up

This group defines a set of parameters used with the Process PID (PID1) controller.
Typically only parameters in this group are needed.
PID Controller – Basic Set-up
In PID control mode, the drive compares a reference signal (setpoint) to an actual
signal (feedback), and automatically adjusts the speed of the drive to match the two
signals. The difference between the two signals is the error value.
Typically PID control mode is used, when the speed of a motor needs to be
controlled based on pressure, flow or temperature. In most cases – when there is
only 1 transducer signal wired to the ACS510 – only parameter group 40 is needed.
The following is a schematic of setpoint/feedback signal flow using parameter group
40.
Panel REF1 P1101
Panel REF 2 REF1

P1106
0…17 REF2
500% PID Setpoint
Panel REF2 19
-500%
AI P4016 G40
Current PID1 PANEL
Torque
Power Hand/Auto
Selection
AI P4017 P4014 P4015 HAND
Current
PID Act Value
Torque AUTO
Power
Panel REF 1 P1103 P1102

G12 P1104
DI Const P1105 EXT 1
AI Speed
Comm REF 1 EXT 2
Panel REF 2 P1106
G12
DI Const
AI Speed
Comm REF 2
P1106
Panel REF2 P4010 PID Setpoint 0…17 P1107
AI1 P4012
AI2 P1108
P4013 19
Comm
Internal G40
AI P4016 PID1
Current PID1 Out
Torque
Power P4014 P4015
AI P4017 PID Act Value
Current
Torque
Power
Note! In order to activate and use the PID controller Parameter 1106 must be set to
value 19.
Start-Up
PID Controller – Advanced

ACS510 has 2 separate PID Controllers:
• Process PID (PID1) and
• External PID (PID2)
Process PID (PID1) has 2 separate sets of parameters:
• Process PID (PID1) SET1, defined in Group 40 and
• Process PID (PID1) SET2, defined in Group 41
You can select between the 2 different sets by using parameter 4027.
Typically two different PID-Controller sets are used when the load of the motor
changes considerably from one situation to another.
You can use External PID (PID2), defined in Group 42, in 2 different ways:
• Instead of using additional PID-controller hardware, you can set outputs of the
ACS510 to control a field instrument like a damper or a valve. In this case, set
Parameter 4230 to value 0. (0 is the default value.)
• You can use External PID (PID2) as an additional PID-controller to Process PID
(PID1) to trim or fine-tune the speed of the ACS510.
Code Description
4001 GAIN
Defines the PID Controller’s gain.
• The setting range is 0.1… 100.
• At 0.1, the PID Controller output changes one-tenth as much as the error value.
• At 100, the PID Controller output changes one hundred times as much as the error value.
Use the proportional gain and integration time values to adjust the responsiveness of the system.
• A low value for proportional gain and a high value for integral time ensures stable operation, but provides sluggish
response.
If the proportional gain value is too large or the integral time too short, the system can become unstable.
Procedure:
• Initially, set:
• 4001 GAIN = 0.1.
• 4002 INTEGRATION TIME = 20 seconds.
• Start the system and see if it reaches the set point quickly while maintaining stable operation. If not, increase GAIN
(4001) until the actual signal (or drive speed) oscillates constantly. It may be necessary to start and stop the drive to
induce this oscillation.
• Reduce GAIN (4001) until the oscillation stops.
• Set GAIN (4001) to 0.4 to 0.6 times the above value.
• Decrease the INTEGRATION TIME (4002) until the feedback signal (or drive speed) oscillates constantly. It may be
necessary to start and stop the drive to induce this oscillation.
• Increase INTEGRATION TIME (4002) until the oscillation stops.
• Set INTEGRATION TIME (4002) to 1.15 to 1.5 times the above value.
• If the feedback signal contains high frequency noise, increase the value of Parameter 1303 FILTER AI1 or 1306
FILTER AI2 until the noise is filtered from the signal.
Start-Up
Code Description
4002 INTEGRATION TIME A
Defines the PID Controller’s integration time.
Integration time is, by definition, is the time required to increase B
the output by the error value: D (P 4001 = 10)
• Error value is constant and 100%.
• Gain = 1. C (P 4001 = 1)
• Integration time of 1 second denotes that a 100% change is
achieved in 1 second. t
0.0 = NOT SEL – Disables integration (I-part of controller).
0.1…3600.0 = Integration time (seconds). P 4002
See 4001 for adjustment procedure. A = Error
B = Error value step
C = Controller output with Gain = 1
D = Controller output with Gain = 10
4003 DERIVATION TIME Process Error Value
Error
Defines the PID Controller’s derivation time.
• You can add the derivative of the error to the PID controller 100%
output. The derivative is the error value’s rate of change. For
example, if the process error value changes linearly, the
derivative is a constant added to the PID controller output.
• The error-derivative is filtered with a 1-pole filter. The time
constant of the filter is defined by parameter 4004 PID DERIV
FILTER.
0.0 = NOT SEL – Disables the error-derivative part of the PID 0%
controller output t
0.1…10.0 = Derivation time (seconds)
PID output
D-part of controller output
Gain
P 401
t
P 4003
4004 PID DERIV FILTER

Defines the filter time constant for the error-derivative part of the PID controller output.
• Before being added to the PID controller output, the error-derivative is filtered with a 1-pole filter.
• Increasing the filter time smooths the error-derivative, reducing noise.
0.0 = NOT SEL – Disables the error-derivative filter.
0.1…10.0 = Filter time constant (seconds).
4005 ERROR VALUE INV
Selects either a normal or inverted relationship between the feedback signal and the drive speed.
0 = NO – Normal, a decrease in feedback signal increases drive speed. Error = Ref - Fbk
1 = YES – Inverted, a decrease in feedback signal decreases drive speed. Error = Fbk - Ref
4006 UNITS
Selects the unit for the PID controller actual values. (PID1 parameters 0128, 0130, and 0132).
See parameter 3405 for list of available units.
4007 UNIT SCALE
4007 Value Entry Display
Defines the decimal point location in PID controller actual values.
• Enter the decimal point location counting in from the right of the entry. 0 0003 3
• See table for example using pi (3.14159). 1 0031 3.1
2 0314 3.14
3 3142 3.142
Start-Up
Code Description
4008 0% VALUE Units (P4006)
Defines (together with the next parameter) the scaling applied to Scale (P4007) +1000%
the PID controller’s actual values (PID1 parameters 0128, 0130,
and 0132).
Units and scale are defined by parameters 4006 and 4007. P 4009
4009 100% VALUE
Defines (together with the previous parameter) the scaling applied
to the PID controller’s actual values. P 4008
Units and scale are defined by parameters 4006 and 4007.
0% 100%
-1000% Internal scale (%)
4010 SET POINT SEL
Defines the reference signal source for the PID controller.
• Parameter has no significance when the PID regulator is by-passed (see 8121 REG BYPASS CTRL).
0 = keypad – Control panel provides reference.
1 = AI1 – Analog input 1 provides reference.
2 = AI2 – Analog input 2 provides reference.
8 = comm – Fieldbus provides reference.
9 = COMM + AI1 – Defines a fieldbus and analog input 1 (AI1) combination as the reference source. See Analog Input
10 = COMM * AI1 – Defines a fieldbus and analog input 1 (AI1) combination as the reference source. See Analog Input
11 = DI3U, 4D(RNC) – Digital inputs, acting as a motor potentiometer control, provide reference.
• DI3 increases the speed (the U stands for “up”)
• DI4 decreases the reference (the D stands for “down”).
• Parameter 2205 ACCELER TIME 2 controls the reference signal’s rate of change.
• R = Stop command resets the reference to zero.
• NC = Reference value is not copied.
12 = DI3U, 4D(NC) – Same as DI3U, 4D(RNC) above, except:
• Stop command does not reset reference to zero. At restart the motor ramps up, at the selected acceleration rate,
to the stored reference.
13 = DI5U, 6D(NC) – Same as DI3U, 4D(NC) above, except:
• Uses digital inputs DI5 and DI6.
14 = AI1 + AI2 – Defines an analog input 1 (AI1) and analog input 2 (AI2) combination as the reference source. See
15 = AI1 * AI2 – Defines an analog input 1 (AI1) and analog input 2 (AI2) combination as the reference source. See
16 = AI1 - AI2 – Defines an analog input 1 (AI1) and analog input 2 (AI2) combination as the reference source. See
17 = AI1/AI2 – Defines an analog input 1 (AI1) and analog input 2 (AI2) combination as the reference source. See
19 = INTERNAL – A constant value set using parameter 4011 provides reference.
Start-Up
Code Description
Analog Input Reference Correction
Parameter values 9, 10, and 14…17 use the formula in the following table.
Value Setting AI reference is calculated as following:
C+B C value + (B value - 50% of reference value)

C*B C value * (B value / 50% of reference value)
C-B (C value + 50% of reference value) - B value
C/B (C value * 50% of reference value) / B value
Where:
• C = Main Reference value
( = COMM for values 9, 10 and 120
= AI1 for values 14…17). 17 (/)
• B = Correcting reference 100
( = AI1 for values 9, 10 and
= AI2 for values 14…17). 80
Example:
The figure shows the reference source curves for 9, 14 (+)
value settings 9, 10, and 14…17, where: 60
• C = 25%.
• P 4012 SETPOINT MIN = 0. 40 10, 15 (*)
• P 4013 SETPOINT MAX = 0.
• B varies along the horizontal axis. 20
16 (-)
0
0 100% B
4011 INTERNAL SETPNT
Sets a constant value used for the process reference.
Units and scale are defined by parameters 4006 and 4007.
4012 SETPOINT MIN
Sets the minimum value for the reference signal source. See parameter 4010.
4013 SETPOINT MAX
Sets the maximum value for the reference signal source. See parameter 4010.
4014 FBK SEL
Defines the PID controller feedback (actual signal).
• You can define a combination of two actual values (ACT1 and ACT2) as the feedback signal.
• Use parameter 4016 to define the source for actual value 1 (ACT1).
• Use parameter 4017 to define the source for actual value 2 (ACT2).
1 = ACT1 – Actual value 1 (ACT1) provides the feedback signal.
2 = ACT1-ACT2 – ACT1 minus ACT2 provides the feedback signal.
3 = ACT1+ACT2 – ACT1 plus ACT2 provides the feedback signal.
4 = ACT1*ACT2 – ACT1 times ACT2 provides the feedback signal.
5 = ACT1/ACT2 – ACT1 divided by ACT2 provides the feedback signal.
6 = MIN (A1, A2) – The smaller of ACT1 or ACT2 provides the feedback signal.
7 = MAX (A1, A2) – The greater of ACT1 or ACT2 provides the feedback signal.
8 = SQRT (A1-A2) – Square root of the value for ACT1 minus ACT2 provides the feedback signal.
9 = SQA1 + SQA2 – Square root of ACT1 plus the square root of ACT2 provides the feedback signal.
10 = SQRT (ACT1) – Square root of ACT1 provides the feedback signal.
11 = COMM FBK 1 – Signal 0158 PID COMM VALUE 1 provides the feedback signal.
12 = COMM FBK 2 – Signal 0159 PID COMM VALUE 2 provides the feedback signal.
13 = AVE (ACT1, 2) – The average fo ACT1 and ACT2 provides the feedback signal.
4015 FBK MULTIPLIER
Defines an extra multiplier for the PID FBK value defined by parameter 4014.
Used mainly in applications where the flow is calculated from the pressure difference.
0 = NOT USED.
-32.768…32.767 = Multiplier applied to the signal defined by parameter 4014 FBK SEL.
Example: FBK = Multiplier × A1 – A2
Start-Up
Code Description
4016 ACT1 INPUT
Defines the source for actual value 1 (ACT1).
1= AI 1 – Uses analog input 1 for ACT1.
3= Current – Uses current for ACT1, scaled so:
• Min ACT1 = 0 current
• Max ACT1 = 2 x nominal current
4= Torque – Uses torque for ACT1, scaled so:
• Min ACT1 = -2 x nominal torque
• Max ACT1 = 2 x nominal torque
5= Power – Uses power for ACT1, scaled so:
• Min ACT1 = -2 x nominal power
• Max ACT1 = 2 x nominal power
6 = COMM ACT 1 – Uses value of signal 0158 PID COMM VALUE 1 for ACT1.
4017 ACT2 INPUT
Defines the source for actual value 2 (ACT2).
3= Current – Uses current for ACT2, scaled so:
• Min ACT2 = 0 current
• Max ACT2 = 2 x nominal current
4= Torque – Uses torque for ACT2, scaled so:
• Min ACT2 = -2 x nominal torque
• Max ACT2 = 2 x nominal torque
5= Power – Uses power for ACT2, scaled so:
• Min ACT2 = -2 x nominal power
• Max ACT2 = 2 x nominal power
4018 ACT1 MINIMUM
ACT1 (%) A
Sets the minimum value for ACT1.
• Used with analog input min/max settings (e.g. 1301 MINIMUM AI1, P 4019
1302 MAXIMUM AI1).
• Scales analog inputs used as actual values.
• See figure: A= Normal; B = Inversion (ACT1 MINIMUM > ACT1
MAXIMUM) P 4018
4019 ACT1 MAXIMUM
Sets the maximum value for ACT1. P 1301 P 1302
See 4018 ACT1 MINIMUM. Analog input signal
4020 ACT2 MINIMUM
ACT1 (%) B
Sets the minimum value for ACT2.
See 4018 ACT1 MINIMUM. P 4018
4021 ACT2 MAXIMUM
Sets the maximum value for ACT2.
See 4018 ACT1 MINIMUM.
P 4019
P 1301 P 1302
Analog input signal
Start-Up
Code Description
4022 SLEEP SELECTION
Defines the control for the PID sleep function.
0 = NOT SEL– Disables the PID sleep control function.
1 = DI1 – Defines digital input DI1 as the control for the PID sleep function.
• Activating the digital input activates the sleep function.
• De-activating the digital input restores PID control.
2…6 = DI2…DI6 – Defines digital input DI2…DI6 as the control for the PID sleep function.
• See DI1 above.
7 = INTERNAL – Defines the output frequency, process reference, and process actual value as the control for the PID
sleep function. Refer to parameters 4025 WAKE-UP DEV and 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL.
-1 = DI1(INV) – Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the control for the PID sleep function.
• De-activating the digital input activates the sleep function.
• Activating the digital input restores PID control.
-2…-6 = DI2(INV)…DI6(INV) – Defines an inverted digital input DI2…DI6 as the control for the PID sleep function.
4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL A
t < P 4024
Sets the motor speed / frequency that enables the PID sleep
function – a motor speed / frequency below this level, for at least t > P 4024
the time period 4024 PID SLEEP DELAY enables the PID sleep
function (stopping the drive). P 4023
• Requires 4022 = 7 INTERNAL. t
• See figure: A = PID output level; B = PID process feedback.
4024 PID SLEEP DELAY B
Sets the time delay for the PID sleep function – a motor speed / P 4026
frequency below 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL for at least this time period Setpoint
enables the PID sleep function (stopping the drive). P 4025
See 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL above. t
4025 WAKE-UP DEVIATION Stop
Defines the wake-up deviation – a deviation from the setpoint Start
greater than this value, for at least the time period 4026 WAKE-UP
DELAY, re-starts the PID controller.
C
• Parameters 4006 and 4007 define the units and scale.
• Parameter 4005 = 0,
Setpoint
P 4025 }4005 = 1
Wake-up level = Setpoint - Wake-up deviation.
• Parameter 4005 = 1, P 4025 }4005
D
=0
Wake-up level = Setpoint + Wake-up deviation. t
• Wake-up level can be above or below setpoint.
See figures:
• C = Wake-up level when parameter 4005 = 1
• D = Wake-up level when parameter 4005 = 0 E
• E = Feedback is above wake-up level and lasts longer than 4026
WAKE-UP DELAY – PID function wakes up.
C
• F = Feedback is below wake-up level and lasts longer than 4026 P 4025
WAKE-UP DELAY – PID function wakes up. P 4026
Setpoint
4026 WAKE-UP DELAY P 4025
Defines the wake-up delay – a deviation from the setpoint greater D
than 4025 WAKE-UP DEVIATION, for at least this time period, re-starts t
the PID controller.
P 4026
F
Start-Up
Code Description
4027 PID 1 PARAM SET
Defines how selections are made between PID Set 1 and PID Set 2.
PID parameter set selection. When set 1 is selected, parameters 4001…4026 are used.
When set 2 is selected, parameters 4101…4126 are used.
0 = SET 1 – PID Set 1 (parameters 4001…4026) is active.
1 = DI1 – Defines digital input DI1 as the control for PID Set selection.
• Activating the digital input selects PID Set 2.
• De-activating the digital input selects PID Set 1.
2…6 = DI2…DI6 – Defines digital input DI2…DI6 as the control for PID Set selection.
• See DI1 above.
7 = SET 2 – PID Set 2 (parameters 4101…4126) is active.
-1 = DI1(INV) – Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the control for PID Set selection.
• Activating the digital input selects PID Set 1.
• De-activating the digital input selects PID Set 2.
-2…-6 = DI2(INV)…DI6(INV) – Defines an inverted digital input DI2…DI6 as the control for PID Set selection.
Start-Up

Parameters of this group belong to PID parameter set 2. The operation of
parameters 4101…4126 is analogous with set 1 parameters 4001…4026.
PID parameter set 2 can be selected by parameter 4027 PID 1 PARAM SET.
Code Description
4101 See 4001 …4026
…
4126
Start-Up
Group 42: External / Trimming PID

This group defines the parameters used for the second PID controller (PID2), which
is used for the External / Trimming PID.
The operation of parameters 4201…4221 is analogous with Process PID set 1
(PID1) parameters 4001…4021.
Code Description
4201 See 4001 …4021
…
4221
4228 ACTIVATE
Defines the source for enabling the external PID function.
• Requires 4230 TRIM MODE = 0 NOT SEL.
0 = NOT SEL – Disables external PID control.
1 = DI1 – Defines digital input DI1 as the control for enabling external PID control.
• Activating the digital input enables external PID control.
• De-activating the digital input disables external PID control.
2…6 = DI2…DI6 – Defines digital input DI2…DI6 as the control for enabling external PID control.
• See DI1 above.
7 = DRIVE RUN – Defines the start command as the control for enabling external PID control.
• Activating the start command (drive is running) enables external PID control.
8 = ON – Defines the power-on as the control for enabling external PID control.
• Activating power to the drive enables external PID control.
-1 = DI1(INV) – Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the control for enabling external PID control.
• Activating the digital input disables external PID control.
• De-activating the digital input enables external PID control.
-2…-6 = DI2(INV)…DI6(INV) – Defines an inverted digital input DI2…DI6 as the control for enabling external PID control.
4229 OFFSET
Defines the offset for the PID output.
• When PID is activated, output starts from this value.
• When PID is deactivated, output resets to this value.
• Parameter is active when 4230 TRIM MODE = 0 (trim mode is not active).
4230 TRIM MODE
Selects the type of trim, if any. Using the trim it is possible to combine a corrective factor to the drive reference.
0 = NOT SEL – Disables the trim function.
1 = PROPORTIONAL – Adds a trim factor that is proportional to the Hz reference.
2 = DIRECT – Adds a trim factor based on the control loop’s maximum limit.
4231 TRIM SCALE
Defines the multiplier (as a percent, plus or minus) used in the trim mode.
Start-Up
Code Description
4232 CORRECTION SRC
Defines the trimming reference for the correction source.
1 = PID2 REF – Uses appropriate REF MAX (SWITCH A OR B):
• 1105 REF 1 MAX when REF1 is active (A).
• 1108 REF 2 MAX when REF2 is active (B).
2 = PID2 OUTPUT – Uses the absolute maximum speed or frequency (Switch C):
• 2008 MAXIMUM FREQUENCY.
Add
Ramped ref
Trimmed ref
Switch Select
(par. 4230) trim scale Mul. Mul. +
Ext ref 1 max (A) off X

X
Ext ref 2 max (B) propor.
Abs Max Speed direct Select
Freq (C) (par. 4232)
Trimming PID2 ref
PID2 ref PID 2 Trimming PID2 out
Start-Up
Group 51: Ext Comm Module

This group defines set-up variables for a fieldbus adapter (FBA) communication
module. For more information on these parameters, refer to the user’s manual
supplied with the FBA module.
Code Description
5101 FBA TYPE
Displays the type of the connected fieldbus adapter module.
0 = NOT DEFINED – Module not found, or not properly connected, or parameter 9802 is not set to 4 (EXT FBA).
1 = PROFIBUS-DP –
16 = INTERBUS –
21 = LONWORKS –
32 = CANOPEN –
37 = DEVICENET –
64 = MODBUS PLUS –
101 = CONTROLNET –
5102 FB PAR 2…FB PAR 26
… Refer to communication module documentation for more information on these parameters.
5126
5127 FBA PAR REFRESH
Validates any changed fieldbus parameter settings.
0 = DONE – Refreshing done.
1 = REFRESH – Refreshing.
• After refreshing, the value reverts automatically to DONE.
5128 FILE CPI FW REV
Displays the CPI firmware revision of the drive’s fieldbus adapter configuration file. Format is xyz where:
• x = major revision number
• y = minor revision number
• z = correction number
Example: 107 = revision 1.07
5129 FILE CONFIG ID
Displays the revision of the drive’s fieldbus adapter module’s configuration file identification.
File configuration information is drive application program-dependent.
5130 FILE CONFIG REV
Contains the revision of the drive’s fieldbus adapter module configuration file.
Example: 1 = revision 1
5131 FBA STATUS
Contains the status of the adapter module.
0 = IDLE – Adapter not configured.
1 = EXEC. INIT – Adapter is initializing.
2 = TIME OUT – A timeout has occurred in the communication between the adapter and the drive.
3 = CONFIG ERROR – Adapter configuration error.
• The revision code of the adapter’s CPI firmware revision is older than required CPI firmware version defined in
the drive’s configuration file (parameter 5132 < 5128).
4 = OFF-LINE – Adapter is off-line.
5 = ON-LINE – Adapter is on-line.
6 = RESET – Adapter is performing a hardware reset.
5132 FBA CPI FW REV
Contains the revision of the module’s CPI program. Format is xyz where:
• x = major revision number
• y = minor revision number
• z = correction number
Example: 107 = revision 1.07
5133 FBA APPL FW REV
Contains the revision of the module’s application program Format is xyz (see parametrer 5132).
Start-Up
Group 53: EFB Protocol

This group defines set-up variables used for an embedded fieldbus (EFB)
communication protocol. The standard EFB protocol in the ACS510 is Modbus. See
"Embedded Fieldbus" starting on page 143.
Code Description
5301 EFB PROTOCOL ID
Contains the identification and program revision of the protocol.
Format: XXYY, where xx = protocol ID, and YY = program revision.
5302 EFB STATION ID
Defines the node address of the RS485 link.
The node address on each unit must be unique.
5303 EFB BAUD RATE
Defines the communication speed of the RS485 link in kbits per second (kbits/s).
1.2 kbits/s
2.4 kbits/s
4.8 kbits/s
9.6 kbits/s
19.2 kbits/s
38.4 kbits/s
57.6 kbits/s
76.8 kbits/s
5304 EFB PARITY
Defines the data length, parity and stop bits to be used with the RS485 link communication.
The same settings must be used in all on-line stations.
0 = 8N1 – 8 data bits, No parity, one stop bit.
1 = 8N2 – 8 data bits, No parity, two stop bits.
2 = 8E1 – 8 data bits, Even parity, one stop bit.
3 = 8O1 – 8 data bits, Odd parity, one stop bit.
5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE
Selects the communication profile used by the EFB protocol.
0 = ABB DRV LIM – Operation of Control/Status Words conforms to ABB Drives Profile, as used in ACS400.
1 = DCU PROFILE – Operation of Control/Status Words conforms to 32-bit DCU Profile.
2 = ABB DRV FULL – Operation of Control/Status Words conforms to ABB Drives Profile, as used in ACS600/800.
5306 EFB OK MESSAGES
Contains a count of valid messages received by the drive.
During normal operation, this counter is increasing constantly.
5307 EFB CRC ERRORS
Contains a count of the messages with a CRC error received by the drive. For high counts, check:
• Ambient electro-magnetic noise levels – high noise levels generate errors.
• CRC calculations for possible errors.
5308 EFB UART ERRORS
Contains a count of the messages with a character error received by the drive.
5309 EFB STATUS
Contains the status of the EFB protocol.
0 = IDLE – EFB protocol is configured, but not receiving any messages.
1 = EXEC. INIT – EFB protocol is initializing.
2 = TIME OUT – A timeout has occurred in the communication between the network master and the EFB protocol.
3 = CONFIG ERROR – EFB protocol has a configuration error.
4 = OFF-LINE – EFB protocol is receiving messages that are NOT addressed to this drive.
5 = ON-LINE – EFB protocol is receiving messages that are addressed to this drive.
6 = RESET – EFB protocol is performing a hardware reset.
7 = LISTEN ONLY – EFB protocol is in listen-only mode.
5310 EFB PAR 10
Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus Register 40005.
Start-Up
Code Description
5311 EFB PAR 11
5312 EFB PAR 12
5313 EFB PAR 13
5314 EFB PAR 14
5315 EFB PAR 15
5316 EFB PAR 16
5317 EFB PAR 17
5318 EFB PAR 18
Added TX delay to allow additional response delay (in msec) to be set by user.
5319 EFB PAR 19
ABB Drives profile (ABB DRV LIM or ABB DRV FULL) Control Word. Read only copy of the Fieldbus Control Word.
5320 EFB PAR 20
ABB Drives profile (ABB DRV LIM or ABB DRV FULL) Status Word. Read only copy of the Fieldbus Status Word.
Start-Up
Group 81: PFC Control

This group defines a Pump-Fan Control (PFC) mode of operation. The major
features of PFC control are:
• The ACS510 controls the motor of pump no. 1, varying the motor speed to control
the pump capacity. This motor is the speed regulated motor.
• Direct line connections power the motor of pump no. 2 and pump no.3...pump
no.6,etc (pump 4,5,6 need RO extension module OREL-01). The ACS510
switches pump no. 2 (and then pump no. 3...pump no.6, etc.) on and off as
needed. These motors are auxiliary motors.
• The ACS510 PID control uses two signals: a process reference and an actual
value feedback. The PID controller adjusts the speed (frequency) of the first
pump such that the actual value follows the process reference.
• When demand (defined by the process reference) exceeds the first motor’s
capacity (user defined as a frequency limit), the PFC control automatically starts
an auxiliary pump. The PFC also reduces the speed of the first pump to account
for the auxiliary pump’s addition to total output. Then, as before, the PID controller
adjusts the speed (frequency) of the first pump such that the actual value follows
the process reference. If demand continues to increase, PFC adds additional
auxiliary pumps, using the same process.
• When demand drops, such that the first pump speed falls below a minimum limit
(user defined by a frequency limit), the PFC control automatically stops an
auxiliary pump. The PFC also increases the speed of the first pump to account for
the auxiliary pump’s missing output.
• An Interlock function (when enabled) identifies off-line (out of service) motors, and
the PFC control skips to the next available motor in the sequence.
• An Autochange function (when enabled and with the appropriate switchgear)
equalizes duty time between the pump motors. Autochange periodically
increments the position of each motor in the rotation – the speed regulated motor
becomes the last auxiliary motor, the first auxiliary motor becomes the speed
regulated motor, etc.
• The soft-start function ensures that all motors are started smoothly:When new
motors need to be started due to increasing pumping capacity need, they are
powered up by the drive as follows:
– When motor 1 reaches the AC powerline frequency, it is disconnected from the
drive and switched to direct on-line connection(with a slight delay in between).
– Motor 2 is connected to drive output. After a slight delay the motor speed is
increased to fulfil the pumping capacity needed.
– Motor 3...6 are sterted accoring to the same routine.
– The motor stopping routine follows always the normal PFC routine.
• This is the way PFC “Soft Start” controls the motors when starting new motors,
See the follow diagram:
– Drive is started and RO1 is closed. Modulation is not allowed.
Start-Up
8109 START START FREQ 1

4.
3.
Motor in RO1 is Speed Req Motor
Motor in RO2 is Speed Req Motor
FOut 1.
6.
2.
Motor in RO1 is Aux Motor
5. 7.
Start
8.
RO1 /Motor1
RO2 /Motor2
8122 PFC START DLY
8122 PFC START DLY

8122 PFC START DLY
– Drive waits for PFC Start Delay(parameter 8122). Modulation is not allowed
because drive has to wait that all contactor are stabilized.
– Modulation is allowed. Modulation starts from zero speed. After Fout rises over
Start Frequency 1, Aux. Mot. Start Delay starts (parameter 8115).
– When Aux. Mot. Start Delay elapses then drive coasts to stop and RO1 is
opened.
– Drive waits for PFC Start Delay (parameter 8122). Meaning of this delay it to
wait contactors to stabilize. If there is some oscillation in Motor 1 contactors
when closing RO2, then contactors might go to wrong state.
– Drive close RO2. This is new plae for Speed Regulated Motor. Modulation is
not allow yet.
– Drive waits for PFC Start Delay (parameter 8122). Modulation is not allowed
because the drive has to wait that all contactors are stabilized.
– Drive close RO1. Motor in RO1 is connected directly to the network(constant
speed) and modulation is allowed. Drive start accelerating from zero in RO2.
• Stoping motors goes like in standard PFC. See the figure.
Speed Req Motor in RO2

FOut
8109 START LOW FREQ 1
Start
RO2 /Motor1 Motor in RO2 is

Speed Req Motor
RO1 /Motor2 Motor in RO1 is

Aux Motor
Start-Up
• In next two pages show the typical circuit digram of SPFC control.
Start-Up
Start-Up
Code Description
8103 REFERENCE STEP 1
Sets a percentage value that is added to the process reference.
• Applies only when at least one auxiliary (constant speed) motor is running.
• Default value is 0%.
Example: An ACS510 operates three parallel pumps that maintain water pressure in a pipe.
• 4011 INTERNAL SETPNT sets a constant pressure reference that controls the pressure in the pipe.
• The speed regulated pump operates alone at low water consumption levels.
• As water consumption increases, first one constant speed pump operates, then, the second.
• As flow increases, the pressure at the output end of the pipe drops relative to the pressure measured at the input
end. As auxiliary motors step in to increase the flow, the adjustments below correct the reference to more closely
match the output pressure.
• When the first auxiliary pump operates, increase the reference with parameter 8103 REFERENCE STEP 1.
• When both auxiliary pumps operate, increase the reference with parameter 8103 reference step 1 + parameter
8104 reference step 2.
• When three auxiliary pumps operate, increase the reference with parameter 8103 REFERENCE STEP 1 + parameter
8104 REFERENCE STEP 2 + parameter 8105 REFERENCE STEP 3.
• When four auxiliary pumps operate, increase the reference with parameter 8103 REFERENCE STEP 1 + parameter
8104 REFERENCE STEP 2 + 2 X parameter 8105 REFERENCE STEP 3.
• When five auxiliary pumps operate, increase the reference with parameter 8103 REFERENCE STEP 1 + parameter
• When six auxiliary pumps operate, increase the reference with parameter 8103 REFERENCE STEP 1 + parameter
• Applies only when at least two auxiliary (constant speed) motors are running.
• See parameter 8103 REFERENCE STEP1.
• Applies only when at least three auxiliary (constant speed) motors are running.
• See parameter 8103 REFERENCE STEP1.
8109 START FREQ 1
Sets the frequency limit used to start the first auxiliary motor. The first auxiliary motor starts if:
• No auxiliary motors are running.
• ACS510 output frequency exceeds the limit:
f (Hz) P 8115
8109 + 1 Hz.
• Output frequency stays above a relaxed limit fMAX
(8109 - 1 Hz) for at least the time: 8115 AUX MOT START D.
(P 8109)+1
After the first auxiliary motor starts:
P 8109
• Output frequency decreases by the value = A
(8109 START FREQ 1) - (8112 LOW FREQ 1).
P 8112
• In effect, the output of the speed regulated motor drops to B A
compensate for the input from the auxiliary motor. fMIN
t
See figure, where:
• A = (8109 START FREQ 1) - (8112 LOW FREQ 1)
• B = Output frequency increase during the start delay. C
• C = Diagram showing auxiliary motor’s run status as frequency 1
increases (1 = On). t
0
Note! 8109 START FREQ 1 value must be between:
• 8112 LOW FREQ 1
• (2008 MAXIMUM FREQ) -1.
8110 START FREQ 2
Sets the frequency limit used to start the second auxiliary motor.
• See 8109 START FREQ 1 for a complete description of the operation.
The second auxiliary motor starts if:
• One auxiliary motor is running.
• ACS510 output frequency exceeds the limit: 8110 + 1.
• Output frequency stays above the relaxed limit (8110 - 1 Hz) for at least the time: 8115 AUX MOT START D.
Start-Up
Code Description
8111 START FREQ 3
Sets the frequency limit used to start the third to the sixth auxiliary motor.
The third auxiliary motor starts if:
• Two auxiliary motors are running.
• ACS510 output frequency exceeds the limit: 8111 + 1 Hz.
• Output frequency stays above the relaxed limit (8111 - 1 Hz) for at least the time: 8115 AUX MOT START D.
• Same process for the fouth motor to the sixth motor.
8112 LOW FREQ 1
Sets the frequency limit used to stop the first auxiliary motor. The first auxiliary motor stops if:
• The first auxiliary motor is running alone.
• ACS510 output frequency drops below the limit: f (Hz)
8112 - 1.
• Output frequency stays below the relaxed limit fMAX
(8112 + 1 Hz) for at least the time: 8116 AUX MOT STOP D.
P 8109
After the first auxiliary motor stops:
• Output frequency increases by the value = A
P 8112 A
(8109 START FREQ 1) - (8112 LOW FREQ 1).
• In effect, the output of the speed regulated motor increases to (P 8112)-1
compensate for the loss of the auxiliary motor. fMIN
B t
See figure, where:
• A = (8109 START FREQ 1) - (8112 LOW FREQ 1) P 8116
• B = Output frequency decrease during the stop delay.
• C = Diagram showing auxiliary motor’s run status as frequency C
decreases (1 = On).
• Grey path = Shows hysteresis – if time is reversed, the path 1
t
backwards is not the same. For details on the path for starting, 0
see the diagram at 8109 START FREQ 1.
Note! Low Frequency 1 value must be between:
• (2007 MINIMUM FREQ) +1.
• 8109 START FREQ 1
8113 LOW FREQ 2
Sets the frequency limit used to stop the second auxiliary motor.
• See 8112 LOW FREQ 1 for a complete description of the operation.
The second auxiliary motor stops if:
• Two auxiliary motors are running.
• ACS510 output frequency drops below the limit: 8113 - 1.
• Output frequency stays below the relaxed limit (8113 + 1 Hz) for at least the time: 8116 AUX MOT STOP D.
8114 LOW FREQ 3
Sets the frequency limit used to stop the third to the sixth auxiliary motor.
The third auxiliary motor stops if:
• Three auxiliary motors are running.
• ACS510 output frequency drops below the limit: 8114 - 1.
• Output frequency stays below the relaxed limit (8114 + 1 Hz) for at least the time: 8116 AUX MOT STOP D.
• Same process for the fouth motor to the sixth motor.
8115 AUX MOT START D
Sets the Start Delay for the auxiliary motors.
• The output frequency must remain above the start frequency limit (parameter 8109, 8110, or 8111) for this time
period before the auxiliary motor starts.
8116 AUX MOT STOP D.
Sets the Stop Delay for the auxiliary motors.
• The output frequency must remain below the low frequency limit (parameter 8112, 8113, or 8114) for this time
period before the auxiliary motor stops.
Start-Up
Code Description
8117 NR OF AUX MOT
Sets the number of auxiliary motors.
• Each auxiliary motor requires a relay output, which the drive uses to send start/stop signals.
• The Autochange function, if used, requires an additional relay output for the speed regulated motor.
• The following describes the set-up of the required relay outputs.
Relay Outputs
As noted above, each auxiliary motor requires a relay output, which the drive uses to send start/stop signals. The
following describes how the drive keeps track of motors and relays.
• The ACS510 provides relay outputs RO1…RO3.
• An external digital output module can be added to provide relay outputs RO4…RO6.
• Parameters 1401…1403 and 1410…1412 define, respectively, how relays RO1…RO6 are used – the parameter
value 31 PFC defines the relay as used for PFC.
• The ACS510 assigns auxiliary motors to relays in ascending order. If the Autochange function is disabled, the first
auxiliary motor is the one connected to the first relay with a parameter setting = 31 PFC, and so on. If the
Autochange function is used, the assignments rotate. Initially, the speed regulated motor is the one connected to
the first relay with a parameter setting = 31 PFC, the first auxiliary motor is the one connected to the second relay
with a parameter setting = 31 PFC, and so on.
Relay Logic
ACS510
ACS510
Standard PFC mode PFC with Autochange mode

• The fourth auxiliary motor uses the same reference step, low frequency and start frequency values as the third
auxiliary motor.
Start-Up
Code Description
• The table below shows the ACS510 PFC motor assignments for some typical settings in the Relay Output
parameters (1401…1403 and 1410…1412), where the settings are either =31 (PFC), or =X (anything but 31), and
where the Autochange function is disabled (8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV = 0).
Parameter Setting ACS510 Relay Assignment
1 1 1 1 1 1 8 Autochange Disabled
4 4 4 4 4 4 1 RO1 RO2 RO3 RO4 RO5 RO6
0 0 0 1 1 1 1
1 2 3 0 1 2 7
31 X X X X X 1 Aux. X X X X X
31 31 X X X X 2 Aux. Aux. X X X X
31 31 31 X X X 3 Aux. Aux. Aux. X X X
X 31 31 X X X 2 X Aux. Aux. X X X
31 31 31 31 31 31 6 Aux. Aux. Aux. Aux. Aux. Aux.
31 31 X X X X 1* Aux. Aux. X X X X
* = One additional relay output for the PFC that is in use. One motor is in “sleep”
when the other is rotating.
• The table below shows the ACS510 PFC motor assignments for some typical settings in the Relay Output
parameters (1401…1403 and 1410…1412), where the settings are either =31 (PFC), or =X (anything but 31), and
where the Autochange function is enabled (8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV = value > 0).
Parameter Setting ACS510 Relay Assignment

1 1 1 1 1 1 8 Autochange Disabled
4 4 4 4 4 4 1 RO1 RO2 RO3 RO4 RO5 RO6
0 0 0 1 1 1 1
1 2 3 0 1 2 7
31 31 X X X X 1 PFC PFC X X X X
31 31 31 X X X 2 PFC PFC PFC X X X
x 31 31 X X X 1 X PFC PFC X X X
31 31 31 31 31 31 5 PFC PFC PFC PFC PFC PFC
31 31 X X X X 0** PFC PFC X X X X
** = No auxiliary motors, but the autochange function is in use. Working as a
standard PID-control.
8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV

Controls operation of the Autochange function and sets the Relay Logic
interval between changes.
ACS510
• The Autochange time interval only applies to the time when
the speed regulated motor is running.
• See parameter 8119 AUTOCHNG LEVEL for an overview of the
Autochange function.
• The drive always coasts to a stop when autochange is
performed.
• Autochange enabled requires parameter 8120 INTERLOCKS =
value > 0.
0.0 = NOT SEL – Disables the Autochange function.
0.1…336 = The operating time interval (the time when the start
signal is on) between automatic motor changes.
-0.1 = TEST MODE – Forces the interval to value 36...48 s.
Warning! When enabled, the Autochange function requires
the interlocks (8120 interlocks = value > 0) enabled. During
autochange the interlocks interrupt the drive’s power output,
preventing damage to the contacts.
PFC with Autochange mode
Start-Up
Code Description
8119 AUTOCHNG LEVEL
Sets an upper limit, as a percent of output capacity, for the autochange logic. When the output from the PID/PFC
control block exceeds this limit, autochange is prevented. For example, use this parameter to deny autochange when
the Pump-Fan system is operating near maximum capacity.
Autochange Overview
The purpose of the autochange operation is to equalize duty time between multiple motors used in a system. At each
autochange operation:
• A different motor takes a turn connected to the ACS510 output – the speed regulated motor.
• The starting order of the other motors rotates.
The Autochange function requires:
• External switchgear for changing the drive’s output power connections.
• Parameter 8120 INTERLOCKS = value > 0.
Autochange is performed when:
• The running time since the previous autochange reaches the time set by 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV
• The PFC input is below the level set by this parameter, 8119 AUTOCHNG LEVEL.
Note! The ACS510 always coasts to stop when autochange is performed.
In an autochange, the Autochange function does all of the PID Output
following (see figure): A
4PFC
• Initiates a change when the running time, since the last 100%
autochange, reaches 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV, and PFC 2PFC
input is below limit 8119 AUTOCHNG LEVEL.
• Stops the speed regulated motor. P 8119
3PFC
• Switches off the contactor of the speed regulated motor. 3PFC
• Increments the starting order counter, to change the 4PFC
starting order for the motors. 2PFC
• Identifies the next motor in line to be the speed regulated
motor. 1PFC t
• Switches off the above motor’s contactor, if the motor was P 8122
running. Any other running motors are not interrupted.
• Switches on the contactor of the new speed regulated P 8118 P 8118
motor. The autochange switchgear connects this motor to B
the ACS510 power output. A = Area above 8119 AUTOCHNG LEVEL –
• Delays motor start for the time 8122 PFC START DELAy. autochange not allowed.
• Starts the speed regulated motor. B = Autochange occurs.
• Identifies the next constant speed motor in the rotation. 1PFC, etc. = PID output associated with each motor.
• Switches the above motor on, but only if the new speed
regulated motor had been running (as a constant speed
motor) – This step keeps an equal number of motors running before and after autochange.
• Continues with normal PFC operation.
Starting Order Counter Output
The operation of the starting-order counter: frequency 2 aux
No aux 1 aux
• The relay output parameter definitions (1401…1403 and motors motor motors
1410…1412)) establish the initial motor sequence. (The lowest fMAX
parameter number with a value 31 (PFC) identifies the relay
connected to 1PFC, the first motor, and so on.)
• Initially, 1PFC = speed regulated motor, 2PFC = 1st auxiliary
motor, etc.
• The first autochange shifts the sequence to: 2PFC = speed
regulated motor, 3PFC = 1st auxiliary motor, …, 1PFC = last
auxiliary motor. Area
• The next autochange shifts the sequence again, and so on. Autochange
• If the autochange cannot start a needed motor because all is Allowed PID output
inactive motors are interlocked, the drive displays an alarm
P 8119 100%
(2015, PFC INTERLOCK).
• When ACS510 power supply is switched off, the counter
preserves the current Autochange rotation positions in permanent memory. When power is restored, the
Autochange rotation starts at the position stored in memory.
• If the PFC relay configuration is changed (or if the PFC enable value is changed), the rotation is reset. (See the first
bullet above.)
Start-Up
Code Description
8120 INTERLOCKS
Defines operation of the Interlock function. When the Interlock function is enabled:
• An interlock is active when its command signal is absent.
• An interlock is inactive when its command signal is present.
• The ACS510 will not start if a start command occurs when the speed regulated motor’s interlock is active – the
control panel displays an alarm (2015, PFC INTERLOCK).
Wire each Interlock circuit as follows:
• Wire a contact of the motor’s On/Off switch to the Interlock circuit – the drive’s PFC logic can then recognize that
the motor is switched off, and start the next available motor.
• Wire a contact of the motor thermal relay (or other protective device in the motor circuit) to the Interlock input – the
drive’s PFC logic can then recognize that a motor fault is activated and stop the motor.
0 = NOT SEL – Disables the Interlock function. All digital inputs are available for other purposes.
• Requires 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV = 0 (The Autochange function must be disabled if Interlock function is disabled.)
1 = DI1 – Enables the Interlock function, and assigns a digital input (starting with DI1) to the interlock signal for each
PFC relay. These assignments are defined in the following table and depend on:
• The number of PFC relays (number of parameters 1401…1403 and 1410…1412) and with value = 31 PFC)
• The Autochange function status (disabled if 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV = 0, and otherwise enabled).
No. PFC Autochange Disabled Autochange Enabled

Relays (P 8118) (P 8118)
0 DI1: Speed Reg Motor Not allowed
DI2…DI6: Free
1 DI1: Speed Reg Motor DI1: First PFC Relay
DI2: First PFC Relay DI2…DI6: Free
DI3…DI6: Free
DI2: First PFC Relay DI2: Second PFC Relay
DI3: Second PFC Relay DI3…DI6: Free
DI4…DI6: Free
DI3: Second PFC Relay DI3: Third PFC Relay
DI4: Third PFC Relay DI4…DI6: Free
DI5…DI6: Free
DI4: Third PFC Relay DI4: Fourth PFC Relay
DI5: Fourth PFC Relay DI5…DI6: Free
DI6: Free
DI5: Fourth PFC Relay DI5: Fifth PFC Relay
DI6: Fifth PFC Relay DI6: Free
6 Not allowed DI1: First PFC Relay
DI2: Second PFC Relay
DI3: Third PFC Relay
DI4: Fourth PFC Relay
DI5: Fifth PFC Relay
DI6: Sixth PFC Relay
Start-Up
Code Description
• The number of PFC relays (number of parameters 1401…1403 and 1410…1412) with value = 31 PFC)

Relays (P 8118) (P 8118)
0 DI1: Free Not allowed
DI2: Speed Reg Motor
DI3…DI6: Free
1 DI1: Free DI1: Free
DI2: Speed Reg Motor DI2: First PFC Relay
DI4…DI6: Free
DI5…DI6: Free
DI5: Third PFC Relay DI5…DI6: Free
DI6: Free
DI6: Fourth PFC Relay DI6: Free
5 Not allowed DI1: Free
DI2: First PFC Relay
DI6: Fifth PFC Relay
6 Not allowed Not allowed
Start-Up
Code Description
3 = DI3 – Enables the Interlocks function, and assigns a digital input (starting with DI3) to the interlock signal for each

Relays (P 8118) (P 8118)
0 DI1…DI2: Free Not allowed
DI4…DI6: Free
1 DI1…DI2: Free DI1…DI2: Free
DI5…DI6: Free
DI6: Free
DI6: Third PFC Relay DI6: Free
4 Not allowed DI1…DI2: Free
5…6 Not allowed Not allowed

Relays (P 8118) (P 8118)
DI5…DI6: Free
DI6: Free
DI6: Second PFC Relay DI6: Free
Start-Up
Code Description

Relays (P 8118) (P 8118)
DI6: Free
DI6: First PFC Relay DI6: Free
6 = DI6 – Enables the Interlock function, and assigns digital input DI6 to the interlock signal for the speed regulated
motor.
• Requires 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV = 0.

Relays
Start-Up
Code Description
8121 REG BYPASS CTRL
Selects Regulator by-pass control. When enabled, Regulator by-pass control provides a simple control mechanism
without a PID regulator.
Use Regulator by-pass control only in special
fOUT
applications.
0 = NO – Disables Regulator by-pass control. The drive fMAX
uses the normal PFC reference: 1106 REF2 SELECT.
1 = YES – Enables Regulator by-pass control.
• The process PID regulator is bypassed.
Actual value of PID is used as the PFC reference P 8110
(input). Normally EXT REF2 is used as the PFC P 8109
reference.
• The drive uses the feedback signal defined by 4014
FBK SEL (or 4114) for the PFC frequency reference.
P 8113
• The figure shows the relation between the control
signal 4014 FBK SEL (OR 4114) and the speed P 8112
regulated motor’s frequency in a three-motor
system. fMIN
Example: In the diagram below, the pumping station’s P 4014
outlet flow is controlled by the measured inlet flow (A). A B C (%)
A = No auxiliary motors running
B = One auxiliary motor running
Mains 3~ 3 Contactors C = Two auxiliary motors running
3
3 ACS510 P1
P2 3
M
P3 3 3~
3 P1 Outlet Pipe1
A Sewage
Tank M
3~
P2 Outlet Pipe2
Inlet Pipe
M
3~
P3 Outlet Pipe3
8122 PFC START DELAY

Sets the start delay for speed regulated motors in the system. Using the delay, the drive works as follows:
• Switches on the contactor of the speed regulated motor – connecting the motor to the ACS510 power output.
• Delays motor start for the time 8122 PFC START DELAY.
• Starts the speed regulated motor.
• Starts auxiliary motors. See parameter 8115 for delay.
Warning! Motors equipped with star-delta starters require a PFC Start Delay.
• After the ACS510 relay output switches a motor On, the star-delta starter must switch to the star-connection and
then back to the delta-connection before the drive applies power.
• So, the PFC Start Delay must be longer than the time setting of the star-delta starter.
8123 PFC ENABLE
Selects PFC control. When enabled, PFC control:
• Switches in, or out, auxiliary constant speed motors as output demand increases or decreases. Parameters 8109
START FREQ 1 to 8114 LOW FREQ 3 define the switch points in terms of the drive output frequency.
• Adjusts the speed regulated motor output down, as auxiliary motors are added, and adjusts the speed regulated
motor output up, as auxiliary motors are taken off line.
• Provides Interlock functions, if enabled.
0 = NOT SEL – Disables PFC control.
1 = ACTIVE – Enables PFC control.
2 = CYCLE SOFT START – Enables PFC control and use cycle soft-start function.
• Require parameter 8118 = value > 0 .
Start-Up
Code Description
8124 ACC IN AUX STOP
Sets the PFC acceleration time for a zero-to-maximum fOUT
frequency ramp. This PFC acceleration ramp:
• Applies to the speed regulated motor, when an auxiliary A
motor is switched off. B
• Replaces the acceleration ramp defined in Group 22:
Accel / Decel.
• Applies only until the output of the regulated motor
increases by an amount equal to the output of the P 8125 P 8124
switched off auxiliary motor. Then the acceleration ramp t
defined in Group 22: Accel / Decel applies.
0 = NOT SEL. Aux.
0.1…1800 = Activates this function using the value Motor
entered as the acceleration time. 1
t
8125 DEC IN AUX START 0
Sets the PFC deceleration time for a maximum-to-zero • A = speed regulated motor accelerating using Group 22
frequency ramp. This PFC deceleration ramp: parameters (2202 or 2205).
• Applies to the speed regulated motor, when an auxiliary • B = speed regulated motor decelerating using Group 22
motor is switched on. parameters (2203 or 2206).
• Replaces the deceleration ramp defined in Group 22 • At aux. motor start, speed regulated motor decelerates
ACCEL / DECEL. using 8125 DEC IN AUX START.
• Applies only until the output of the regulated motor • At aux. motor stop, speed regulated motor accelerates
decreases by an amount equal to the output of the using 8124 ACC IN AUX STOP.
auxiliary motor. Then the deceleration ramp defined in
Group 22 ACCEL / DECEL applies.
0 = NOT SEL.
0.1…1800 = Activates this function using the value
entered as the deceleration time.
8127 MOTORS
Sets the actual number of PFC controlled motors (maximum 7 motors, 1 speed regulated + 6 connected direct-on-
line motors, or 1 speed regulated + 3 connected direct-on-line and 3 spare motors).
• This value includes also the speed regulated motor.
• This value must be compatible with number of relays allocated to PFC if the autochange function is used.
• If Autochange function is not used, the speed regulated motor does not need to have a relay output allocated to
PFC but it needs to be included in this value.
8128 AUX START ORDER
Sets the start order of the auxiliary moters.
1 = EVEN RUNTIME – Time sharing is active. The start order depends on the run times.
2 = RELAY ORDER – The start order is fixed to be the order of the relays.
Start-Up
Group 98: Options

This group configures for options, in particular, enabling serial communication with
the drive.
Code Description
9802 COMM PROT SEL
Selects the communication protocol.
0 = NOT SEL – No communication protocol selected.
1 = STD MODBUS – The drive communicates with Modbus via the RS485 channel (X1-communications, terminal).
• See also parameter Group 53 EFB PROTOCOL.
4 = EXT FBA – The drive communicates via a fieldbus adapter module in option slot 2 of the drive.
• See also parameter Group 51 EXT COMM MODULE.
Start-Up
Embedded Fieldbus
Overview
The ACS510 can be set up to accept control from an external system using standard
serial communication protocols. When using serial communication, the ACS510 can
either:
• Receive all of its control information from the fieldbus, or
• Be controlled from some combination of fieldbus control and other available
control locations, such as digital or analog inputs, and the control panel.
Fieldbus Controller
Fieldbus
Other Devices
Connect using either:

• Standard embedded fieldbus (EFB) at
terminals X1:28…32
• Fieldbus adapter (FBA) module
mounted in slot 2 (option Rxxx)
Two basic serial communications configurations are available:

• Embedded fieldbus (EFB) – Using the RS485 interface at terminals X1:28…32 on
the control board, a control system can communicate with the drive using the
Modbus® protocol. (For protocol and profile descriptions, see "Modbus Protocol
Technical Data" and "ABB Control Profiles Technical Data" later in this section.)
• Fieldbus adapter (FBA) – See "Fieldbus Adapter" on page 175.
Control Interface
In general, the basic control interface between Modbus and the drive consists of:
• Output words
– Control Word
– Reference1
– Reference2
• Input words
– Status Word
– Actual value 1
– Actual value 2
– Actual value 3
Embedded Fieldbus
– Actual value 4
– Actual value 5
– Actual value 6
– Actual value 7
– Actual value 8
The content of these words is defined by profiles. For details on the profiles used,
see "ABB Control Profiles Technical Data" on page 163.
Note! The words “output” and “input” are used as seen from the fieldbus controller
point of view. For example an output describes data flow from the fieldbus controller
to the drive and appears as an input from the drive point of view.
Planning
Network planning should address the following questions:
• What types and quantities of devices must be connected to the network?
• What control information must be sent down to the drives?
• What feedback information must be sent from the drives to the controlling
system?
Mechanical and Electrical Installation – EFB
Warning! Connections should be made only while the drive is disconnected from the
power source.
Drive terminals 28…32 are for RS485 communications.

• Use Belden 9842 or equivalent. Belden 9842 is a dual twisted, shielded pair cable
with a wave impedance of 120 Ω.
• Use one of these twisted shielded pairs for the RS485 link. Use this pair to
connect all A (-) terminals together and all B (+) terminals together.
• Use one of the wires in the other pair for the logical ground (terminal 31), leaving
one wire unused.
• Do not directly ground the RS485 network at any point. Ground all devices on the
network using their corresponding earthing terminals.
• As always, the grounding wires should not form any closed loops, and all the
devices should be earthed to a common ground.
• Connect the RS485 link in a daisy-chained bus, without dropout lines.
Embedded Fieldbus
• To reduce noise on the network, terminate the RS485 network using 120 Ω
resistors at both ends of the network. Use the DIP switch to connect or disconnect
the termination resistors. See following diagram and table.
Terminated Terminated
Station Station Station Station
X1 Identification Hardware Description

28 Screen RS485 Multidrop application RS485 interface
29 B (Positive +) 28 SCR J2 J2
SCR
29 B
30 A (Negative -) +
- 30 A ON
31 AGND GND 31 AGND ON
SCR 32 SCR
32 Screen OFF position ON position
+ Bus termination
-
GND
• Connect the shield at each end of the cable to a drive. On one end, connect the
shield to terminal 28, and on the other end connect to terminal 32. Do not connect
the incoming and outgoing cable shields to the same terminals, as that would
make the shielding continuous.
• For configuration information see the following:
– "Communication Set-up – EFB" below.
– "Activate Drive Control Functions – EFB" on page 147.
– The appropriate EFB protocol specific technical data. For example, "Modbus
Protocol Technical Data" on page 155.
Communication Set-up – EFB
Serial Communication Selection

To activate the serial communication, set parameter 9802 COMM PROTOCOL SEL =
1 (STD MODBUS).
Note! If you cannot see the desired selection on the panel, your drive does not have
that protocol software in the application memory.
Embedded Fieldbus
Serial Communication Configuration

Setting 9802 automatically sets the appropriate default values in parameters that
define the communication process. These parameters and descriptions are defined
below. In particular, note that the station Id may require adjustment.
Protocol Reference
Code Description
Modbus
5301 EFB PROTOCOL ID Do not edit. Any non-zero value entered
Contains the identification and program revision of for parameter 9802 COMM PROT SEL,
the protocol. sets this parameter automatically. The
format is: XXYY, where xx = protocol ID,
and YY = program revision.
5302 EFB STATION ID Set each drive on the network with a
Defines the node address of the RS485 link. unique value for this parameter.
When this protocol is selected, the
default value for this parameter is: 1
Note! For a new address to take affect, the drive power must be cycled or 5302 must first be
set to 0 before selecting a new address. Leaving 5302 = 0 places the RS485 channel in reset,
disabling communication.
5303 EFB BAUD RATE When this protocol is selected, the
Defines the communication speed of the RS485 default value for this parameter is: 9.6
link in kbits per second (kbits/s).
1.2 kbits/s 19.2 kbits/s
5304 EFB PARITY When this protocol is selected, the
Defines the data length, parity and stop bits to be default value for this parameter is: 1
used with the RS485 communication.
The same settings must be used in all on-line
stations.
0 = 8N1 – 8 data bits, No parity, one stop bit.
1 = 8N2 – 8 data bits, No parity, two stop bits.
2 = 8E1 – 8 data bits, Even parity, one stop bit.
3 = 8O1 – 8 data bits, Odd parity, one stop bit.
5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE When this protocol is selected, the
Selects the communication profile used by the default value for this parameter is: 0
EFB protocol.
0 = ABB DRV LIM – Operation of Control/Status
Words conforms to ABB Drives Profile, as used
in ACS400.
1 = DCU PROFILE – Operation of Control/Status
Words conforms to 32-bit DCU Profile.
2 = ABB DRV FULL – Operation of Control/Status
Words conforms to ABB Drives Profile, as used
in ACS600/800.
Note! After any changes to the communication settings, the protocol must be
reactivated by either cycling the drive power, or by clearing and then restoring the
station Id (5302).
Embedded Fieldbus
Activate Drive Control Functions – EFB
Controlling the Drive

Fieldbus control of various drive functions requires configuration to:
• Tell the drive to accept fieldbus control of the function.
• Define as a fieldbus input, any drive data required for control.
• Define as a fieldbus output, any control data required by the drive.
The following sections describe, at a general level, the configuration required for
each control function. For the protocol-specific details, see the document supplied
with the FBA module.
Start/Stop Direction Control

Using the fieldbus for start/stop/direction control of the drive requires:
• Drive parameter values set as defined below.
• Fieldbus controller supplied command(s) in the appropriate location. (The
location is defined by the Protocol Reference, which is protocol dependent.)
Modbus1 Protocol Reference
Drive Parameter Value Description
ABB DRV DCU PROFILE
1001 EXT1 COMMANDS 10 (COMM) Start/Stop by fieldbus 40001 bits 0…3 40031 bits 0, 1
with Ext1 selected.
1002 EXT2 COMMANDS 10 (COMM) Start/Stop by fieldbus 40001 bits 0…3 40031 bits 0, 1
with Ext2 selected.
1003* DIRECTION 3 (REQUEST) Direction by fieldbus. 40002/400032 40031 bit 3
1. For Modbus, the protocol reference can depend on the profile used, hence two columns in these
tables. One column refers to the ABB Drives profile, selected when parameter 5305 = 0 (ABB DRV
LIM) or 5305 = 2 (ABB DRV FULL). The other column refers to the DCU profile selected when
parameter 5305 = 1 (DCU PROFILE). See "ABB Control Profiles Technical Data" on page 163.
2. The reference provides direction control – a negative reference provides reverse rotation.
Embedded Fieldbus
Input Reference Select

Using the fieldbus to provide input references to the drive requires:
• Fieldbus controller supplied reference word(s) in the appropriate location. (The
Modbus Protocol
Drive Parameter Value Description Reference
ABB DRV DCU PROFILE
1102 EXT1/EXT2 SEL 8 (COMM) Reference set selection by fieldbus. 40001 bit 11 40031 bit 5
1103 REF1 SEL 8 (COMM) Input reference 1 by fieldbus. 40002
1106 REF2 SEL 8 (COMM) Input reference 2 by fieldbus. 40003
Reference Scaling
Where required, REFERENCES can be scaled. See the following, as appropriate:
• Modbus Register "40002" in the "Modbus Protocol Technical Data" section.
• "Reference Scaling" in the "ABB Control Profiles Technical Data" section.
Miscellaneous Drive Control

Using the fieldbus for miscellaneous drive control requires:
Modbus Protocol
ABB DRV DCU PROFILE
1601 RUN ENABLE 7 (COMM) Run enable by fieldbus. 40001 bit 3 40031 bit 6
(inverted)
1604 FAULT RESET SEL 8 (COMM) Fault reset by fieldbus. 40001 bit 7 40031 bit 4
1606 LOCAL LOCK 8 (COMM) Source for local lock selection is Does not 40031 bit 14
the fieldbus. apply
1607 PARAM SAVE 1 (SAVE) Saves altered parameters to 41607
memory (then value returns to 0).
1608 START ENABLE 1 7 (COMM) Source for start enable 1 is the Does not 40032 bit 2
fieldbus Command word. apply.
1609 START ENABLE 2 7 (COMM) Source for start enable 2 is the 40032 bit 3
fieldbus Command word.
2201 ACC/DEC 1/2 SEL 7 (COMM) Source for ramp pair selection is 40031 bit 10
the fieldbus.
Embedded Fieldbus
Relay Output Control

Using the fieldbus for relay output control requires:
• Fieldbus controller supplied, binary coded, relay command(s) in the appropriate
location. (The location is defined by the Protocol Reference, which is protocol
dependent.)
Modbus Protocol Reference
ABB DRV DCU PROFILE
1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 35 (COMM) Relay Output 1 controlled 40134 bit 0 or 00033
by fieldbus.
by fieldbus.
by fieldbus.
(Note 1) by fieldbus.
1. More than 3 relays requires the addition of a relay extension module.
Note! Relay status feedback occurs without configuration as defined below.
Modbus Protocol
Drive Parameter Description Reference
ABB DRV DCU PROFILE
0122 RO 1-3 STATUS Relay 1…3 status. 40122

0123 RO 4-6 STATUS Relay 4…6 status. 40123
Analog Output Control

Using the fieldbus for analog output control (e.g. PID setpoint) requires:
• Fieldbus controller supplied analog value(s) in the appropriate location. (The
Modbus Protocol
ABB DRV DCU PROFILE
1501 AO1 CONTENT SEL 135 (COMM VALUE 1) Analog Output 1 –

controlled by writing to
0135 COMM VALUE 1 – parameter 0135. 40135
1507 AO2 CONTENT SEL 136 (COMM VALUE 2) Analog Output 2 –

controlled by writing to
0136 COMM VALUE 2 – parameter 0136. 40136
Embedded Fieldbus
PID Control Setpoint Source

Using the following settings to select the fieldbus as the setpoint source for PID
loops:
Modbus Protocol
ABB DRV DCU PROFILE
4010 SET POINT SEL 8 (COMM VALUE 1) Setpoint is input reference 2 40003
(Set 1) 9 (COMM + AI1) (+/-/* AI1)
4110 SET POINT SEL 10 (COMM*AI1)
(Set 2)
4210 SET POINT SEL
(Ext/Trim)
Communication Fault
When using fieldbus control, specify the drive’s action if serial communication is lost.
3018 COMM FAULT FUNC 0 (NOT SEL) Set for appropriate drive response.
1 (FAULT)
2 (CONST SP7)
3 (LAST SPEED)
3019 COMM FAULT TIME Set time delay before acting on a communication loss.
Embedded Fieldbus
Feedback from the Drive – EFB
Pre-defined Feedback
Inputs to the controller (drive outputs) have pre-defined meanings established by the
protocol. This feedback does not require drive configuration. The following table lists
a sample of feedback data. For a complete listing, see input word/point/object
listings in the technical data for the appropriate protocol starting on page 155.
Drive Parameter
ABB DRV DCU PROFILE
0102 SPEED 40102

0103 FREQ OUTPUT 40103
0104 CURRENT 40104
0105 TORQUE 40105
0106 POWER 40106
0107 DC BUS VOLT 40107
0109 OUTPUT VOLTAGE 40109
0301 FB STATUS WORD – bit 0 (STOP) 40301 bit 0
0301 FB STATUS WORD – bit 2 (REV) 40301 bit 2
0118 DI1-3 STATUS – bit 1 (DI3) 40118
Note! With Modbus, any parameter can be accessed using the format: “4” followed
by the parameter number.
Actual Value Scaling

The scaling of actual values can be protocol dependent. In general, for Actual
Values, scale the feedback integer using the parameter’s resolution. (See "Complete
Parameter List for ACS510" section for parameter resolutions.) For example:
Feedback Parameter
(Feedback Integer) * (Parameter Resolution) = Scaled Value
Integer Resolution
1 0.1 mA 1 * 0.1 mA = 0.1 mA
10 0.1% 10 * 0.1% = 1%
Where parameters are in percent, the "Complete Parameter Descriptions" section

specifies what parameter corresponds to 100%. In such cases, to convert from
percent to engineering units, multiply by the value of the parameter that defines
100% and divide by 100%.
Embedded Fieldbus
For example:
Value of the
Feedback Parameter (Feedback Integer) * (Parameter Resolution) *
Parameter that
Integer Resolution (Value of 100% Ref.) / 100% = Scaled Value
defines 100%
10 0.1% 1500 rpm (Note 1) 10 * 0.1% * 1500 RPM / 100% = 15 rpm
100 0.1% 500 Hz (Note 2) 100 * 0.1% * 500 Hz / 100% = 50 Hz
1. Assuming, for the sake of this example, that the Actual Value uses parameter 9908 MOT NOM SPEED
as the 100% reference, and that 9908 = 1500 rpm.
2. Assuming, for the sake of this example, that the Actual Value uses parameter 9907 MOT NOM FREQ
as the 100% reference, and that 9907 = 500 Hz.
Diagnostics – EFB
Fault Queue for Drive Diagnostics

For general ACS510 diagnostics information, see "Diagnostics" starting on page
196. The three most recent ACS510 faults are reported to the fieldbus as defined
below.
Drive Parameter
ABB DRV DCU PROFILE
0401 Last Fault 40401

0412 Previous Fault 1 40402
0413 Previous Fault 2 40403
Serial Communication Diagnostics

Network problems can be caused by multiple sources. Some of these sources are:
• Loose connections
• Incorrect wiring (including swapped wires)
• Bad grounding
• Duplicate station numbers
• Incorrect setup of drives or other devices on the network
The major diagnostic features for fault tracing on an EFB network include Group 53
EFB Protocol parameters 5306…5309. The "Complete Parameter Descriptions"
section describes these parameters in detail.
Embedded Fieldbus
Diagnostic Situations
The sub-sections below describe various diagnostic situations – the problem
symptoms and corrective actions.
Normal Operation
During normal network operation, 5306…5309 parameter values act as follows at
each drive:
• 5306 EFB OK MESSAGES advances (advances for each message properly received
and addressed to this drive).
• 5307 EFB CRC ERRORS does not advance at all (advances when an invalid
message CRC is received).
• 5308 EFB UART ERRORS does not advance at all (advances when character format
errors are detected, such as parity or framing errors).
• 5309 EFB status value varies depending on network traffic.
Loss of Communication
The ACS510ACS510 behavior, if communication is lost, was configured earlier in
"Communication Fault". The parameters are 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC and 3019 COMM
FAULT TIME. The "Complete Parameter Descriptions" section describes these
parameters in detail.
No Master Station on Line
If no master station is on line: Neither the EFB OK MESSAGES nor the errors (5307 EFB
CRC ERRORS and 5308 EFB UART ERRORS) increase on any of the stations.
To correct:
• Check that a network master is connected and properly programmed on the
network.
• Verify that the cable is connected, and is not cut or short circuited.
Duplicate Stations
If two or more stations have duplicate numbers:
• Two or more drives cannot be addressed.
• Every time there is a read or write to one particular station, the value for 5307 EFB
CRC ERRORS or 5308 EFB UART ERRORS advances.
To correct: Verify the station numbers of all stations. Change conflicting station
numbers.
Swapped Wires
If the communication wires are swapped (terminal A on one drive is connected to
terminal B on another):
• The value of 5306 EFB OK MESSAGES does not advance.
• The values of 5307 EFB CRC ERRORS and 5308 EFB UART ERRORS are advancing.
To correct: Check that the RS-485 lines are not swapped.
Embedded Fieldbus
Fault 28 – Serial 1 Err

If the drive’s control panel shows fault code 28 “SERIAL 1 ERR”, check for either of the
following:
• The master system is down. To correct, resolve problem with master system.
• The communication connection is bad. To correct, check communication
connection at the drive.
• The time-out selection for the drive is too short for the given installation. The
master is not polling the drive within the specified time-out delay. To correct,
increase the time set by parameter 3019 COMM FAULT TIME.
Faults 31…33 – EFB1…EFB3
The three EFB fault codes listed for the drive in "Diagnostics" starting on page 196
(fault codes 31…33) are not used.
Intermittent Off-line Occurrences
The problems described above are the most common problems encountered with
ACS510 serial communication. Intermittent problems might also be caused by:
• Marginally loose connections,
• Wear on wires caused by equipment vibrations,
• Insufficient grounding and shielding on both the devices and on the
communication cables.
Embedded Fieldbus
Modbus Protocol Technical Data
Overview
The Modbus® protocol was introduced by Modicon, Inc. for use in control
environments featuring Modicon programmable controllers. Due to its ease of use
and implementation, this common PLC language was quickly adopted as a de-facto
standard for integration of a wide variety of master controllers and slave devices.
Modbus is a serial, asynchronous protocol. Transactions are half-duplex, featuring a
single Master controlling one or more Slaves. While RS232 can be used for point-to-
point communication between a single Master and a single Slave, a more common
implementation features a multi-drop RS485 network with a single Master controlling
multiple Slaves. The ACS510 features RS485 for its Modbus physical interface.
RTU
The Modbus specification defines two distinct transmission modes: ASCII and RTU.
The ACS510 supports RTU only.
Feature Summary
The following Modbus function codes are supported by the ACS510.
Function Code (Hex) Description
Read Coil Status 0x01 Read discrete output status. For the ACS510, the individual bits
of the control word are mapped to Coils 1…16. Relay outputs are
mapped sequentially beginning with Coil 33 (e.g. RO1=Coil 33).
Read Discrete Input 0x02 Read discrete inputs status. For the ACS510, the individual bits
Status of the status word are mapped to Inputs 1…16 or 1…32,
depending on the active profile. Terminal inputs are mapped
sequentially beginning with Input 33 (e.g. DI1=Input 33).
Read Multiple 0x03 Read multiple holding registers. For the ACS510, the entire
Holding Registers parameter set is mapped as holding registers, as well as
command, status and reference values.
Read Multiple Input 0x04 Read multiple input registers. For the ACS510, the 2 analog input
Registers channels are mapped as input registers 1 & 2.
Force Single Coil 0x05 Write a single discrete output. For the ACS510, the individual bits
of the control word are mapped to Coils 1…16. Relay outputs are
mapped sequentially beginning with Coil 33 (e.g. RO1=Coil 33).
Write Single 0x06 Write single holding register. For the ACS510, the entire
Holding Register parameter set is mapped as holding registers, as well as
Diagnostics 0x08 Perform Modbus diagnostics. Subcodes for Query (0x00),
Restart (0x01) & Listen Only (0x04) are supported.
Force Multiple Coils 0x0F Write multiple discrete outputs. For the ACS510, the individual
bits of the control word are mapped to Coils 1…16. Relay outputs
are mapped sequentially beginning with Coil 33 (e.g. RO1=Coil
33).
Write Multiple 0x10 Write multiple holding registers. For the ACS510, the entire
Holding Registers parameter set is mapped as holding registers, as well as
Read/Write Multiple 0x17 This function combines functions 0x03 and 0x10 into a single
Holding Registers command.
Embedded Fieldbus
Mapping Summary
The following table summarizes the mapping between the ACS510 (parameters and
I/0) and Modbus reference space. For details, see "Modbus Addressing" below.
ACS510 Modbus Reference Supported Function Codes
• Control Bits Coils(0xxxx) • 01 – Read Coil Status
• Relay Outputs • 05 – Force Single Coil
• 15 – Force Multiple Coils
• Status Bits Discrete Inputs(1xxxx) • 02 – Read Input Status
• Discrete Inputs
• Analog Inputs Input Registers(3xxxxx) • 04 – Read Input Registers
• Parameters Holding Registers(4xxxx) • 03 – Read 4X Registers
• Control/Status Words • 06 – Preset Single 4X Register
• References • 16 – Preset Multiple 4X Registers
• 23 – Read/Write 4X Registers
Communication Profiles
When communicating by Modbus, the ACS510 supports multiple profiles for control
and status information. Parameter 5305 (EFB CTRL PROFILE) selects the profile used.
• ABB DRV LIM – The primary (and default) profile is the ABB DRV LIM profile. This
implementation of the ABB Drives profile standardizes the control interface with
ACS400 drives. The ABB Drives profile is based on the PROFIBUS interface, and
is discussed in detail in the following sections.
• DCU PROFILE – The DCU PROFILE profile extends the control and status interface to
32 bits, and is the internal interface between the main drive application and the
embedded fieldbus environment.
• ABB DRV FULL – ABB DRV FULL is the implementation of the ABB Drives profile that
standardizes the control interface with ACS600 and ACS800 drives. This
implementation supports two control word bits not supported by the ABB DRV LIM
implementation.
Modbus Addressing
With Modbus, each function code implies access to a specific Modbus reference set.
Thus, the leading digit is not included in the address field of a Modbus message.
Note: The ACS510 supports the zero-based addressing of the Modbus

specification. Holding register 40002 is addressed as 0001 in a Modbus message.
Similarly, coil 33 is addressed as 0032 in a Modbus message.
Refer again to the "Mapping Summary" above. The following sections describe, in
detail, the mapping to each Modbus reference set.
0xxxx Mapping – Modbus Coils. The drive maps the following information to the
0xxxx Modbus set called Modbus Coils:
• Bit-wise map of the CONTROL WORD (selected using parameter 5305 EFB CTRL
PROFILE). The first 32 coils are reserved for this purpose.
Embedded Fieldbus
• Relay output states, numbered sequentially beginning with coil 00033.

The following table summarizes the 0xxxx reference set:
Modbus Internal Location ABB DRV LIM DCU PROFILE ABB DRV FULL
Ref. (All Profiles) (5305 = 0) (5305 = 1) (5305 = 2)
00001 CONTROL WORD – Bit 0 OFF1* STOP OFF1*
00002 CONTROL WORD – Bit 1 OFF2* START OFF2*
00003 CONTROL WORD – Bit 2 OFF3* REVERSE OFF3*
00004 CONTROL WORD – Bit 3 START LOCAL START
00005 CONTROL WORD – Bit 4 N/A RESET RAMP_OUT_ZERO*
00006 CONTROL WORD – Bit 5 RAMP_HOLD* EXT2 RAMP_HOLD*
00007 CONTROL WORD – Bit 6 RAMP_IN_ZERO* RUN_DISABLE RAMP_IN_ZERO*
00008 CONTROL WORD – Bit 7 RESET STPMODE_R RESET
00009 CONTROL WORD – Bit 8 N/A STPMODE_EM N/A
00010 CONTROL WORD – Bit 9 N/A STPMODE_C N/A
00011 CONTROL WORD – Bit 10 N/A RAMP_2 REMOTE_CMD*
00012 CONTROL WORD – Bit 11 EXT2 RAMP_OUT_0 EXT2
00013 CONTROL WORD – Bit 12 N/A RAMP_HOLD N/A
00014 CONTROL WORD – Bit 13 N/A RAMP_IN_0 N/A
00015 CONTROL WORD – Bit 14 N/A REQ_LOCALLOCK N/A
00016 CONTROL WORD – Bit 15 N/A TORQLIM2 N/A
00017 CONTROL WORD – Bit 16 Does not apply FBLOCAL_CTL Does not apply
00018 CONTROL WORD – Bit 17 FBLOCAL_REF
00019 CONTROL WORD – Bit 18 START_DISABLE1
00020 CONTROL WORD – Bit 19 START_DISABLE2
00021… Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved
00032
00033 RELAY OUTPUT 1 Relay Output 1 Relay Output 1 Relay Output 1
* = Active low
For the 0xxxx registers:
• Status is always readable.
• Forcing is allowed by user configuration of the drive for fieldbus control.
• Additional relay outputs are added sequentially.
Embedded Fieldbus
The ACS510 supports the following Modbus function codes for coils:
Function Code Description
01 Read coil status
05 Force single coil
15 (0x0F Hex) Force multiple coils
1xxxx Mapping – Modbus Discrete Inputs. The drive maps the following
information to the 1xxxx Modbus set called Modbus Discrete Inputs:
• Bit-wise map of the STATUS WORD (selected using parameter 5305 EFB CTRL
PROFILE). The first 32 inputs are reserved for this purpose.
• Discrete hardware inputs, numbered sequentially beginning with input 33.

The following table summarizes the 1xxxx reference set:
Modbus Internal Location ABB DRV DCU PROFILE
Ref. (All Profiles) (5305 = 0 OR 2) (5305 = 1)
10001 STATUS WORD – Bit 0 RDY_ON READY
10002 STATUS WORD – Bit 1 RDY_RUN ENABLED
10003 STATUS WORD – Bit 2 RDY_REF STARTED
10004 STATUS WORD – Bit 3 TRIPPED RUNNING
10005 STATUS WORD – Bit 4 OFF_2_STA* ZERO_SPEED
10006 STATUS WORD – Bit 5 OFF_3_STA* ACCELERATE
10007 STATUS WORD – Bit 6 SWC_ON_INHIB DECELERATE
10008 STATUS WORD – Bit 7 ALARM AT_SETPOINT
10009 STATUS WORD – Bit 8 AT_SETPOINT LIMIT
10010 STATUS WORD – Bit 9 REMOTE SUPERVISION
10011 STATUS WORD – Bit 10 ABOVE_LIMIT REV_REF
10012 STATUS WORD – Bit 11 EXT2 REV_ACT
10013 STATUS WORD – Bit 12 RUN_ENABLE PANEL_LOCAL
10014 STATUS WORD – Bit 13 N/A FIELDBUS_LOCAL
10015 STATUS WORD – Bit 14 N/A EXT2_ACT
10016 STATUS WORD – Bit 15 N/A FAULT
10017 STATUS WORD – Bit 16 Reserved ALARM
10018 STATUS WORD – Bit 17 Reserved REQ_MAINT
10019 STATUS WORD – Bit 18 Reserved DIRLOCK
10020 STATUS WORD – Bit 19 Reserved LOCALLOCK
10021 STATUS WORD – Bit 20 Reserved CTL_MODE
10022 STATUS WORD – Bit 21 Reserved Reserved
10027 STATUS WORD – Bit 26 Reserved REQ_CTL
Embedded Fieldbus
Modbus Internal Location ABB DRV DCU PROFILE

Ref. (All Profiles) (5305 = 0 OR 2) (5305 = 1)
10028 STATUS WORD – Bit 27 Reserved REQ_REF1
10029 STATUS WORD – Bit 28 Reserved REQ_REF2
10030 STATUS WORD – Bit 29 Reserved REQ_REF2EXT
10031 STATUS WORD – Bit 30 Reserved ACK_STARTINH
10032 STATUS WORD – Bit 31 Reserved ACK_OFF_ILCK
10033 DI1 DI1 DI1
10034 DI2 DI2 DI2
10035 DI3 DI3 DI3
10036 DI4 DI4 DI4
10037 DI5 DI5 DI5
10038 DI6 DI6 DI6
* = Active low
For the 1xxxx registers:
• Additional discrete inputs are added sequentially.
The ACS510 supports the following Modbus function codes for discrete inputs:
02 Read input status
3xxxx Mapping – Modbus Inputs. The drive maps the following information to the
3xxxx Modbus addresses called Modbus input registers:
• Any user defined analog inputs.
The following table summarizes the input registers:
Modbus ACS510
Remarks
Reference All Profiles
30001 AI1 This register shall report the level of Analog Input 1 (0…100%).
30002 AI2 This register shall report the level of Analog Input 2 (0…100%).
The ACS510 supports the following Modbus function codes for 3xxxx registers:
04 Read 3xxxx input status
4xxxx Register Mapping. The drive maps its parameters and other data to the
4xxxx holding registers as follows:
• 40001…40099 map to drive control and actual values. These registers are
described in the table below.
• 40101…49999 map to drive parameters 0101…9999. Register addresses that do
not correspond to drive parameters are invalid. If there is an attempt to read or
write outside the parameter addresses, the Modbus interface returns an
exception code to the controller.
Embedded Fieldbus
The following table summarizes the 4xxxx drive control registers 40001…40099 (for
4xxxx registers above 40099, see the drive parameter list, e.g. 40102 is parameter
0102):
Modbus Register Access Remarks
40001 CONTROL WORD R/W Maps directly to the profile‘S CONTROL WORD. Supported only
if 5305 = 0 or 2 (ABB Drives profile). Parameter 5319 holds
a copy in hex format.
40002 Reference 1 R/W Range = 0…+20000 (scaled to 0…1105 REF1 MAX), or
-20000…0 (scaled to 1105 REF1 MAX…0).
40003 Reference 2 R/W Range = 0…+10000 (scaled to 0…1108 REF2 MAX), or
-10000…0 (scaled to 1108 REF2 MAX…0).
40004 STATUS WORD R Maps directly to the profile‘S STATUS WORD. Supported only if
5305 = 0 or 2 (ABB Drives profile). Parameter 5320 holds a
copy in hex format.
40005 Actual 1 R By default, stores a copy of 0103 OUTPUT FREQ. Use
(select using 5310) parameter 5310 to select a different actual value for this
register.
40006 Actual 2 R By default, stores a copy of 0104 CURRENT. Use parameter
(select using 5311) 5311 to select a different actual value for this register.
40007 Actual 3 R By default, stores nothing. Use parameter 5312 to select an
(select using 5312) actual value for this register.
(select by 5313) actual value for this register.
40031 ACS510 CONTROL R/W Maps directly to the Least Significant Word of the DCU
WORD LSW profile‘s CONTROL WORD. Supported only if 5305 = 1.
See parameter 0301.
40032 ACS510 CONTROL R Maps directly to the Most Significant Word of the DCU
WORD MSW profile‘s CONTROL WORD. Supported only if 5305 = 1.
See parameter 0302.
40033 ACS510 STATUS R Maps directly to the Least Significant Word of the DCU
WORD LSW profile‘s STATUS WORD. Supported only if 5305 = 1.
See parameter 0303.
40034 ACS510 STATUS R Maps directly to the Most Significant Word of the DCU
WORD MSW profile‘s STATUS WORD. Supported only if 5305 = 1.
See parameter 0304.
Embedded Fieldbus
For the Modbus protocol, drive parameters in group 53 report the parameter
mapping to 4xxxx Registers.
Code Description
5310 EFB PAR 10
Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus register 40005.
5311 EFB PAR 11
5312 EFB PAR 12
5313 EFB PAR 13
5314 EFB PAR 14
5315 EFB PAR 15
5316 EFB PAR 16
5317 EFB PAR 17
5319 EFB PAR 19
Holds a copy (in hex) of the CONTROL WORD, Modbus register 40001.
5320 EFB PAR 20
Holds a copy (in hex) of the STATUS WORD, Modbus register 40004.
Except where restricted by the drive, all parameters are available for both reading
and writing. The parameter writes are verified for the correct value, and for a valid
register addresses.
Note! Parameter writes through standard Modbus are always volatile i.e. modified
values are not automatically stored to permanent memory. Use parameter 1607
PARAM. SAVE to save all altered values.
The ACS510 supports the following Modbus function codes for 4xxxx registers:
03 Read holding 4xxxx registers
06 Preset single 4xxxx register
16 (0x10 Hex) Preset multiple 4xxxx registers
23 (0x17 Hex) Read/write 4xxxx registers
Embedded Fieldbus
Actual Values
The contents of the register addresses 40005…40012 are ACTUAL VALUES and are:
• Specified using parameters 5310…5317.
• Read-only values containing information on the operation of the drive.
• 16-bit words containing a sign bit and a 15-bit integer.
• When negative values, written as the two’s complement of the corresponding
positive value.
• Scaled as described earlier in "Actual Value Scaling".
Exception Codes
Exception codes are serial communication responses from the drive. The ACS510
supports the standard Modbus exception codes defined below.
Exception
Name Meaning
Code
01 ILLEGAL FUNCTION Unsupported Command
02 ILLEGAL DATA ADDRESS The data address received in the query is not allowable. It is not
a defined parameter/group.
03 ILLEGAL DATA VALUE A value contained in the query data field is not an allowable
value for the ACS510, because it is one of the following:
• Outside min. or max. limits.
• Parameter is read-only.
• Message is too long.
• Parameter write not allowed when start is active.
• Parameter write not allowed when factory macro is selected.
For the Modbus protocol, a drive parameter in group 53 holds the most recent
exception code:
Code Description
5318 EFB PAR 18
Holds the most recent exception code.
Embedded Fieldbus
ABB Control Profiles Technical Data
Overview
ABB Drives Profile
The ABB Drives profile provides a standard profile that can be used on multiple
protocols, including Modbus and the protocols available on the FBA module. Two
implementations of the ABB Drives profile are available:
• ABB DRV FULL – This implementation standardizes the control interface with
ACS600 and ACS800 drives.
• ABB DRV LIM– This implementation standardizes the control interface with
ACS400 drives. This implementation does not support two control word bits
supported by ABB DRV FULL.
Except as noted, the following “ABB Drives Profile” descriptions apply to both
implementations.
DCU Profile
The DCU profile extends the control and status interface to 32 bits, and is the
internal interface between the main drive application and the embedded fieldbus
environment.
Control Word
The CONTROL WORD is the principal means for controlling the drive from a fieldbus
system. The fieldbus master station sends the CONTROL WORD to the drive. The drive
switches between states according to the bit-coded instructions in the CONTROL
WORD. Using the CONTROL WORD requires that:
• The drive is in remote (REM) control.

• The serial communication channel is defined as the source for controlling
commands (set using parameters such as 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS, 1002 EXT2
COMMANDS and 1102 EXT1/EXT2 SEL).
• The serial communication channel used is configured to use an ABB control

profile. For example, to use the control profile ABB DRV FULL, requires both
parameter 9802 COMM PROT SEL = 1 (STD MODBUS), and parameter 5305 EFB CTRL
PROFILE = 2 (ABB DRV FULL).
Embedded Fieldbus
ABB Drives Profile

The following table and the state diagram later in this sub-section describe the
CONTROL WORD content for the ABB Drives profile.
ABB Drives Profile CONTROL WORD (See Parameter 5319)
Commanded
Bit Name Value Comments
State
0 OFF1 1 READY TO OPERATE Enter READY TO OPERATE
CONTROL
0 EMERGENCY OFF Drive ramps to stop according to currently
active deceleration ramp (2203 or 2205)
Normal command sequence:
• Enter OFF1 ACTIVE
• Proceed to READY TO SWITCH ON, unless
other interlocks (OFF2, OFF3) are active.
1 OFF2 1 OPERATING Continue operation (OFF2 inactive)
CONTROL
0 EMERGENCY OFF Drive coasts to stop.
• Proceed to SWITCHON INHIBITED
CONTROL
0 EMERGENCY STOP Drive stops within in time specified by
parameter 2208.
• Proceed to SWITCH ON INHIBITED
WARNING! Be sure motor and driven
equipment can be stopped using this mode.
3 INHIBIT 1 OPERATION Enter OPERATION ENABLED (Note the Run
OPERATION ENABLED enable signal must be active. See 1601. If
1601 is set to COMM, this bit also actives the
Run Enable signal.)
0 OPERATION Inhibit operation. Enter OPERATION INHIBITED
INHIBITED
4 Unused (ABB DRV LIM)

RAMP_OUT_ 1 NORMAL OPERATION Enter RAMP FUNCTION GENERATOR:
ZERO ACCELERATION ENABLED
(ABB DRV FULL)
0 RFG OUT ZERO Force ramp function generator output to Zero.
Drive ramps to stop (current and DC voltage
limits in force).
5 RAMP_HOLD 1 RFG OUT ENABLED Enable ramp function.
Enter RAMP FUNCTION GENERATOR:
ACCELERATOR ENABLED
0 RFG OUT HOLD Halt ramping (Ramp Function Generator

output held)
6 RAMP_IN_ 1 RFG INPUT ENABLED Normal operation. Enter OPERATING
ZERO
0 RFG INPUT ZERO Force Ramp Function Generator input to zero.
Embedded Fieldbus
ABB Drives Profile CONTROL WORD (See Parameter 5319)

Commanded
State
7 RESET 0=>1 RESET Fault reset if an active fault exists (Enter
SWITCH-ON INHIBITED). Effective if 1604 =
COMM.
0 OPERATING Continue normal operation

8…9 Unused
10 Unused (ABB DRV LIM)
REMOTE_CMD 1 Fieldbus control enabled.
(ABB DRV FULL)
0 • CW =/ 0 or Ref =/ 0: Retain last CW and Ref.
• CW = 0 and Ref = 0: Fieldbus control
enabled.
• Ref and deceleration/acceleration ramp are
locked.
11 EXT CTRL LOC 1 EXT2 SELECT Select external control location 2 (EXT2).
Effective if 1102 = COMM.
0 EXT1 SELECT Select external control location 1 (EXT1).
12… Unused
15
DCU Profile
The following tables describe the CONTROL WORD content for the DCU profile.
DCU Profile CONTROL WORD (See Parameter 0301)
Bit Name Value Command/Req. Comments
0 STOP 1 Stop Stops according to either the stop mode
parameter or the stop mode requests (bits 7
0 (no op) and 8).
1 START 1 Start Simultaneous STOP and START commands
result in a stop command.
0 (no op)
2 REVERSE 1 Reverse direction This bit XOR’d with the sign of the reference
defines direction.
0 Forward direction
3 LOCAL 1 Local mode When the fieldbus sets this bit, it steals
control and the drive moves to fieldbus local
0 External mode control mode.
4 RESET -> 1 Reset Edge sensitive.
other (no op)
5 EXT2 1 Switch to EXT2
0 Switch to EXT1
6 RUN_DISABLE 1 Run disable Inverted run enable.
0 Run enable on
7 STPMODE_R 1 Normal ramp stop
mode
0 (no op)
Embedded Fieldbus

Bit Name Value Command/Req. Comments
8 STPMODE_EM 1 Emergency ramp
stop mode
0 (no op)
9 STPMODE_C 1 Coast stop mode
0 (no op)
10 RAMP_2 1 Ramp pair 2
0 Ramp pair 1
11 RAMP_OUT_0 1 Ramp output to 0
0 (no op)
12 RAMP_HOLD 1 Ramp freeze
0 (no op)
13 RAMP_IN_0 1 Ramp input to 0
0 (no op)
14 RREQ_LOCALL 1 Local mode lock In lock, drive will not switch to local mode.
OC
0 (no op)
15 RESERVED

Bit Name Value Function Comments
16…26 Reserved
27 REF_CONST 1 Constant speed ref. These bits are only for supervision
purposes.
0 (no op)
28 REF_AVE 1 Average speed ref.
0 (no op)
29 LINK_ON 1 Master is detected
in link
0 Link is down
30 REQ_STARTINH 1 Start inhibit request
is pending
0 Start inhibit request
is OFF
31 OFF_INTERLOCK 1 Panel OFF button For the control panel (or PC tool) this is
pressed the OFF button interlock.
0 (no op)
Status Word
The contents of the STATUS WORD is status information, sent by the drive to the
master station.
Embedded Fieldbus
ABB Drives Profile

STATUS WORD content for the ABB Drives profile.
ABB Drives Profile (EFB) STATUS WORD (See Parameter 5320)
Description
Bit Name Value
(Correspond to states/boxes in the state diagram)
0 RDY_ON 1 READY TO SWITCH ON
0 NOT READY TO SWITCH ON
1 RDY_RUN 1 READY TO OPERATE
0 OFF1 ACTIVE
2 RDY_REF 1 OPERATION ENABLED
0 OPERATION INHIBITED
3 TRIPPED 0…1 FAULT
0 No fault
4 OFF_2_STA 1 OFF2 INACTIVE
0 OFF2 ACTIVE
5 OFF_3_STA 1 OFF3 INACTIVE
0 OFF3 ACTIVE
6 SWC_ON_INHIB 1 SWITCH-ON INHIBIT ACTIVE
0 SWITCH-ON INHIBIT NOT ACTIVE
7 ALARM 1 Warning/alarm (See "Alarm Listing" in the "Diagnostics" section

for details on alarms.)
0 No warning/alarm
8 AT_SETPOINT 1 OPERATING. Actual value equals (within tolerance limits) the
reference value.
0 Actual value is outside tolerance limits (not equal to reference
value).
9 REMOTE 1 Drive control location: REMOTE (EXT1 or EXT2)
0 Drive control location: LOCAL
10 ABOVE_LIMIT 1 Supervised parameter’s value > supervision high limit.
Bit remains “1” until supervised parameter’s value < supervision
low limit.
See group 32, Supervision
0 Supervised parameter’s value < supervision low limit.
Bit remains “0” until supervised parameter’s value > supervision
high limit.
11 EXT CTRL LOC 1 External control location 2 (EXT2) selected
0 External control location 1 (EXT1) selected
12 EXT RUN ENABLE 1 External Run Enable signal received
0 No External Run Enable signal received
13… Unused
15
Embedded Fieldbus
DCU Profile
The following tables describe the STATUS WORD content for the DCU profile.
DCU Profile STATUS WORD (See Parameter 0303)
Bit Name Value Status
0 READY 1 Drive is ready to receive start command.
0 Drive is not ready.
1 ENABLED 1 External run enable signal received.
0 No external run enable signal received.
2 STARTED 1 Drive has received start command.
0 Drive has not received start command.
3 RUNNING 1 Drive is modulating.
0 Drive is not modulating.
4 ZERO_SPEED 1 Drive is at zero speed.
0 Drive has not reached zero speed.
5 ACCELERATE 1 Drive is accelerating.
0 Drive is not accelerating.
6 DECELERATE 1 Drive is decelerating.
0 Drive is not decelerating.
7 AT_SETPOINT 1 Drive is at setpoint.
0 Drive has not reached setpoint.
8 LIMIT 1 Operation is limited by Group 20 settings.
0 Operation is within Group 20 settings.
9 SUPERVISION 1 A supervised parameter (Group 32) is outside its limits.
0 All supervised parameters are within limits.
10 REV_REF 1 Drive reference is in reverse direction.
0 Drive reference is in forward direction.
11 REV_ACT 1 Drive is running in reverse direction.
0 Drive is running in forward direction.
12 PANEL_LOCAL 1 Control is in control panel (or PC tool) local mode.
0 Control is not in control panel local mode.
13 FIELDBUS_LOCAL 1 Control is in fieldbus local mode (steals control panel local).
0 Control is not in fieldbus local mode.
14 EXT2_ACT 1 Control is in EXT2 mode.
0 Control is in EXT1 mode.
15 FAULT 1 Drive is in a fault state.
0 Drive is not in a fault state.
Embedded Fieldbus
DCU Profile STATUS WORD (See Parameter 0304)

Bit Name Value Status
16 ALARM 1 An alarm is on.
0 No alarms are on.
17 REQ_MAINT 1 A maintenance request is pending.
0 No maintenance request is pending.
18 DIRLOCK 1 Direction lock is ON. (Direction change is locked out.)
0 Direction lock is OFF.
19 LOCALLOCK 1 Local mode lock is ON. (Local mode is locked out.)
0 Local mode lock is OFF.
20…25 Reserved
26 REQ_CTL 1 Copy the control word
0 (no op)
27 REQ_REF1 1 Reference 1 requested in this channel.
0 Reference 1 is not requested in this channel.
28 REQ_REF2 1 Reference 2 requested in this channel.
0 Reference 2 is not requested in this channel.
29 REQ_REF2EXT 1 External PID reference 2 requested in this channel.
0 External PID reference 2 is not requested in this channel.
30 ACK_STARTINH 1 A start inhibit from this channel is granted.
0 A start inhibit from this channel is not granted.
31 ACK_OFF_ILCK 1 Start inhibit due to OFF button
0 Normal operation
Embedded Fieldbus
State Diagram
ABB Drives Profile
To illustrate the operation of the state diagram, the following example (ABB DRV LIM
implementation of the ABB Drives profile) uses the control word to start the drive:
• First, the requirements for using the CONTROL WORD must be met. See above.
• When the power is first connected, the state of the drive is not ready to switch on.
See dotted lined path ( ) in the state diagram below.
• Use the CONTROL WORD to step through the state machine states until the
OPERATING state is reached, meaning that the drive is running and follows the
given reference. See table below.
Step CONTROL WORD Value Description
1 CW = 0000 0000 0000 0110 This CW value changes the drive state to READY TO SWITCH
ON.
bit 15 bit 0
2 Wait at least 100 ms before proceeding.
3 CW = 0000 0000 0000 0111 This CW value changes the drive state to READY TO OPERATE.
4 CW = 0000 0000 0000 1111 This CW value changes the drive state to OPERATION ENABLED.
The drive starts, but will not accelerate.
5 CW = 0000 0000 0010 1111 This CW value releases the ramp function generator (RFG)
output, and changes the drive state to RFG: ACCELERATOR
ENABLED.
6 CW = 0000 0000 0110 1111 This CW value releases the ramp function generator (RFG)
output, and changes the drive state to OPERATING. The drive
accelerates to the given reference and follows the reference.
Embedded Fieldbus
The state diagram below describes the start-stop function of CONTROL WORD (CW)
and STATUS WORD (SW) bits for the ABB Drives profile.
From any state From any state From any state
Emergency Stop Emergency Off Fault

OFF3 (CW Bit2=0) OFF2 (CW Bit1=0)
OFF3 OFF2 FAULT (SW Bit3=1)

(SW Bit5=0) (SW Bit4=0)
ACTIVE ACTIVE
(CW Bit7=1)**
n(f)=0 / I=0
From any state

OFF1 (CW Bit0=0)
SWITCH-ON
OFF1 MAINS OFF INHIBITED (SW Bit6=1)
(SW Bit1=0)
ACTIVE
n(f)=0 / I=0 Power ON (CW Bit0=0)
A B* C D NOT READY
(SW Bit0=0)
TO SWITCH ON
(CW Bit3=0) (CW xxxx x1xx xxxx x110)
OPERATION READY TO (SW Bit0=1)

(SW Bit2=0)
INHIBITED SWITCH ON
OPERATION INHIBITED (CW= xxxx x1xx xxxx x111)
B* C* D* READY TO
(SW Bit1=1)
OPERATE
(CW Bit4=0)* (CW Bit3=1 and
SW Bit12=1)
OPERATION
C D (SW Bit2=1)
ENABLED
A
(CW Bit5=0) (CW=xxxx x1xx xxx1* 1111
i.e. Bit 4=1)*
KEY RFG OUTPUT

State D ENABLED*
State change B*
(CW Bit6=0)
Path described in example (CW=xxxx x1xx xx11* 1111
i.e. Bit 5=1)
CW = CONTROL WORD
SW = STATUS WORD RFG: ACCELERATOR
RFG = Ramp Function Generator ENABLED
I = Param. 0104 CURRENT C
f = Param. 0103 OUTPUT FREQ (CW=xxxx x1xx x111* 1111
i.e. Bit 6=1)
n = Speed
* Indicates the features not in ABB DRV LIM OPERATING (SW Bit8=1)
** This state transition also occurs if the fault is
reset from any other source (e.g. digital input). D
Embedded Fieldbus
Reference Scaling
ABB Drives and DCU Profiles
The following table describes REFERENCE scaling for the ABB Drives and DCU
profiles.
Reference
Reference Range Scaling Remarks
Type
REF1 -32767 Frequency -20000 = -(par. 1105) Final reference limited by
… 0=0 1104/1105. Actual motor
+32767 +20000 = (par. 1105) speed limited by 2007/2008
(20000 corresponds to 100%) (frequency).
REF2 -32767 Frequency -10000 = -(par. 1108) Final reference limited by

… 0=0 1107/1108. Actual motor
+32767 +10000 = (par. 1108) speed limited by 2007/2008
PID -10000 = -(par. 1108) Final reference limited by

Reference 0=0 4012/4013 (PID set1) or
+10000 = (par. 1108) 4112/4113 (PID set2).
(10000 corresponds to 100%)
Note! The setting of parameter 1104 REF1 MIN and 1107 REF2 MIN has no effect on
the scaling of references.
When parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT or 1106 REF2 SELECT is set to COMM+AI1 or
COMM*AI1, the reference is scaled as follows:

Value
Reference AI Reference Scaling
Setting
REF1 COMM+AI1 COMM (%) +(AI (%) - 0.5*REF1 MAX (%))
Fieldbus Reference
Correction Coefficient
(100 + 0.5 * (Par. 1105)%
100%
AI1 Input Signal

(100 - 0.5 * (par. 1105))%
0% 50% 100%
Embedded Fieldbus

Value
Reference AI Reference Scaling
Setting
REF1 COMM*AI1 COMM (%) * (AI (%) / 0.5*REF1 MAX (%))
Fieldbus Reference
200%
100%
AI1 Input Signal

(100 - 0.5 * (par. 1105))%
0% 50% 100%
REF2 COMM+AI1 COMM (%) + (AI (%) - 0.5*REF2 MAX (%))

Fieldbus Reference
(100 + 0.5 * (Par. 1108)%
100%
AI1 Input Signal

(100 - 0.5 * (par. 1108)%
0% 50% 100%

Fieldbus Reference
200%
100%
AI1 Input Signal

0%
0% 50% 100%
Embedded Fieldbus
Reference Handling
Use group 10 parameters to configure for control of rotation direction for each control
location (EXT1 and EXT2). The following diagrams illustrate how group 10 parameters
and the sign of the fieldbus reference interact to produce REFERENCE values (REF1
and REF2). Note, fieldbus references are bipolar, that is they can be positive or
negative.
ABB Drives Profile
Parameter Value Setting AI Reference Scaling
*
1003 DIRECTION 1 (FORWARD)
Resultant Ref.
Max. Ref
Fieldbus
Reference -163% -100% 100% 163%
-(Max. Ref.)
1003 DIRECTION* 2 (REVERSE) Max. Ref

Resultant Ref.
Fieldbus -163% -100% 100% 163%

Reference
-(Max. Ref.)
1003 DIRECTION* 3 (REQUEST)

Resultant Ref.
Max. Ref
Fieldbus -163% -100%

Reference 100% 163%
-(Max. Ref.)
Embedded Fieldbus
Fieldbus Adapter
Overview
The ACS510 can be set up to accept control from an external system using standard
serial communication protocols. When using serial communication, the ACS510 can
either:
• Receive all of its control information from the fieldbus, or
• Be controlled from some combination of fieldbus control and other available
control locations, such as digital or analog inputs, and the control panel.
Fieldbus Controller
Fieldbus
Other Devices
Connect using either:

• Standard embedded fieldbus (EFB) at
terminals X1:28…32
• Fieldbus adapter (FBA) module
mounted in slot 2 (option Rxxx)
Two basic serial communications configurations are available:

• Embedded fieldbus (EFB) – See "Embedded Fieldbus" on page 143.
• Fieldbus adapter (FBA) – With one of the optional FBA modules in the drive’s
expansion slot 2, the drive can communicate to a control system using one of the
following protocols:
– Profibus-DP®
– LonWorks®
– CANopen®
– DeviceNet®
– ControlNet®
The ACS510 detects automatically which communication protocol is used by the
plug-in fieldbus adapter. The default settings for each protocol assume that the
profile used is the protocol’s industry-standard drive profile (e.g. PROFIdrive for
PROFIBUS, AC/DC Drive for DeviceNet). All of the FBA protocols can also be
configured for the ABB Drives profile.
Configuration details depend on the protocol and profile used.These details are
provided in a user’s manual supplied with the FBA module.
Details for the ABB Drives profile (which apply for all protocols) are provided in "ABB
Drives Profile Technical Data" on page 186.
Fieldbus Adapter
Control Interface
In general, the basic control interface between the fieldbus system and the drive
consists of:
• Output Words:
– CONTROL WORD
– REFERENCE (frequency)
– Others: The drive supports a maximum of 15 output words. Protocols limits
may further restrict the total.
• Input Words:
– STATUS WORD
– Actual Value (frequency)
– Others: The drive supports a maximum of 15 input words. Protocols limits may
further restrict the total.
Note! The words “output” and “input” are used as seen from the fieldbus controller
point of view. For example an output describes data flow from the fieldbus controller
to the drive and appears as an input from the drive point of view.
The meanings of the controller interface words are not restricted by the ACS510.
However, the profile used may set particular meanings.
Fieldbus Controller
Fieldbus
Control Word (CW)

References
Process I/O
(cyclic) Status Word (SW)
Actual Values
Service
Messages Parameter R/W Requests/Responses
(Acyclic)
Control Word
The CONTROL WORD is the principal means for controlling the drive from a fieldbus
system. The fieldbus controller sends the CONTROL WORD to the drive. The drive
switches between states according to the bit-coded instructions in the CONTROL
WORD. Using the CONTROL WORD requires that:
• The drive is in remote (REM) control.

• The serial communication channel is defined as the source for controlling
commands from EXT1 (set using parameters 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS and 1102
EXT1/EXT2 SEL).
• The external plug-in fieldbus adapter is activated:
Fieldbus Adapter
– Parameter 9802 COMM PROT SEL = 4 (EXT FBA).

– The external plug-in fieldbus adapter is configured to use the drive profile
mode or drive profile objects.
The content of the CONTROL WORD depends on the protocol/profile used. See the
user’s manual provided with the FBA module and/or the "ABB Drives Profile
Technical Data".
Status Word
The STATUS WORD is a 16-bit word containing status information, sent by the drive to
the fieldbus controller. The content of the STATUS WORD depends on the protocol/
profile used. See the user’s manual provided with the FBA module and/or the "ABB
Drives Profile Technical Data" section.
Reference
The contents of each REFERENCE word:
• Can be used, as frequency reference.
• Is a 16-bit word comprised of a sign bit and a 15-bit integer.
• Negative references (indicating reversed rotation direction) are indicated by the
two’s complement of the corresponding positive reference value.
The use of a second reference (REF2) is supported only when a protocol is
configured for the ABB Drives profile.
Reference scaling is fieldbus type specific. See the user’s manual provided with the
FBA module and/or the following sections as appropriate:
• "ABB Drives Profile Technical Data"
• "Generic Profile Technical Data"
Actual Values
Actual Values are 16-bit words containing information on selected operations of the
drive. Drive Actual Values (for example, group 01 parameters) can be mapped to
Input Words using group 51 parameters (protocol-dependent, but typically
parameters 5104…5126).
Planning
Network planning should address the following questions:
• What types and quantities of devices must be connected to the network?
• What control information must be sent down to the drives?
• What feedback information must be sent from the drives to the controlling
system?
Fieldbus Adapter
Mechanical and Electrical Installation – FBA
Warning! Connections should be made only while the drive is disconnected from the
power source.
Overview
The FBA (fieldbus adapter) is a plug-in module that fits in the drive’s expansion slot
2. The module is held in place with plastic retaining clips and two screws. The
screws also ground the shield for the module cable, and connect the module GND
signals to the drive control board.
On installation of the module, electrical connection to the drive is automatically
established through the 34-pin connector.
Mounting Procedure
1
Note! Install the input power and motor cables first.
2
1. Insert the module carefully into the drive expansion slot 2
until the retaining clips lock the module into position.
2. Fasten the two screws (included) to the stand-offs.
Note! Correct installation of the screws is essential for

fulfilling the EMC requirements and for proper operation of
the module.
7 X00301
3. Open the appropriate knockout in the conduit box and
install the cable clamp for the network cable.
4. Route the network cable through the cable clamp.
5. Connect the network cable to the module’s network 5
connector.
6
6. Tighten the cable clamp.
3
7. Install the conduit box cover (1 screw).
4
8. For configuration information see the following: X00302
• "Communication Set-up – FBA" below.

• "Activate Drive Control Functions – FBA" on page 179.
• The protocol specific documentation provided with the module.
Fieldbus Adapter
Communication Set-up – FBA
Serial Communication Selection

To activate the serial communication, use parameter 9802 COMM PROTOCOL SEL. Set
9802 = 4 (EXT FBA).
Serial Communication Configuration

Setting 9802, together with mounting a particular FBA module, automatically sets the
appropriate default values in parameters that define the communication process.
These parameters and descriptions are defined in the user’s manual supplied with
the FBA module.
• Parameter 5101 is automatically configured.
• Parameters 5102…5126 are protocol-dependent and define, for example, the
profile used, and additional I/O words. These parameters are referred to as the
fieldbus configuration parameters. See the user’s manual provided with the FBA
module for details on the fieldbus configuration parameters.
• Parameter 5127 forces the validation of changes to parameters 5102…5126. If
parameter 5127 is not used, changes to parameters 5102…5126 take affect only
after the drive power is cycled.
• Parameters 5128…5133 provide data about the FBA module currently installed
(e.g. component versions and status).
The Parameters Description section lists the group 51 parameters.
Activate Drive Control Functions – FBA

Fieldbus control of various drive functions requires configuration to:
• Tell the drive to accept fieldbus control of the function.
• Define as a fieldbus input, any drive data required for control.
• Define as a fieldbus output, any control data required by the drive.
The following sections describe, at a general level, the configuration required for
each control function. The last column in each table below is deliberately blank. See
the user’s manual supplied with the FBA module for the appropriate entry.
Start/Stop Direction Control

Using the fieldbus for start/stop/direction control of the drive requires:
Protocol
Reference
1001 EXT1 10 (COMM) Start/Stop controlled by fieldbus with
COMMANDS Ext1 selected.
Fieldbus Adapter
Protocol
Reference
1002 EXT2 10 (COMM) Start/Stop by controlled fieldbus with
COMMANDS Ext2 selected.
1003* DIRECTION 3 (REQUEST) Direction controlled by fieldbus.
Input Reference Select

Using the fieldbus to provide input reference to the drive requires:
• Drive parameter value set as defined below.
• Fieldbus controller supplied reference word(s) in the appropriate location. (The
Protocol
Reference
1102 EXT1/EXT2 SEL 8 (COMM) Ref. selected by fieldbus.
(Required only if 2 references used.)
1103 REF1 SEL 8 (COMM) Input reference 1supplied by fieldbus.
9 (COMM+AI1)
10 (COMM*AI1)
1106 REF2 SEL 8 (COMM) Input reference 1 supplied by fieldbus.
9 (COMM+AI) (Required only if 2 references used.)
10 (COMM*AI)
Note! Multiple references are supported only when using the ABB Drives profile.
Scaling
Where required, REFERENCES can be scaled. See the "Reference Scaling" in the
following sections, as appropriate:
System Control
Using the fieldbus for miscellaneous drive control requires:
• Fieldbus controller command(s) in the appropriate location. (The location is
defined by the Protocol Reference, which is protocol dependent.)
Protocol
Reference
1601 RUN ENABLE 7 (COMM) Run enable by fieldbus.
1604 FAULT RESET SEL 8 (COMM) Fault reset by fieldbus.
Fieldbus Adapter
Protocol
Reference
1607 PARAM SAVE 1 (SAVE) Saves altered parameters to memory (then
value returns to 0).
Relay Output Control

Using the fieldbus for relay output control requires:
• Fieldbus controller supplied, binary coded, relay command(s) in the appropriate
location. (The location is defined by the Protocol Reference, which is protocol
dependent.)
Protocol
Reference
1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 35 (COMM) Relay Output 1 controlled by fieldbus.
1402 RELAY OUTPUT 2 36 (COMM(-1)) Relay Output 2 controlled by fieldbus.
1403 RELAY OUTPUT 3 Relay Output 3 controlled by fieldbus.

1. More than 3 relays requires the addition of a relay extension module.
Note! Relay status feedback occurs without configuration as defined below.
Drive Parameter Value Protocol Reference

0122 RO 1-3 STATUS Relay 1…3 status.
0123 RO 4-6 STATUS Relay 4…6 status.
Analog Output Control

Using the fieldbus for analog output control (e.g. PID setpoint) requires:
• Fieldbus controller supplied analog value(s) in the appropriate location. (The
Protocol
Reference
1501 AO1 CONTENT SEL 135 (COMM VALUE 1) Analog Output 1 controlled by –
writing to parameter 0135.
0135 COMM VALUE 1 –
1502 AO1 CONTENT MIN Set appropriate Used for scaling –
… … values.
1505 MAXIMUM AO1
1506 FILTER AO1 Filter time constant for AO1. –

1507 AO2 CONTENT SEL 136 (COMM VALUE 2) Analog Output 2 controlled by –
writing to parameter 0136.
0136 COMM VALUE 2 –
Fieldbus Adapter
Protocol
Reference
1508 AO2 CONTENT MIN Set appropriate Used for scaling –
… … values.
1511 MAXIMUM AO2
1512 FILTER AO2 Filter time constant for AO2. –
PID Control Setpoint Source

Using the following settings to select the fieldbus as the setpoint source for PID
loops:
Protocol
Drive Parameter Value Setting
Reference
4010 SET POINT SEL (Set 1) 8 (COMM VALUE 1) Setpoint is input reference 2
9 (COMM + AI1) (+/-/* AI1)
4110 SET POINT SEL (Set 2)
10 (COMM*AI1)
4210 SET POINT SEL (Ext/Trim)
Communication Fault
When using fieldbus control, specify the drive’s action if serial communication is lost.
3018 COMM FAULT FUNC 0 (NOT SEL) Set for appropriate drive
1 (FAULT) response.
2 (CONST SP7)
3 (LAST SPEED)
3019 COMM FAULT TIME Set time delay before acting on a communication loss.
Feedback from the Drive – FBA

Inputs to the controller (drive outputs) have pre-defined meanings established by the
protocol. This feedback does not require drive configuration. The following table lists
a sample of feedback data. For a complete listing, see all parameters listed in
"Complete Parameter Descriptions".
Drive Parameter Protocol Reference
0102 SPEED
0103 FREQ OUTPUT
0104 CURRENT
0105 TORQUE
0106 POWER
0107 DC BUS VOLT
0109 OUTPUT VOLTAGE
0301 FB STATUS WORD – bit 0 (STOP)
0301 FB STATUS WORD – bit 2 (REV)
0118 DI1-3 STATUS – bit 1 (DI3)
Fieldbus Adapter
Scaling
To scale the drive parameter values see the "Actual Value Scaling" in the following
sections, as appropriate:
Diagnostics – FBA
Fault Handling
The ACS510 provides fault information as follows:
• The control panel display shows a fault code and text. See "Diagnostics" starting
on page 195 for a complete description.
• Parameters 0401 LAST FAULT, 0402 PREVIOUS FAULT1 and 0403 PREVIOUS FAULT2
store the most recent faults.
• For fieldbus access, the drive reports faults as a hexadecimal value, assigned
and coded according to the DRIVECOM specification. See table below. Not all
profiles support requesting fault codes using this specification. For profiles that
support this specification, the profile documentation defines the proper fault
request process.
Fieldbus Fault Code
Drive Fault Code
(DRIVECOM specification)
1 OVERCURRENT 2310h
2 DC OVERVOLT 3210h
3 DEV OVERTEMP 4210h
4 SHORT CIRC 2340h
5 Reserved FF6Bh
6 DC UNDERVOLT 3220h
7 AI1 LOSS 8110h
8 AI2 LOSS 8110h
9 MOT TEMP 4310h
10 PANEL LOSS 5300h
11 NOT USED
12 MOTOR STALL 7121h
14 EXTERNAL FLT 1 9000h
15 EXTERNAL FLT 2 9001h
16 EARTH FAULT 2330h
17 UNDERLOAD FF6Ah
18 THERM FAIL 5210h
19 OPEX LINK 7500h
20 OPEX PWR 5414h
21 CURR MEAS 2211h
Fieldbus Adapter
Fieldbus Fault Code

Drive Fault Code
22 SUPPLY PHASE 3130h
23 NOT USED
24 NOT USED
25 Reserved FF80h
26 DRIVE ID 5400h
27 CONFIG FILE 630Fh
28 SERIAL 1 ERR 7510h
29 EFB CONFIG FILE 6306h
30 FORCE TRIP FF90h
31 EFB 1 FF92h
32 EFB 2 FF93h
33 EFB 3 FF94h
34 MOTOR PHASE FF56h
35 OUTPUT WIRING FF95h
36 INCOMP SWTYPE 630Fh
101 SERF CORRUPT FF55h
102 Reserved FF55h
103 SERF MACRO FF55h
104 Reserved FF55h
105 Reserved FF55h
201 DSP T1 OVERLOAD 6100h
204 DSP STACK ERROR 6100h
205 Reserved (obsolete) 5000h
206 OMIO ID ERROR 5000h
207 EFB LOAD ERR 6100h
1000 PAR HZRPM 6320h
1001 PAR PFCREFNG 6320h
1002 Reserved (obsolete) 6320h
1003 PAR AI SCALE 6320h
1004 PAR AO SCALE 6320h
1005 PAR PCU 2 6320h
1006 EXT ROMISSING 6320h
1007 PAR FBUSMISSING 6320h
1008 NOT USED
1009 PAR PCU1 6320h
1012 PAR PFC IO 1 6320h
Fieldbus Adapter
Fieldbus Fault Code

Drive Fault Code
1013 PAR PFC IO 2 6320h
1014 PAR PFC IO 3 6320h
1015 PAR USER DEFIND U/F
Serial Communication Diagnostics

Besides the drive fault codes, the FBA module has diagnostic tools. Refer to the
user’s manual supplied with the FBA module.
Fieldbus Adapter
ABB Drives Profile Technical Data
Overview
The ABB Drives profile provides a standard profile that can be used on multiple
protocols, including protocols available on the FBA module. This section describes
the ABB Drives profile implemented for FBA modules.
Control Word
As described earlier in "Control Interface" the CONTROL WORD is the principal means
for controlling the drive from a fieldbus system.
CONTROL WORD content for the ABB Drives profile.
ABB Drives Profile (FBA) CONTROL WORD

Commanded
State
0 OFF1 1 READY TO OPERATE Enter READY TO OPERATE
CONTROL
0 EMERGENCY OFF Drive ramps to stop according to currently
active deceleration ramp (2203 or 2205)
• Proceed to READY TO SWITCH ON,
unless other interlocks (OFF2, OFF3) are
active.
CONTROL
0 EMERGENCY OFF Drive coasts to stop.
• Proceed to SWITCHON INHIBITED
CONTROL
0 EMERGENCY STOP Drive stops within in time specified by
parameter 2208.
• Proceed to SWITCH ON INHIBITED
WARNING! Be sure motor and driven
equipment can be stopped using this
mode.
3 INHIBIT 1 OPERATION Enter OPERATION ENABLED (Note the Run
OPERATION ENABLED enable signal must be active. See 1601. If
1601 is set to COMM, this bit also actives
the Run Enable signal.)
0 OPERATION Inhibit operation. Enter OPERATION
INHIBITED INHIBITED
4 RAMP_OUT_ 1 NORMAL OPERATION Enter RAMP FUNCTION GENERATOR:

ZERO ACCELERATION ENABLED
0 RFG OUT ZERO Force ramp function generator output to

Zero. Drive ramps to stop (current and DC
voltage limits in force).
Fieldbus Adapter
ABB Drives Profile (FBA) CONTROL WORD

Commanded
State
5 RAMP_HOLD 1 RFG OUT ENABLED Enable ramp function.
Enter RAMP FUNCTION GENERATOR:
ACCELERATOR ENABLED
0 RFG OUT HOLD Halt ramping (Ramp Function Generator

output held)
6 RAMP_IN_ 1 RFG INPUT ENABLED Normal operation. Enter OPERATING
ZERO
0 RFG INPUT ZERO Force Ramp Function Generator input to
zero.
7 RESET 0=>1 RESET Fault reset if an active fault exists (Enter
SWITCH-ON INHIBITED). Effective if 1604 =
COMM.
0 OPERATING Continue normal operation

8…9 Unused
10 REMOTE_CMD 1 Fieldbus control enabled
0 • CW =/ 0 or Ref =/ 0: Retain last CW and
Ref.
• CW = 0 and Ref = 0: Fieldbus control
enabled.
• Ref and deceleration/acceleration ramp
are locked.
11 EXT CTRL LOC 1 EXT2 SELECT Select external control location 2 (EXT2).
0 EXT1 SELECT Select external control location 1 (EXT1).
12…15 Unused
Status Word
As described earlier in "Control Interface", the contents of the STATUS WORD is status
information, sent by the drive to the master station. The following table and the state
diagram later in this sub-section describe the status word content.
ABB Drives Profile (FBA) STATUS WORD
Description
Bit Name Value
0 RDY_ON 1 READY TO SWITCH ON
0 NOT READY TO SWITCH ON
1 RDY_RUN 1 READY TO OPERATE
0 OFF1 ACTIVE
2 RDY_REF 1 OPERATION ENABLED
0 OPERATION INHIBITED
3 TRIPPED 0…1 FAULT
0 No fault
Fieldbus Adapter
ABB Drives Profile (FBA) STATUS WORD

Description
Bit Name Value
4 OFF_2_STA 1 OFF2 inactive
0 OFF2 ACTIVE
5 OFF_3_STA 1 OFF3 inactive

0 OFF3 ACTIVE
6 SWC_ON_INHIB 1 SWITCH-ON INHIBIT ACTIVE
0 SWITCH-ON INHIBIT NOT ACTIVE
7 ALARM 1 Warning/alarm (See "Alarm Listing" in the "Diagnostics"

section for details on alarms.)
0 No warning/alarm
8 AT_SETPOINT 1 OPERATING. Actual value equals (within tolerance limits)
the reference value.
0 Actual value is outside tolerance limits (not equal to
reference value).
9 REMOTE 1 Drive control location: REMOTE (EXT1 or EXT2)
0 Drive control location: LOCAL
10 ABOVE_LIMIT 1 Supervised parameter’s value > supervision high limit.
Bit remains “1” until supervised parameter’s value <
supervision low limit.
0 Supervised parameter’s value < supervision low limit.
Bit remains “0” until supervised parameter’s value >
supervision high limit.
11 EXT CTRL LOC 1 External control location 2 (EXT2) selected
0 External control location 1 (EXT1) selected
12 EXT RUN ENABLE 1 External Run Enable signal received
0 No External Run Enable signal received
13… 15 Unused
Fieldbus Adapter
The state diagram below describes the start-stop function of CONTROL WORD (CW)
and STATUS WORD (SW) bits.
From any state From any state From any state
Emergency Stop Emergency Off Fault

OFF3 (CW Bit2=0) OFF2 (CW Bit1=0)
OFF3 OFF2 FAULT (SW Bit3=1)

(SW Bit5=0) (SW Bit4=0)
ACTIVE ACTIVE
(CW Bit7=1)
n(f)=0 / I=0
From any state

OFF1 (CW Bit0=0)
SWITCH-ON
OFF1 MAINS OFF INHIBITED (SW Bit6=1)
(SW Bit1=0)
ACTIVE
n(f)=0 / I=0 Power ON (CW Bit0=0)
A B C D NOT READY
(SW Bit0=0)
TO SWITCH ON
(CW Bit3=0) (CW xxxx x1xx xxxx x110)
OPERATION READY TO (SW Bit0=1)

(SW Bit2=0)
INHIBITED SWITCH ON
OPERATION INHIBITED (CW= xxxx x1xx xxxx x111)
B C D READY TO
(SW Bit1=1)
OPERATE
(CW Bit4=0) (CW Bit3=1 and
SW Bit12=1)
C D OPERATION
(SW Bit2=1)
ENABLED
A
(CW Bit5=0) (CW=xxxx x1xx xxx1 1111)
RFG OUTPUT
D ENABLED
B
(CW Bit6=0)
(CW=xxxx x1xx xx11 1111)
KEY
State
State change RFG: ACCELERATOR
CW = CONTROL WORD ENABLED
SW = STATUS WORD C
RFG = Ramp Function Generator (CW=xxxx x1xx x111 1111)
I = Param. 0104 CURRENT
OPERATING (SW Bit8=1)
f = Param. 0103 OUTPUT FREQ
n = Speed D
Fieldbus Adapter
Reference
As described earlier in "Control Interface", the REFERENCE word is a frequency
reference.
Reference Scaling
The following table describes REFERENCE scaling for the ABB Drives profile.
ABB Drives Profile (FBA)
Reference
Type
REF1 -32767… Frequency -20000 = -(par. 1105) Final reference limited by
+32767 0=0 1104/1105. Actual motor
+20000 = (par. 1105) speed limited by 2007/2008
REF2 -32767… Frequency -10000 = -(par. 1108) Final reference limited by

+32767 0=0 1107/1108. Actual motor
+10000 = (par. 1108) speed limited by 2007/2008
PID -10000 = -(par. 1108) Final reference limited by

Reference 0=0 4012/4013 (PID set1) or
+10000 = (par. 1108) 4112/4113 (PID set2).
(10000 corresponds to 100%)
Note! The setting of parameter 1104 REF1 MIN and 1107 REF2 MIN has no effect on
the scaling of references.
When parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT or 1106 REF2 SELECT is set to COMM+AI1 or
COMM*AI1, the reference is scaled as follows:

Reference Value Setting AI Reference Scaling
REF1 COMM+AI1 COMM (%) +(AI (%) - 0.5*REF1 MAX (%))
Fieldbus Reference
(100 + 0.5 * (Par. 1105)%
100%
AI1 Input Signal

(100 - 0.5 * (par. 1105))%
0% 50% 100%
Fieldbus Adapter

Reference Value Setting AI Reference Scaling
Fieldbus Reference
200%
100%
AI1 Input Signal

(100 - 0.5 * (par. 1105))%
0% 50% 100%
REF2 COMM+AI1 COMM (%) + (AI (%) - 0.5*REF2 MAX (%))

Fieldbus Reference
(100 + 0.5 * (Par. 1108)%
100%
AI1 Input Signal

(100 - 0.5 * (par. 1108)%
0% 50% 100%
Fieldbus Reference
200%
100%
AI1 Input Signal

0%
0% 50% 100%
Fieldbus Adapter
Reference Handling
Use group 10 parameters to configure for control of rotation direction for each control
location (EXT1 and EXT2). The following diagrams illustrate how group 10 parameters
and the sign of the fieldbus reference interact to produce REFERENCE values (REF1
and REF2). Note, fieldbus references are bipolar, that is they can be positive or
negative.
ABB Drives Profile
Parameter Value Setting AI Reference Scaling
*
1003 DIRECTION 1 (FORWARD) Resultant Ref.
Max. Ref
Fieldbus
Reference -163% -100% 100% 163%
-(Max. Ref.)
1003 DIRECTION* 2 (REVERSE) Max. Ref
Resultant Ref.
Fieldbus -163% -100% 100% 163%

Reference
-(Max. Ref.)
1003 DIRECTION* 3 (REQUEST) Resultant Ref.

Max. Ref
Fieldbus -163% -100%

Reference 100% 163%
-(Max. Ref.)
Fieldbus Adapter
Actual Value
As described earlier in "Control Interface", Actual Values are words containing drive
values.

The scaling of the integers sent to the fieldbus as Actual Values depends on the
resolution of the selected drive parameter. Except as noted for Data Words 5 and 6
below, scale the feedback integer using the resolution listed for the parameter in the
"Complete Parameter List for ACS510" section. For example:
Feedback Integer Parameter Resolution Scaled Value
1 0.1 mA 1 * 0.1 mA = 0.1 mA
10 0.1% 10 * 0.1% = 1%
Data words 5 and 6 are scaled as follows:

ABB Drives Profile
Data Word Contents Scaling
5 ACTUAL SPEED -20000 … +20000 = -(par. 1105) … +(par. 1105)
6 TORQUE -10000 … +10000 = -100% … +100%
Actual Value Mapping

See the user’s manual supplied with the FBA module.
Fieldbus Adapter
Generic Profile Technical Data
Overview
The generic profile aims to fulfill the industry-standard drive profile for each protocol
(e.g. PROFIdrive for PROFIBUS, AC/DC Drive for DeviceNet).
Control Word
As described earlier in "Control Interface" the CONTROL WORD is the principal means
for controlling the drive from a fieldbus system. For specific CONTROL WORD content,
see the user’s manual provided with the FBA module.
Status Word
As described earlier in "Control Interface", the contents of the STATUS WORD is status
information, sent by the drive to the master station. For specific STATUS WORD
content, see the user’s manual provided with the FBA module.
Reference
As described earlier in "Control Interface", the REFERENCE word is a frequency
reference.
Note! REF2 is not supported by the Generic Drive profiles.
Reference Scaling
REFERENCE scaling is fieldbus type specific. However, at the drive, the meaning of a
100% REFERENCE value is fixed as described in the table below. For a detailed
description on the range and scaling of the REFERENCE, see the user’s manual
supplied with the FBA module.
Generic Profile
Reference
Type
REF Fieldbus Frequency -100% = -(par. 9907) Final reference limited by
specific 0=0 1104/1105.
+100 = (par. 9907) Actual motor speed limited by 2007/
2008 (frequency).
Actual Values
As described earlier in "Control Interface", Actual Values are words containing drive
values.
Fieldbus Adapter

For Actual Values, scale the feedback integer using the parameter’s resolution. (See
"Complete Parameter List for ACS510" section for parameter resolutions.) For
example:
Feedback Parameter (Feedback Integer) * (Parameter Resolution) =
Integer Resolution Scaled Value
1 0.1 mA 1 * 0.1 mA = 0.1 mA
10 0.1% 10 * 0.1% = 1%
Where parameters are in percent, the "Complete Parameter List for ACS510"
section specifies what parameter corresponds to 100%. In such cases, to convert
from percent to engineering units, multiply by the value of the parameter that defines
100% and divide by 100%. For example:
Value of the (Feedback Integer) * (Parameter Resolution) *
Feedback Parameter
Parameter that (Value of 100% Ref.) / 100% =
Integer Resolution
defines 100% Scaled Value
10 0.1% 1500 rpm1 10 * 0.1% * 1500 RPM / 100% = 15 rpm
100 0.1% 500 Hz2 100 * 0.1% * 500 Hz / 100% = 50 Hz
1. Assuming, for the sake of this example, that the Actual Value uses parameter 9908 MOT NOM SPEED
as the 100% reference, and that 9908 = 1500 rpm.
2. Assuming, for the sake of this example, that the Actual Value uses parameter 9907 MOT NOM FREQ
as the 100% reference, and that 9907 = 500 Hz.
Actual Value Mapping

See the user’s manual supplied with the FBA module.
Fieldbus Adapter
Diagnostics
Warning! Do not attempt any measurement, parts replacement or other service

procedure not described in this manual. Such action will void the warranty, may
endanger correct operation, and increase downtime and expense.
Warning! All electrical installation and maintenance work described in this chapter
should only be undertaken by qualified service personnel. The Safety instructions on
the first pages of this manual must be followed.
Diagnostic Displays
The drive detects error situations and reports them using:
• The green and red LED on the body of the drive
• The status LED on the control panel (if an Assistant control panel is attached to
the drive)
• The control panel display (if a control panel is attached to the drive)
• The Fault Word and Alarm Word parameter bits (parameters 0305 to 0309). See
"Group 03: FB Actual Signals" on page 68 for the bit definitions.
The form of the display depends on the severity of the error. You can specify the
severity for many errors by directing the drive to:
• Ignore the error situation.
• Report the situation as an alarm.
• Report the situation as a fault.
Red – Faults
The drive signals that it has detected a severe error, or fault, by:
• Enabling the red LED on the drive (LED is either steady on or blinking).
• Setting an appropriate bit in a Fault Word parameter (0305 to 0307).
• Overriding the control panel display with the display of a fault code.
• Stopping the motor (if it was on).
The fault code on the control panel display is temporary. Pressing any of the
following buttons removes the fault message: MENU, ENTER, UP button, or DOWN
button. The message reappears after a few seconds if the control panel is not
touched and the fault is still active.
Diagnostics
Flashing Green – Alarms

For less severe errors, called alarms, the diagnostic display is advisory. For these
situations, the drive is simply reporting that it had detected something “unusual.” In
these situations, the drive:
• Flashes the green LED on the drive (does not apply to alarms that arise from
control panel operation errors).
• Sets an appropriate bit in an Alarm Word parameter (0308 or 0309). See "Group
03: FB Actual Signals" on page 68 for the bit definitions.
• Overrides the control panel display with the display of an alarm code and/or
name.
Alarm messages disappear from the control panel display after a few seconds. The
message returns periodically as long as the alarm condition exists.
Correcting Faults
The recommended corrective action for faults is:
• Use the "Fault Listing" table below to find and address the root cause of the
problem.
• Reset the drive. See "Fault Resetting" on page 202.
Fault Listing
Fault Fault Name In

Description and Recommended Corrective Action
Code Panel
1 OVERCURRENT Output current is excessive. Check for and correct:
• Excessive motor load.
• Insufficient acceleration time (parameters 2202 ACCELER TIME 1 and
2205 ACCELER TIME 2).
• Faulty motor, motor cables or connections.
2 DC OVERVOLT Intermediate circuit DC voltage is excessive. Check for and correct:
• Static or transient overvoltages in the input power supply.
• Insufficient deceleration time (parameters 2203 DECELER TIME 1 and
2206 DECELER TIME 2).
• Undersized brake chopper (if present).
• Verify that overvoltage controller is ON (using parameter 2005).
3 DEV OVERTEMP Drive heatsink is overheated. Temperature is at or above limit.
R1…R4 : 115 °C (239 °F)
R5/R6: 125 °C (257 °F)
Check for and correct:
• Fan failure.
• Obstructions in the air flow.
• Dirt or dust coating on the heat sink.
• Excessive ambient temperature.
Diagnostics
Fault Fault Name In

Code Panel
4 SHORT CIRC Fault current. Check for and correct:
• A short-circuit in the motor cable(s) or motor.
• Supply disturbances.
5 REVERSED Not used.
6 DC UNDERVOLT Intermediate circuit DC voltage is not sufficient. Check for and correct:
• Missing phase in the input power supply.
• Blown fuse.
• Undervoltage on mains.
7 AI1 LOSS Analog input 1 loss. Analog input value is less than AI1FLT LIMIT (3021).
• Source and connection for analog input.
• Parameter settings for AI1FLT LIMIT (3021) and 3001 AI<MIN FUNCTION.
8 AI2 LOSS Analog input 2 loss. Analog input value is less than AI2FLT LIMIT (3022).
• Source and connection for analog input.
• Parameter settings for AI2FLT LIMIT (3022) and 3001 AI<MIN FUNCTION.
9 MOT TEMP Motor is too hot, based on either the drive’s estimate or on temperature
feedback.
• Check for overloaded motor.
• Adjust the parameters used for the estimate (3005…3009).
• Check the temperature sensors and Group 35 parameters.
10 PANEL LOSS Panel communication is lost and either:
• Drive is in local control mode (the control panel displays LOC), or
• Drive is in remote control mode (REM) and is parameterized to accept
start/stop, direction or reference from the control panel.
To correct check:
• Communication lines and connections
• Parameter 3002 PANEL COMM ERROR.
• Parameters in Group 10: Command Inputs and Group 11: Reference
Select (if drive operation is REM).
11 REVERSED Not used.
12 MOTOR STALL Motor or process stall. Motor is operating in the stall region. Check for and
correct:
• Excessive load.
• Insufficient motor power.
• Parameters 3010…3012.
13 RESERVED Not used.
14 EXTERNAL FLT 1 Digital input defined to report first external fault is active. See parameter
3003 EXTERNAL FAULT 1.
15 EXTERNAL FLT 2 Digital input defined to report second external fault is active. See parameter
3004 EXTERNAL FAULT 2.
Diagnostics
Fault Fault Name In

Code Panel
16 EARTH FAULT Possible ground fault detected in the motor or motor cables. The drive
monitors for ground faults while the drive is running and while the drive is
not running. Detection is more sensitive when the drive is not running and
can produce false positives.
Possible corrections:
• Check for/correct faults in the input wiring.
• Verify that motor cable does not exceed maximum specified length.
• A delta grounded input power supply and motor cables with high
capacitance may result in erroneous error reports during non-running
tests. To disable response to fault monitoring when the drive is not
running, use parameter 3023 WIRING FAULT. To disable response to all
ground fault monitoring, use parameter 3017 EARTH FAULT.
17 RESERVED
18 THERM FAIL Internal fault. The thermistor measuring the internal temperature of the
drive is open or shorted. Contact your local ABB sales representative.
19 OPEX LINK Internal fault. A communication-related problem has been detected on the
fiber optic link between the OITF and OINT boards. Contact your local ABB
sales representative.
20 OPEX PWR Internal fault. Low voltage condition detected on OINT power supply.
Contact your local ABB sales representative.
21 CURR MEAS Internal fault. Current measurement is out of range. Contact your local ABB
sales representative.
22 SUPPLY PHASE Ripple voltage in the DC link is too high. Check for and correct:
• Missing mains phase.
• Blown fuse.
23 If this error code appears, refer to the appropriate accessory manual.
26 DRIVE ID Internal fault. Configuration Block Drive ID is not valid. Contact your local
ABB sales representative.
27 CONFIG FILE Internal configuration file has an error. Contact your local ABB sales
representative.
28 SERIAL 1 ERR Fieldbus communication has timed out. Check for and correct:
• Fault setup (3018 COMM FAULT FUNC and 3019 COMM FAULT TIME).
• Communication settings (Group 51 or 53 as appropriate).
• Poor connections and/or noise on line.
29 EFB CONFIG Error in reading the configuration file for the embedded fieldbus.
FILE
30 FORCE TRIP Fault trip forced by the fieldbus. See the fieldbus User’s Manual.
31 EFB 1 Fault code reserved for the embedded fieldbus (EFB) protocol application.
The meaning is protocol dependent.
32 EFB 2
33 EFB 3
Diagnostics
Fault Fault Name In

Code Panel
34 MOTOR PHASE Fault in the motor circuit. One of the motor phases is lost. Check for and
correct:
• Motor fault.
• Motor cable fault.
• Thermal relay fault (if used).
• Internal fault.
35 OUTPUT WIRING Possible power wiring error detected. When the drive is not running it
monitors for an improper connection between the drive input power and the
drive output. Check for and correct:
• Proper input wiring – line voltage is NOT connected to drive output.
• The fault can be erroneously declared if the input power is a delta
grounded system and motor cable capacitance is large. This fault can be
disabled using parameter 3023 WIRING FAULT.
36 INCOMP The drive cannot use the software.
SWTYPE • Internal Fault.
• The loaded software is not compatible with the drive.
• Call support representative.
37 CB OVERTEMP
38 USER LOAD See Parameter Group 37.

CURVE
101 SERF CORRUPT Error internal to the drive. Contact your local ABB sales representative and
report the error number.
102 RESERVED
103 SERF MACRO
104 RESERVED
105 RESERVED
201 DSP T1 Error in the system. Contact your local ABB sales representative and report
OVERLOAD the error number.
202 DSP T2
OVERLOAD
203 DSP T3
OVERLOAD
204 DSP STACK

ERROR
205 RESERVED
(OBSOLETE)
206 OMIO ID ERROR
207 EFB LOAD

ERROR
Diagnostics
Faults that indicate conflicts in the parameter settings are listed below.
Fault Fault Name In
Code Panel
1000 PAR HZRPM Parameter values are inconsistent. Check for any of the following:
• 2007 MINIMUM FREQ > 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ.
• 2007 MINIMUM FREQ / 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ is outside proper range
(> 50)
• 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ / 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ is outside proper range
(> 50)
1001 PAR PFCREFNG Parameter values are inconsistent. Check for the following:
• 2007 MINIMUM FREQ is negative, when 8123 PFC ENABLE is active.
1003 PAR AI SCALE Parameter values are inconsistent. Check for any of the following:
• 1301 AI 1 MIN > 1302 AI 1 MAX.
• 1304 AI 2 MIN > 1305 AI 2 MAX.
1004 PAR AO SCALE Parameter values are inconsistent. Check for any of the following:
• 1504 AO 1 MIN > 1505 AO 1 MAX.
• 1510 AO 2 MIN > 1511 AO 2 MAX.
1005 PAR PCU 2 Parameter values for power control are inconsistent: Improper motor
nominal kVA or motor nominal power. Check for the following:
• 1.1 < (9906 MOTOR NOM CURR * 9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT * 1.73 / PN) < 3.0
• Where: PN = 1000 * 9909 MOTOR NOM POWER (if units are kW)
or PN = 746 * 9909 MOTOR NOM POWER (if units are HP, e.g. in US)
1006 PAR Parameter values are inconsistent. Check for the following:
EXTROMISSING • Extension relay module not connected and
• 1410…1412 RELAY OUTPUTS 4…6 have non-zero values.
1007 PAR Parameter values are inconsistent. Check for and correct:
FBUSMISSING • A parameter is set for fieldbus control (e.g. 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS = 10
(COMM)), but 9802 COMM PROT SEL = 0.
1008 REVERSED
1009 PAR PCU1 Parameter values for power control are inconsistent: Improper motor
nominal frequency or speed. Check for both of the following:
• 1 < (60 * 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ / 9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED < 16
• 0.8 < 9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED /
(120 * 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ / Motor Poles) < 0.992
1011 PAR OVERRIDE See Parameter Group 17.
1012 PAR PFC IO 1 IO configuration is not complete – not enough relays are parameterized to
PFC. Or, a conflict exists between Group 14, parameter 8117, NR OF AUX
MOT, and parameter 8118, AUTOCHNG INTERV.
1013 PAR PFC IO 2 IO configuration is not complete – the actual number of PFC motors
(parameter 8127, MOTORS) does not match the PFC motors in Group 14
and parameter 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV.
1014 PAR PFC IO 3 IO configuration is not complete – the drive is unable to allocate a digital
input (interlock) for each PFC motor (parameters 8120 INTERLOCKS and
8127 MOTORS).
1015 PAR USER The user defined U/f ratio is not compatibility (only when parameters 2605
DEFINED U/F
= 3 ).
1016 PAR USER LOAD See Parameter Group 37.

C
Diagnostics
Fault Resetting
The ACS510 can be configured to automatically reset certain faults. Refer to
parameter Group 31: Automatic Reset.
Warning! If an external source for start command is selected and it is active, the
ACS510 may start immediately after fault reset.
Flashing Red LED

To reset the drive for faults indicated by a flashing red LED:
• Turn the power off for 5 minutes.
Red LED
To reset the drive for faults indicated by a red LED (on, not flashing), correct the
problem and do one of the following:
• From the control panel: Press RESET
• Turn the power off for 5 minutes.
Depending on the value of 1604, FAULT RESET SELECT, the following could also be
used to reset the drive:
• Digital input
• Serial communication
When the fault has been corrected, the motor can be started.
History
For reference, the last three fault codes are stored into parameters 0401, 0412,
0413. For the most recent fault (identified by parameter 0401), the drive stores
additional data (in parameters 0402…0411) to aid in troubleshooting a problem. For
example, parameter 0404 stores the motor speed at the time of the fault.
To clear the fault history (all of the Group 04, Fault History parameters):
1. Using the control panel in Parameters mode, select parameter 0401.
2. Press EDIT (or ENTER on the Basic control panel).
3. Press UP and Down at the same time.
4. Press SAVE.
Correcting Alarms
The recommended corrective action for alarms is:
• Determine if the Alarm requires any corrective action (action is not always
required).
• Use "Alarm Listing" below to find and address the root cause of the problem.
Diagnostics
Alarm Listing
The following table lists the alarms by code number and describes each.
Alarm
Display Description
Code
2001 OVERCURRENT Current limiting controller is active. Check for and correct:
• Insufficient acceleration time (parameters 2202 ACCELER TIME 1 and
2205 ACCELER TIME 2).
• Faulty motor, motor cables or connections.
2002 OVERVOLTAGE Over voltage controller is active. Check for and correct:
• Static or transient overvoltages in the input power supply.
• Insufficient deceleration time (parameters 2203 DECELER TIME 1 and
2206 DECELER TIME 2).
2003 UNDERVOLTAGE Under voltage controller is active. Check for and correct:
• Undervoltage on mains.
2004 DIR LOCK The change in direction being attempted is not allowed. Either:
• Do not attempt to change the direction of motor rotation, or
• Change parameter 1003 DIRECTION to allow direction change (if
reverse operation is safe).
2005 I/O COMM Fieldbus communication has timed out. Check for and correct:
• Fault setup (3018 COMM FAULT FUNC and 3019 COMM FAULT TIME).
• Communication settings (Group 51 or 53 as appropriate).
• Poor connections and/or noise on line.
2006 AI1 LOSS Analog input 1 is lost, or value is less than the minimum setting.
Check:
• Input source and connections
• Parameter that sets the minimum (3021)
• Parameter that sets the Alarm/Fault operation (3001)
2007 AI2 LOSS Analog input 2 is lost, or value is less than the minimum setting.
Check:
• Input source and connections
• Parameter that sets the minimum (3022)
• Parameter that sets the Alarm/Fault operation (3001)
2008 PANEL LOSS Panel communication is lost and either:
• Drive is in local control mode (the control panel displays LOC), or
• Drive is in remote control mode (REM) and is parameterized to
accept start/stop, direction or reference from the control panel.
To correct check:
• Communication lines and connections
• Parameter 3002 PANEL LOSS.
• Parameters in groups 10 COMMAND INPUTS and 11 REFERENCE
SELECT (if drive operation is REM).
Diagnostics
Alarm
Display Description
Code
2009 DEVICE Drive heatsink is hot. This alarm warns that a DEVICE OVERTEMP fault
OVERTEMP may be near.
R1…R4 & R7/R8: 100 °C (212 °F)
R5/R6: 110 °C (230 °F)
• Fan failure.
• Obstructions in the air flow.
• Dirt or dust coating on the heat sink.
• Excessive ambient temperature.
2010 MOT OVERTEMP Motor is hot, based on either the drive’s estimate or on temperature
feedback. This alarm warns that a Motor Underload fault trip may be
near. Check:
• Check for overloaded motor.
• Adjust the parameters used for the estimate (3005…3009).
• Check the temperature sensors and Group 35 parameters.
2011 RESERVED
2012 MOTOR STALL Motor is operating in the stall region. This alarm warns that a Motor
Stall fault trip may be near.
2013 AUTORESET This alarm warns that the drive is about to perform an automatic fault
(note 1) reset, which may start the motor.
• To control automatic reset, use parameter group 31 AUTOMATIC
RESET.
2014 AUTOCHANGE This alarm warns that the PFC autochange function is active.
(note 1) • To control PFC, use parameter group 81 PFC CONTROL and
"Application Macro: PFC" on page 48.
2015 PFC INTERLOCK This alarm warns that the PFC interlocks are active, which means that
the drive cannot start the following:
• Any motor (when Autochange is used),
• The speed regulated motor (when Autochange is not used).
2016/ RESERVED
2017
2018 PID SLEEP This alarm warns that the PID sleep function is active, which means
(note 1) that the motor could accelerate when the PID sleep function ends.
• To control PID sleep, use parameters 4022…4026 or 4122…4126.
2019 RESERVED
2020 OVERRIDE This alarm warns that the override mode are activated,which means
that the drive run at override mode.
2021 START ENABLE 1 This alarm warns that the Start Enable 1 signal is missing.
MISSING • To control Start Enable 1 function, use parameter 1608.
To correct, check:
• Digital input configuration.
• Communication settings.
Diagnostics
Alarm
Display Description
Code
2022 START ENABLE 2 This alarm warns that the Start Enable 2 signal is missing.
MISSING • To control Start Enable 2 function, use parameter 1609.
To correct, check:
• Digital input configuration.
• Communication settings.
2023 EMERGENCY Emergency stop activated.
STOP
2024 If this alarm code appears, refer to the appropriate accessory manual.
2025 FIRST START This alarm occurs a few seconds during the scalar flystart first active.
2027 USER LOAD CURVE See Parameter Group 37.
2028 START DELAY See Parameter 2113.
Note 1. Even when the relay output is configured to indicate alarm conditions (e.g. parameter
1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 = 5 (ALARM) or 16 (FLT/ALARM)), this alarm is not indicated by a relay output.
Alarm Codes (Basic Control Panel)

The Basic Control Panel indicates Control Panel alarms with a code, A5xxx. The
following table lists the alarm codes and descriptions.
Code Description
5001 Drive is not responding.
5002 The communication profile is incompatible with the drive.
5010 The panel’s parameter backup file is corrupted.
5011 Drive is controlled from another source.
5012 Rotation direction is locked.
5013 Button is disabled, because start is inhibited.
5014 Button is disabled, because drive is faulted.
5015 Button is disabled, because local mode lock is on.
5018 Parameter default value can’t be found.
5019 Writing a non-zero value is prohibited (can only write a zero value).
5020 Group or parameter does not exist or parameter value is inconsistent.
5021 Group or parameter is hidden.
5022 Group or parameter is write protected.
5023 Modification is not allowed while the drive is running.
5024 Drive is busy, try again.
5025 Write is not allowed while upload or download is in progress.
5026 Value is at or below low limit.
5027 Value is at or above high limit.
5028 Value is invalid – doesn't match any values in the discrete values list.
5029 Memory is not ready, try again.
5030 Request is invalid.
5031 Drive is not ready, e.g due to Low DC voltage.
Diagnostics
Code Description
5032 Parameter error was detected.
5040 Selected parameter set can’t be found in the current parameter backup.
5041 Parameter backup doesn't fit into memory.
5042 Selected parameter set can’t be found in the current parameter backup.
5043 No start inhibit was granted.
5044 Parameter backup versions do not match.
5050 Parameter upload was aborted.
5051 File error was detected.
5052 Parameter upload attempt has failed.
5060 Parameter download was aborted.
5062 Parameter download attempt has failed.
5070 Panel backup memory write error was detected.
5071 Panel backup memory read error was detected.
5080 Operation is not allowed, because the drive is not in local mode.
5081 Operation is not allowed, because a fault is active.
5082 Operation is not allowed, because override mode is enabled.
5083 Operation is not allowed, because parameter lock is not open.
5084 Operation is not allowed, because drive is busy, try again.
5085 Download is not allowed, because drive types are incompatible.
5086 Download is not allowed, because drive models are incompatible.
5087 Download is not allowed, because parameter sets do not match.
5088 Operation failed, because a drive memory error was detected.
5089 Download failed, because a CRC error was detected.
5090 Download failed, because a data processing error was detected.
5091 Operation failed, because a parameter error was detected.
5092 Download failed, because parameter sets do not match.
Diagnostics
Maintenance
Warning! Read "Safety" on page 3 before performing any maintenance on the

equipment. Ignoring the safety instructions can cause injury or death.
Maintenance Intervals
If installed in an appropriate environment, the drive requires very little maintenance.
This table lists the routine maintenance intervals recommended by ABB.
Maintenance Interval Instruction
Heatsink temperature check Depends on the dustiness of the See "Heatsink" on page 207.
and cleaning environment (every 6…12
months)
Main cooling fan replacement Every five years See "Main Fan Replacement"
on page 208.
Internal enclosure cooling fan Every three years. See "Internal Enclosure Fan
replacement Replacement" on 209.
(IP 54/UL Type 12 units)
Capacitor change Every ten years See "Capacitors" on page 209.
(Frame sizes R5 and R6)
Heatsink
The heatsink fins accumulate dust from the cooling air. Since a dusty heatsink is less
efficient at cooling the drive, overtemperature faults become more likely. In a
“normal” environment (not dusty, not clean) check the heatsink annually, in a dusty
environment check more often.
Clean the heatsink as follows (when necessary):
1. Remove power from drive.
2. Remove the cooling fan (see section "Main Fan Replacement" on page 208).
3. Blow clean compressed air (not humid) from bottom to top and simultaneously use a
vacuum cleaner at the air outlet to trap the dust.
Note: If there is a risk of the dust entering adjoining equipment, perform the cleaning
in another room.
4. Replace the cooling fan.

5. Restore power.
Maintenance
Main Fan Replacement

The drive’s main cooling fan has a life span of about 60,000 operating hours at
maximum rated operating temperature and drive load. The expected life span
doubles for each 10 °C (18 °F) drop in the fan temperature (fan temperature is a
function of ambient temperatures and drive loads).
Fan failure can be predicted by the increasing noise from fan bearings and the
gradual rise in the heatsink temperature in spite of heatsink cleaning. If the drive is
operated in a critical part of a process, fan replacement is recommended once these
symptoms start appearing. Replacement fans are available from ABB. Do not use
other than ABB specified spare parts.
Frame Sizes R1…R4

To replace the fan: 3
4
2. Remove drive cover.
3. For Frame Size: 2
• R1, R2: Press together the retaining clips on the fan
cover sides, and lift.
• R3, R4: Press in on the lever located on the left side
of the fan mount, and rotate the fan up and out.
4. Disconnect the fan cable.
5. Install the fan in reverse order. X0021
6. Restore power.
Frame Sizes R5 and R6

Bottom View (R5)
To replace the fan:
1. Remove power from drive. 3
2
2. Remove the screws attaching the fan.
3. Remove the fan: X5023
• R5: Swing the fan out on its hinges. Bottom View (R6) 4
• R6: Pull the fan out.
2
5. Install the fan in reverse order.
6. Restore power.
X0022
Maintenance
Internal Enclosure Fan Replacement

IP 54 enclosures have an additional internal fan to circulate air inside the enclosure.
Frame Sizes R1…R4

To replace the internal enclosure fan in frame sizes R1 to R4:
4
2. Remove the front cover. 3
3. The housing that holds the fan in place has barbed 5
retaining clips at each corner. Press all four clips toward
the center to release the barbs.
4. When the clips/barbs are free, pull the housing up to
remove from the drive.
6. Install the fan in reverse order, noting that:
• The fan air flow is up (refer to arrow on fan). FM
• The fan wire harness is toward the front.

• The notched housing barb is located in the right-rear corner.
• The fan cable connects just forward of the fan at the top of the drive.
Frame Sizes R5 and R6

To replace the internal enclosure fan in frame sizes R5 or R6:
• Remove power from drive.
• Remove the front cover.
• Lift the fan out and disconnect the cable.
• Install the fan in reverse order.
• Restore power.
Capacitors
The drive intermediate circuit employs several electrolytic capacitors. Their life span
is from 35,000…90,000 hours depending on drive loading and ambient temperature.
Capacitor life can be prolonged by lowering the ambient temperature.
It is not possible to predict a capacitor failure. Capacitor failure is usually followed by
a input power fuse failure or a fault trip. Contact ABB if capacitor failure is suspected.
Replacements for frame size R5 and R6 are available from ABB. Do not use other
than ABB specified spare parts.
Maintenance
Control Panel
Cleaning
Use a soft damp cloth to clean the control panel. Avoid harsh cleaners which could
scratch the display window.
Maintenance
Technical Data
Ratings
By type code, the table below provides ratings for the ACS510 adjustable speed AC
drive, including:
• IEC ratings
• NEMA ratings (shaded columns)
• Frame size
Ratings, 380…480 Volt Drives

Abbreviated column headers are described in “Symbols” on page 212.
Type Code Pump and Fan Use
Frame
ACS510-01- I2N PN PN
Size
see below A kW HP
Three-phase supply voltage, 380…480 V
-03A3-4 3.3 1.1 1.5 R1
-04A1-4 4.1 1.5 2 R1
-05A6-4 5.6 2.2 Note 1 R1
-07A2-4 7.2 3 3 R1
-09A4-4 9.4 4 5 R1
-012A-4 11.9 5.5 7.5 R1
-017A-4 17 7.5 10 R2
-025A-4 25 11 15 R2
-031A-4 31 15 20 R3
-038A-4 38 18.5 25 R3
-046A-4 45 22 30 R3
-060A-4 60 30 40 R4
-072A-4 72 37 50 R4
-088A-4 87 45 60 R4
-125A-4 125 55 100 R5
-157A-4 157 75 125 R6
-180A-4 180 90 150 R6
-195A-4 195 110 Note 1 R6
Technical Data
Symbols
Typical ratings:
Pump and Fan use
I2N continuous rms current.
PN typical motor power in normal use. The kilowatt power ratings apply to most IEC, 4-pole
motors. The Horsepower ratings apply to most 4-pole NEMA motors.
Sizing
The current ratings are the same regardless of the supply voltage within one voltage
range. To achieve the rated motor power given in the table, the rated current of the
drive must be higher than or equal to the rated motor current. Also note that:
• The ratings apply for ambient temperature of 40 °C (104 °F).
Technical Data
Derating
The load capacity (current and power) decreases for certain situations, as defined
below. In such situations, where full motor power is required, oversize the drive so
that the derated value provides sufficient capacity.
For example, if your application requires 15.4 A of motor current and a 8 kHz
switching frequency, calculate the appropriate drive size requirement as follows:
The minimum size required = 15.4 A / 0.80 = 19.25 A
Where: 0.80 is the derating for 8 kHz switching frequency (see "Switching Frequency Derating"
below).
Referring to I2N in the ratings tables (page 211), the following drives exceed the I2N
requirement of 19.25 A: ACS510-01-025A-4.
Temperature Derating
In the temperature range +40 °C…50 °C (+104 °F…122 °F) the rated output current
is decreased 1% for every 1 °C (1.8 °F) above +40 °C (+104 °F). The output current
is calculated by multiplying the current given in the rating table by the derating factor.
Example If the ambient temperature is 50 °C (+122 °F) the derating factor is
100% - 1%/°C x 10 °C = 90% or 0.90.
The output current is then 0.90 x I2N.
Altitude Derating
In altitudes from 1000…2000 m (3300…13,200 ft) above sea level, the derating is 1%
for every 100 m (330 ft). If the installation site is higher than 2000 m (6600 ft) above
sea level, please contact your local ABB distributor or office for further information.
Switching Frequency Derating

If the 8 kHz switching frequency (parameter 2606) is used, either:
• Derate PN and I2N to 80% or
• Set parameter 2607 SW FREQ CTRL = 1 (ON) which allows the drive to reduce the
switching frequency if/when the drive’s internal temperature exceeds 90 °C. See
the parameter description for 2607 for details.
If the 12 kHz switching frequency (parameter 2606) is used, either:
• Derate PN and I2N to 65%, and derate ambient temperature maximum to 30 °C
(86 °F), or
• Set parameter 2607 SW FREQ CTRL = 1 (ON) which allows the drive to reduce the
switching frequency if/when the drive’s internal temperature exceeds 80 °C. See
the parameter description for 2607 for details.
Technical Data
Input Power Connections
Warning! Do not operate the drive outside the nominal input line voltage range.
Over-voltage can result in permanent damage to the drive.
Input Power Specifications

Input Power (Mains) Connection Specifications
Voltage (U1) 380/400/415/440/460/480 VAC 3-phase +10% -15%.
Prospective short- Maximum allowed prospective short-circuit current in the supply is 100 kA
circuit current in a second providing that the mains cable of the drive is protected with
(IEC 629) appropriate fuses.
Frequency 48…63 Hz
Imbalance Max. ± 3% of nominal phase to phase input voltage
Fundamental power 0.98 (at nominal load)
factor (cos phi1)
Cable Temperature 90 °C (194 °F) rating minimum.
Rating
Disconnect Device
The ACS510 does not include a disconnect device. A means to disconnect input
power must be installed between the AC power source and the ACS510. This
disconnect device must:
• Be sized to conform to applicable safety regulations, including, but not limited to,
both national and local electrical codes.
• Be locked in the open position during installation and maintenance work.
The disconnect device must not be used to control the motor. Instead use the control
panel, or commands to the I/O terminals for motor control.
Fuses
Branch circuit protection must be provided by the end-user, and sized per national
and local electric codes. The following tables provide fuse recommendations for
short circuit protection on the drive’s input power.
Technical Data
Fuses, 380…480 Volt Drives
ACS510-01- Input Current Mains Fuses

see below A IEC269 gG (A) UL Class T (A) Bussmann Type
-03A3-4 3.3 10 10 JJS-10
-04A1-4 4.1
-05A6-4 5.6
-07A2-4 7.2
-09A4-4 9.4 15 JJS-15
-012A-4 11.9 16
-017A-4 17 20 JJS-20
-025A-4 25 25 30 JJS-30
-031A-4 31 35 40 JJS-40
-038A-4 38 50 50 JJS-50
-046A-4 45 60 JJS-60
-060A-4 60 63 80 JJS-80
-072A-4 72 80 90 JJS-90
-088A-4 87 80 125 JJS-125
-125A-4 125 160 175 JJS-175
-157A-4 157 200 200 JJS-200
-180A-4 180 250 250 JJS-250
-195A-4 195 250 250 JJS-250
Emergency Stop Devices

The overall design of the installation must include emergency stop devices and any
other safety equipment that may be needed. Pressing STOP on the drive’s control
panel does NOT:
• Generate an emergency stop of the motor.
• Separate the drive from dangerous potential.
Input Power Cables/ Wiring

Input wiring can be any of:
• A four conductor cable (three phases and ground/protective earth). Shielding is
not required.
• Four insulated conductors routed through conduit.
Size wiring according to local safety regulations, appropriate input voltage and the
drive’s load current. In any case, the conductor must be less than the maximum limit
defined by the terminal size (see "Drive’s Power Connection Terminals" on page
218).
Technical Data
The table below lists copper and aluminum cable types for different load currents.
These recommendations apply only for the conditions listed at the top of the table.
IEC NEC
Based on: Based on:
• EN 60204-1 and IEC 60364-5-2/2001 • NEC Table 310-16 for copper wires
• PVC insulation • 90 °C (194 °F) wire insulation
• 30 °C (86 °F) ambient temperature • 40 °C (104 °F) ambient temperature
• 70 °C (158 °F) surface temperature • Not more than three current-carrying
• Cables with concentric copper shield conductors in raceway or cable, or earth
(directly buried).
• Not more than nine cables laid on cable ladder
side by side. • Copper cables with concentric copper shield
Max Max
Max Load
Load Cu Cable Load Al Cable Cu Wire Size
Current
Current (mm2) Current (mm2) (AWG/kcmil)
(A)
(A) (A)
14 3x1.5 Do not use aluminum 22.8 14
cable with frame sizes
20 3x2.5 R1…R4 27.3 12
27 3x4 36.4 10
34 3x6 50.1 8
47 3x10 68.3 6
62 3x16 86.5 4
79 3x25 100 3
98 3x35 91 3x50 118 2
119 3x50 117 3x70 137 1
153 3x70 143 3x95 155 1/0
186 3x95 165 3x120 178 2/0
215 3x120 191 3x150 205 3/0
249 3x150 218 3x185 237 4/0
284 3x185 257 3x240 264 250 MCM or 2 x 1
274 3x (3x50) 291 300 MCM or 2 x 1/0
285 2x (3x95) 319 350 MCM or 2 x 2/0
Ground Connections
For personnel safety, proper operation and to reduce electromagnetic emission/pick-
up, the drive and the motor must be grounded at the installation site.
• Conductors must be adequately sized as required by safety regulations.
• Power cable shields must be connected to the drive PE terminal in order to meet
safety regulations.
• Power cable shields are suitable for use as equipment grounding conductors only
when the shield conductors are adequately sized as required by safety
regulations.
• In multiple drive installations, do not connect drive terminals in series.
Technical Data
Unsymmetrically Grounded Networks
Warning! Do not attempt to install or remove EM1 or EM3 screws while power is
applied to the drive’s input terminals.
Unsymmetrically grounded networks are defined in the following table. In such

networks, the internal connection provided by the EM3 screw (on frame sizes
R1…R4 only) must be disconnected by removing EM3. If the grounding
configuration of the network is unknown, remove EM3. Note that:
• ACS510-01 drives are shipped with the screw installed.
Unsymmetrically Grounded Networks – EM3 Must Be Out
Grounded at the L1 Grounded at the L1
corner of the mid point of a
delta delta leg
L2 L2
L3 L3
Single phase, L1 Three phase L1
grounded at an “Variac” without L1
end point solidly grounded
neutral
L2
N L2
L3
L3
EM3 (an M4x16 screw) makes an internal ground connection L1

that reduces electro-magnetic emission. Where EMC (electro-
magnetic compatibility) is a concern, and the network is
symmetrically grounded, EM3 may be installed. For
reference, the diagram at right illustrates a symmetrically
grounded network. L2
L3
Floating Networks
Warning! Do not attempt to install or remove EM1, EM3, F1 or F2 screws while

power is applied to the drive’s input terminals.
For floating networks (also known as IT, ungrounded, or impedance/resistance

grounded networks):
• Disconnect the ground connection to the internal RFI filters:
– ACS510-01, frame sizes R1…R4: Remove both the EM1 and EM3 screws
(see "Power Connection Diagrams" on page 15).
– Frame sizes R5…R6: Remove both the F1 and F2 screws (see page 16).
• Where EMC requirements exist, check for excessive emission propagated to
neighboring low voltage networks. In some cases, the natural suppression in
Technical Data
transformers and cables is sufficient. If in doubt, use a supply transformer with

static screening between the primary and secondary windings.
• Do NOT install an external RFI/EMC filter, such as one of the kits listed in "EN
61800-3 Compliant Motor Cables" on page 222. Using an RFI filter grounds the
input power through the filter capacitors, which could be dangerous and could
damage the unit.
Drive’s Power Connection Terminals

The following table provides specifications for the drive’s power connection
terminals.
U1, V1, W1
Frame U2, V2, W2 Earthing PE Terminal
Size BRK+, UDC+ Terminals
Min. Wire Size Max. Wire Size Torque Max. Wire Size Torque
2 2 2
mm AWG mm AWG Nm lb-ft mm AWG Nm lb-ft
R11 0.75 18 16 6 1.3 1 16 6 1.3 1
R21 0.75 18 16 6 1.3 1 16 6 1.3 1
R31 2.5 14 25 3 2.7 2 25 3 2.7 2
R41 10 8 50 1/0 5.6 4 50 1/0 5.6 4
R5 16 6 70 2/0 15 11 70 2/0 15 11
R6 95 3/0 185 350 MCM 40 30 185 350 MCM 40 30
1. Do not use aluminum cable with frame sizes R1…R4.
Power Terminal Considerations – R6 Frame Size
Warning! For R6 power terminals, if compression 4

lugs are supplied, they can only be used for wire 2
sizes that are 95 mm2 (3/0 AWG) or larger. Smaller 3
wires will loosen and may damage the drive, and
require ring lugs as described below.
Ring Lugs
On the R6 frame size, if the cable size used is less
than 95 mm2 (3/0 AWG) or if no compression lugs
are supplied, use ring lugs according to the X60002
following procedure.
1. Select appropriate ring lugs from the following table.
2. Attach the supplied terminal lugs to the drive end of the cables.
3. Isolate the ends of the ring lugs with insulating tape or shrink tubing.
Technical Data
4. Attach terminal lug to the drive.

Wire Size
Crimping No. of
kcmil/ Manufacturer Ring Lug
mm2 Tool Crimps
AWG
Burndy YAV6C-L2 MY29-3 1
16 6
Ilsco CCL-6-38 ILC-10 2
Burndy YA4C-L4BOX MY29-3 1
25 4
Ilsco CCL-4-38 MT-25 1
35 2 Ilsco CRC-2 IDT-12 1
Ilsco CRA-1-38 IDT-12 1
50 1
Thomas & Betts 54148 TBM-8 3
Burndy YA25-L4BOX MY29-3 2
Ilsco CRB-0 IDT-12 1
55 1/0
Ilsco CCL-1/0-38 MT-25 1
Burndy YAL26T38 MY29-3 2
Ilsco CRA-2/0 IDT-12 1
70 2/0
Burndy YAL27T38 MY29-3 2
95 3/0
Burndy YA28R4 MY29-3 2
95 3/0
Compression Lugs
Use the following procedure to attach cables 2
if compression lugs are supplied and can be 1
used.
1. Attach the supplied compression lugs to the
drive end of the cables.
X60003
2. Attach compression lug to the drive.
X60001
Technical Data
Motor Connections
Warning! Never connect line power to the drive output terminals: U2, V2 or W2. Line
voltage applied to the output can result in permanent damage to the unit. If frequent
bypassing is required, use mechanically interlocked switches or contactors.
Warning! Do not connect any motor with a nominal voltage less than one half of the
drive’s nominal input voltage.
Warning! Disconnect the drive before conducting any voltage tolerance (Hi-Pot) test
or insulation resistance (Megger) test on the motor or motor cables. Do not conduct
these tests on the drive.
Motor Connection Specifications

Motor Connection Specifications
Voltage (U2) 0…U1, 3-phase symmetrical, Umax at the field weakening point
Frequency 0…500 Hz
Frequency Resolution 0.01 Hz
Current See "Ratings" on page 211.
Field Weakening Point 10…500 Hz
Switching Frequency Selectable: 1, 4, 8, or 12 kHz
Cable Temperature Rating 90 °C (194 °F) rating minimum.
Max. Motor Cable Length*
Frame Size
fsw = 1 or 4 kHz fsw = 8 kHz or 12 kHz
Maximum Motor Cable
R1 100 m 330 ft 100 m 330 ft
Length
R2…R4 200 m 650 ft 100 m 330 ft
R5…R6 300 m 980 ft 150 m 490 ft
* Warning! Using a motor cable longer than specified in the chart
above may cause permanent damage to the drive.
Ground Fault Protection

ACS510 internal fault logic detects ground faults in the drive, motor, or motor cable.
This fault logic:
• Is NOT a personal safety or fire protection feature.
• Can be disabled using parameter 3017 EARTH FAULT.
• Could be tripped by leakage currents (input power to ground) associated with
long high capacitance motor cables.
Technical Data
Grounding and Routing
Motor Cable Shielding

Motor cables require shielding using conduit, armored cable or shielded cable.
• Conduit – When using conduit:
– Bridge joints with a ground conductor bonded to the conduit on each side of
the joint.
– Bond conduit run to the drive enclosure.
– Use a separate conduit run for motor cables (also separate input power and
control cables).
– Use a separate conduit run for each drive.
• Armored Cable – When using armored cable:
– Use six-conductor (3 phases and 3 grounds), type MC continuous corrugated
aluminum armor cable with symmetrical grounds.
– Armored motor cable can share a cable tray with input power cables, but not
with control cables.
• Shielded Cable – For shielded cable details, see "Motor Cable Requirements for
CE Compliance" below.
Grounding
See "Ground Connections" in "Input Power Connections" above.
For CE compliant installations and installations where EMC emissions must be
minimized, see "Effective Motor Cable Screens" below.
Drive’s Motor Connection Terminals

The drive’s motor and input power terminals have the same specifications. See
"Drive’s Power Connection Terminals" above.
Motor Cable Requirements for CE Compliance

The requirements in this section apply for CE compliance.
Minimum Requirement (CE )

The motor cable must be a symmetrical three conductor cable with a concentric PE
conductor or a four conductor cable with a concentric shield, however, a symmetrical
constructed PE conductor is always recommended. The following figure shows the
minimum requirement for the motor cable screen (for example, MCMK, NK Cables).
Copper Wire Screen Helix of Copper Tape Inner Insulation
Insulation Jacket
Cable Core
Technical Data
Recommendation for Conductor Layout

The following figure compares conductor layout features in motor cables.
Recommended (CE ) Allowed (CE )
Symmetrical shielded cable: three phase A separate PE conductor is required if the
conductors and a concentric or otherwise conductivity of the cable shield is < 50% of the
symmetrically constructed PE conductor, and a conductivity of the phase conductor.
shield
Shield
PE Shield
Conductor
and Shield PE
Shield
Not allowed for motor cables (CE )
A four-conductor system: three phase
conductors and a protective conductor, without a
shield.
Allowed for motor cables with phase
PE conductor cross section up to 10 mm2.
Effective Motor Cable Screens

The general rule for cable screen effectiveness is: the better and tighter the cable’s
screen, the lower the radiated emission level. The following figure shows an
example of an effective construction (for example Ölflex-Servo-FD 780 CP,
Lappkabel or MCCMK, NK Cables).
Insulation Jacket Inner Insulator L2
L1
Braided Metallic Screen L3
EN 61800-3 Compliant Motor Cables

To comply with EN 61800-3 requirements:
• Motor cables must have an effective screen as described in "Effective Motor
Cable Screens" on page 222.
• Motor cable screen wires must be twisted together into a bundle (the bundle
length must be less than five times its width) and connected it to the terminal
marked (at the bottom right-hand corner of the drive).
• Motor cables must be grounded, at the motor end, with an EMC cable gland. The
ground must contact the cable screen all the way around the cable.
• For EN 61800-3 First Environment, Restricted Distribution (CISPR11 Class A),
and EN 61800-3 Second Environment compliance, the drive includes an internal
filter that provides compliance for at least 30 m (100 ft.) motor cable lengths. For
some drives, longer cable lengths require an additional, external RFI/EMC filter
as specified in the table below. The RFI/EMC filters are separate options and
Technical Data
installation must conform to the instructions in the filter package for all cable
screen connections.
Maximum Cable Length for EN 61800-3 First Environment, Restricted Distribution
(CISPR11 Class A) Compliance (Radiated and Conducted Emissions)
Switching Frequency (Parameter 2606)
1 or 4 kHz (2606 = 1 or 4) 8 kHz (2606 = 8)
Drive Type
Max. Length / Max. Length / Max. Length / Max. Length /
Internal Filter RFI/EMC Filter Internal Filter RFI/EMC Filter
ACS510-01-03A3-4 R1 100 m (330 ft) / Note 1 100 m (330 ft) / Note 1
Internal Internal
ACS510-01-04A1-4
ACS510-01-07A2-4
ACS510-01-09A4-4
ACS510-01-012A-4
ACS510-01-017A-4 R2 30 m (100 ft) / 100 m (330 ft) / 30 m (100 ft) / 100 m (330 ft) /
Internal ACS400-IF21-3 Internal ACS400-IF21-3
ACS510-01-025A-4
ACS510-01-038A-4
ACS510-01-046A-4
ACS510-01-072A-4
ACS510-01-088A-4
ACS510-01-125A-4 R5 100 m (330 ft) / Note 1 100 m (330 ft) / Note 1
Internal Internal
ACS510-01-157A-4 R6 100 m (330 ft) / Note 2 Note 2
Internal
ACS510-01-180A-4
ACS510-01-195A-4
1. For any motor cable length (up to the100 m maximum length limit) compliance does not require an
additional filter.
2. Data not available at time of publication.
Warning! Do not use RFI/EMC filters in a floating, or impedance grounded network.
• For EN 61800-3 First Environment, Unrestricted Distribution, (CISPR11 Class B)

compliance with conducted emission limits, all drives require an additional,
external RFI/EMC filter, and cable lengths are limited as specified in the table
below. The RFI/EMC filters are separate options and installation must conform to
the instructions in the filter package for all cable screen connections.
Technical Data
Note! The filter does not assure compliance with radiated emissions limits.
Maximum Cable Length for EN 61800-3 CE First Environment, Unrestricted Distribution

(CISPR11 Class B) Compliance (Conducted Emissions Only)
Switching Frequency (Parameter 2606)
Drive Type 1 or 4 kHz (2606 = 1 or 4) 8 kHz (2606 = 8)
Max. Length / RFI/EMC Filter Max. Length / RFI/EMC Filter
ACS510-01-03A3-4 R1 10 m (33 ft) / 10 m (33 ft) /
ACS400-IF11-3 ACS400-IF11-3
ACS510-01-04A1-4
ACS510-01-07A2-4
ACS510-01-09A4-4
ACS510-01-012A-4
ACS510-01-017A-4 R2 10 m (33 ft) / 10 m (33 ft) /
ACS400-IF21-3 ACS400-IF21-3
ACS510-01-025A-4
ACS510-01-031A-4 R3 10 m (33 ft) / 10 m (33 ft) /
ACS400-IF31-3 ACS400-IF31-3
ACS510-01-038A-4
ACS510-01-046A-4
ACS510-01-060A-4 R4 10 m (33 ft) / 10 m (33 ft) /
ACS400-IF41-3 ACS400-IF41-3
ACS510-01-072A-4
ACS510-01-088A-4
Warning! Do not use RFI/EMC filters in a floating, or impedance grounded network.
Technical Data
Brake Components
Availability
Braking availability for ACS510 drives, by frame size is:
• R1 and R2 – a built-in brake chopper is standard equipment. Add appropriate
resistor, as determined using the following section. Resistors are available from
ABB.
• R3…R6 – does not include an internal brake chopper. Connect a chopper and a
resistor, or a brake unit to the DC link terminals on the drive. Contact your ABB
representative for appropriate parts.
Selecting the Braking Resistors (Frame Sizes R1 and R2)

Braking resistor must meet three requirements:
• Resistance must be always higher than the minimum value RMIN defined for the
drive type in the following tables. Never use resistance below this value.
• Resistance must be low enough to be able to produce the desired braking torque.
To achieve the maximum braking torque (the larger of 150% of heavy duty or
110% of nominal duty), the resistance must not exceed RMAX. If maximum
braking torque is not necessary, resistor values can exceed RMAX.
• The resistor power rating must be high enough to dissipate the braking power.
This requirement involves many factors:
– The maximum continuous power rating for the resistor(s).
– The rate at which the resistor changes temperature (resistor thermal time
constant).
– Maximum braking time ON – If the regeneration (braking) power is larger than
the resistor rated power, there is a limit to the ON time, or the resistor
overheats before the OFF period begins.
– Minimum braking time OFF – If the regeneration (braking) power is larger than
the resistor rated power, the OFF time must be large enough for the resistor to
cool between ON periods.
Braking ON
Time
Braking OFF
ON Time OFF Time
ON Time
Cycle Time Duty Cycle =
Cycle Time
– The peak braking power requirement.

– Type of braking (deceleration to zero vs. overhauling load) – During
deceleration to zero, the generated power steadily decreases, averaging half
of the peak power. For an overhauling load, the braking is countering an
external force (gravity for example) and the braking power is constant. The
total heat generated from an overhauling load is double the heat generated
from deceleration to zero speed (for the same peak torque and ON time).
Technical Data
Power Deceleration Curve Overhauling Load

Avg. Braking Power – Curve
Overhauling Load
Avg. Braking Power
During Deceleration Time
to Zero
Temperature
2x
x
Time
The many variables in the last requirement above are most easily dealt with using
the following tables.
• First, determine your maximum braking time ON (ONMAX), minimum braking time
OFF (OFFMIN) and load type (deceleration or overhauling load).
• Calculate duty cycle:
ONMAX
Duty Cycle = 100%
(ONMAX + OFFMIN)
• In the appropriate table, find the column that best matches your data:
– ONMAX < column specification and
– Duty Cycle < column specification
• Find the row that matches your drive.
• The minimum power rating for deceleration to zero is the value in the selected
row/column.
• For overhauling loads, double the rating in the selected row/column, or use the
Continuous ON column.
Technical Data
380…480 Volt Drives

Resistance Resistor1 Minimum Continuous Power Rating
Deceleration-to-Zero Rating Prcont
Type Code
Pr3 Pr10 Pr30 Pr60 Continuous ON
ACS510-
< 3 s ON < 10 s ON < 30 s ON < 60 s ON > 60 s ON
01- RMAX RMIN
see below > 27 s OFF > 50 s OFF > 180 s OFF > 180 s OFF
< 10% Duty < 17% Duty < 14% Duty < 25% Duty > 25% Duty
Ohm Ohm W W W W W
Three-phase supply voltage, 380…480 V
-03A3-4 641 120 65 120 175 285 1100
-04A1-4 470 120 90 160 235 390 1500
-05A6-4 320 120 125 235 345 570 2200
-07A2-4 235 80 170 320 470 775 3000
-09A4-4 192 80 210 400 575 950 4000
-012A-4 128 80 315 590 860 1425 5500
-017A-4 94 63 425 800 1175 1950 7500
-025A-4 64 63 625 1175 1725 2850 11000
1. Resistor time constant specification must be > 85 seconds.
WARNING! Never use a brake resistor with a resistance below the minimum value
specified for the particular drive. The drive and the internal chopper are not able to
handle the overcurrent caused by the low resistance.
Symbols
RMIN – Minimum allowed braking resistor.
RMAX – Maximum resistance allowed if maximum braking torque is necessary.
Prx – Duty-cycle based resistor power rating in deceleration braking, where “x” is
ONMAX time.
Installing and Wiring Resistors

All resistors must be installed outside the drive module in a place where they can
dissipate heat.
Warning! The surface temperature of the resistor is very high and air flowing from
the resistor is very hot. Materials near the brake resistor must be non-flammable.
Provide protection from accidental contact with the resistor.
To ensure that the input fuses protect the resistor cable, use resistor cables with the
same rating as used for the power input to the drive.
The maximum length of the resistor cable(s) is 10 m (33 ft). See the "Power
Connection Diagrams" on page 15 for the resistor cable connection points.
Technical Data
Mandatory Circuit Protection

The following setup is essential for safety – it interrupts the main supply in fault
situations involving chopper shorts:
• Equip the drive with a main contactor.
• Wire the contactor so that it opens if the resistor thermal switch opens (an
overheated resistor opens the contactor).
Below is a simple wiring diagram example.
L1 L2 L3 1
Off
Fuses 2
1 3 5 13 3
On
2 4 6 14 4
ACS510
U1 V1 W1
Thermal switch (standard in
Q
ABB resistors)
K1
Parameter Set-up
To enable dynamic braking, switch off the drive’s overvoltage control (Set parameter
2005 = 0 (DISABLE))
Technical Data
Control Connections
Control Connection Specifications

Control Connection Specifications
Analog Inputs and See table heading "Hardware Description" on page 17.
Outputs
Digital Inputs Digital input impedance 1.5 kΩ. Maximum voltage for digital inputs is 30 V.
• Max. contact voltage: 30 V DC, 250 V AC
• Max. contact current / power: 6 A, 30 V DC; 1500 VA, 250 V AC
Relays • Max. continuous current: 2 A rms (cos ϕ = 1), 1 A rms (cos ϕ = 0.4)
(Digital Outputs) • Minimum load: 500 mW (12 V, 10 mA)
• Contact material: Silver-nickel (AgN)
• Isolation between relay digital outputs, test voltage: 2.5 kV rms, 1 minute
Cable Specifications See "Control Terminals Table" on page 17.
Control Cables
General Recommendations
Use multi-core cables with a braided copper wire screen, temperature rated at 60 °C
(140 °F) or above:
Double Shielded Single Shielded

Example: JAMAK by Draka NK Cables Example: NOMAK by Draka NK Cables
At the drive end, twist the screen together into a bundle not longer than five times its
width and connected to terminal X1-1 (for digital and analog I/O cables) or to either
X1-28 or X1-32 (for RS485 cables). Leave the other end of the cable shield
unconnected.
Route control cables to minimize radiation to the cable:
• Route as far away as possible from the input power and motor cables (at least
20 cm (8 in)).
• Where control cables must cross power cables make sure they are at an angle as
near 90° as possible.
• Stay at least 20 cm (8 in) from the sides of the drive.
Use care in mixing signal types on the same cable:
• Do not mix analog and digital input signals on the same cable.
• Run relay-controlled signals as twisted pairs (especially if voltage > 48 V). Relay-
controlled signals using less than 48 V can be run in the same cables as digital
input signals.
Note! Never mix 24 VDC and 115/230 VAC signals in the same cable.
Technical Data
Analog Cables
Recommendations for analog signal runs:
• Use double shielded, twisted pair cable.
• Use one individually shielded pair for each signal.
• Do not use a common return for different analog signals.
Digital Cables
Recommendation for digital signal runs: A double shielded cable is the best
alternative, but single-shielded, twisted, multi-pair cable is also usable.
Control Panel Cable

If the control panel is connected to the drive with a cable, use only Category 5 Patch
ethernet cable. The maximum length that is tested to meet EMC specifications is 3 m
(9.8 ft). Longer cables are susceptible to electromagnetic noise and must be user-
tested to verify that EMC requirements are met. Where long runs are required
(especially for runs longer than about 12 m (40 ft)), use a RS232/RS485 converter at
each end and run RS485 cable.
Drive’s Control Connection Terminals

The following table provides specifications for the drive’s control terminals
Control
Frame Size
Maximum Wire Size Torque
mm2 AWG Nm lb-ft
All 1.5 16 0.4 0.3
Efficiency
Approximately 98% at nominal power level.
Cooling
Cooling Specifications
Method Internal fan, flow direction from bottom to top.
Free space above and below the ACS510 drive: 200 mm (8 in).
Requirement Free space is not required on the drive’s sides – ACS510 units can be mounted side-
by-side.
Air Flow, 380…480 Volt Drives

The following table lists heat loss and air flow data for 380…480 Volt drives.
Drive Heat Loss Air Flow
ACS510-01- Frame Size W BTU/Hr m3/h ft3/min
-03A3-4 R1 40 137 44 26
-04A1-4 R1 52 177 44 26
Technical Data
Drive Heat Loss Air Flow

3
ACS510-01- Frame Size W BTU/Hr m /h ft3/min
-05A6-4 R1 73 249 44 26
-07A2-4 R1 97 331 44 26
-09A4-4 R1 127 433 44 26
-012A-4 R1 172 587 44 26
-017A-4 R2 232 792 88 52
-025A-4 R2 337 1150 88 52
-031A-4 R3 457 1560 134 79
-038A-4 R3 562 1918 134 79
-046A-4 R3 667 2278 134 79
-060A-4 R4 907 3096 280 165
-072A-4 R4 1120 3820 280 165
-088A-4 R4 1440 4918 280 147
-125A-4 R5 1940 6625 350 205
-157A-4 R6 2310 7884 405 238
-180A-4 R6 2810 9590 405 238
-195A-4 R6 3050 10416 405 238
Technical Data
Dimensions and Weights

The dimensions and mass for the ACS510 depend on the frame size and enclosure
type. If unsure of frame size, first, find the “Type” code on the drive labels. Then look
up that type code in the "Technical Data" on page 211, to determine the frame size. A
complete set of dimensional drawings for ACS510 drives is located in the ACS510
Technical Reference manual.
Mounting Dimensions
W1
W2
See Detail A
H1
a
c
See Detail B b d
Detail A Detail B X0032
IP 21 and IP 54 – Dimensions for each Frame Size

R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6
Ref.
mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in
W1* 98.0 3.9 98.0 3.9 160 6.3 160 6.3 238 9.4 263 10.4
W2* -- -- -- -- 98.0 3.9 98.0 3.9 -- -- -- --
H1* 318 12.5 418 16.4 473 18.6 578 22.8 588 23.2 675 26.6
a 5.5 0.2 5.5 0.2 6.5 0.25 6.5 0.25 6.5 0.25 9.0 0.35
b 10.0 0.4 10.0 0.4 13.0 0.5 13.0 0.5 14.0 0.55 14.0 0.55
c 5.5 0.2 5.5 0.2 8.0 0.3 8.0 0.3 8.5 0.3 8.5 0.3
d 5.5 0.2 5.5 0.2 6.5 0.25 6.5 025 6.5 0.25 9.0 0.35
* Center to center dimension.
Technical Data
Outside Dimensions
Units with IP 21 Enclosures

D W
H H2
H3
X0031
IP 21 – Dimensions for each Frame Size

R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6
Ref.
W 125 4.9 125 4.9 203 8.0 203 8.0 265 10.4 300 11.8
H 330 13.0 430 16.9 490 19.3 596 23.4 602 23.7 700 27.6
H2 315 12.4 415 16.3 478 18.8 583 23.0 578 22.8 698 27.5
H3 369 14.5 469 18.5 583 23.0 689 27.1 739 29.1 880 34.6
D 212 8.3 222 8.7 231 9.1 262 10.3 286 11.3 400 15.8
Units with IP 54 Enclosures

W2
H3
W D

Ref. R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6
W 215 8.5 215 8.5 257 10.1 257 10.1 369 14.5 410 16.1
Technical Data

Ref. R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6
W2 225 8.9 225 8.9 267 10.5 267 10.5 369 14.5 410 16.1
H3 441 17.4 541 21.3 604 23.8 723 28.5 776 30.5 924 36.4
D 238 9.37 245 9.6 276 10.9 306 12.0 309 12.2 423 16.6
Weight
The following table lists typical maximum weights for each frame size. Variations
within each frame size (due to components associated with voltage/current ratings,
and options) are minor.
Weight
Enclosure R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6
kg lb. kg lb. kg lb. kg lb. kg lb. kg lb.
IP 21 6.5 14.3 9.0 19.8 16 35.0 24 53.0 34 75 69 152
IP 54 8.2 18.1 11.2 24.7 18.5 40.8 26.5 58.4 38.5 84.9 86 190
Degrees of Protection
Available enclosures:
• IP 21 enclosure. The site must be free of airborne dust, corrosive gases or
liquids, and conductive contaminants such as condensation, carbon dust, and
metallic particles.
• IP 54 enclosure. This enclosure provides protection from airborne dust and light
sprays or splashing water from all directions.
Compared to the IP 21 enclosure, the IP 54 enclosure has:

• The same internal plastic shell as the IP 21 enclosure
• A different outer plastic cover
• An additional internal fan to improve cooling.
• Larger dimensions
• The same rating (does not require a derating).
Technical Data
Ambient Conditions
The following table lists the ACS510 environmental requirements.
Ambient Environment Requirements
Storage and Transportation in the
Installation Site
protective package
• 0…1000 m (0…3,300 ft)
Altitude • 1000…2000 m (3,300…6,600 ft) if
PN and I2 derated 1% every 100 m
above 1000 m (300 ft above 3,300 ft)
• Min. -15 ºC (5 ºF) – no frost allowed -40…70 ºC (-40…158 ºF)
• Max. (fsw = 1 or 4) 40 ºC (104 ºF);
50 ºC (122 ºF) if
Ambient PN and I2 derated to 90%
temperature • Max. (fsw = 8) 40 ºC (104 ºF) if
PN and I2 derated to 80%
• Max. (fsw = 12) 30 ºC (86 ºF) if
PN and I2 derated to 65%
Relative < 95% (non-condensing)
humidity
• No conductive dust allowed. Storage
• The ACS510 should be installed in • No conductive dust allowed.
clean air according to enclosure • Chemical gases: Class 1C2
Contamination classification.
• Solid particles: Class 1S2
levels • Cooling air must be clean, free from
(IEC 721-3-3) corrosive materials and free from Transportation
electrically conductive dust. • No conductive dust allowed.
• Chemical gases: Class 3C2 • Chemical gases: Class 2C2
• Solid particles: Class 3S2 • Solid particles: Class 2S2
The following table lists the standard stress testing that the ACS510 passes.
Stress Tests
Without Shipping Package Inside Shipping Package
Mechanical conditions: In accordance In accordance with ISTA 1A and 1B
Sinusoidal with IEC 60721-3-3, Class 3M4 specifications.
vibration • 2…9 Hz 3.0 mm (0.12 in)
• 9…200 Hz 10 m/s2 (33 ft/s2)
Not allowed In accordance with IEC 68-2-29:
Shock
max. 100 m/s2 (330 ft/s2), 11ms (36 fts)
Not allowed • 76 cm (30 in), frame size R1
• 61cm (24 in), frame size R2
• 46 cm (18 in), frame size R3
Free fall
Technical Data
Materials
Material Specifications
• PC/ABS 2.5 mm, color NCS 1502-Y (RAL 90021 / PMS 420 C and 425 C)
• Hot-dip zinc coated steel sheet 1.5…2 mm, thickness of coating 20
Drive enclosure micrometers
• Cast aluminium AlSi
• Extruded aluminium AlSi
Corrugated board, expanded polystyrene, plywood, raw wood (heat dried).
Package Package wrap consists of one or more of the following: PE-LD plastic wrap, PP
or steel bands.
The drive contains raw materials that should be recycled to preserve energy
and natural resources. The package materials are environmentally compatible
and recyclable. All metal parts can be recycled. The plastic parts can either be
recycled or burned under controlled circumstances, according to local
regulations. Most recyclable parts are marked with recycling marks.
If recycling is not feasible, all parts excluding electrolytic capacitors and printed
Disposal
circuit boards can be landfilled. The DC capacitors contain electrolyte and the
printed circuit boards contain lead, both of which will be classified as hazardous
waste within the EU. They must be removed and handled according to local
regulations.
For further information on environmental aspects and more detailed recycling
instructions, please contact your local ABB distributor.
Applicable Standards
Drive compliance with the following standards is identified by the standards “marks”
on the type code label.
Mark Applicable Standards
EN 50178 (1997) Electronic equipment for use in power installations
EN 60204-1 (1997 + Safety of machinery. Electrical equipment of machines. Part 1:
corrigendum Sep. 1998) General requirements. Provisions for compliance: The final
assembler of the machine is responsible for installing:
• An emergency-stop device
• A supply disconnecting device
EN 60529 (1991 + Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP code)
corrigendum May 1993 +
amendment A1:2000)
EN 61800-3 (1996) + EMC product standard including specific test methods
Amendment A11 (2000)
Compliance is valid with the following provisions:

• The motor and control cables are chosen as specified in this manual.
• The installation rules of this manual are followed.
EMC
This section describes conformance with EMC requirements.
Technical Data
CE Marking
When a CE mark is attached to the ACS510 AC drive, it verifies that the drive follows
the provisions of the European Low Voltage and EMC Directives (Directive
73/23/EEC, as amended by 93/68/EEC and Directive 89/336/EEC, as amended by
93/68/EEC). The corresponding declarations are available on request and can be
found using the internet at: http://www.abb.com.
The EMC Directive defines the requirements for immunity and emissions of electrical
equipment used in European Economic Area. The EMC product standard
EN 61800-3 covers the requirements stated for drives, such as the ACS510. The
drive complies with the First environment (restricted distribution) and Second
Environment limits of EN/IEC 61800-3.
Electromagnetic Environments
Product standard EN 61800-3 (Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems -
Part 3: EMC product standard including specific test methods) defines First
Environment as environment that includes domestic premises. It also includes
establishments directly connected without intermediate transformers to a low voltage
power supply network which supplies buildings used for domestic purposes.
Second Environment includes establishments other than those directly connected
to a low voltage power supply network which supplies buildings used for domestic
purposes.
Liability Limits
The manufacturer is not responsible for:
• Any costs resulting from a failure if the installation, commissioning, repair,
alteration, or ambient conditions of the drive do not fulfil the requirements
specified in the documentation delivered with the unit and other relevant
documentation.
• Units subjected to misuse, negligence or accident.
• Units comprised of materials provided or designs stipulated by the purchaser.
In no event shall the manufacturer, its suppliers or subcontractors be liable for
special, indirect, incidental or consequential damages, losses or penalties.
If you have any questions concerning your ABB drive, please contact the local
distributor or ABB office. The technical data, information and specifications are valid
at the time of printing. The manufacturer reserves the right to modifications without
prior notice.
Technical Data
Index
Numerics analog input

data parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
0xxxx register
fault limit, parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
EFB function codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 filter, parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
EFB mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 less than min. auto. reset, parameter. . . . . . 104
1xxxx register less than min., fault parameter. . . . . . . . . . . 100
EFB function codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 loss, fault codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
EFB mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 maximum, parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
3-wire macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 minimum, parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
3xxxx register parameter group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
EFB function codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 ref. correction formula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
EFB mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 analog output
4xxxx register content max., parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
EFB function codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 content min., parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
EFB mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 current max., parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
current min., parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
A data content, parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
ABB standard (default) macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 data parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
acceleration filter, parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
/deceleration, parameter group. . . . . . . . . . . 94 parameter group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
at aux. stop (PFC), parameter . . . . . . . . . . 140 application block output, data parameter . . . . . . . 65
ramp select, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 application macro, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
ramp shape, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 application macros
ramp time (PFC), parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 see macros
ramp zero select, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Assistant control panel
time, parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 see control panel (Assistant)
activate (external PID), parameter . . . . . . . . . . 121 autochange
actual input (PID), parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 interval, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
actual max. (PID), parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 level, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
actual min. (PID), parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
actual values starting order counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
mapping, FBA, generic profile. . . . . . . . . . . 194 automatic reset
scaling, EFB comm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 see reset, automatic
scaling, FBA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 auxiliary motor
scaling, FBA, ABB drives profile . . . . . . . . . 192 see motor, auxiliary
scaling, FBA, generic profile . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
alarm B
codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 backing up parameters (Assistant panel) . . . . . . . 32
codes (Basic control panel). . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 backing up parameters (Basic panel) . . . . . . . . . . 39
enable display, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 braking
listing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
words, data parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 protection from overheated resistor . . . . . . . 227
alternate macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 resistor heat dissipation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
altitude selecting brake choppers/resistors. . . . . . . . 224
derating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
environment limit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 break point frequency, fault parameter . . . . . . . . 101
shipping limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
analog cable C
requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
analog I/O cable requirements
connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 input power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
CE marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
changed parameters (Assistant panel) . . . . . . . . . 32
chopper
see braking
Index
CISPR11 class A comm (FBA)

radiation limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 actual values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
CISPR11 class B analog output control, activate . . . . . . . . . . . 180
radiation limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 comm fault response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
comm configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
config file CPI firmware revision, parameter 123 control interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
config file id revision, parameter . . . . . . . . . 123 control word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
config file revision, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . 123 control word, ABB drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
fault function, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
fault time, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 drive feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
fieldbus CPI firmware revision, parameter . 123 fieldbus control, activate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
fieldbus parameter refresh, parameter . . . . 123 input ref. sel., activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
fieldbus parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
fieldbus status, parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
fieldbus type, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 PID control setpoint source, activate . . . . . . 181
protocol select, parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
relay output word, data parameter . . . . . . . . 66 protocol listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
values, data parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
comm (EFB) relay output control, activate . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
actual value scaling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 set-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
actual values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 start/stop control, activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
analog output control, activate . . . . . . . . . . 148 state diagram, ABB drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
comm fault response. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 status word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 status word, ABB drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
configure for loss of communication . . . . . . 152 conduit
control interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
control word. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 config file
diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 CPI firmware revision, parameter. . . . . . . . . 123
drive control of functions, activate. . . . . . . . 146 id revision, parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
exception codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 revision, parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
fault code 28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 connections
fault code 31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
fault code 32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
fault code 33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 EFB comm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
fault tracing parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 FBA module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
fault, duplicate stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 X1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
fault, intermittent off-line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 constant speed
fault, no master station on line . . . . . . . . . . 152 see speed, constant
fault, swapped wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 construction code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
feedback from drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 contamination levels
input ref. sel., activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 environment limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 shipping limit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
misc. drive control, activate. . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 contrast, control panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
modbus actual values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 control
normal operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 connection specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
location, data parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
PID control setpoint source, activate. . . . . . 149 reference (Assistant panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
planning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 shaft direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
profiles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
start/stop. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
reference scaling, ABB drives profile . . . . . 171 terminal specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
relay output control, activate . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
set-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 control cable
start/stop control, activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
state diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
status word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Index
control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 D
cable requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
comm error, fault parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 dc brake time, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 dc bus voltage, data parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
display bar-graph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 dc current ref., parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
display contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 DC magnetizing time, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
display decimal point (form), parameters . . 108 DC overvoltage, fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
display max., parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 DC undervoltage, fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
display min., parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 deceleration
display process variables, parameter group 108 at aux. start (PFC), parameter . . . . . . . . . . . 140
display selection, parameters . . . . . . . . . . . 108 emergency time, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
display units, parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 parameter group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
parameter lock, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 ramp select, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
pass code, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 ramp shape, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
reference control, parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 ramp time (PFC), parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
signal max., parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 ramp zero select, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
signal min., parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 time, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
soft keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 default macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
control panel (Assistant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 default values
changed parameters mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 listing for macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
controls overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 listing for parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
fault logger mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 derating
I/O settings mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 adjustment example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 altitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
output mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 switching frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
parameter backup mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
parameters mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 derivation time (PID), parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
rotating arrow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
soft key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 device overtemperature, fault code . . . . . . . . . . 196
diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
control panel (Basic)
alarm codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 EFB comm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
controls overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 FBA comm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
output mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 differences list, downloads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
parameter backup mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 digital cable
parameters mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
control word digital input
ABB drives, FBA, description . . . . . . . . . . . 185 at fault, history parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
comm (EFB), description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
FBA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
FBA generic profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 status, data parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
controls overview (Assistant panel). . . . . . . . . . . 28 digital output
controls overview (Basic panel). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
cooling specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
air flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 dimensions
heat loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 drive, mounting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
space requirement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 drive, outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
correction source (PID), parameter . . . . . . . . . . 122 direction
cover control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
control, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
replace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 display format (PID), parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
critical speeds (avoiding) disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
high, parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 download
low, parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
parameter group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 handling inexact transfers . . . . . . . . . . . . 33, 40
select, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 parameter sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
current
at fault, history parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
data parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
max. limit, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
measurement, fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
rating code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Index
drive F
EFB comm installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
FBA module installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 fan maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
id, fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 fault
mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
mounting dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 comm (FBA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
outside dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 comm failure (EFB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
rating, parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 current at, history parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
temperature, data parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 digital input status at, history parameter. . . . . 70
weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 frequency at, history parameter . . . . . . . . . . . 70
drive on time, data parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 functions, parameter group . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
history. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
history, parameter group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
E last, history parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
earth fault listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
fault code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 previous, history parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
earthing reset select, parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
see ground speed at, history parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
EFB status at, history parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
baud rate, parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 time of, history parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
config file, fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 torque at, history parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
control profile, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 voltage at, history parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
CRC errors (count), parameter . . . . . . . . . . 124 words, data parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
fault codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 fault code
ok messages (count), parameter . . . . . . . . 124 28 serial 1 err . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124, 125 fault logging (Assistant panel). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
parity, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 FB actual signals, parameter group . . . . . . . . . . . 68
protocol id, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 feedback multiplier (PID), parameter . . . . . . . . . 116
protocol, parameter group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 feedback select (PID), parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
station id, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 field weakening point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
status, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
fieldbus
UART errors (count), parameter . . . . . . . . . 124 see comm
efficiency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 command words, data parameters. . . . . . . . . 68
EM3 screw. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 CPI firmware revision, parameter. . . . . . . . . 123
embedded field bus parameter refresh, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . 123
see EFB parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
EMC status words, data parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
CE marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 status, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
motor cable requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 type, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
emergency fieldbus adapter
deceleration time, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 see comm (FBA)
stop devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 firmware test date, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
stop select, parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 firmware version, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
EN 61800-3 first environment first environment, definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
restricted distribution radiation limits . . . . . . 221 floating network
unrestricted distribution radiation limits . . . . 222 connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
enclosure warning about filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222, 223
types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 warning about screws at EM1, EM3 . . . . . . . . 15
enclosure protection class code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 warning about screws at F1, F2 . . . . . . . . . . . 16
environment flux braking, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
first, definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 flux optimization, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
second, definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 force trip, fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
error value inversion (PID), parameter . . . . . . . 114 frame size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
exception codes, EFB modbus . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 free fall
external comm module, parameter group . . . . . 123 stress testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
external commands selection, parameter . . . . . . 71 frequency
external control selection, parameter . . . . . . . . . 73 at fault, history parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
external fault max. limit, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
automatic reset, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 min. limit, parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
fault codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 motor, resolution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 motor, specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
external reference, data parameter . . . . . . . . . . . 65 switching, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Index
fuses K
380...480 volt drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
keypad
see control panel
G keypad reference select, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . 73
gain (PID), parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 kWh counter, data parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
generic profile
actual value mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 L
actual value scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 label
reference scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 serial number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 type code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
gland kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 language, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
ground liability limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
cable/wire requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 limits, parameter group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
fault protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 load package version, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
LOC/REM
H Assistant panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Basic panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
hand-auto macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 local control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
heat loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
local mode
lock, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
I lock
I/O settings (Assistant panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 control panel access, IP54 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
IEC ratings drive control at local control panel . . . . . . . . . 85
see ratings parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
impedance grounded network low frequency (PFC), parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . 131
see floating network lugs for R6 power cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
information
parameter group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 M
input power macros
cable/wire requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 3-wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
disconnect device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 ABB standard (default). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 alternate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
input power connection hand-auto . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
floating networks motor potentiometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
lugs for R6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 parameter default values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
terminal size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 parameters not changed
torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 PFC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48, 49
installation PID control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
check list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 main menu
compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 control panel (Assistant). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 mains
flow chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 see input power
location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
maintenance
mounting drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 capacitors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 control panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
heat sink. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
wiring overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 internal enclosure fan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
insulation main fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
integration time (PID), parameter . . . . . . . . . . . 114
mapping
interlocks actual value, FBA, generic profile . . . . . . . . 194
parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 EFB modbus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
internal setpoint (PID), parameter . . . . . . . . . . . 116 materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
IR compensation maximum
frequency, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 frequency, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
voltage, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 minimum
frequency, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
IT network
see floating network
Index
modbus O
EFB addressing, convention . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
EFB coils . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 offset (PID), parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
EFB discrete inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 operating data, parameter group . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
EFB holding registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 OPEX link, fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
EFB input registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 OPEX power, fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
EFB mapping details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 options, parameter group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
EFB mapping summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 output frequency, data parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
EFB supported features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 output voltage, data parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
EFB technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 output wiring
motor fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
changing rotation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 overcurrent
checking insulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 automatic reset, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
connection specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 overvoltage
load curve break point frequency . . . . . . . . 101 control enable, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
load curve max., fault parameter. . . . . . . . . 101
load curve zero speed load . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 P
nominal current, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
nominal frequency, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . 63 panel display variables, parameter group . . . . . . 108
nominal power, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 panel loss, fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
nominal speed, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 parameter
nominal voltage, parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 analog input scale, fault code. . . . . . . . . . . . 200
phase, fault code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 analog output scale, fault code. . . . . . . . . . . 200
stall, fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 change lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
motor cable descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
checking insulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 external relay output, fault code . . . . . . . . . . 200
max. length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 fieldbus, fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 hz rpm, fault code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
requirements, EMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 listing (ranges, resolutions, defaults) . . . . . . . 51
motor connection PCU 1 (power control unit), fault code 183, 184,
lugs for R6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 200
terminal size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 PCU 2 (power control unit), fault code . . . . . 200
torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 PFC mode, fault code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197, 200
motor control PFC ref. neg., fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
IR compensation, parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 restore (Assistant panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
parameter group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 restore (Basic panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
motor potentiometer macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 save changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
motor temperature parameters mode (Assistant panel) . . . . . . . . . . . 30
alarm limit, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 parameters mode (Basic panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
data parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 PE earth
fault limit, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 earth fault, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
measure, parameter group . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 PE earth connection
overtemperature, fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 terminal size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
sensor selection, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
sensor type, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 PFC
thermal protection, fault parameter . . . . . . . 100 acceleration time, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
thermal time, fault parameter . . . . . . . . . . . 100 aux. motor start delay, parameter . . . . . . . . 131
motor, auxiliary aux. motor stop delay, parameter. . . . . . . . . 131
aux. start delay (PFC), parameter. . . . . . . . 131 control, parameter group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
aux. stop delay (PFC), parameter . . . . . . . . 131 deceleration time, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
number of aux., parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 enable, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
mounting low frequency, parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 macro
MWh counter, data parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 number of aux. motors, parameter . . . . . . . . 132
number of motors parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
N reference step, parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
start delay, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
NEMA ratings start frequency, parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
see ratings
noise
random sw. freq. parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
NPN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Index
PID pump fan control

0% (actual signal), parameter . . . . . . . . . . . 115 see PFC
100% (actual signal), parameter . . . . . . . . . 115
actual input select, parameters . . . . . . . . . . 117 R
actual value max., parameters . . . . . . . . . . 117
actual value min., parameters. . . . . . . . . . . 117 radiation limits, conducted
adjustment procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 EN 61800-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
control macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 ramp pair (accel/decel), parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . 94
correction source, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . 122 range
decimal point (actual signal), parameter . . . 114 listing for parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
derivation filter, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
derivation time, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 reference
deviation, data parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 analog input corrections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
error feedback inversion, parameter . . . . . . 114 corrections for parameter values . . . . . . . . . . 74
external / trimming, parameter group . . . . . 121 keypad control, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
external source activate, parameter . . . . . . 121 maximum, parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
feedback multiplier, parameter . . . . . . . . . . 116 minimum, parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
feedback select, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 select source, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
feedback, data parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 select, parameter group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
gain, parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 speed/frequency control (Assistant panel) . . . 30
integration time, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 reference scaling
internal setpoint, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 EFB, ABB drives profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
offset, parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 FBA, ABB drives profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
output, data parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 FBA, generic profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
parameter set select, parameter . . . . . . . . . 119 reference step (PFC), parameters . . . . . . . . . . . 130
process sets, parameter groups . . . . . . . . . 112 regulator by-pass control, parameter . . . . . . . . . 139
scaling (0%...100%), parameters . . . . . . . . 115 relative humidity
setpoint maximum, parameter . . . . . . . . . . 116 environment limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
setpoint minimum, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . 116 shipping limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
setpoint select, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 relay output
setpoint source, EFB comm activate . . . . . 149 activation condition parameters . . . . . . . . . . . 79
setpoint source, FBA comm, activate . . . . . 181 off-delay, parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
setpoint, data parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 on-delay, parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
sleep delay, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 parameter group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
sleep level, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 status, data parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
sleep selection, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
trim mode, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 relays, specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
trim scale, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 remote control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
units (actual signal), parameter. . . . . . . . . . 114 remove cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
wake-up delay, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 reset, automatic
wake-up deviation, parameter. . . . . . . . . . . 118 analog input less than min., parameter . . . . 104
PID controller delay time, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
advanced set-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 external fault, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
basic set-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 number of trials, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
planning overcurrent, parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
EFB comm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 parameter group
FBA comm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 trial time, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
undervoltage, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
PNP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
power resolution
listing for parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
data parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
first applied . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 resonance (avoiding)
select, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
previous faults, history parameters . . . . . . . . . . . 70
process PID sets, parameter groups. . . . . . . . . 112 revolution counter, data parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . 67
process variables, data parameter . . . . . . . . . . . 66 rotating arrow, control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
RS485 comm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
profiles
comm (EFB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 run enable
source select, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
protection
circuit, required w/ chopper. . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 run time, data parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65, 67
disconnect device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
enclosure standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 S
environmental . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
PT100 temperature sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 save changes parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
PTC temperature sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Index
scaling start
actual value, FBA, ABB drives profile . . . . . 192 aux. motor (PFC), parameters . . . . . . . . . . . 130
actual value, FBA, generic profile . . . . . . . . 194 aux. motor delay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
actual values, EFB comm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
reference (EFB, ABB drives profile) . . . . . . 171 control, EFB comm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
reference, FBA, ABB drives profile . . . . . . . 189 control, FBA comm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
reference, FBA, generic profile . . . . . . . . . . 193 DC magnetizing time, parameter . . . . . . . . . . 92
s-curve ramp, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 delay (PFC), parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
sensor type, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 frequency (PFC), parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . 130
serial 1 error (fault code 28) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 function, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
serial 1 error, fault code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 inhibit, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
parameter group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
serial communication select enable source, parameter . . . . . . . . . . 86
see comm
torque boost current, parameter. . . . . . . . . . . 93
serial number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 start mode
setpoint maximum (PID), parameter . . . . . . . . . 116 automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
setpoint minimum (PID), parameter. . . . . . . . . . 116 automatic torque boost. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
setpoint select (PID), parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 DC magnetizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
shock flying start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
stress testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 start/stop, parameter group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
short circuit, fault code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 start/stop/dir, parameter group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
single phase supply starting order counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 start-up
sleep selection (PID), parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
slip compensation ratio, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . 98 motor data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
soft key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
soft keys, control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 start-up data, parameter group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
specifications state diagram
control connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 comm (EFB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
input power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 comm, ABB drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
mains. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 status at fault, history parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
motor connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 status word
speed ABB drives, FBA, description . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
at fault, history parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 comm (EFB), definition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
data parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 FBA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
speed, constant FBA generic profile. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
digital input selection parameter . . . . . . . . . . 76 stop
parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 aux. motor (PFC), parameters . . . . . . . . . . . 131
parameter group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 aux. motor delay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
stall control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
frequency, fault parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 dc brake time, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
function, fault parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 DC current control, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 dc current ref., parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
time, fault parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 emergency devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
standards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 emergency select, parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
CE marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 flux braking, parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
EN 50178 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 function, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
EN 60204-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 parameter group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
EN 60529 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 supervision
EN 61800-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235, 236 parameter group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
IEC 60664-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 parameter low limit, parameters . . . . . . . . . . 105
parameter selection, parameters . . . . . . . . . 105
supply phase, fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
switching frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
derating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
switching frequency control, parameter . . . . . . . . 98
switching frequency, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
symmetrically grounded network . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
system controls, parameter group . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
T
temperature derating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Index
terminals wiring
control, description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
control, specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 fault, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
location diagram, R1...R4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
location diagram, R5/R6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 installation steps, IP21/cables . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
termination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 installation steps, IP21/conduit. . . . . . . . . . . . 20
test date, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 installation steps, IP54/cables . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
thermal fail, fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 installation steps, IP54/conduit. . . . . . . . . . . . 22
tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
requirements, general . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
torque
boost current, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 XYZ
data parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 zero speed load, fault parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
trim mode (PID), parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
trim scale (PID), parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
type code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
U
U/f ratio, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
underload
curve, fault parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
function, fault parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
time, fault parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
undervoltage
automatic reset, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
control enable, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
ungrounded network
see floating network
units (PID), parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
unpacking drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
unsymmetrically grounded networks . . . . . . . . . 216
user parameter set
change control, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
V
vibration
stress testing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
voltage
rating code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
voltage/frequency ratio, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . 98
W
wake-up delay (PID), parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
wake-up deviation (PID), parameter . . . . . . . . . 118
warning
automatic start up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3, 25
dangerous voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
high temperatures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
listing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
not field repairable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
parallel control connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
qualified installer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
thermistor installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
weight
drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Index
3ABD00017199 REV B / EN
EFFECTIVE: 4.18. 2007
SUPERSEDES: NONE
ACS510
ABB Oy ABB Inc.

AC Drives Automation Technologies
P.O. Box 184 Drives & Machines
FIN-00381 HELSINKI 16250 West Glendale Drive
FINLAND New Berlin, WI 53151
Telephone +358 10 22 11 USA
Telefax +358 10 22 22681 Telephone +1 262 785-3200
Internet http://www.abb.com +1 800 HELP-365
Telefax +1 262 780-5135
Shenyang Stock Electric Power Equipment Co. Ltd.
SPECIFICATION
OF AE
TYPE FLOW METER
1
1. INTRODUCTION
The C.E. flow meter is new AE (Acoustic Emission) type flow detector
of fluid which is flowing in pipe or chute.
Liquid, powder or particle flow in pipe or chute generates would waves

by friction against the partition.
Frictional sound developed between fluid and the sensing part is

detected by an ultrasonic sensor installed in a tube wall inside of pipe
or chute, and outside mechanical noise which transmits to tube wall is
cut off with a special technique.
2. OUTLINE AND CONSTRUCTION
The construction of this detector is shown in Fig.1. the operation and

adjustment function of control unit is shown in Fig.2.
In Fig.1, a piezoelectric element (5) is installed on the coal sensor (3),

which detects sound of friction and this signal is conducted to control
unit by the connector (10).
The coal sensor (3) is installed on the body (1) with o-ring (9) and fixed
by retainer ring (2). O-ring protects the propagation of vibration of
outside to sensor.
The preamplifier (12) is for protection from induced electrical noise. A

set flange (7) is fixed on the pipe with bolts.
2
Fig.2 shows the control unit, which is composed of signal treatment

circuits which consist of input sensitivity controller, comparator of level
controller and delay time controller, etc.
3. PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
Fig.3 and 4, shows block diagram and operation diagram of the coal
flow meter.
The output detector is led to control unit through exclusive cable which
coal is flowing in a pipe, and this signal is amplified up to the level of
possible treatment.
Mechanical noise will be removed by a high-pass filter, and the

ingredients of coal flow will be picked up.
Further, whether the coal flow exists or not will be indicated after
detecting and commutating it and comparing it with comparator setting
level.
The delay time controller continuously indicates coal flow for a constant
tine, and will be used whenever it is afraid or trouble from intermittent
flow in case of powder or particle.
Therefore, coal flow monitor indicates coal flow for setting time, even if
flow is nothing.
Input sensitivity controller, comparator set level controller and delay time
controller are adjusted to suitable position according to operating
condition of equipment.
4. INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT
This detector should be installed at a position or level on pipe wall with
3
flange where flow must be detected.
It is necessary for flow sensor to stand out more than 20-50mm, at least
inside of the pipe.
5. SPECIFICATION
Adjusting Function:
Sensitivity 40dB - 80 dB continuation variable

Comparison-transducer setting level: V = 0~6V
Delay time: T=5 - 60 sec
Output:
Relay Point: Electric Power - 60W
Voltage - 110V
Ampere - 2A
Lighting to relay operate by LED
Operational Environment Temperature:
Detector: -20 - 60 degrees C
Control Unit: -20 - 65 degrees C
Power Requirements:
AC 110 V/0.4A
50 or 60 Hz
6. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
6.1 Installation of equipment procedure
A. Unfasten four screws (4 - M4) on front panel of control box,
then open the cover. Note - pay attention to the cable for the
alarm lamp. Do not damage.
B. Install the control box with (4 – M6) mounting screws.
6.2 Wiring Procedure
Wiring procedures is as follows in Fig. 6 and Fig.7.
A. Connect the output cables from each detector (upper side
and lower side) is as follows in Fig. 6 terminal point no. 1.
+12v ; 2. -12v ; 3 . OUT ; 4 . GND .
4
B. Connect the power cable (Fig.7. AC 220V ) into terminal

point No.9and No.10 on terminal 2.
C. Terminal No.6, 7 and 8 on terminal 2 is relay output
connection for alarm. Terminal No.7 is common of the is an
output connection closed, when coal does not flow in a pipe.
Rated capacity of relay contact is shown in section 5.
(Specification)
D. Power cable and signal cable must have a proper sag at the
control box.
7. ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE
A. In case of shipment, the adjusting resistance is adjusted as

follows:
Resistance for zero adjusting (VR-1) bias voltage = 0 volt
Resistance for D.C. gain (VR-2) Maximum gain
Resistance for T.H. voltage (VR-3)
Resistance for delay timer (VR-4)
After the wiring has been finished, adjust them

according to the next procedure.
NO COAL FLOW CONDITION
1. Power switch is at ON position, then power lamp is lighted.
2. The alarm lamp on front panel is lighted after 10 seconds.

If alarm lamp does not light after 10 seconds, check the following
items:
Either coal is moving in coal pipe or not.

Either noise voltage is higher then the T.H. voltage, which is initially
set to 1.0 volt or not.
5
When the mill is started and coal is flowing, the ANN-lamp is lighted
out immediately, and signal which coal is flowing is output by
relay contact.
COAL FLOW CONDITION
1. The Ann-lamp is not lighted when the mill and coal feeder are
running. The output voltage and generation period as shown in
Fig. 10 should be checked by an oscilloscope the same as noise
voltage checking procedure.
2. If the output voltage is lower than 1.0 volt, check that the coal
sensor contact the coal flowing position in coal pipe. Especially the
upper side has a chance to decrease output voltage even if
observing coal flowing phenomenon.
3. If the output voltage is lower than the initial setting voltage (Vt =
1.0 volt), the gain should be adjusted (VR-3) so the output is to
be higher than Vt, i.e. VT<V1 or V2 as shown in Fig 8. The
terminal point for measuring of the T.H. voltage is TP-7. In this
case, it is necessary to set the T.H. voltage (VT) as to be higher
than the noise level.
4. This sometimes causes the generation period (T1, T2, and Tn ) is
longer than the initial setting time (TD = 10 sec.) by intermittent
coal flow at low load condition of the coal feeder.
6
7
FIG.2
8
9
10
FIG.7 WIRING PROCEDUREAE-100 Coal Flow Monitor

Instruction
Potentiometer:
VR1—Zero adjustment (setup already before ex-work, needn’t adjust by user)
VR2—D. C. gain
VR3—Threshold voltage. 2V typically.
VR4—Time delay. Turn clockwise to increase, counterclockwise to decrease. (Detailed
in user’s manual)
Wiring terminals:
1. Signal
2. +12V
3. –12V
4. GND
5. NO
6. Common
7. NC
8. NO
9. Common
10. NC
11. 12 AC 110V
11
机械图纸目录
THAI BINH2 THERMAL PLANT 2*600MW
EG2490 GRRAVIMETRIC COAL FEEDER SYSTEM
1.TB2-SDC.VP101-00HFB-M-M1A-MAN-9028
FICHTNER
GmbH & Co. KG
FICHTNER
GmbH & Co. KG
FICHTNER
GmbH & Co. KG
FICHTNER
GmbH & Co. KG

Tb2 SDC - vp101 00hfb M M1a Man 9033 Rev0 (Even Error Trang 200)

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Tb2 SDC - vp101 00hfb M M1a Man 9033 Rev0 (Even Error Trang 200)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

DOCUMENT SUBMISSION STATUS: FF

REV. DATE DESCRIPTION DRAWN CHECKED APPRDVED APPRDVED

OWNER OWNER’S CONSULTANT

VIETNAM OIL AND GAS GROUP (PVN) FICHTNER PVPOWER PCC

EPC CONTRACTOR EPC CONSTRACTOR’S CONSULTANT

PETROVIETNAM CONSTRUCTION JOINT

DAELIM INDUSTRIAL CO., LTD.

DRAWING / DOCUMENT TITLE

Installation, Operation, Maintenance Manual For Gravimetric Feeder

DRWN Zheng Kewei 20 Mar, 2015

BWB GEDI CHKD Yu Zelong 20 Mar, 2015

APPD Qiao Yuanmin 20 Mar, 2015

DOCUMENT No. TB2-SDC.VP101-00HFB-M-M1

Daelim's Approval Status

Daelim Industrial Co., Ltd.

B - APPROVED WITH COMMENTS

C - RETURNED FOR CORRECTION

N - NOT APPLICABLE(REFERENCE ONLY)

DIC'S PERMISSION TO PROCEED OR REVIEW TAKEN ON VENDOR

BIP SUPPLIER: BWBC BIP SUB-SUPPLIER: GEDI

Shenyang Stock Electric Power Equipment Co.,Ltd. No. 17-2,Zhongyang Avenue,

Tel: (+86)-024-2582 3903

Section 1.0 Installation

RECEIVING INSPECTION 1–1

STORAGE PROCEDURES 1–1

STORAGE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES 1–2

EXTENDED STORAGE PROCEDURES 1–3

INSTALLATION PROCEDURES 1–3

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Store feeders without electronic enclosures in a heated warehouse or in an enclosed building. If it is

STORAGE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES

EXTENDED STORAGE PROCEDURES

6. Tighten the four mounting bolts in place.

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

SYSTEM COMPONENT DESCRIPTION 2–1

Preliminary Startup Measures 2–3

INITIAL SYSTEM OPERATION 2–5

TYPICAL OPERATING PROCEDURES 2–6

SITE SPECIFIC DATA 2–9

Feeder Operation Specifications 2–9

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

SYSTEM COMPONENT DESCRIPTION

Belt and Drive System

1. Material falling from the belt scraper.

2. Dust settling out of the air.

3. Material falling from the self–cleaning take–up pulley.

Feeder Electrical Controls

Microprocessor/Power Control Cabinet

Service Tool Kit

Preliminary Startup Measures

4. Inspect the gear reducers for proper oil level.

Microprocessor Controller Setup

Storage Maintenance After Startup

1. Remove all material from the equipment, bunker to pulverizer.

6. Follow the storage maintenance procedures detailed in Storage Maintenance Procedures

Extended Storage After Startup

INITIAL SYSTEM OPERATION

TYPICAL OPERATING PROCEDURES

4. Verify the microprocessor/cabinet in REMOTE mode.

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

SITE SPECIFIC DATA

Feeder Operation Specifications